Tag Archives: World politics

America’s Hidden History

Something about how templars and masons created America:

America’s Hidden History

Many people talk about conspiracies such as WATERGATE, IRAN-CONTRA, THE S & L (Savings and Loan) SCANDAL, THE FEDERAL RESERVE, OCTOBER SURPRISE, KENNEDY, THE FREEMASONS, THE COUNCIL ON FOREIGN RELATIONS and THE TRILATERAL COMMISSION, and even GREY ALIENS, but very few people know the real facts enough to explain them because they are not researched themselves. As information comes down the pipeline it becomes distorted and confused because most of the people passing along the information do not know the entire story, they have not researched much information themselves, and they tend to be biased as well. (They tend to have an angle in the information they put out, usually because they have an ulterior motive. ) I can only state from research of seven years, WHAT I BELIEVE to be the TRUTH based on mostly HARD FACTS.

For AT LEAST five- to ten thousand years, mankind has been aware of MORE scientific and spiritual facts than we are currently aware of today as a great society and nation. The libraries of Alexandria, which held the collection of the world’s greatest knowledge, existed in Egypt thousands of years ago. The Essenes were just one secret sect of Gnostics (Knowledge Holders) that existed around two thousand years ago.

Since the earliest times of Pagan groups and Nature religions, the SUN has been considered a SYMBOL for LIFE. The Ancients believed that when the SUN gave off its energy, it was giving ITS life for US. They believed that the SUN of GOD, the LIGHT of the WORLD is ALL SALVATION because He has RISEN. He is therefore our ETERNAL SAVIOR.

There has always been a struggle between LIGHT and DARK forces in the world. When the SUN goes down and it becomes DARK, we cannot SEE. We naturally fear what we do not know and since we cannot SEE in the DARK, we do not know what’s there and we fear. When the SUN would SET (Satan), it would get DARK. But when the SUN was on the HORIZON (Horus, translates to Jesus), it would be called THE SAVIOR. This formed the basis for early Christianity.

The Essenes, as well as other secret societies around the times were PRIESTHOODS, so the early CHURCH was an established KNOWLEDGE CENTER with IDEAS ENCODED SYMBOLICALLY into religious text. After time, symbols lose their meaning except to those whom are INITIATED.

Essentially, they held knowledge of ARCHETYPAL ENERGIES that bond or link Spirit to matter. These energies are expressed in mathematics and Greek Gematria called SACRED GEOMETRY. The word OCCULT means HIDDEN. They took the knowledge, hid it, and made it appear to be EVIL, so that they would know it, we wouldn’t, and they could then control us a lot easier. This allowed an early guild of bricklayers, or MASONS, to be established, making it possible to build great pyramids, etc. Now, if everybody knew how to build a pyramid, then not only would the Pharaoh’s tomb be no greater than Joe neighbor’s cottage, but the Masons would also lose a lot of money building great castles and churches throughout Europe. This was the basis for early CAPITALISM, but we will discuss this later.

SACRED MUSHROOM ingesting and CANNABIS-smoking shamans are tribe spirit leaders in a sense and they practice inducing a state of consciousness in warrior tribesmen to temporarily replace their consciousness with animal consciousness to perform certain tasks or learn spiritual lessons or principles. There were special groups of assassin cults that were trained in earlier times using substances like hashish and they were called “Hashishans” or “Assassins”. Although these two practices are not identical, they are similar and related. While the first example may be considered early natural mind control in the sense of learning to control your own mind, the second example could be considered manipulative mind control in the sense that the participants were trained under hallucinogens to kill for God or “Allah”.

The Assassins, as well as a society called The Order of Lady of Sion appeared at the same time around 1090 AD. Out of The Order of Lady of Sion came Notre Dame de Sion and five out of nine of the founders of the KNIGHTS TEMPLAR came from this order. The Templars and Assassins had interlocking affairs and philosophies. They also had ongoing fights as well as commercial dealings. The Templars pronounced vows to poverty and in the meantime amassed great fortunes for the church (really themselves), and were responsible for financing the Crusades and other bloody religious wars. They were also some of the first to set up banks in Jerusalem. These were Temple Banks which occasionally were raided for their gold. This forced the Templars to develop branch banking, or, putting your money in several places so it doesn’t all get taken at once.

This is where the idea of a central bank and its local branches comes from, which became the model for banking in Europe and America. The Knights Templar became more popular when they were exposed in the fourteenth century and banished by the king. Jacques de Moley was burned at the stake for being a homosexual and a heretic. A portion of the Templar’s wealth was seized by the king and handed over to their sister society, called the Knights Hospitalers, who were a branch of the Templars responsible for medical facilities in the kingdom. There is evidence to suggest that the Templars may have carried themselves on as the Rosicrucians for the next couple of centuries. This really doesn’t matter too much, though, because all of these orders or secret societies are offshoots of other ones. They are all Masonic in nature because of the nature of the information which they possess.

The same secret societies and old European bloodline families are in control of the world today. To better understand what they do, we need to look at their philosophies and ideas. One motto of theirs is “Ordo ab Chao” or “order out or chaos”. First they create CHAOS, then they propose the solution, ORDER, secretly from behind the scenes to control a given situation. There are different areas of Freemasonry and it is all a hierarchy of power. Occasionally, Masonic groups will work against each other in the public forum through the agencies which they control, but they may be united behind the scenes. You will see examples of what I mean very soon.

The first Masonic lodges by that name appeared in England in the 1600’s and within a century they were spread throughout most of Europe, including Germany and France and the colonies of early America. One of the purposes they served was as a forum for the elite individuals to meet and discuss their political and social views without fear of religious persecution. Remember, just a couple of centuries earlier under Rome in the Dark Ages, they would kill you if you didn’t believe that the moon was made of green cheese. In Rome, they realized that they could not rule the world by themselves and that they would need a consensus of nations or a United Kingdom and United Nations. The symbol for Fascism is a bundle of sticks wrapped together with a hatchet or an axe tied to it.

It represents a world consensus of power or AXIS POWER. It appears on the U. S. Senate flag today and on the back of the American mercury dime from 1916 to 1945. While there were several enlightened societies around calling themselves illuminated, it was on May 1, 1776 that Professor Adam Weishaupt put together a secret society called The “ILLUMINATI”. Its sole purpose secretly was to control the world. Weishaupt was a genius of a particular sort as far as scheming and manipulation are concerned. He was a respected teacher at the University of Ingolstadt at the time and had many connections in education. He became a Mason but was also a Jesuit priest. He learned as much as he could and decided to put his own secret society together. He used a process of initiation and power dissemination among ranks similar to the structure of a pyramid, where one sole individual or group at the top know what’s going on but no one else really does, they only know a little until they succeed up the ranks and learn only a little more. In the meantime, they don’t know who is watching them or above them keeping them in check.

In the highest circles of the order they propose to control the world through a One-world government, which they stated they could do by converting existing Masons to concepts of Illuminism. Weishaupt told them about the Utopia that could be established on Earth if everyone who KNEW would secretly work together to bring about this plan. Being free-thinkers and atheists to begin with, they proposed abolishing religion, government, orders of class, right to own property, or even raise your own children; and they believed that the ENDS justified the MEANS, meaning that whatever it takes to accomplish this task should be done WITHOUT HESITATION. Within two years they had over 3000 members and many established lodges. Within several years they were exposed and banished from Bavaria. The documents were recovered and displayed in the British museum where they exist today. This is an important historical fact that has been severely covered up in America. They continued to exist, however, in the form of the German Union and scattered Reading Societies.

Through their combined fortunes, the members of the Illuminati gained control over the literary societies and printing press. They circulated printed papers showing falsities of religion and abuses of government and promoted a general state of desperation throughout society, all the while blaming it on religion and government. They sought to promote ANARCHY and REVOLUTION, whereby they would strip the monarchy (king) of power using the classes (people) as a lever to ultimately bring power back into their own hands, all the while creating new forms of government which would be puppets they could secretly control from behind the scenes.

In Germany, the lodges which preceded the Illuminati were the Lodge Theodore and the Lodge of Strict Observance. In France they were known as the GRAND ORIENT TEMPLE MASONS. Their motto was “LIBERTY, EQUALITY, FRATERNITY”. In 1789, they beheaded the King and Queen of France and orchestrated what was historically known as the French Revolution. This was only the first of several revolutions to come. Weishaupt had succeeded in grabbing the existing reigns of power in both Europe and America, entwining them together using new philosophical concepts, and tightening all of the existing slack.

In 1797, a book appeared in Europe by John Robison called “Proofs of A Conspiracy against all of the Religions and Governments of Europe, Carried on in the Secret Meetings of Freemasons, Illuminati and Reading Societies”. Then in 1799, written in another country and in another language, Abbe Augustine Barruel published his four-volume study entitled “Memoirs Illustrating the History of Jacobinism”.

Then in 1826, William Morgan, an American Freemason who had written a book entitled “Illustrations of Freemasonry”, was abducted and drowned in Lake Ontario. Because of the existence of these books, as well as the murder scandal, there was a nationwide furor resulting in the creation of an Anti-Masonic political party in 1829. After this there was a temporary drop in membership in the lodges, but their control over the press soon caused the anger to diminish.

There is what is called the “Colombian” faction of the Illuminati which came over to America early on. The documents that were recovered in Germany showed that the symbol for the Illuminati society was the PYRAMID and the EYE IN THE CAPSTONE as shown on the back of the ONE-DOLLAR BILL. The symbol for Columbia Broadcasting System (CBS) is the ALL-SEEING EYE. The U. S. is located in the District of Columbia. There is Columbia University, and the Columbia space shuttle.

The Americas have been called the New World since Columbus, however, Columbus did not come here first. There had already been a “New England Charter” and a colony established twenty years before he arrived. In America in the east, we have the area of NEW ENGLAND, where the first colonies were established. The eventual American Revolution wasn’t actually a real revolution. The Founding Fathers (Masons), did not go to war with their parents, the monarchy of England.

There are many prominent American Presidents who are related to strong European bloodlines and great wealth. When the YORK Rite Masons of York, England, came over here, they settled on the East coast and declared it NEW YORK. Then they went to work to build the “Empire State”. In New York sits the Statue of “LIBERTY”, given to us by FRANCE, holding up the Masonic torch of ENLIGHTENMENT. The highest degrees of Freemasonry are the 32nd and 33rd degree.

On the back of the dollar bill, on the Great Seal of the U. S. , there are 32 feathers on the right wing of the eagle and 33 on the left. Underneath the pyramid, the Latin term “Novus Ordo Seclorum” means “New World Order”. It has appeared on the dollar bill since 1933.

Karl Marx and Frederick Engels were students of Weishaupt and Illuminism. The 10 platforms that make up COMMUNISM are identical to the goals of the ILLUMINATI. The Communist Manifesto appeared in 1848 and Communism formed itself as a solid revolutionary movement in Russia in the early 1900’s, in the form of the Bolshevik Revolution.

One particular group of families made up of the Russell’s and the Piertpont’s founded several scholastic institutions, two of which were Yale and Princeton. Rev. James Piertpont and Rev. Nodiah Russell CO-founded Yale in 1701. In 1832, Gen. William Huntington Russell and Alfonso Taft, grandfather of William Howard Taft, former President of the U.S., founded a secret society at Yale called SKULL AND BONES, or “The Brotherhood of Death”. Gen. Huntington’s brother-in-law, Samuel Russell, founded “Russell and Co.”, the world’s largest opium smuggling syndicate at the time. This provided them with a huge fortune in the millions.

The founders and later influential graduates of Skull and Bones studied philosophy and other subjects in Germany where many prominent “Illuminated” teachers were working. Probably the most influential family in this power circle throughout the last century has been the Harriman family. Edward H. Harriman amassed over $60 million in the late 1800’s in a swift stock deal involving Union Pacific Railroad and Kuhn Loeb. (1904 Northern Securities case) William Averall Harriman, his son, graduated Yale in the Skull and Bones Fraternity in 1913. Averall Harriman controlled Harriman and Co. which owns Brown Bros. and Harriman, the world’s largest private investment bank. Prescott Bush, George Bush’s father was initiated and graduated in 1917. Prescott Bush as well as some other Skull and Bones Graduates were directors of the bank. These banks as well as Guaranty Trust and Union Banking Corp, all of which were controlled by Skull and Bones, were the most influential entities in building up the Soviet Union from the early times of the Bolshevik Revolution in the early 1900’s, through contracts to improve mining of raw materials and rebuilding of the RR transportation infrastructure. These same banks were also directly responsible for financing Hitler’s rise to power and build up of Nazi- Socialism through contacts and subsidiary banks in Germany.

The PURPOSE for the build up of World Wars was to create a NEED for PEACE so that a UNITED NATIONS may be needed and then created as a SOLUTION for establishing peace between nations. A WORLD body of GOVERNMENT with a WORLD COURT and a WORLD POLICE to keep nations in place and to concentrate power into a few people’s hands. Who’s hands? William Howard Taft, Skull and Bones graduate of 1878, helped found the American Society for the Judicial Settlement of International Disputes in 1920. This soon became the League to Enforce the Peace, then the League of Nations and then finally The United Nations.

If you look at things from a historical perspective, the U.N. today has implemented or is in the process of implementing all the planks of Adam Weishaupt’s Manifesto. When George Bush took us to war in the Persian Gulf, he stated boldly that he didn’t need the approval of Congress anymore to declare war because he had a U.N. Mandate. We have sacrificed a large part of our U.S. sovereignty. .

This brings us to the World Bank, the IMF (International Monetary Fund), both creations of the U.N., and banking in general. In Switzerland there is a big building that is divided into 3 parts. If you look at it from above it looks like a peace symbol or Rune. This is the headquarters of the United Nations and the World Bank, the 3rd part is the World headquarters of Freemasonry. It’s so convenient they can go back and forth between coffee breaks. In Brussels, there is a computer called “The Beast” which stores the names and information of every person in the world and that was created years ago. By now, it probably orbits the planet. THE U.S. IS A CORPORATION located in the DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA and each CITIZEN IS A FRANCHISE OF THE U.S. IDENTIFIED BY A SOCIAL SECURITY #.

One of the main influences of British Masonry comes to America in the area of Banking. Cecil Rhodes made his fortune from diamond mines in South Africa. Millions and millions of dollars were secured and put into a trust in his will to be used to finance the creation of secret societies for the furtherance of Anglo-Saxon rulership in the New World Order and the eventual recapture of the U.S. for England through the creation of a central bank in America. Cecil Rhodes formed what is called the “Rhodes Scholarship” at Oxford. There is also the Round Table in England put together by Alfred Milner. Bill Clinton is a Rhodes Scholar as well as other things. In Europe, at least at the time, the Rothschilds were the leading banking clan. Paul Warburg, an agent for the Rothschilds as well as several members of Skull & Bones were instrumental in setting up the Federal Reserve Central Banking system in America in 1913. President Andrew Jackson had stated that the central bankers were a den of vipers and thieves and he intended to drive them out of America in earlier times.

He also stated that if the American people understood the rank injustice of our banking system, there would be a revolution by morning. President Thomas Jefferson stated “If the Americanpeople ever allow the private banks to control the issue of their currency, first by inflation, then by deflation, the banks and the corporations that grow up around them will deprive the people of all property until their children wake up homeless on the continent their fathers conquered”. Abraham Lincoln took action against the central bank in his time and he was killed for it.

President Garfield was shot and killed shortly after declaring that whoever controls the supply of currency would control the business and activities of all people. Baron Nathan Mayer de Rothschild once said, “Let me issue and control a nations money and I care not who writes the laws”.

The measure of a nations wealth is the sum total of it’s goods, services, natural resources and private wealth. In early America, private wealth consisted mostly of gold or silver. This is a great monetary standard because it has inherent value. For a long time, gold was worth $20.00 an ounce.

A One-Ounce gold coin was a $20.00 piece. Our grandfathers and great grandfathers found it a hassle to carry these around during large transactions due to heavy weight and frequent robbery, so out of the kindness of their hearts, the bankers would allow people to leave their gold and silver on deposit, while the bank would issue a gold or silver certificate, a piece of paper that was as good as gold. It said on the bill, “Pay to bearer upon demand in gold or silver. So after the bankers started to issue these notes they saw after a while that the people were not using the gold as much and coming back to withdraw it and that they could issue and loan more notes than they had gold to back it up. This is the true source of inflation.

A short time later they replaced the gold and silver certificates with Federal reserve notes which are worthless. Without the gold and silver, the real valuables, America was essentially bankrupt. The Federal Reserve is a private corporation. When Federal Reserve notes are printed they are loaned to the U.S. Treasury or the people. Notes that cost 2 cents each are printed by the Fed and loaned to the U.S. government at face value plus 8 1/2% interest compounded. The interest is collected each year by the IRS (Repo Man), also a private corporation controlled by the Federal Reserve.

With a federal deficit of 4 trillion 8 hundred billion dollars so far [currently around $10 trillion – New Illuminati Ed.], the interest is in the neighborhood of $200 Billion dollars, which is drained from the economy each year in the form of income taxes. The words “Federal Reserve Note” first appeared on our paper currency in 1933.

It is common sense that if you are borrowing money from someone and you have to pay interest then where will the money come from to pay the interest ? If you have to borrow it then that creates more interest. Obviously, in this situation, there is no way out. However, coins are minted by the U.S. treasury and they are worth their face value as currency. There is a clause written into the agreement that provides us with the option to buy back the right to issue our own currency.

The solution to the problem of the National Debt is to coin a 4 trillion dollar coin and use it to pay off the Federal Reserve. It would have to be accepted and it could even be made out of copper nickel clad. In 1963, President Kennedy passed an Executive Order calling for the printing of $450 Billion dollars in U.S. backed Debt-Free currency. Shortly after, he was killed and as soon as his successor, Lyndon Johnson took office, the first thing he did was suspend the executive order and the printing of the currency. If you look hard enough, you can find $2 bills from 1963 that say “U.S. Treasury” at the top instead of “Federal Reserve note”. 1964 was the last year silver was used as the standard coin metal and coincidentally Kennedy’s face first appeared on the half-dollar.

23 years later, silver is $5.00 per ounce instead of $1. If you still don’t see how this works, just realize that 23 years later, you now need 5 times as much money (work) to buy the same ounce of silver and 60 years later, after they removed the gold, we have to pay 20 times as much money for the same ounce of gold. ($400.00 / ounce). The moral of this little story is that we are being ripped off by the biggest “Sleight of Hand” money scam ever devised. There is a Masonic term for this kind of deception, they call it “Hoodwinked”. We are the sheep and we have had the wool pulled over our eyes.

It may appear to be a grand conspiracy where you may think that everyone knows what’s going on, or you may say that it is impossible for everyone to work together on such a large scale for so long and so secretly, but the truth is that not everybody knows everything. Some people that are a part of the establishment only know a little and some don’t really have a clue, some just follow the money, but most that hold high degrees have a pretty good idea, if not a lot of knowledge about the inner workings of the conspiracy.

Big name families like the Rockefellers and J.P. Morgan, even in their time, were not the main financial powers in America. They were highly paid agents, front-men and spokespeople. Henry Ford resigned from the Ford Foundation citing an inability to maintain control over affairs. The Rockefeller foundation ties into and controls the American Medical Association and the public educational system through textbook publishing. The Rockefeller family got started with the help of the Harriman family, the Whitney’s (Eli Whitney’s family) and Standard Oil of New York (SONY), now Exxon. They have a lot of influence, even today.

All of the founding fathers of this nation were Masons as well as almost all of the presidents. The building of early American colonies as well as the American Revolution would not have been possible if it were not for a very special plant. The Cannabis / Hemp plant was used throughout the world since the beginning of time for just about everything that mankind needed. Paper made from hemp was used for books, bibles, maps, and money. You can produce 4 times as much paper from an acre of hemp as you can from an acre of trees at 1/4 the cost, 1/5 the pollution, it is 10 times stronger and lasts up to 1000 years instead of only 50. And it can be recycled 4 times as many times as paper from wood pulp. The Constitution was printed on hemp paper as well as the first 3 drafts of the Declaration of Independence. Even great sailing ships like the U.S.S. Constitution were made primarily out of hemp.

Hemp is the STRONGEST natural fiber on the planet. Hemp is 26 times stronger than cotton and 10 times longer lasting. The first Levi jeans were made out of hemp as well as all of the soldier’s clothes for the Revolutionary War. It requires no chemicals to grow, has very few natural enemies, and grows in the widest variety of climates of any weed or plant. It is also the FASTEST GROWING plant on the planet, growing 4 times faster than corn. The seeds from the hemp plant provide the highest source of complete vegetable protein of any food source on earth. Even higher than soybeans. It has also been re-realized lately that the hemp seed is the highest source of Essential Fatty Acids in the world. ESSENTIAL, meaning :NECESSARY FOR LIFE, Fatty Acids are necessary for us and beneficial for cleaning the cholesterol out of the arteries naturally. All oils in the supermarket are bad since they are placed in clear plastic containers and exposed to direct sunlight. They become as bad as saturated fats, and end up CAUSING cholesterol buildup, leading to heart attacks, etc. Hemp seed oil can even be used as a machine-grade lubricant for engines and other machines replacing petroleum oil from the ground.

Henry Ford built his Ford Model-T using hemp to line the side panels. The impact strength was 10 times stronger than steel alone. This would eliminate many vehicular deaths today. The Model-T was also designed to run on hemp fuel which Henry Ford grew. This was displayed in Popular Mechanics in Feb. of 1938. Concentrated extracts of Cannabis from the flowers were the 2nd most used medicines in America for 150 years for over 100 separate medical illnesses. It is probably the best natural medicine for Glaucoma, stress, and controlling nausea, and works very well for arthritis , asthma, and epilepsy. It is estimated that Hemp would have at least 50,000 commercial uses if it were legal in America today.

The reason that Hemp is illegal in America today is because the main families in America (Masons), the Harrimans and Rockefellers (Standard Oil), the Whitneys (Eli Whitney-Cotton Gin), Dupont (Chemicals in wood pulp processing and cotton pesticides), and Hearst (Newspapers, Media) find it more profitable to sell us unnecessary chemicals, unneeded dug-up petroleum oil, immune system destroying pharmaceuticals, and axed up trees cut into real thin slices, all at over-inflated prices and at the expense of our health and living environment. For these companies, the real problem is that one cannot patent a natural plant. Almost everything produced in America by large corporations is exported for sale on the world markets. The total value of oil, petrochemicals, and pharmaceutical sales totals hundreds of billions of dollars. However, with the availability of over 50,000 new products and the necessity to manufacture them, America would be a much richer nation if the farmers and the average citizen were allowed to grow this valuable crop.

Right now, the power is concentrated in the hands of a few rich individuals like George Bush, for example, who’s legacy goes something like this : Graduated Yale in the Skull and Bones fraternity in 1948, went into the Airforce, got shot down and was played up in the press as a war hero, becomes owner of Zapata Off-shore Oil , which controls a large fleet of oil tankers off the coast of Kuwait, becomes director of the CIA, working to introduce cocaine and heroin in large part to America, is made Director of Eli Lilly Pharmaceuticals by Dan Quayle’s Father (Lilly produces precursor chemicals used in cocaine production), sits on the board of First Interstate Bank, Puralator Shipping, and Texas Gulf (Fertilizers and pesticides to grow the Coca with and then spray on it to wipe some of it out), then becomes Vice-President and Drug Czar (During this time Cocaine influx into the U.S. increased by over 2000 %), declares war on the American people and the Bill of Rights through the militarization of a phony drug war, tricks Saddam Hussein with the help of the leaders of Kuwait, into attacking Iraq (The reason was Zapata Oil’s slant drilling from Kuwait into Iraqi territory) so that he could declare war under a U.N. Mandate, strengthen the U.N. and hike up oil prices, then before leaving office, signs into law a secret Telecommunications Bill requiring the switch-over of all Federal and Bank phone lines to Fiber Optic for the purpose of electronic funds transfer as required by law in the year 2000 when cash and checks will be no longer legal.

If that isn’t bad enough, he also has brothers and sons that are Skull and Bones members and they do politics as well. Neil Bush (Silverado Savings and Loan Scam), there is Jeb Bush and there are several other Bush’s hiding in the BIG BUSH FAMILY. It is probably no coincidence that the Harriman and Bush families both have a history in Eugenics or race purification and Genetic Selective Breeding. They will propagate their own young on the planet because they can afford it, while sitting back and deciding which countries can have how many children per family.

Population control and mind control are the methods used by the new Fascist Roman Capitalistic Empire. Millions of people die around the world each year from debilitating diseases like cancer, AIDS, Leukemia and now flesh-eating strep and Ebola. Does the Rockefeller-run American Medical Association (AMA) do everything it can to insure that doctors know the truth about health and do the most to insure the safety of the patient ? NO !

Let’s consider these facts. Herbs have been around forever, they grow naturally and they have been used for healing for centuries. Drugs are synthetic chemical reproductions sold by the large pharmaceutical corporations at highly inflated prices. Doctors receive less than 3 hours of instruction on nutrition, eating right and preventative medicine in their entire 4-6 years of training.

Luis Pasteur, shortly before he died, stated that he was possibly mistaken about his germ theory. He said that germs and viruses might be the result of the disease instead of the cause. The way this could be explained is that the body overloads on toxic build-up and produces symptoms of stress, then necessary bacteria or viruses move in to scavenge the toxins, creating an abundance of these in the system, and leaving a super toxic waste by-product behind, which the body has a difficult time expelling. Therefore the presence of the virus or high bacteria count is a result of the disease and not the cause. A couple of very important things to realize when considering this possibility are : 1. A person does not need to be exposed to another individual to come down with a cold. People living in small communities with no outside exposure can come down with colds and disease. 2. People with no disease can sleep with people and exchange bodily fluids with people with HIV and not be infected. Considering these facts further weakens the Germ Theory of Disease. If this information is true, then the introduction of prescription and pharmaceutical drugs would only serve to mask the symptoms of the problem and slowly destroy the immune system since these drugs are highly toxic.

There have been several cures for cancer and other diseases but these have been viciously suppressed by the establishment and pharmaceutical industry. Some of these include Raymond Rife and the Rife Microscope, Harry Hoxsey, Cancell, Essiac, and Ozone. The latest and most promising information so far comes from a woman named Dr. Hulda Clark. Her books and research have just been published this year. She states that the age-long problem and cause of diseases are parasites, Worms in particular. There is a worm, an intestinal fluke, which exists in most people throughout their lives. Generally, it is excreted by the body in the younger stages and does not grow into an adult in our bodies. But, something different happens when substances like Benzene and Propyl Alcohol are abundant in our body. These toxic chemicals are consumed in the form of carbonated sodas and extracts and they are absorbed into our skin in hair and body care products. The abundance of propyl Alcohols break down the shells of the eggs allowing them to hatch early.

The build-up of these toxic substances weakens the immunity of certain organs or areas of the body (Thyroid, Lymph, skin), allowing worms to grow in these areas. Dr. Clark has diagnosed hundreds of people with both Cancer and AIDS and found that all of them had both the worm present and the weakened immunity from one of these toxic sources. She was also successful curing all of them with the three herbs that are necessary to kill the worms. She does claim though that some people that are very close to death may be too far gone from the severe burden of over-toxicity. We will see how long it takes for the general public to find out about this. We have already spoken to people in different states that have used her methods successfully. Even if people do find out about things one way or another, the average person will not even know that people are finding out about something because the media will not televise it and tell people certain things.

The biggest people in the media are members of the Council on Foreign Relations and Trilateral Commission, both creations of Skull and Bones and David Rockefeller. The media is used to promote disinformation and propaganda. The only way you can think the media doesn’t withhold information is if you don’t know what is REALLY going on. Hitler said, in regard to propaganda and thought control, “The bigger the lie, the easier to believe”. Sometimes it can be very difficult to discern the truth and find out what is really going on. Your heart will tell you one thing and your intellect another and usually we get caught up believing what we want to believe because it’s too much trouble to see all the way through.

To one with an open mind, it would seem foolish to assume that we are alone in the universe. In contrast, to one with a closed mind and a probable lack of spirituality, it would appear that reality is made up only of what we see and feel physically. There is, at this time, a growing awareness on the planet that perhaps we are not alone. Millions of people around the world claim to have seen unidentified flying objects, flying disks, bright lights, and fast moving objects that reflect advanced technology, that we, most people claim, could not possess.

Some people claim to have been abducted by GREY ALIENS and underwent childbearing and medical experiments only to have been returned somewhere unconscious with examination scars left behind. Thousands of cattle mutilations have occurred in remote areas sometimes followed by sightings of flying disks or bright lights and occasionally black helicopters. There has been a recent movie made about the crash and retrieval of a spaceship as well as bodies of several dead aliens in Roswell, New Mexico and it is suggested that the government might be covering up this entire situation for political or religious reasons. UFO researchers were a very small group in the 1950’s and 60’s, but recently in the 1980’s and 90’s there has been an enormous increase in interest on the subject.

I was personally first introduced to this information in 1987 through info put out by Bill Cooper a little while before the first printing of “Behold a Pale Horse”. I was very curious about the subject and read everything of quality that I could find. There were less than 100 half-way decent books in print that you could find at the time. Today, there are probably over 500. I read the best books I could find by retired high ranking military officials, channeled material from Seth and The Ashtar Command, I learned about Billy Meier, Barbara Marciniak and the Pleadians material, Bob Lazaar, Area 51 and S-4 Dreamland in Las Vegas, listened to contactees discuss the Draco-Reptilian and Andromeda connection and watched Richard Hoagland bring out the “Face on Mars” info to the U.N. and the public.

If you take the sum total of the info that exists and put it into perspective, it would appear as though our race may have been seeded here by off-planet intelligences or that we were created as an intergalactic experiment, that huge 8-10 foot tall powerful Reptilian beings live at the core of the Earth, pilot advanced flying craft, read minds and plot to enslave mankind by using grey Zeta-Reticulans, who have no choice but to assist because their race is dying from genetic inbreeding and they need help and have nowhere else to go, and that they have the government under their control through genetic cloning and electronic implants. It has even been proposed that members of the government are related to these aliens.

This may sound a little silly, but some people believe it might be true. The positive side to this double edged sword is that the Pleadians are supposedly here to save us along with another group called the Arcturians. They are supposedly here to assist us in our higher spiritual development and help us break out of our old 3rd dimensional physical reality into the 4th dimension or multi-dimensional reality. All we have to do to receive their help is give up nuclear weapons, turn our lives to god and learn to live in peace. Although these are good ideas they are easier said than done.

Probably the best book I have read on the subject came to me recently after years of entertaining the idea of this possible reality of Aliens, gov. cover-ups, and so forth, all the while learning about secret societies and other related info. The book is called “Space Aliens from the Pentagon” by William Lyne. While the former reality may seem to be a little out of this world, the info presented in this book is a lot more down to Earth. According to Mr. Lyne, the secret societies in America and abroad have harnessed a naturally occurring “Free Energy” and have possessed and suppressed this secret for at least 80-100 years.

Many people have heard of Albert Einstein and his Theory of Relativity (E=MC2). Most would consider him a genius although it is known that he was a Grade School dropout. Around the same time lived a man named Nikola Tesla. He came to America in the early 1900’s as a scientist and inventor. He was responsible for many great discoveries, but it is not mentioned in history very much. He was responsible for Radio, Television, Fluorescent and Neon lighting, Helicopters, Lasers, Particle Beams and Alternating Current. If you haven’t heard of him you should at least wonder why. William Lyne is himself an inventor and scientist. Mr. Lyne claims that when Tesla came to America, he had under his arm blueprints for possibly the world’s first FLYING SAUCER and it flew without the need for external energy.

He intended to present it to the Geneva Convention as a proposed solution for world peace and energy liberation. He had theories of Magnetism and Anti-gravity as well as other forms of “Free Energy”. The story goes that Einstein was working as a clerk at the Swiss Patent office at the time that Tesla was applying for his patents. Alternating Current was in the position of putting DC out of business, which meant that Edison and Westinghouse would suffer. J.P. Morgan, a Skull and Bones Banking Frontman, was financing Westinghouse and attempted to make arrangements to secure Tesla’s patents through con deals and contracts.

He used Einstein’s position at the patent office to rip off several of Tesla’s patents and then told him outright that since it would be difficult to collect money on this “Free Energy”, that it would not be used or promoted in society. Instead, Einstein’s Theory of Relativity would prevail and Tesla’s Dynamic Theory of Gravity would be suppressed. Today, it is impossible to locate some of Tesla’s earlier patents. The Flying Saucer project was then moved out of the country to a secret joint German / American base near the South Pole called “Neu Shwabenland” or New Berlin, which was under the control of the Thule society, a secret society in Germany to which the SS belonged. Here, the crafts were perfected and outfitted with the latest technology and design.

The Nazis created propaganda back home that Hitler was in touch with a Blond-haired, blue-eyed Aryan race of beings who communicated to him that he was chosen to lead the Germanic people. There was a resurgence of Occultism in Germany at this time. Hitler was into the occult and he was a master of propaganda. Remember, he stated “The bigger the lie, the easier to sell to the public”, people believe what they want to believe After W.W.II, during Operation Paperclip, hundreds of Nazi intelligence officers were secretly brought to America and given positions in the OSS (Office of Strategic Services), the forerunner to the CIA, supposedly to gain information on the Russians, our new enemy. Along with the Nazis came the flying saucer project.

The project was brought to New Mexico, where it was worked on further. Soon there were several sightings by people of mysterious flying objects and bright flying balls of light. In 1944 and 45, there were newspaper reports about flying balls of light possibly being advanced Nazi aircraft. They were called FOO-FIGHTERS. Then a couple of years later, in 1947, there was supposedly a flying saucer crash in the desert of Roswell, New Mexico, with advanced technology and even bodies of aliens recovered. This was reported on the front page of the newspaper and then it was explained away as a weather balloon. Within a few years science fiction films started coming out like crazy. (The day the Earth Stood Still-about the threat of war and the necessity to make peace with ourselves and the aliens, and War of the Worlds-H.G. Wells, a British Intelligence Agent).

There was a time in America in the 1950’s, when it was trendy to wear alien antennas on your head or a Hat shaped like a flying saucer. This was the beginning of the first wave of American propaganda. Then in the 1970’s, we had Star Wars, Close Encounters, Hanger 18, and eventually E.T. T.V. movies like Alien Nation and “V” were shown to us and now Sightings, The X-files, and even Roswell the movie. There is a consistent theme that suggests the government is involved in a super high level cosmic Watergate cover-up.

William Lyne claims to have seen this entire drama evolve from a simple bungled crash recovery story to the elaborate present day theory mentioned before. He basically says that this is the biggest “Free Energy Cover-up” scam ever perpetrated against the people of the world. Millions and millions of dollars are poured into an elaborate propaganda complex of Authors, Ph.D.’s, Ret. Military Officials and self proclaimed “Channelers” to distribute books and videos on these ideas. They fund UFO expos, research groups like MUFON, and UFO magazines. He even claims that he was offered money by the CIA to write phony scripts about being abducted by grey Zeta-Reticulans. He claims to have many contacts himself, through his own family and relatives and friends from previous service in the Air Force, who have confirmed this info. He claims the UFO expos are filled with disinformation agents.

Here are a couple of things to consider : 1. If you wanted to expose the government or publish books or videos on UFOs or aliens then where do you get the money to do it ? Who has this kind of money lying around and is willing to invest it in these ventures ? There is new information appearing that Lawrence Rockefeller has been behind the private financing of groups to discuss the UFO issue and undoubtedly promote more propaganda and lies. 2. If this is the government’s biggest cover-up then how come all of this info is coming out all at once all over the place ? 3. After Bill Lyne presented this info for the first time at the UFO expo in California and was a huge success, why was he asked not to return and told that he would be better suited at the Extraordinary Experiences Expo ?

There has been some speculation that the government maybe preparing to “inform” the public about the supposed alien presence and possibly even present a staged landing or invasion scenario. Either way we may soon see, depending on how carefully we are watching. If this is the kind of technology the government had 50 and 100 years ago, then 166 mhz pentium processors are probably a far cry from REAL present day capabilities.

One of the symbols for Roman Catholic Freemasonry is the Double Cross. It may appear on the Pope’s headdress or on the advertisement for the American Lung Association or even in the EXXON sign. This may imply that we’ve been double-crossed. Is the Shell gas station symbol really a shell ? Or is it the SUN rising in the East ? The Panorama Mall in California uses an almost identical symbol and it is surely not a shell, but the SUNRISE. The flag of El Salvador and Nicaragua both are a symbol of the triangle or pyramid with the eye in the peak or capstone as well as the sun rising. The flag for Germany is the Masonic compass symbol. Look at the America On-line symbol. A Current Affair T.V series. The next time you are driving on the freeway and you see an exit sign with gas station displays that offer you a choice between Citgo or Shell, ask yourself whether you are really looking at a pyramid and a sun rising in the east.

And now, back to the most popular conspiracy question : Who did kill JFK ? If you still think it was Lee Harvey Oswald and you believe the lone assassin theory or if you are stuck in a cave somewhere building a wheel that is shaped like a square then consider these important historical facts : The assassination took place in Dealey Plaza, site of the first Masonic temple in Dallas. Dallas is located just south of the 33rd degree of latitude. The 33rd degree is the highest degree one can achieve in Freemasonry. Shakespeare’s MacBeth is a “Killing of the King” drama. MacBeth, who killed his King in accordance with a witch’s plot and was himself later killed, parallels the JFK assassination and the sequence of Oswald being killed by Ruby. “Mason Road” in Texas, connects to the “Mason No El Bar” and the Texas / New Mexico “Land of Enchantment” border. This connecting line is on the 32nd degree.

When the 32nd degree line of latitude is traced west into the “Land of Enchantment”, it becomes situated midway between Deming and Columbus. Slightly to the north of the town of Columbus are the “Tres Hermanas” (Three Sisters) mountains. The Three Sisters are found approx. 32 miles between Deming and Columbus and are a minute and some seconds south of the 32nd degree line. When this line is traced further to the west, it passes the ghost town of Shakespeare at a distance south of the town that is roughly equivalent to the distance which the 32nd degree line passes north of the three sisters mountains. Both Shakespeare and the three sisters relate to MacBeth. When this 32nd degree line is traced some distance further west, into Arizona, it crosses an old trail which meanders north of a ghost town, which was once the town of Ruby.

The trail itself was called Ruby Road. Ruby Road twists north into the area of 2 mountain peaks known as Kennedy and Johnson Mountains. The New Orleans CIA (who provided security) station’s headquarters were in a Masonic temple. And last but not least, Mason Lyndon Johnson appointed Mason Earl Warren to investigate Kennedy’s death. 33rd degree Mason, Gerald Ford was instrumental in suppressing what little evidence of a conspiratorial nature reached the commission. Responsible for supplying information to the commission was 33rd degree Mason J. Edgar Hoover and former CIA director and Mason Allen Dulles was responsible for most of his Agency’s information to the panel. There IS NO need to wonder whether there is a conspiracy going on, the fact is AMERICA IS ONE BIG LIVING CONSPIRACY.


Read more from Auricmedia:


Hellish Nightmare Unfolds With Bilderbergs Real Agenda!

It’s almost the time when Bilderberg meeting takes place and global elite shapes the guidelines of the World:

By Lisa Haven

“Bilderberg pulls the strings of every government and intelligence agency in the Western world.” ― James Morcan, The Ninth Orphan

That is one of the truest statements coming straight from the mouth of a globalist himself! They are pulling a majority—if not all—of the strings that are in play today. From politics, to medical advancements, to technological, to world governance and more. They are a manipulative, money seeking, power hungry group out for the betterment of themselves. Only recently has their malicious agendas been spilled to the public. In the form of Bilderberg meetings, the Georgia Guidestones, and leakers themselves.

In the video below I delve through Bilderbergs own stated agendas found in the years 2013 – 2015, using the yearly conferences held across the globe as a springboard. I link agenda similarities and note the differences, as well as tie them to current events that are happening globally. Based on that information I forecast what we could be looking at in 2016 and beyond based of their “stated conference agenda”. Trust me this video is one you do not want to miss! Please get the word out and share it with everyone you know… 

June 3rd 2013 Bilderberg Agenda

– Can the US and Europe grow Faster and create jobs?    To be honest they care nothing about our jobs. This is why they ask it in the form of a question. Very vague to cover their real agenda which is, yes jobs can be created however coming from the Bilderberg’s they choose not to create them—after all the target is the downgrading of the middle class!

– Jobs, entitlement and debt:  Could they be looking at ways to increase debt and implode the economy? After all our economy has gotten worser, not better.

– How big data is changing everything:  Just days after the June 3rd Bilderberg meeting the secret NSA program was leaked on June 9th by Edward Snowden who official came out days later on the 14th.  Did the NWO group have some sort of agenda planned? All I know is days after Bilderberg’s talk on Big Data, Snowden came out.

– Nationalism and populism. 

– US Foreign policy:  Two major moves have been made since the meeting. (1.) 2013 – U.S. threatens an air attack on Syria after it uses chemical weapons; resolved by agreement to destroy all the chemical weapons under international auspices. (2.) 2014 – U.S. implements economic sanctions against the Russian Federation after its illegal occupation of Crimea during the 2014 Ukraine conflict. (Funny how since 2014 after the Bilderberg meetings this has been on the table both in 2014 and 2015) Agenda?

– Africa’s challenges:    Ebola Outbreak began December 2013, shortly after the Bilderberg meeting June 2013. Was this part of their plan?

– Cyber warfare and the proliferation of asymmetric threats:   In August 2013 US Department of Homeland Security Janet Napolitano released her farewell statement indicating that a serious cyber attack was possible in the U.S. Additional could the Bilderbergs have initiated this threat to incite fear over the populace, after all it gave the government an open door to create government agencies that monitor cyber threat tracking. More power in the hand of the government to surveillance you.

– Major trends in medical research:  Microchip medical implants were likely on the table for discussion. Especially considering this years Bilderberg meeting in which they invited former DARPA director and now Google executive Regina Dugan, the lady who pushes and promotes ingestible ID Chips! Could it be that this has been on the table all along? A major goal towards the NWO mindset.

– Education, promise and impacts:  There are more online public schools today then ever before. Also we were faced head on with the Federalized school system known as, COMMON CORE! (Evil to the core!)

– Politics of the European Union

– Developments in the Middle East: This is on the agenda yearly specifically because Jerusalem is at the center of the Middle East Conflict. That and oil! They likely discuss who they will and won’t back and what fear they’ll strike into people’s minds to initiate their agenda.

– Current Affairs  this makes a yearly appearance on the list.


May 29-June 1 Bilderberg Meeting 2014: 

– Is the economic recovery sustainable? Short answer, no! They made sure of it and they are well aware of it! Therefore I’m sure they have plans underway to eliminate the middle class, especially here in America. If they can do that then it would be easier for the to implicate their NWO agenda. After all the middle class has always been a target.

– Who will pay for the demographics? It won’t be them! More taxes, maybe even a carbon tax, etc.

– Does privacy exist?:  I think the real truth behind this discussion is how to “NOT MAKE privacy exist.” How to gather data on everyone and anyone they can! After all ever since the 2013 meeting the NSA has upped their game by increasing surveillance on the population through the NSA Spy grid, Fusions Centers, the  Joint terrorist task force, and now they are listening to our phone calls, and putting surveillance drones in our skies.

– How special is the relationship in intelligence sharing?:  Special enough for them to discuss it!! They need intel to gather data on all who are against them. They want this!

– Big shifts in technology and jobs:  Yes! This is also a goal, they want to merge man with machine. It is a goal to make some sort of ‘transhuman’ lifeform that can give them longevity of life. They know they are headed to the pits of hell and want to live as long as possible. This is also why some medical advancements for 2014 included genome editing.

– The future of democracy and the middle class trap:  Truth how to eliminate the future of democracy and implement tyranny and their One World Order.

– China’s political and economic outlook:  Truth how to make other countries follow China’s communistic regime. After all major attacks against patriots, christians, and vets, have surfaced. Taken straight from a Maoist playbook!

– The new architecture of the Middle East

– Ukraine: Obviously their agenda is to spark tensions considering much is funded from Bilderbergs own George Soros.

– What’s next for Europe 

– Current Events


Bilderberg, June 11th – 14th 2015 Agenda: 

– Artificial Intelligence: There will be a major push for microchipping considering Regina Dugan, the former DARPA director and Google executive who pushes microchipping will be attending the meeting.

– Cybersecurity: This was on the agenda before and it’s likely we could see a cyber threat in the near future. Likely part of a manufactured crisis.

– Chemical Weapons Threats

– Current Economic Issues: We all know the economic crisis is coming, but it could be a lot sooner then I’d like to realize. They know it and we know it.

– European Strategy: On the list three years running!

– Globalization: This is the first year they have added this as one of their key topic discussions. However, I believe it’s been it’s been discussed yearly! The NWO is, after all, their main objective! Could it be that they finally listed this on their agenda because things are getting down to the wire? Do they fear something’s ahead that either could prevent them from accomplishing their goal or propel them forward. I believe a huge NWO push will be coming in these next years.

– Iran, Greece, Middle East, Russia, NATO, USA, UK, and Ukraine: All listed as globalists in the working. Likely to discuss a number of topics maybe even World War Three. Considering the players they have listed here. We know US, Russia and Ukraine are in tensions. Along with Middle East and chaos in Greece. All player. As for UK, I’m guessing it will soon join in.

– Terrorism: There could be an uptick in action against “ patriotic terrorists.” Those who oppose their rule! This could be the main objectives of Jade Helm, especially considering the official start date takes place right after the Bilderberg event? Coincidence? I think not!

– US Elections: Considering Hilary Clintons advisor, Jim Messina, is on the list. It’s possible Bilderberg’s could be backing Hilary as our next president.

“We are grateful to the Washington Post, the New York Times, Time Magazine and other great publications whose directors have attended our meetings and respected their promises of discretion for almost forty years … It would have been impossible for us to develop our plan for the world if we had been subjected to the lights of publicity during those years. But, the world is more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a world government. The supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national auto-determination practiced in past centuries.” – David Rockefeller, 1991 Bilderberg Meeting at Baden, Germany (a meeting also attended by Bill Clinton)


Read more from Auricmedia:


How the Illuminati Trapped Hitler in Two-Front War

Interesting article about how Illuminati organized Hitler to power and used him as a tool:

The pre-war British establishment was Illuminati and Communist to the core.

They put Hitler into power in Germany and then maneuvered him into a war that would destroy Germany as an independent country once and for all.

(from Sept. 2006)

by Henry Makow Ph.D.

In Dec. 1942 Heinrich Mueller, Chief of the Gestapo, rolled up the Soviet spy network in mainland Europe and secured a list of Soviet agents and informants in England  that reads like a “who’s who” of the British establishment and lifts the veil from modern history.


(Gestapo Chief Heinrich Muller)

Soviet spies include Edward Wood, Lord Halifax, Neville Chamberlain’s Foreign Secretary and an architect of the “Appeasement” policy.

Appeasement encouraged Hitler to think England wanted him to expand eastward against the Soviet Union. In fact, Halifax was Illuminati like the Communists. Appeasement was designed to trap Hitler in a two-front war which would level Germany (and Europe) and kill sixty million people.

Mueller’s list of spies includes Victor Rothschild, the head of the central banking dynasty, one of the “Cambridge Five” traitors. Curiously, the other four (Burgess, Maclean, Blunt and Philby) aren’t on Mueller’s list. Halifax’s son married a Rothschild.

The list also includes Charles Hambro, another banker of Jewish origin who was part of a Bank of England decision to continue financing Nazism in 1934 as a “stabilizing influence.” Obviously, as a Soviet asset, this man was not pro-Nazi. The explanation is that both Nazism and Communism are Illuminati creations.

The list also includes Sir Robert Waley-Cohen and many members of the anti-appeasement “Focus” group that funded Winston Churchill. Waley-Cohen was the Chairman of the Rothschild-controlled Shell Oil and the leader of the British Jewish Community.

Other bankers, banking scions and industrialists include Eugen Spier, Maurice Baring, Leonard Montefiore, Edward Guggenheim, Sir Robert Mond and Sir Phillip Sassoon. All are of Jewish origin.

Prominent Labor Party and trade union leaders included Ernest Bevin, Harold Laski, Herbert Stanley Morrison and Sir Walter Citrine. Members of ancient aristocratic families include Richard Combe Abdy, Baron Strabogli, and Admiral Reginald Plunkett-Ernle-Erle-Drax. There was press mogul J.S. Elias, cartoonist Victor Weisz and Daily Express Chairman Ralph D. Blumenfeld.

Prominent civil servants include Rex Leeper of the Foreign Office ruling clique and Sir Maurice Hankey, who as cabinet secretary and Clerk of the Privy Council (1919-1938) knew all the secrets. There was Slavonic scholar Bernard Pares and Jurist Sir Hirsch Lauterpacht. (The complete agent list is at the end of this article.)


What did this disparate group have in common? About half of them are recognizably Jewish. But the connection that binds all of them likely is the Illuminati, the top rung of Freemasonry. Its aim is to weaken mankind through a series of contrived  wars in order to establish a Masonic or “Illuminist” world dictatorship dedicated to the “light giver” Lucifer (their alter ego.) Obama, Bush, Clinton, Kerry etc. are all members.

The Illuminati started Communism. Their common anniversary is May 1; their common symbol is the satanic inverted pentagram. They funded the Bolshevik Revolution and secretly ran the USSR, which was a model for the New World Order. Far from being spies for Stalin, some of these men probably were his superiors.

Soviet Russia was a dummy-state creation of  the London-based Illuminati bankers. The Second World War, the Cold War, and now the “War on Terror” are all their inventions. They are responsible for 9-11 and for the neopagan assault on Western Civilization, Christianity and Islam (incl. family, nation, race, morality and truth) that we call modernism, humanism and globalism.

Heinrich Mueller died in California in 1983. The CIA recruited Mueller in Switzerland in 1948 and paid him $1 million for an Interrogation running 1000-pages that includes this list. Mueller left his microfilmed archives to his nephew, “Douglas Gregory” who has published a part.


The Bank of England funded the rise of Adolf Hitler through the Schroder Bank.


(Tiarcks and his granddaughter)

F.C. Tiarcks, the Managing Director of the Schroder Bank, was also a Director of the Bank of England.

Eustace Mullins writes: “Because his own financial backers, the Schroders, were sponsoring the Appeasement Party, Hitler believed there would be no war [with England.] He did not suspect that the backers of the Appeasement Party, now that Chamberlain had served his purpose in duping Hitler, would cast Chamberlain aside and make Churchill the Prime Minister.” (The Secrets of the Federal Reserve, pp.76-78.)

While history portrays Hitler as duping the naive Neville Chamberlain and Lord Halifax, it appears Hitler himself was tricked into thinking he could expand eastward with impunity. Neville Chamberlain wasn’t in on the secret. (He died prematurely just months after leaving office.) But as a Soviet informant, Halifax certainly was instrumental.

As an early opponent of British rearmament, Halifax encouraged Hitler’s plans and later complimented the dictator for being a “genuine hater of Communism.” In 1937, Halifax actually offered Hitler changes in the “European Order” in regard to Danzig, Austria and Czechoslovakia.

“It was Halifax not Hitler who first mentioned by name the areas where the Versailles Treaty might be reinterpreted to Germany’s benefit,” writes historian Andrew Roberts. “Halifax did the one thing which Eden had told him not to, and which Vansittart warned would ‘bring the European card-castle tumbling down.’ Moreover he did it not once but thrice in the course of the conversations.” (The Holy Fox: A Biography of Lord Halifax, 1991, pp. 67, 70-71.)

Halifx’s closest adviser was Philip Kerr, Lord Lothian, a member of the Rothschild-Milner-Rhodes  Round Table secret society (i.e  the Illuminati). According to Roberts, Lothian was “a friend of Halifax’s and had  non-parliamentary political influence of a type seldom seen in today’s politics.” (109)

Appeasement was designed to encourage Hitler to take action which would justify a declaration of war by the West.

“What we want to secure is the certainty of a war on two-fronts,” Halifax said in March 1939. (Roberts, 146) Halifax was responsible for the foolhardy British guarantee of Poland that led to this war declaration in Sept. 1939. The USSR also invaded Poland but there was no declaration of war against it. Stalin was pre-primed to attack the Nazis in 1941.(This is essentially the deal Christian Rakovsky offered Stalin 1938.)

The whole knuckle-biting drama of war and peace in 1939-41, including England as the lonely defender of freedom, was a charade. Germany was in the cross-hairs all along. Could the USA be in the same position today as Russia and China prepare for war?

The appeasers and their opponents were two Illuminati house teams pursuing  common goals. Lady Astor’s Cliveden Manor was supposed to be the HQ of the (pro-Nazi) appeasement party but, as Andrew Roberts points out, arch anti-appeasers like Duff Cooper, Anthony Eden and Russian Foreign Minister Maxim Litvinov (nee Meir Finkelstein) were regular guests. (67)


Wars are the artificial creation of the Illuminati, a satanic cult that extends its tentacles over the whole planet. “Muller’s List” provides a glimpse at the composition of this group: bankers, industrialists, aristocrats, military, scholars, trade unionists and media.

There are a lot of Jews but it should be obvious that the Illuminati victimized Jews as much as anyone. Jews have been the canon fodder for Communism, Zionism and Nazism. Instead of  defending the Illuminati, Jews should revile it. Otherwise they appear to be in collusion.

Possibly some listees didn’t realize what they were advancing. The Illuminati pretended to oppose fascism. Today they pretend to build a humanist utopia, an answer to poverty, disease, and prejudice. Former World Bank President James Wolfensohn had the slogan “Plutocrat for the Poor” on his web site.

Hitler was groomed and funded for the purpose of destroying Germany’s national aspirations and to provide a pretext for the State of Israel. The Illuminati starts wars to destroy nation states, demoralize humanity, consolidate power and produce huge profits and debt slavery. This cult, which has a stranglehold on thought and expression, pretty much defines realty. Our best course is to find our truth from different sources and define reality anew.

“Mueller’s List”  from Douglas Gregory, “Gestapo Chief: The 1948 Interrogation of Heinrich Muller Vol. 3 p.107.

Lt. Col. Frederick William Abbot
Sir Maurice Hankey
Richard Combe Abdy
Eugen Spier
George Dixon Abraham
Baron Strabogli
Frederick Edward Fox Adam
J.S. Elias, Baron Southwood
Admiral Sir Percy Addison
Sir H.L. Rothband
Elkan Nathan Adler
Sir E.L. Goschen
Admiral Oliver Backhouse
Mrs. Blanche Dugdale
John Ball
Sir Robert Wood
Maurice Baring
Sir Robert Mond
Ralph D. Blumenfeld
Jurgen Kuczynski
Sir Harry Robert Boyd
Sir Robert Waley-Cohen
Sir Charles Hambro
Rex Leeper
Edward Wood (Lord Halifax)
Sir Walter Citrine
Walter Rosenhain
Victor Rothschild

Charles Masterman Herz
Sir Philip Sassoon
Victor Weisz
Sir Bernard Pares
Friedrich Saxl
Ernest Bevin
Sir Hirsch Lauterpacht
Herbert Stanley Morrison
Harold Joseph Laski
Sir Reginald Plunkett-Erle-Drax
Edward Armand Guggenheim


Read more from Auricmedia:


The Illuminati Agenda – Part IV

The final part of the Illuminati agenda…

Part 4

By Myron C. Fagan
June 12, 2002

We know how Roosevelt and his traitorous State Department kept building up the communist menace right here in our country and thus throughout the world. We know how he perpetuated the whole Pearl Harbor atrocity for his excuse to hurl us into World War II. We know all about his secret meetings with Stalin at Yalta and how he, with Eisenhower’s help, delivered the Balkans and Berlin to Moscow and lastuj but by no means least; we know that the 20th century Benedict Arnold not only dragged us into that new corridor; the United Nations, into the one-world government, but he actually schemed all the arrangements to plant it within our country.

In short, the day that Roosevelt entered the White House, the CFR conspirators regained full control of our foreign relations machinery and firmly established the United Nations as the housing for the Illuminati one-world government.

I wish to stress one other very vital point. That Wilson’s “League of Nations” flop brought Schiff and his gang to the realization that control of just the Democratic Party was not enough.

True, they could create a crisis during the Republican administration as they did in 1929 with their Federal Reserve manufactured Crash and Depression which would bring another Democrat stooge back into the White House, but they realized that a four-year disruption in their control of our foreign relation policies could play havoc with the progress of their conspiracy. It could even break up their entire strategy as it almost did before Roosevelt saved it with his recognition of the Stalin regime.

Thereupon, after that Wilson debacle, they began to formulate plans to achieve control of both of our national parties. But that posed a problem for them. They needed manpower with stooges in the Republican Party with additional manpower for the Democratic Party and because control of just the man in the White House would not be enough; they would have to provide that man with trained stooges for his entire cabinet; men to head the State Department, the Treasury Department, the Pentagon, the CFR, the USIA, etc..

In short; every member of the various cabinets would have to be a chosen tool of the CFR, such as Rusk and McNamara, as well as all the under Secretaries and assistant Secretaries. That would give the conspirators absolute control of all our policies, both domestic and most important, foreign. That course of action would require a reserve pool of trained stooges; instantaneously ready for administrative changes and for all other exigencies.

All such stooges would of necessity have to be men of national reputation, high in the esteem of the people; but they would have to be men without honor, without scruple, and without conscience. These men would have to be vulnerable to blackmail. It is needless for me to stress how well the CFR succeeded. The immortal Joe McCarthy fully revealed that there are thousands of such security risks in all federal agencies.

Scott MacLeod unmasked thousands more and you know the price that Oetega had to pay, and is still paying, for his expositions before a Senate Committee of the traitors in the State Department and you know that the men in the State Department, who delivered Cuba to Castro, have not only been shielded, but promoted.

Now let’s go back to the crux of the whole one-world government plot and the maneuvering necessary to create another “League of Nations” to house such a government.

As I have already stated, the conspirators knew that only another world war was vital for the success of their plot. It would have to be such a horrifying world war that the peoples of the world would cry out for the creation of some kind of a world organization that could secure an everlasting peace. But how could such a war be brought about? All the European nations were at peace. None had any quarrels with their neighboring nations and certainly their stooges in Moscow wouldn’t dare to start a war. Even Stalin realized that it would mean the overthrow of his regime unless, so-called, “patriotism” would weld the Russian people behind him.

But the conspirators had to have a war. They had to find or create some kind of an incident to launch it. They found it in a little inconspicuous and repulsive little man who called himself Adolf Hitler.

Hitler, an impecunious Austrian house painter, had been a corporal in the German army. He made the defeat of Germany into a personal grievance. He began to rabble rouse about it in the Munich, Germany area. He began to spout about restoring the greatness of the German Empire and the might of the German solidarity. He advocated the restoration of the old German military to be used to conquer the whole world. Strangely enough, Hitler, the little clown that he was, could deliver a rabble rousing speech and he did have a certain kind of magnetism. But the new authorities in Germany didn’t want anymore wars and they promptly threw the obnoxious Austrian house painter into a prison cell.

Aha! Here was the man, decided the conspirators, who, if properly directed and financed, could be the key to another world war. So while he was in prison; they had Rudolph Hess and Hermann Goering write a book which they titled: Mein Kompf and attributed the authorship to Hitler; exactly as Lipdenoff wrote: Mission to Moscow and attributed the authorship to Joseph Davies; then our ambassador to Russia and a stooge of the CFR. In Mein Kompf;  the Hitler pseudo-author outlined his grievances and how he would restore the German people to their former greatness.

The conspirators then arranged for a wide circulation of the book among the German people in order to arouse a fanatical following for him. On his release from prison (also arranged by the conspirators); they began to groom and finance him to travel to other parts of Germany to deliver his rabble rousing speeches. Soon he gathered a growing following among other veterans of the war that soon spread to the masses who began to see in him a saviour for their beloved Germany.

Then came his leadership of what he called “his brown shirt army” and the march on Berlin. That required a great deal of financing; but the Rothschilds, the Warburgs, and others of the conspirators provided all the money he needed. Gradually Hitler became the idol of the German people and they then overthrew the Von Hindenburg government and Hitler became the new fuhrer. But that still was no reason for a war.

The rest of the world watched Hitler’s rise, but saw no reason to interfere in what was distinctly a domestic condition within Germany. Certainly none of the other Nations felt it was a reason for another war against Germany and the German people were not yet incited into enough of a frenzy to commit any acts against any neighboring nation; not even against France that would lead to a war. The conspirators realized they would have to create such a frenzy; a frenzy that would cause the German people to throw caution to the winds and at the same time; horrify the whole world. And incidentally; Mein Kompf was actually a follow-up of Karl Marx’s book: A World Without Jews.

The conspirators suddenly remembered how the Schiff- Rothschild gang had engineered the pogroms in Russia which slaughtered many, many thousands of Jews and created a world-wide hatred for Russia and they decided to use that same unconscionable trick to inflame the new Hitler-led German people into a murderous hatred of the Jews.

Now it is true that the German people never had any particular affection for the Jews; but neither did they have an ingrained hatred for them. Such a hatred would have to be manufactured so Hitler was to create it. This idea more than appealed to Hitler. He saw in it the grisly gimmick to make him the “God-man” of the German people.

Thus craftily inspired and coached by his financial advisers, the Warburgs, the Rothschilds, and all the Illuminati masterminds,  he blamed the Jews for the hated Versailles Treaty and for the financial ruination that followed the war. The rest is history. We know all about the Hitler concentration camps and the incineration of hundred of thousands of Jews.

Not the 6,000,000 nor even the 600,000 claimed by the conspirators; but it was enough. And here let me reiterate how little the internationalist bankers, the Rothschilds, Schiffs, Lehmans, Warburgs, Barouchs, cared about their racial brethren who were the victims of their nefarious schemes. In their eyes; the slaughter of the several hundred thousand innocent Jews by Hitler didn’t bother them at all.

They considered it a necessary sacrifice to further their Illuminati one-world plot just as the slaughter of the many millions in the wars that followed was a similar necessary sacrifice. And here is another grisly detail about those concentration camps. Many of the Hitler soldier executioners in those camps had previously been sent to Russia to acquire their arts of torture and brutalization so as to emphasize the horrors of the atrocities.

All this created a new world-wide hatred for the German people but it still did not provide a cause for a war. There upon Hitler was incited to demand the “Sudetenland” and you remember how Chamberlain and the then diplomats of Czechoslovakia and France surrendered to that demand. That demand led to further Hitlerian demands for territories in Poland and in the French Czar territories and those demands were rejected.
Then came his [Non-Aggression] pact with Stalin. Hitler had been screaming hatred against communism (Oh how he ranted against communism), but actually nazism was nothing but socialism, and communism is, in fact, socialism. But Hitler disregarded all that. He entered into a pact with Stalin to attack and divide Poland between them. While Stalin marched into one part of Poland (for which he was never blamed [the Illuminati masterminds saw to that]); Hitler launched a “blitzkrieg” on Poland from his side. The conspirators finally had their new world war and what a horrible war it was.

And in 1945; the conspirators finally achieved the United Nations, their new housing for their one-world government. And truly amazing; all of the American people hailed this foul outfit as a Holy of Holies. Even after all the true facts about how the U.N. was created were revealed, the American people continued to worship that evil outfit. Even after Alger Hess was unmasked as a Soviet spy and traitor, the American people continued to believe in the U.N..

Even after I had publicly revealed the secret agreement between Hess and Mulatoff that a Russian would always be the head of the military secretariat and by that token, the real master of the U.N.. But most of the American people continued to believe that the U.N. could do no wrong. Even after Trig D. Lee, the first Secretary general of the U.N. confirmed that Hess-Mulatoff secret agreement in his book: For The Cause of Peace,  Vasialia was given a leave of absence by the U.N. so that he could take command of the North Koreans and Red Chinese who were fighting the so-called U.N. police action under our own General McArthur, who, by orders of the U.N., was fired by the pusillanimous president Truman in order to prevent him from winning that war.

Our people still believed in the U.N. despite our 150,000 sons who were murdered and maimed in that war; the people continued to regard the U.N. as a sure means for peace even after it was revealed in 1951 that the U.N. (using our own American soldiers under U.N. command, under the U.N. flag, in collusion with our traitorous State Department and the Pentagon) had been invading many small cities in California and Texas in order to perfect their plan for the complete takeover of our country. Most of our people brushed it off and continued their belief that the U.N. is a Holy of Holies.

Do you know that the U.N. Charter was written by traitor Alger Hess, Mulatoff, and Vyshinsky? That Hess and Mulatoff had made within that secret agreement that the military chief of the U.N. was always to be a Russian appointed by Moscow? Do you know that at their secret meetings at Yalta; Roosevelt and Stalin, at the behest of the Illuminati operating as the CFR, decided that the U.N. must be placed on American soil?

Do you know that most of the U.N. Charter was copied intact, word for word, from the Marx Communist Manifesto and the Russian, so-called, constitution? Do you know that the only two Senators who voted against the U.N. Charter had read it? Do you know that since the U.N. was founded, communist enslavement has grown from 250,000 to 1,000,000,000?

Do you know that since the U.N. was founded to insure peace there have been at least 20 major wars incited by the U.N., just as they incited war against little Rhodesia and Kuwait? Do you know that under the U.N. set up, the American taxpayers have been forced to make up the U.N. Treasury deficit of many millions of dollars because of Russia’s refusal to pay her share? Do you know that the U.N. had never passed a resolution condemning Russia or her so-called satellites; but always condemns our Allies?

Do you know that J. Edgar Hoover said: “the overwhelming majority of the communist delegations to the U.N. are espionage agents” and that 66 Senators voted for a “Consular Treaty” to open our entire country to Russian spies and saboteurs? Do you know that the U.N. helps Russia’s conquest of the world by preventing the free world from taking any action whatsoever except to debate each new aggression in the U.N. General Assembly?
Do you know that at the time of the Korean War there were 60 Nations in the U.N., yet 95% of the U.N. forces were our American sons and practically 100% of the cost was paid by the United States taxpayers?

And surely you know that the U.N. policy during the Korean and Vietnam Wars was to prevent us from winning those wars? Do you know that all the battle plans of General McArther had to go first to the U.N. to be relayed to Vasialia, Commander of the North Koreans and Red Chinese, and that any future wars fought by our sons under the U.N. flag would have to be fought by our sons under the control of the U.N. Security Council?
Do you know that the U.N. has never done anything about the 80,000 Russian Mongolian troops that occupy Hungary?

Where was the U.N. when the Hungarian freedom fighters were slaughtered by the Russians [1956]? Do you know that the U.N. and its peace army turned the Congo over to the communists? Do you know that the U.N.’s own, so-called, peace force was used to crash, rape, and kill the white anti-communists in Katanga?
Do you know that the U.N. stood by and did nothing while Red China invaded Laos and Vietnam? That it did nothing while Nero invaded Goa and other Portuguese territories? Do you know that the U.N. was directly responsible for aiding Castro? That it does absolutely nothing about the many thousands of Cuban youngsters who are shipped to Russia for communist indoctrination.

Do you know that Adlai Stevenson said: “the free world must expect to loose more and more decisions in the U.N..” Do you know that the U.N. openly proclaims that its chief objective is a “one-world government” which means “one-world laws,” “one-world court,” “one-world schools,” and a “one world church” in which Christianity would be prohibited?

Do you know that a U.N. law has been passed to disarm all American citizens and to transfer all our armed forces to the U.N.? Such a law was secretly signed by saint’ Jack Kennedy in 1961. Do you realize how that fits in with Article 47, paragraph 3, of the U.N. Charter, which states and I quote: “the military staff committee of the U.N. shall be responsible through the Security Council for the strategic direction of all armed forces placed at the disposal of the Security Council” and when and if all our armed forces are transferred to the U.N., your sons would be forced to serve and die under the U.N. command all over the world. This will happen unless you fight to get the U.S. out of the U.N..

Do you know that Congressmen James B. Utt has submitted a bill to get the U.S. out of the U.N. and a resolution to prevent our President from forcing us to support the U.N. embargoes on Rhodesia? Well, he has and many people all over the country are writing to their representatives to support the Utt bill and resolution. Fifty Congressmen, spear headed by Schweiker and Moorhead of Pennsylvania, have introduced a bill to immediately transfer all our armed forces to the U.N.? Can you imagine such brazen treason? Is your Congressman one of those 50 traitors? Find out and take immediate action against him and help Congressman Utt.

Now do you know that the National Council of Churches passed a resolution in San Francisco which states that the United States will soon have to subordinate its will to that of the U.N. and that all American citizens must be prepared to accept it? Is your church a member of the National Council of Churches?  In connection with that, bear in mind that God is never mentioned in the U.N. Charter and their meetings are never opened with prayer.

The creators of the U.N. stipulated in advance that there should be no mention of God or Jesus Christ in the U.N. Charter or in its U.N. headquarters. Does your pastor subscribe to that? Find out! Furthermore; do you know that the great majority of the, so-called, Nations in the U.N. are anti-christianity and that the U.N. is a completely godless organization by orders of its creators; the CFR Illuminati. Have you heard enough of the truth the Illuminati’s United Nations? Do you want to leave your sons and our precious country to the unholy mercy of the Illuminati’s United Nations?

If you don’t; write, telegraph, or phone your Representatives and Senators that they must support Congressman Utt’s bill to get the U.S. out of the U.N. and the U.N. out of the U.S.. Do it today; now, before you forget! It is the only salvation for your sons and for our country.

Now I have one more vital message to deliver. As I told you; one of the four specific assignments Rothschild gave Jacob Schiff was to create a movement to destroy religion in the United States with Christianity to be the chief target. For a very obvious reason; the Anti defamation League wouldn’t dare to attempt to do it because such an attempt could create the most terrible blood bath in the history of the world; not only for the ADL and the conspirators, but for the millions of innocent Jews.

Schiff turned that job over to Rockefeller for another specific reason. The destruction of Christianity could be accomplished only by those who are entrusted to preserve it. By the pastors; the men of the cloth.

As a starter; John D. Rockefeller picked up a young, so-called, Christian minister by the name of Dr. Harry F. Ward. Reverend Ward if you please. At that time he was teaching religion at the Union Theological Seminary. Rockefeller found a very willing Judas in this Reverend and thereupon in 1907, he financed him to set up the Methodist Foundation of Social Service and Ward’s job was to teach bright young men to become, so-called, ministers of Christ and to place them as pastors of churches.

While teaching them to become ministers; the Reverend Ward also taught them how to subtlely and craftily preach to their congregations that the entire story of Christ was a myth to cast doubts on the divinity of Christ, to cast doubts about the virgin Mary, in short; to cast doubts on Christianity as a whole. It was not to be a direct attack, but much of it to be done by crafty insinuation that was to be applied, in particular, to the youth in the Sunday schools.

Remember Lenin’s statement: “give me just one generation of youth and I’ll transform the whole world.” Then in 1908; the Methodist Foundation of Social Service, which incidentally was America’s first communist front organization, changed its name to the Federal Council of Churches. By 1950; the Federal Council of Churches was becoming very suspect so in 1950 they changed the name to the National Council of Churches.

Do I have to tell you more about how this National Council of Churches is deliberately destroying faith in Christianity? I don’t think so, but this I will tell you. If you are a member of any congregation whose pastor and church are members of this Judas organization, you and your contributions are helping the Illuminati’s plot to destroy Christianity and your faith in God and Jesus Christ thus you are deliberately delivering your children to be indoctrinated with disbelief in God and Church and which can easily transform them into atheists.

Find out immediately if your Church is a member of the National Council of Churches and for the love of God and your children; if it is, withdraw from it at once. However; let me warn you that the same destroying religion process has been infiltrated into other denominations. If you have seen the “Negro on Selma” and other such demonstrations; you have seen how the Negro mobs are led and encouraged by ministers (and even Catholic priests and nuns) who march along with them.

There are many individual churches and pastors who are honest and sincere. Find one such for yourself and for your children. Incidentally; this same Reverend Harry F. Ward was also one of the founders of the American Civil Liberties Union, a notorious pro-communist organization. He was the actual head of it from 1920 to 1940. He also was a co-founder of the American League against War and Fascism which, under Browder, became the Communist Party of the United States.

In short, Ward’s entire background reeked of communism and he was identified as a member of the communist party. He died a vicious traitor to both his church and country and this was the man old John D. Rockefeller picked and financed to destroy America’s Christian religion in accordance with the orders given to Schiff by the Rothschilds.

In conclusion I have this to say. You probably are familiar with the story of how one Dr. Frankenstien created a monster to do his will of destroying his chosen victims but how instead in the end, that monster turned on his own creator, Frankenstien, and destroyed him. Well, the Illuminati/CFR has created a monster called the United Nations (who is supported by their minority groups, rioting negroes, the traitorous mass communications media, and the traitors in Washington D.C.) which was created to destroy the American people.

We know all about that many-headed hydramonster and we know the names of those who created that monster. We know all their names and I predict that one fine day the American people will come fully awake and cause that very monster to destroy its creator. True! The majority of our people are still being brainwashed, deceived, and deluded by our traitorous press, TV, and radio, and by our traitors in Washington D.C., but surely by now enough is known about the U.N. to stamp out that outfit as a deadly poisonous rattlesnake in our midst.

My only wonder is: “what will it take to awaken and arouse our people to the full proof?” Perhaps this record [transcript] will do it. A hundred thousand or a million copies of this record can do it. I pray to God it will. And I pray that this record will inspire you, all of you, to spread this story to all loyal Americans in your community.

You can do it by playing it to study groups assembled in your homes, at meetings of the American Legion, the VFW, the DAR, all other civic groups and women’s clubs; especially the women’s clubs who have their sons lives at stake. With this record, I have provided you with the weapon that will destroy the monster. For the love of God, of our Country, and of your children, use it! Get a copy of it into every American home.

Myron Fagan, Illuminati/CFR Recordings, 1967
[Originally distributed as a 3 LP record set. Later, audio cassestes were also made available.]


Read more from Auricmedia:


The Illuminati Agenda – Part III

Saga still continues…

Part 3

By Myron C. Fagan
June 10, 2002
By 1917 the conspirators had achieved their primary objective; all of Europe was in a state of destitution. All the peoples were war weary and crying for peace and the outcome too was all set. It was to come as soon as the United States would be hurled on the side of the Allies and that was all set to happen immediately after Wilson’s re-election. After that, there could be only one outcome; complete victory for the Allies. To fully confirm my statement that long before 1917; the conspiracy, headed in America by Jacob Schiff, had it all set to hurl the United States into that war. I will cite the proof.

When Wilson was campaigning for re-election in 1916; his chief appeal was: “re-elect the man who will keep your sons out of the war.” But during that same campaign; the Republican Party publicly charged that Wilson had long committed himself to throw us into the war. They charged that if he would be defeated he would accomplish that act during his few remaining months in office; but if re-elected, he would hold off until after the election. But at that time the American people looked upon Wilson as a “God-man.” Well; Wilson was re-elected and as per the schedule of the conspirators; he hurled us into the war in 1917. He used the sinking of the Lusitania as an excuse; a sinking which also was prearranged. Roosevelt, also a God-man in the eyes of the American people, followed the same technique in 1941 when he used the prearranged Pearl Harbor attack as his excuse for hurling us into World War II.

Now exactly as the conspirators planned; victory for the Allies would eliminate all the Monarchs of the defeated Nations and leave all their people leaderless, confused, bewildered and perfectly conditioned for the one-world government. The great conspiracy intended would follow; but there still would be an obstacle; the same obstacle that had balked the Illuminati and Rothschild at that Congress in Vienna (peace gathering) after the Napoleonic Wars.

Russia would be on the winning side this time as it was in 1814 and therefore the Czar would be securely seated on his throne. Here it is pertinent to note that Russia, under the Czarist regime, had been the one country in which the Illuminati had never made any headway nor had the Rothschilds ever been able to infiltrate in their banking interests thus a winning Czar would be more difficult than ever to cope with. Even if he could be enticed into a so-called “League of Nations;” it was a foregone conclusion that he would never, but never, go for a one-world government.

So even before the outbreak of World War I, the conspirators had a plan in the making to carry out Nathan Rothschild’s vow of 1814 to destroy the Czar and also murder all possible royal heirs to the throne and it would have to be done before the close of the war. The Russian Bolsheviks were to be their instruments in this particular plot. From the turn of the century; the chiefs of the Bolsheviks were Nicolai Lenin, Leon Trotsky, and later Joseph Stalin.

Of course, those were not their true family names. Prior to the outbreak; Switzerland became their haven. Trotsky’s headquarters was on the lower East Side in New York; largely the habitat of Russian-Jewish refugees. Both Lenin and Trotsky were similarly bewhiskered and unkempt. In those days, that was the badge of Bolshevism. Both lived well yet neither had a regular occupation.

Neither had any visible means of support, yet both always had plenty of money. All those mysteries were solved in 1917. Right from the outset of the war; strange and mysterious goings on were taking place in New York. Night after night; Trotsky darted furtively in and out of Jacob Schiff’s palace mansion and in the dead of those same nights there were a gathering of hoodlums of New York’s lower East Side. All of them Russian refugees at Trotsky’s headquarters and all were going through some mysterious sort of training process that was all shrouded in mystery. Nobody talked; although it did leak out that Schiff was financing all of Trotsky’s activities.

Then suddenly Trotsky vanished and so did approximately 300 of his trained hoodlums. Actually they were on the high seas in a Schiff-chartered ship bound for a rendezvous with Lenin and his gang in Switzerland. And also on that ship was $20,000,000 in gold; the $20,000,000 was provided to finance the Bolsheviks takeover of Russia. In anticipation of Trotsky’s arrival; Lenin prepared to throw a party in his Switzerland hideaway.

Men of the very highest places in the world were to be guests at that party. Among them were the mysterious Colonel Edward Mandell House, Woodrow Wilson’s mentor and palsy-walsy, and more important; Schiff’s special and confidential messenger. Another of the expected guests was Warburg of the Warburg Banking Clan in Germany who was financing the Kaiser and whom the Kaiser had rewarded by making him chief of the Secret Police of Germany. In addition; there were the Rothschilds of London and Paris also Lithenoth, Kakonavich, and Stalin (who was then the head of a train and bank robbing gang of bandits). He was known as the “Jesse James of the Urals.”

And here I must remind you that England and France were then long in the war with Germany and that on February 3, 1917, Wilson had broken off all diplomatic relations with Germany. Therefore; Warburg, Colonel House, the Rothschilds, and all those others were enemies, but of course, Switzerland was neutral ground where enemies could meet and be friends-especially if they had some scheme in common.

That Lenin party was very nearly wrecked by an unforeseen incident: The Schiff-chartered ship on its way to Switzerland was intercepted and taken into custody by a British warship. But Schiff quickly rushed orders to Wilson to order the British to release the ship intact with Trotsky’s hoodlums and the gold. Wilson obeyed. He warned the British that if they refuse to release the ship; the United States would not enter the war in April as he had faithfully promised a year earlier.

The British headed the warning. Trotsky arrived in Switzerland and the Lenin party went off as scheduled; but they still faced what ordinarily would have been the insurmountable obstacle of getting the Lenin-Trotsky band of terrorists across the border into Russia. Well; that’s where Brother Warburg, chief of the German Secret Police, came in. He loaded all those thugs into sealed freight cars and made all the necessary arrangements for their secret entry into Russia. The rest is history. The revolution in Russia took place and all members of the royal Romanoff family were murdered.

Now my chief objective is to establish beyond even a remote doubt that communism, so-called, is an integral part of the Illuminati great conspiracy for the enslavement of the entire world. That communism, so-called, is merely their weapon and bogy man word to terrify the peoples of the whole world and that the conquest of Russia and the creation of communism was, in great part, organized by Schiff and the other international bankers right in our own city of New York.

A fantastic story? Yes. Some might even refuse to believe it. Well; for the benefit of any doubting Thomas I will prove it by reminding that just a few years ago Charlie Knickerbocker, a Hearst newspaper columnist, published an interview with John Schiff, grandson of Jacob, in which young Schiff confirmed the entire story and named the figure old Jacob contributed, $20,000,000.

If anybody still has even a remote doubt that the entire menace of communism was created by the masterminds of the great conspiracy right in our own city of New York; I will cite the following historical fact: All records show that when Lenin and Trotsky engineered the capture of Russia; they operated as heads of the Bolsheviks party. Now “Bolshevism” is a purely Russian word.

The masterminds realized that “Bolshevism” could never be sold as an ideology to any but the Russian people. So in April 1918; Jacob Schiff dispatched Colonel House to Moscow with orders to Lenin, Trotsky, and Stalin to change the name of their regime to the Communist Party and to adopt the Karl Marx “Manifesto” as the constitution of the Communist Party. Lenin, Trotsky, and Stalin obeyed; and in that year of 1918 was when the Communist party and the menace of communism came into being. All this is confirmed in Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, Fifth Edition.

In short; communism was created by the capitalists. Thus; until November 11, 1918, the entire fiendish plan of the conspirators worked perfectly. All the great nations, including the United States, were war-weary, devastated, and mourning their dead. Peace was the great universal desire. Thus when it was proposed by Wilson to set up a “League of Nations” to ensure peace; all the great nations, with no Russian Czar to stand in their way, jumped on that bandwagon without even stopping to read the fine print in that insurance policy.

That is; all but one: the United States, the very one that Schiff and his co-conspirators least expected would balk and that was their one fatal mistake in that early plot. You see; when Schiff planted Woodrow Wilson in the White House; the conspirators assumed that they had the United States in the proverbial bag. Wilson had been perfectly built up as a great humanitarian. He supposedly became established as a God-man with the American people. There was every reason for the conspirators to have believed that he would easily hornswaggled Congress into buying the “League of Nations,” sight unseen, exactly as the Congress of 1945 bought the “United Nations,” sight unseen.

But there was one man in the Senate in 1918 who saw through that scheme just as the Russian Czar did in 1814. He was a man of great political stature; almost as great as that of Teddy Roosevelt and fully as astute. He was highly respected and trusted by all members of both houses of Congress and by the American people. The name of that great and patriotic American was Henry Cabot Lodge (not the phony of today who called himselfHenry Cabot Lodge, Jr., until he was exposed).

Henry Cabot Lodge completely unmasked Wilson and kept the United States out of the “League of Nations.”

Shortly thereafter; the Illuminati had created the 17th Amendment to do away with appointed Senators by the legislatures of the several states of the Union. Whereas the Illuminati controls the press; they now control the election of the US Senators. The Illuminati/CFR had little or no power over the individual legislatures of the several states or their appointed U.S. Senators prior to the [purported] ratification of the 17th Amendment.

Although the 17th Amendment supposedly amends the method of placing Senators into the US Senate; the 17th Amendment was never ratified in accordance to the last sentence of Article V of the US Constitution. Two states, New Jersey and Utah, voted down the proposition and nine other states never voted at all.

Whereas the states of New Jersey and Utah expressly refused to relinquish their “suffrage” in the Senate while the other non-voting nine states never gave their “express” consent; the proposition for the 17th Amendment did not obtain the “unanimous” vote required for its adoption. Furthermore; the resolution that created the “Proposition” did not pass the Senate with a “unanimous” vote and as those Senators of that day were “appointed” by the legislatures of their states; those “negative” votes or “non-votes” were made in the name of their respective state.

Here it becomes of great interest to know the real reason for the Wilson League of Nations flop. As I previously stated, Schiff was sent to the United States to carry out four specific assignments:

1. Most important was to acquire complete control of the U.S. money system.
2. As outlined in the original Weishaupt Illuminati blueprint, he was to find the right kind of men to serve as
stooges for the great conspiracy and promote them into the highest offices in our federal government, our
Congress, our U.S. Supreme Court, and all federal agencies, such as the State Department, the Pentagon, the
Treasury Department, etc..
3. Destroy the unity of the American people by creating minority groups strife throughout the nation; especially
between the whites and blacks as outlined in Israel Cohen’s book.
4. Create a movement to destroy religion of the United States with Christianity to be the chief target or victim.

In addition; he was strongly reminded of the imperative directive of the Illuminati blueprint to achieve full control of all mass communications media to be used to brainwash the people into believing and accepting all of the maneuverings of the great conspiracy. Schiff was warned that only control of the press, at that time our only mass communications media, would enable him to destroy the unity of the American people.

Now then; Schiff and his co-conspirators did set up the “NAACP” (the “National Association for the Advancement of the Colored People”) in 1909 and in 1913 he set up the “Anti defamation League of the B’nai B’rith;” both were to create the necessary strife; but in the early years; the “ADL” operated very timidly. Perhaps for fear of a “pogrom-like” action by an aroused and enraged American people and the “NAACP” was practically dormant because its white leadership didn’t realize that they would have to develop fire-brand Negro leaders, such as Martin Luther King for one, to spark the then completely satisfied contented mass of Negroes.

In addition; he, Schiff, was busy developing and infiltrating the stooges to serve in all high places in our Washington government and in the job of acquiring control of our money system and the creation of the “16th Amendment.” He also was very busy with the organizing of the plot for the takeover of Russia.

In short; Schiff was kept so busy with all those jobs that he completely overlooked the supreme job of acquiring complete control of our mass communications media. That oversight was a direct cause for Wilson’s failure to lure the United States into the “League of Nations” because when Wilson decided to go to the people to overcome the opposition of the Lodge-controlled Senate; despite his established, but phony reputation as a great humanitarian, he found himself faced by a solidly united people and by a loyal press whose only ideology was “Americanism” and the American way of life.

At that time; due to the ineptness and ineffectiveness of the “ADL” and the “NAACP,” there were no organized minority groups; no Negro problems; no so-called antisemetic problems to sway the people’s thinking. There were no “lefts” and there were no “rights” nor any prejudices for crafty exploitations. Thus Wilson’s “League of Nations” appeal fell on deaf ears. That was the end of Woodrow Wilson; the conspirators great humanitarian. He quickly abandoned his crusade and returned to Washington were he shortly died an imbecile brought on by syphilis and that was the end of the “League of Nations” as a corridor into one-world government.

Of course that debacle was a terrible disappointment to the masterminds of the Illuminati conspiracy; but they were not discouraged. As I have previously stressed, this enemy never quits; they simply decided to reorganize and try from scratch again. By this time Schiff was very old and slow. He knew it. He knew that the conspiracy needed a new younger and more active leadership.

So on his orders; Colonel House and Bernard Barouk organized and set up what they called the Council on Foreign Relations;” the new name under which the Illuminati would continue to function in the United States. The hierarchy, officers, and directors of the CFR is composed principally of descendants of the original Illuminati, many of whom who had abandoned their old family name and acquired new Americanized names.

For one example; we have Douglas Dillon, who was Secretary of Treasury of the United States, whose original name was Laposky. Another example is Pauley, head of the CBS TV channel, whose true name is Palinsky. The membership of the CFR is approximately 1,000 in number and contains the heads of virtually every industrial empire in America such as Blough, president of the U.S. Steel Corporation; Rockefeller, king of the oil industry; Henry Ford, II, and so on. And of course; all the international bankers.

Also; the heads of the “tax-free” foundations are officers and/or active CFR members. In short; all the men who provided the money and the influence to elect the CFR-chosen Presidents of the United States, the Congressmen, the Senators, and who decide the appointments of our various Secretaries of State, of the Treasury, of every important federal agency are members of the CFR and they are very obedient members indeed.

Now just to cement that fact; I will mention the names of the United States Presidents who were members of the CFR: Franklin Roosevelt, Herbert Hoover, Dwight D. Eisenhower, Jack Kennedy [also, Nixon, and George Bush when they later became U.S. President..Ed ]. Others who were considered for the presidency are Thomas E. Dewey, Adlai Stevenson, and vice-president of a CFR subsidiary, Barry Goldwater. Among the important cabinet members of the various administrations we have John Foster Dulles, Allen Dulles, Cordell Hull, John J. MacLeod, Robert Morganthau, Clarence Dillon, Dean Rusk, Robert McNamara, and just to emphasize the “red color” of the “CFR;” we have as members such men as Alger Hess, Ralph Bunche, Pusvolsky, Haley Dexter White (real name Weiss), Owen Lattimore, Phillip Jaffey, etc., etc.. Simultaneously; they were flooding thousands of homosexuals and other black malleable characters ! into all the federal agencies from the White House on down. Do you remember Johnson’s great friends; Jenkins and Bobby Baker?

Now there were many jobs the new CFR had to accomplish. They required much help. So their first job was to set up various “subsidiaries” to whom they assigned special objectives. I can’t name all the subsidiaries in this recording; but the following are a few: the “Foreign Policy Association” (“FPA”), the “World Affairs Council” (“WAC”), the “Business Advisory Council” (“BAC”), the notorious “ADA” (“Americans for Democratic Action” virtually headed by Walter Ruther), the notorious “13-13” in Chicago; Barry Goldwater was, and no doubt still is a vice-president of one of the CFR subsidiaries. In addition; the CFR set up special committees in every state in the Union to whom they assigned the various state operations.

Simultaneously; the Rothschilds set up similar CFR-like control groups in England, France, Germany, and other Nations to control world conditions and cooperate with the CFR to bring about another world war. But the CFR’s first and foremost job was to get complete control of our mass communications media.

The control of the press was assigned to Rockefeller. Thus; Henry Luce, who recently died, was financed to set up a number of national magazines, among them “Life,” “Time,” “Fortune,” and others, which publish “U.S.S.R.” in America. The Rockefellers also directly or indirectly financed the Coles Brothers’ “Look magazine” and a chain of newspapers. They also financed a man named Sam Newhouseto buy up and build a chain of newspapers all over the country. And the late Eugene Myer, one of the founders of CFR, bought the “Washington Post,” “Newsweek,” the “Weekly magazine,” and other publications.

At the same time; the CFR began to develop and nurture a new breed of scurrilous columnists and editorials writers such as Walter Lippman, Drew Pearson, the Alsops, Herbert Matthews, Erwin Canham, and others of that ilk who called themselves “Liberals” who proclaimed that “Amercanism” is “isolationism;” that “isolationism” is “war mongerism;” that “anti-communism;” is “anti-semiticism” and “racism.”

All that took time of course, but today our “weeklies,” published by patriotic organizations, is completely controlled by CFR stooges and thus they finally succeeded in breaking us up into a Nation of quarreling, wrangling, squabbling, hating factions. Now if you still wonder about this slanted news and outright lies you read in your newspaper; you now have the answer. To the Lehmans, Goldman-Sachs, Kuhn-Loebs, and the Warburgs; the CFR assigned the job of getting control of the motion picture industry, Hollywood, radio, and television; and believe me they succeeded.

If you still wonder about the strange propaganda broadcast by the Ed Morrows and others of that ilk; you now have the answer. If you wonder about all the smut, sex, pornography, and mixed marriage films you see in your movie theater and on your televison set (all of which is demoralizing our youth); you now have the answer.

Now to refresh your memory, let’s go back for a moment. Wilson’s flop had torpedoed all chances of transforming that “League of Nations” into what the conspirators had hope for, a one-world government housing. So the Jacob Schiff plot had to be done all over again and they organized the CFR to do it. We also know how successfully the CFR did that job of brainwashing and destroying the unity of the American people.

But, as was the case with the Schiff plot; the climax and the creation of a new housing for their one world government required another world war. A war that would be even more horrible and more devastating than the first world war in order to get the people of the world to again clamor for peace and a means to end all wars. But the CFR realized that the aftermath of World War II would have to be more carefully planned so that there would be no escape from the new one-world trap – another “League of Nations” that would emerge from the new war. The trap we now know as the “United Nations” and they hit upon a perfect strategy to ensure that no one escaped. Here is how they did it.

In 1943, in the midst of the war, they prepared the framework for the United Nations and it was handed over to Roosevelt and our State Department to be given birth by Alger Hess, Palvosky, Dalton, Trumbull, and other American traitors, thus making the whole scheme a United States’ baby.

Then to fix our parenthood; New York City was to become the nursery for the monstrosity. After that we could hardly walk out on our own baby now could we? Anyway; that’s how the conspirators figured it would work and so far it has. The liberal Rockefeller donated the land for the United Nations’ building.

The United Nations’ charter was written by Alger Hess, Palvosky, Dalton, Trumbull, and other CFR stooges. A phony, so-called, U.N. conference was set up in San Francisco in 1945. All the, so-called, representatives of 50-odd Nations gathered there and promptly signed the Charter and the despicable traitor, Alger Hess, flew to Washington with it; elatedly submitted it to our Senate, and the Senate (elected by our people to safeguard our security) signed the Charter without so much as reading it. The question is: “How many of our Senators were even then traitorous stooges of the CFR?” Anyway; it was thus that the people accepted the “United Nations” as a “holy of holies.”

Again and again and again we have been startled, shocked, bewildered, and horrified by the UN’s mistakes in Berlin, in Korea, in Laos, in Katanga, in Cuba, in Vietnam; mistakes that always favored the enemy; never the United States. Under the law of averages; they should have made at least one or two mistakes in our favor; but they never did.

What’s the answer? The answer is the “CFR” and the parts played by their subsidiaries and stooges in Washington D.C., thus we know that complete control of our foreign relation policy is the key to the success of the entire Illuminati one-world order plot. Here is further proof.

Earlier I fully established that Schiff and his gang had financed the Lenin, Trotsky, Stalin, takeover of Russia and fashioned its communist regime into becoming their chief instrument to keep the world in turmoil and to finally terrorize all of us into seeking peace in a U.N. one-world government. But the conspirators knew that the “Moscow gang” could not become such an instrument until and unless the whole world would accept the communist regime as the legitimate “de jure government” of Russia.

Only one thing could accomplish that and that is the recognition by the United States. The conspirators figured that the whole world would follow our lead and that’s their bag to induce Harding, Coolidge, and Hoover, to grant that recognition. But all three refused. As a result of the late 1920’s, the Stalin regime was in dire straits. Despite all purges and secret police controls; the Russian people were growing more and more resistive. It is a matter of record, admitted by Lipdenoff, that during 1931 and 1932; Stalin and his whole gang were always packed and ready for instant flight.

Then in November 1932; the conspirators achieved their greatest coup; they landed Franklin Roosevelt in the White House, crafty, unscrupulous, and utterly without conscience. That charlatan traitor turned the trick for them. Without even asking consent of Congress; he unlawfully proclaimed recognition for the Stalin regime. That did it. And exactly as the conspirators figured; the whole world did follow our lead. Automatically that squelched the previously growing resistance movement of the Russian people. That automatically launched the greatest menace the civilized world has ever known. The rest is too well known to need repeating.


Read more from Auricmedia:


The Illuminati Agenda – Part II

Saga continues…

Part 2

By Myron C. Fagan
June 8, 2002

It was during the Civil War that the conspirators launched their first concrete efforts. We know that Judah Benjamin, chief advisor of Jefferson Davis, was a Rothschild agent. We also know that there were Rothschild agents planted in Abraham Lincoln’s cabinet who tried to sell him into a financial dealing with the House of Rothschild.

But old Abe saw through the scheme and bluntly rejected it thereby incurring the undying enmity of the Rothschilds; exactly as the Russian Czar did when he torpedoed their first League of Nations at the Congress in Vienna. Investigation of the assassination of Lincoln revealed that the assassin

John Wilkes Booth was a member of a secret conspiratorial group . Because there were a number of highly important government officials involved; the name of the group was never revealed and it became a mystery; exactly as the assassination of Jack Kennedy is still a mystery. But I am sure it will not remain a mystery for long.

Anyway; the ending of the Civil War destroyed temporarily all chances of the House of Rothschilds to get a clutch on our money system; such as they had acquired in Britain and other nations in Europe. I say temporarily because the Rothschilds and the masterminds of the conspiracy never quit so they had to start from scratch; but they lost no time in getting started.

Jacob H. Schiff

Shortly after the Civil War; a young immigrant, who called himself Jacob H. Schiff, arrived in New York. Jacob was a young man with a mission for the House of Rothschild. Jacob was the son of a Rabbi who was born in one of the Rothschild’s houses in Frankfurt, Germany.

I will not go deeply into his background. The important point was that Rothschild recognized in him not only a potential money wizard; but more important, he also saw the latent Machiavellian qualities in Jacob that could, as it did, make him an invaluable functionary in the great one-world conspiracy.

After a comparatively brief training period in the Rothschild’s London Bank; Jacob left for America with instructions to buy into a banking house which was to be the springboard to acquire control of the money system of the United States. Actually; Jacob came here to carry out four specific assignments.

1. The most important, was to acquire control of America’s money system.
2. Find desirable men, who for a price, would be willing to serve as stooges for the great conspiracy and    promote them into high places in our     federal government, our Congress, and the U.S. Supreme Court, and all  federal agencies.
3. Create minority group strife throughout the nations; particularly between the whites and blacks.
4. Create a movement to destroy religion in the United States; but Christianity to be the chief target.

Earlier I stated that Jacob Schiff came to America with orders by Rothschild to carry out four specific directives. The first and most important one was to get control of the United States’ money system. Let’s trace Schiff’s step to accomplish that directive. As a first step he had to buy into a banking house; but it had to be the kind of a house that he could absolutely control and mold for that primary objective of entrapping our U.S. money system.

After carefully scouting around; Jacob bought a partnership in a firm that called itself: Kuhn and Loeb. Like Schiff; Kuhn and Loeb were immigrants from German Jewish ghettos. They came to the U.S. in the mid 1840’s and both of them started their business careers as itinerant pack peddlers. In the early 1850’s; they pooled their interests and set up a merchandise store in Lafayette, Indiana under the firm name of Kuhn and Loeb servicing the covered wagon settlers on their way west. In the years that followed; they set up similar stores in Cincinnati and St. Louis. Then they added pawn broking to their merchandising pursuits. From that to money lending was a short and quick step.

By the time Schiff arrived on the scene; Kuhn and Loeb was a well-known private banking firm and this is the firm Jacob bought into. Shortly after he became a partner in Kuhn and Loeb; Schiff married Loeb’s daughter, Teresa, then he bought out Kuhn’s interests and moved the firm to New York and Kuhn and Loeb became Kuhn, Loeb, and Company; international bankers with Jacob Schiff, agent of the Rothschilds, ostensibly the sole owner. And throughout his career; this blend of Judas and Machiavelli, the first heirarch of the Illuminati’s great conspiracy in America, posed as a generous philanthropist and a man of great holiness; the cover-up policy set forth by the Illuminati.

As I have stated; the first great step of the conspiracy was to be the entrapment of our money system. To achieve that objective; Schiff had to get full cooperation of the then big banker elements in America; and that was easier said than done. Even in those years; Wall Street was the heart of the American money mart and J.P. Morgan was its dictator. Next in line were the Drexels and the Biddles of Philadelphia. All the other financiers, big and little, danced to the music of those three houses; but particularly to that of Morgan. All of those three were proud, haughty, arrogant potentates.

For the first few years; they viewed the little bewhiskered man from the German ghettos with utter contempt; but Jacob knew how to overcome that. He threw a few Rothschild bones to them. Said bones being distribution in America of desirable European stock and bond issues. Then he discovered that he had a still more potent weapon in his hands in the following.

It was in the decades following our Civil War that our industries began to burgeon. We had great railroads to build. The oil, mining, steel, textile industries were bursting out of their swaddling clothes. All of that called for vast financing; much of that financing had to come from abroad. That meant the House of Rothschild and that was when Schiff came into his own. He played a very crafty game.

He became the patron saint of John D. Rockefeller, Edward R. Harriman, and Andrew Carnegie. He financed the Standard Oil Company for Rocky, the Railroad Empire for Harriman, and the Steel Empire for Carnegie. But instead of hogging all the other industries for Kuhn, Loeb, and Company, he opened the doors of the House of Rothschild to Morgan, Biddle, and Drexel. In turn; Rothschild arranged the setting up of London, Paris, European and other branches for those three; but always in partnerships with Rothschild subordinates and Rothschild made it very clear to all those men that Schiff was to be the boss in New York.

Thus at the turn of the century Schiff had a tight control of the entire banking fraternity on Wall Street which by then, with Schiff’s help, included Lehman brothers, Goldman-Sachs, and other internationalist banks that where headed by men chosen by the Rothschilds. In short; that meant control of the nation’s money powers and he was then ready for the giant step – the entrapment of our national money system.

Now under our Constitution; all control of our money system is vested solely in our Congress. Schiff’s next important step was to seduce our Congress to betray that Constitutional edict by surrendering that control to the hierarchy of the Illuminati’s great conspiracy. In order to legalize that surrender and thus make the people powerless to resist it, it would be necessary to have Congress enact special legislation.

To accomplish that; Schiff would have to infiltrate stooges into both houses of Congress. Stooges powerful enough to railroad Congress into passing such legislation. Equally or even more important; he would have to plant a stooge in the White House a president that is without integrity and without scruples who would sign that legislation into law. To accomplish that he had to get control of either the Republican or the Democratic Party.

The Democratic Party was the more vulnerable; it was the hungrier of the two parties. Except for Grover Cleveland; the Democrats had been unable to land one of their men in the White House since before the Civil War. There were two reasons for that:

1. Poverty of the Party.

There were considerably more Republican-minded voters than Democrats. The poverty matter was not a great problem, but the voter problem was a different story. But as I previously said; Schiff was a smart cookie.

Here is the atrocious and murderous method he employed to solve that voter problem. His solution emphasizes how very little the Jewish internationalist bankers care about their own racial brethren as you shall see.

Suddenly; around 1890, there broke out a nationwide series of pogroms in Russia. Many, many, thousands of innocent Jews; men, women, and children were slaughtered by the Cossacks and other peasants. Similar pogroms with similar slaughter of innocent Jews broke out in Poland, Rumania, and Bulgaria. All those pogroms were fomented by Rothschild agents. As a result; the Jewish terrified refugees from all of those nations swarmed into the United States and that continued throughout the next two or three decades because the pogroms were continuous through all those years. All those refugees were aided by self-styled humanitarian committees set up by Schiff, the Rothschilds, and all the Rothschild affiliates.

In the main; the refugees streamed into New York, but the Schiff-Rothschild humanitarian committees found ways to shuffle many of them into other large cities such as Chicago, Boston, Philadelphia, Detroit, Los Angeles, etc.. All of them were quickly transformed into “naturalized citizens” and educated to register as Democrats. Thus all of that so-called minority group became solid Democratic voter blocks in their communities all controlled and maneuvered by their so-called benefactors. And shortly after the turn of the century; they became vital factors in the political life of our nation. That was one of the methods Schiff employed to plant men like Nelson Aldrich in our Senate and Woodrow Wilson in the White House.

2. Racial Strife.

At this point let me remind you of another one of the important jobs that was assigned to Schiff when he was dispatched to America. I refer to the job of destroying the unity of the American people by creating minority group and racial strife. By the pogrom-driven Jewish refugees into America; Schiff was creating a ready-made minority group for that purpose. But the Jewish people, as a whole, made fearful by the pogroms, could not be depended upon to create the violence necessary to destroy the unity of American people.

But right within America; there was an already made-to-order, although as yet, a sleeping minority group, the Negroes, who could be sparked into so-called demonstrations, rioting, looting, murder, and every other type of lawlessness – all that was necessary, was to incite and arouse them. Together; those two minority groups, properly maneuvered, could be used to create exactly the King of Strife in America the Illuminati would need to accomplish their objective.

Thus at the same time that Schiff and co-conspirators were laying their plans for the entrapment of our money system; they were also perfecting plans to hit the unsuspecting American people with an explosive and terrifying racial upheaval that would tear the people into hate fractions and create chaos throughout the nation; especially on all college and university campuses; all protected by Earl Warren decisions and our so-called leaders in Washington D.C. (Remember the Warren commission on the assassination of President John F. Kennedy). Of course, perfecting those plans require time and infinitely patient organizing.

Jack Kennedy, during his term of office as the President of the United States, became a Christian. In his attempt to repent, he tried to inform the people of this Nation (at least twice) that the Office of the President of the United States was being manipulated by the Illuminati/CFR.

At the same time, he put a stop to the ‘borrowing’ of Federal Reserve Notes from the Federal Reserve Bank and began issuing United States Notes (which was interest free) on the credit of the United States. It was the issuing of the United States Notes that caused Jack Kennedy to be assassinated.

Upon the taking the Oath of Office; Lyndon B. Johnson stopped the issuing of the United States Notes and went back to borrowing Federal Reserve Bank Notes (which was loaned to the people of the United States at the going rate of interest of 17%). The US Notes, that was issued under John F. Kennedy, was of the 1963 series which beared a “Red” seal on the face of the Note.

Now to remove all doubts; I’ll take a few moments to give you the documentary proof of this racial strife plot. First of all they had to create the leadership and organizations to draw in millions of dupes, both Jewish and Negroes, who would do the demonstrating and commit the rioting, looting, and lawlessness.

So in 1909; Schiff, the Lehmans, and other conspirators, organized and set up the National Association for the Advancement of the Colored People known as the “NAACP.” The presidents, directors, and legal councils of the NAACP were always “white men Jews” appointed by Schiff and this is the case to this very day.

Then in 1913; the Schiff group organized the Anti-defamation League of the B’nai B’rith commonly known as the “ADL” to serve as the gestapo and hatchet man outfit for the entire great conspiracy. Today the sinister ADL maintains over 2,000 agencies in all parts of our country and they advise and completely control every action of the NAACP or of the Urban League of all the other so-called Negro civil rights organizations throughout the nation including such leaders as Martin Luther King, Stockely Carmichael, Barnard Rustin, and others of the ilk.


Read more from Auricmedia:


The Illuminati Agenda – Part I

And now we post series of Illuminati agenda articles, which everybody should read.

The Illuminati Agenda
(Best Historical Overview Yet-
Transcript of 1967 Recording)

[Editor’s Note: The following is a transcript of a recording distributed in 1967 by  Myron C. Fagan. He had hoped that if enough Americans had heard (or read) this summary, the Illuminati’s plan to destroy America would have been aborted, just as Russia’s Alexander I had torpedoed the Illuminati’s plans for a One World, League of Nations at the Congress of Vienna from 1814-15. Fagan correctly describes those members of congress, the executive branch, and the judicial branch of that time as TRAITORS for their role in assisting to implement the downfall of America’s sovereignty. It’s understandable that most listeners of that period would have found it difficult to believe that the Kennedy’s, for instance, were (are) part of the Illuminati plot, but he did say that Jack had a spiritual rebirth and attempted to rescue the country from the Illuminati’s stranglehold by issuing US silver certificates, which apparently greatly contributed to the Illuminati’s decision to assassinate him (his son, John Jr., was also murdered because he had intended to expose his father’s killers after he gained public office).

Today we realize that the Illuminati exerts almost 100% control over all three branches of the American government and the few remaining congressional defenders of America can be counted on one hand as the intense public vilification and disparagement recently directed at Rep. Cynthia McKinney of Georgia will bear witness to. It’s too late in the game now to expect any patriot remaining within government service to rescue us from the brutal destruction that lies ahead, but the American people can save themselves from these satanic destroyers of  liberty & life through NON-COOPERATION and NON-COMPLIANCE. The Illuminati plans to incorporate MIND CONTROL to force compliance, but their ELF mind control towers can be neutralized before that happens if enough people become aware of the enslavement agenda. The current crop of traitors with names like Rumsfeld, are merely stooges for hidden corporate satanists who, in turn, are themselves stooges for repressive alien overlords as described in the latest books of David Icke and the lectures of Al Bielek.  You must play some role to help save your children and this world from these madmen. Help fulfill Fagan’s Hope and distribute this article far and wide. My gratitude to Dr. Kanya Vashon McGhee <drkanya9@hotmail.com> of the Tree of Life bookstore for forwarding this important transcript to me…Ken Adachi]

By Myron C. Fagan
June 8, 2002

Part 1
(Original title: The Illuminati and the Council on Foreign Relations )

The question of how and why the United Nations is the crux of the great conspiracy to destroy the sovereignty of the United States and the enslavement of the American people within a U.N. one-world dictatorship is a complete and unknown mystery to the vast majority of the American people.

The reason for this unawareness of the frightening danger to our country and to the entire free world is simple. The masterminds behind this great conspiracy have absolute control of all of our mass communications media, especially television, the radio, the press, and Hollywood.

We all know that our State Department, the Pentagon, and the White House have brazenly proclaimed that they have the right and the power to manage the news, to tell us not the truth but what they want us to believe.

They have seized that power on orders from their masters of the great conspiracy and the objective is to brainwash the people into accepting the phony peace bait to transform the United States into an enslaved unit of the United Nations’ one-world government.

First of all, bear in mind that the so-called U.N. police action in Korea, fought by the United States in which 150,000 of our sons were murdered and maimed, was part of the plot; just as the undeclared by Congress war in Vietnam in which our sons are dying is part of the plot; just as the plot against Rhodesia and South Africa in which our sons will be dying is part of the U.N. plot.

However, the vitally important thing for all Americans, all you mothers of the boys who died in Korea and are now dying in Vietnam, to know is that our so-called leaders in Washington, who we elected to safeguard our nation and our constitution, are the betrayers and that behind them are a comparatively small group of men whose sole objective is to enslave the whole world of humanity in their satanic plot of one-world government.

Now in order to give you a very clear picture of this satanic plot, I will go back to its beginning, clear back in the middle of the 18th century and name the men who put that plot into action and then bring you down to the present – today’s status of that plot. Now as a matter of further intelligence, a term used by the FBI, let me clarify the meaning of the expression “he is a liberal.”

The enemy, meaning the one-world conspirators, have seized upon that word “liberal” as a cover-up for their activities. It sounds so innocent and so humanitarian to be liberal. Well, make sure that the person who calls himself a liberal or is described as a liberal is not in truth a “red.”

Now then, this satanic plot was launched back in the 1760’s when it first came into existence under the name “Illuminati.” This Illuminati was organized by one Adam Weishaupt, born a Jew, who was converted to Catholicism and became a Catholic priest, and then, at the behest of the then newly organized House of Rothschild, defected and organized the Illuminati.

Naturally, the Rothschilds financed that operation and every war since then, beginning with the French Revolution, has been promoted by the Illuminati operating under various names and guises. I say under various names and guises because after the Illuminati was exposed and became notorious, Weishaupt and his co-conspirators began to operate under various other names. In the United States, immediately after World War I, they set up what they called the “Council on Foreign Relations,” commonly referred to as the CFR, and this CFR is actually the Illuminati in the United States and its hierarchy.

The masterminds in control of the original Illuminati conspirators, but to conceal that fact, most of them changed their original family names to American sounding names. For example, the true name of the Dillons, Clarence and Douglas Dillon (one Secretary of the U.S. Treasury Department), is Laposky. I’ll come back to all this later.

There is a similar establishment of the Illuminati in England operating under the name of the “British Institute of International Affairs.” There are similar secret Illuminati organizations in France, Germany, and other nations operating under different names and all these organizations, including the CFR, continuously set up numerous subsidiary or front organizations that are infiltrated into every phase of the various nations’ affairs. But at all times, the operations of these organizations were and are masterminded and controlled by the Internationalist Bankers, they in turn were and are controlled by the Rothschilds.

One branch of the Rothschild family had financed Napoleon; another branch of the Rothschilds financed Britain, Germany, and the other nations in the Napoleonic wars.

Immediately after the Napoleonic wars, the Illuminati assumed that all the nations were so destitute and so weary of wars that they’d be glad for any solution, so the Rothschild stooges set up what they called the Congress of Vienna and at that meeting they tried to create the first League of Nations, their first attempted one-world government, on the theory that all the crowned heads of European governments were so deeply in debt to them that they would willingly or unwillingly serve as their stooges.

But the Czar of Russia caught the stench of the plot and completely torpedoed it. The enraged Nathan Rothschild, then the head of the dynasty, vowed that some day he or his descendants would destroy the Czar and his entire family, and his descendants did accomplish that very threat in 1917.

At this point, bear in mind that the Illuminati was not set up to operate on a short-range basis. Normally a conspirator of any type enters into a conspiracy with the expectation of achieving his objective during his own lifetime. But that was not the case with the Illuminati. True, they hoped to accomplish their objective during their lifetime, but paraphrasing “The show must go on,” the Illuminati operates on the very long-range basis. Whether it will take scores of years or even centuries, they have dedicated their descendants to keep the pot boiling until they hope the conspiracy is achieved.

Now, let’s go back to the birth of the Illuminati. Adam Weishaupt was a Jesuit-trained professor of canon law, teaching in Engelstock University, when he defected from Christianity to embrace the luciferian conspiracy. It was in 1770 that the professional money lenders, the then recently organized House of Rothschild, retained him to revise and modernize the age-old Protocols of Zionism, which from the outset, was designed to give the Synagogue of Satan, so named by Jesus Christ, ultimate world domination so they could impose the luciferian ideology upon what would remain of the human race after the final social cataclysm by use of satanic despotism.

Weishaupt completed his task May 1, 1776. Now you know why May 1 is the great day with all communist nations to this very day (May 1 is also “Law Day” as declared by the American Bar Association). That was the day, May 1, 1776, that Weishaupt completed his plan and officially organized the Illuminati to put the plan into execution. That plan required the destruction of all existing governments and religions. That objective was to be reached by dividing the masses of people, whom he Weishaupt, termed: “goyism” or human cattle into opposing camps in ever increasing numbers on political, social, economic, and other issues – the very conditions we have in our country today.

The opposing sides were then to be armed and incidents provided which would cause them to fight and weaken themselves and gradually destroy national governments and religious institutions. Again I say, the very conditions in the world today.

And at this point let me stress a prime feature of the Illuminati plans. When and if their blueprint for world control, the Protocols Of The Elders Of Zion, is discovered and exposed, they would wipe all the Jews off the face of the earth in order to divert suspicions from themselves. If you think this is far fetched, bear in mind that they permitted Hitler, a liberal socialist himself, who was financed by corrupt Kennedy, the Warburgs, and the Rothschilds, to incinerate 600,000 Jews.

Now just why did the conspirators choose the word: “Illuminati” for their satanic organization? Weishaupt himself said that the word is derived from Lucifer and means: “holder of the light.” Using the lie that his objective was to bring about a one-world government to enable those with mental ability to govern the world and prevent all wars in the future.

In short, using the words: “peace on earth” as his bait, exactly as that same bait as: “peace” was used by the 1945 conspirators to force the United Nations on us, Weishaupt financed, I repeat, by the Rothschilds, recruited some 2,000 paid followers. These included the most intelligent men in the field of arts and letters, education, the sciences, finance, and industry.

He then established Lodges of the Grand Orient; Masonic Lodges to be their secret headquarters and I again repeat, that in all of this he was acting under orders from the House of Rothschild. The main features of the Weishaupt plan of operation required his Illuminati to do the following things to help them to accomplish their purpose:

Use monetary and sex bribery to obtain control of men already in high places in the various of levels of all governments and other fields of endeavor. Once influential persons had fallen for the lies, deceits, and temptations of the Illuminati they were to be held in bondage by application of political and other forms of blackmail, threats of financial ruin, public exposure, and fiscal harm, even death to themselves and loved members of their families. Do you realize how many present top officials in our present government in Washington are controlled in just that way by the CFR? Do you realize how many homosexuals in our State Department, the Pentagon, all federal agencies, even in the White House are controlled that way?

Illuminati and the faculties of colleges and universities were to cultivate students possessing exceptional mental ability belonging to well-bred families with international leanings and recommend them for special training in internationalism. Such training was to be provided by granting scholarships to those selected by the Illuminatists. That gives you an idea what a “Rhodes scholarship” means. It means indoctrination into accepting the idea that only a one-world government can put an end to recurring wars and strife. That’s how the United Nations was sold to the American people.  One of the most notable Rhodes scholars we have in our country is Senator William J. Fulbright, sometimes referred to as half-bright. His entire voting record spells Illuminati. All such scholars were to be first persuaded and then convinced that men of special talent and brains have the right to rule those less gifted on the ground that the masses don’t know what is best for them fiscally, mentally, and spiritually.

In addition to the Rhodes and similar scholarships, today there are three special Illuminati schools located in Gordonstown in Scotland, Salem in Germany, and Annavrighta in Greece. These three are known ones, but there are others that are kept undercover. Prince Philip, the husband of Britain’s Queen Elizabeth, was educated at Gordonstown at the instigation of Lord Louis Mountbatten, his uncle, a Rothschild relative, who became Britain’s Admiral of the Fleet after World War II ended.

All influential people trapped into coming under the control of the Illuminati, plus the students who had been specially educated and trained, were to be used as agents and placed behind the scenes of all governments as experts and specialists so they would advise the top executives to adopt policies which would in the long run serve the secret plans of the Illuminati one-world conspiracy and bring about the destruction of the governments and religions they were elected or appointed to serve.

Do you know how many such men operate in our government at this very time? Dean Rusk, Robert McNamara, Hubert Humphrey, Fulbright, Keekle, and goes on and on and on.

Perhaps the most vital directive in Weishaupt’s plan was to obtain absolute control of the press, at that time the only mass communications media, to distribute information to the public so that all news and information could be slanted so that the masses could be convinced that a one-world government is the only solution to our many and varied problems.

Do you know who owns and controls our mass communications media? I’ll tell you. Practically all the movie lots in Hollywood is owned by the Lehmans; Kuhn, Loeb, and Company; Goldman-Sachs; and other internationalist bankers. All the national radio and TV channels in the nation are owned and controlled by those same internationalists bankers.

The same is true of every chain of metropolitan newspapers and magazines, also of the press wire services, such as Associated Press, United Press International, etc.. The supposed heads of all those media are merely the fronts for the internationalist bankers, who in turn compose the hierarchy of the CFR, today’s Illuminati in America.

Now can you understand why the Pentagon Press agent, Sylvester, so brazenly proclaimed that the government has the right to lie to the people. What he really meant was that our CFR controlled government had the power to lie to and be believed by the brain-washed American people.

Let us again go back to the first days of the Illuminati. Because Britain and France were the two greatest world powers in the late years of the 18th Century; Weishaupt ordered the Illuminati to foment the colonial wars, including our Revolutionary War, to weaken the British Empire and organize the French Revolution to start in 1789.

However; in 1784, a true act of God placed the Bavarian government in possession of evidence which proved the existence of the Illuminati and that evidence could have saved France if they, the French government, hadn’t refused to believe it.

Here is how that act of God happened. It was in 1784 that Weishaupt issued his orders for the French Revolution. A German writer, named Zweig, put it into book form. It contained the entire Illuminati story and Weishaupt’s plans. A copy of this book was sent to the Illuminists in France headed by Robespierre whom Weishaupt had delegated to foment the French Revolution.

The courier was struck and killed by lightening as he rode through Rawleston on his way from Frankfurt to Paris. The police found the subversive documents on his body and turned them over to the proper authorities. After a careful study of the plot; the Bavarian government ordered the police to raid Weishaupt’s newly organized Lodges of the “Grand Orient” and the homes of his most influential associates.

All additional evidence thus discovered convinced the authorities that the documents were genuine copies of the conspiracy by which the Illuminati planned to use wars and revolutions to bring about the establishment of a one-world government; the powers of which they, headed by the Rothschilds, intended to usurp as soon as it was established, exactly in line with the United Nations’ plot of today.

In 1785, the Bavarian government outlawed the Illuminati and closed the Lodges of the “Grand Orient.” In 1786; they published all the details of the conspiracy. The English title of that publication is: “The Original Writings of the Order and the Sect of the Illuminati.” Copies of the entire conspiracy were sent to all the heads of church and state in Europe. But the power of the Illuminati, which was actually the power of the Rothschilds, was so great that this warning was ignored. Nevertheless; the Illuminati became a dirty word and it went underground.

At the same time, Weishaupt ordered Illuminists to infiltrate into the Lodges of “Blue Masonry” and formed their own secret societies within all secret societies. Only Masons who proved themselves internationalists and those whose conduct proved they had defected from God were initiated into the Illuminati. Thenceforth; the conspirators donned the cloak of philanthropy and humanitarianism to conceal their revolutionary and subversive activities.

In order to infiltrate into Masonic Lodges in Britain; Weishaupt invited John Robison over to Europe. Robison was a high degree Mason in the “Scottish Rite.” He was a professor of natural philosophy at Edinburgh University and Secretary of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. Robison did not fall for the lie that the objective of the Illuminati was to create a benevolent dictatorship; but he kept his reactions to himself so well that he was entrusted with a copy of Weishaupt’s revised conspiracy for study and safekeeping.

Anyway; because the heads of state and church in France were deluded into ignoring the warnings given them; the revolution broke out in 1789 as scheduled by Weishaupt. In order to alert other governments to their danger, in 1798, Robison published a book entitled: “Proof of a Conspiracy to Destroy all Governments and Religions” but his warnings were ignored exactly as our American people have been ignoring all warnings about the United Nations and the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR).

Now here is something that will stun and very likely outrage many who hear this; but there is documentary proof that our own Thomas Jefferson and Alexander Hamiltonbecame students of Weishaupt. Jefferson was one of Weishaupt’s strongest defenders when he was outlawed by his government and it was Jefferson who infiltrated the Illuminati into the then newly organized lodges of the “Scottish Rite” in New England. Here is the proof.

In 1789; John Robison warned all Masonic leaders in America that the Illuminati had infiltrated into their lodges and on July 19, 1789; David Papen, President of Harvard University, issued the same warning to the graduating class and lectured them on how the influence of Illuminism was acquitting on American politics and religion, and to top it off; John Quincy Adams, who had organized the New England Masonic Lodges, issued his warnings.

Adams wrote three letters to Colonel William L. Stone, a top Mason, in which he exposed how Jefferson was using Masonic lodges for subversive Illuministic purposes. Those three letters are at this very time in Whittenburg Square Library in Philadelphia. In short; Jefferson, founder of the Democratic Party, was a member of the Illuminati which at least partly accounts for the condition of the party at this time and through infiltration of the Republican Party; we have exactly nothing of loyal Americanism today.

That disastrous rebuff at the Congress of Vienna created by the Czar of Russia, Alexander I, did not by any means destroy the Illuminati conspiracy. It merely forced them to adopt a new strategy realizing that the one-world idea was, for the moment, killed. The Rothschild’s decided that to keep the plot alive they would have to do it by heightening their control of the money system of the European nations.

Earlier; by a ruse the outcome of the Battle of Waterloo had been falsified, Rothschild had spread a story that Napoleon had one bad battle which precipitated a terrific panic on the stock market in England. All stocks had plummeted down to practically zero and Nathan Rothschild bought all the stocks for virtually a penny on its dollar values.

That gave him complete control of the economy of Britain and virtually of all Europe. So immediately after that Congress in Vienna had boomeranged; Rothschild had forced Britain to set up a new “Bank of England” which he had absolute control exactly, as later through Jacob Schiff; he engineered our own “Federal Reserve Act” which gave the House of Rothschild a secret control of the economy in the United States. But now for a moment; let’s dwell on the activities of the Illuminati in the United States.

In 1826; one Captain William Morgan decided it was his duty to inform all Masons and the general public what the full proof was regarding the Illuminati, their secret plans, intended objectives, and to reveal the identities of the masterminds of the conspiracy. The Illuminati promptly tried Morgan in absentia and convicted him of treason.

They ordered one Richard Howard, an English Illuminist, to carry out their sentence of execution as a traitor. Morgan was warned and he tried to escape to Canada, but Howard caught up with him near the border; near the Niagara Gorge to be exact, where he murdered him. This was verified in a sworn statement made in New York by one Avery Allen to the effect that he heard Howard render his report of the execution to a meeting of “Knights Templers” in St. John’s Hall in New York. He also told how arrangements had been made to ship Howard back to England.

That Allen affidavit is on record in New York City Archives. Very few Masons and very few of the general public know that general disapproval over that incident of murder caused approximately half of all the Masons in the northern jurisdiction of the United States to secede. Copies of the minutes of the meeting held to discuss that matter are still in existence in safe hands and that all that secrecy emphasizes the power of the masterminds of the Illuminati to prevent such terrible events of history from being taught in our schools.

In the early 1850’s; the Illuminati held a secret meeting in New York which was addressed by a British Illuminist named Wright. Those in attendance were told that the Illuminati was organizing to unite the Nihilist and Atheist groups with all other subversive groups into an international group to be known as Communists. That was when the word: “communist” first came into being and it was intended to be the supreme weapon and scare word to terrify the whole world and drive the terrorized peoples into the Illuminati one-world scheme.

This scheme: “communism,” was to be used to enable the Illuminati to foment future wars and revolutions. Clinton Roosevelt, a direct ancestor of Franklin Roosevelt; Horace Greeley; and Charles Dana; foremost newspaper publishers of that time were appointed to head a committee to raise funds for the new venture. Of course, most of the funds were provided by the Rothschilds and this fund was used to finance Karl Marx and Engels when they wrote “Das Kaptial” and the “Communist Manifesto” in Soho, England. And this clearly reveals that communism is not a so-called ideology, but a secret weapon; a bogy man word to serve the purpose of the Illuminati.

Weishaupt died in 1830; but prior to his death, he prepared a revised version of the age-old conspiracy, the Illuminati, which under various aliases was to organize, finance, direct, and control all international organizations and groups by working their agents into executive positions at the top.

In the United States we have Woodrow Wilson, Franklin Roosevelt, Jack Kennedy, Lyndon Johnson, Dean Rusk, Robert McNamara, William Fulbright, George Bush etc., as prime examples.

In addition, while Karl Marx was writing the “Communist Manifesto” under the director of one group of Illuminists, Professor Karl Ritter of Frankfurt University was writing the antithesis under the direction of another group.

The idea was that those who direct the overall conspiracy could use the differences in those two so-called ideologies to enable them to divide larger and larger members of the human race into opposing camps so that they could be armed and then brainwashed into fighting and destroying each other. And particularly, to destroy all political and religious institutions.

The work Ritter started was continued after his death and completed by the German so-called philosopher Freidrich Wilhelm Nietzache who founded Nietzscheanism. This Nietzecheanism was later developed into Fascism and then into Nazism and was used to foment World War I and II.

In 1834; the Italian revolutionary leader, Guiseppe Mazzini, was selected by the Illuminati to direct their revolutionary program throughout the world. He served in that capacity until he died in 1872, but some years before he died; Mazzini had enticed an American General named Albert Pike into the Illuminati. Pike was fascinated by the idea of a one-world government and ultimately he became the head of this luciferian conspiracy.

Between 1859 and 1871 he, Pike, worked out a military blueprint for three world wars and various revolutions throughout the world which he considered would forward the conspiracy to its final stage in the 20th century. Again I remind you that these conspirators were never concerned with immediate success. They also operated on a long-range view.

Pike did most of his work in his home in Little Rock, Arkansas. But a few years later; when the Illuminati’s Lodges of the Grand Orient became suspect and repudiated because of Mazzini’s revolutionary activities in Europe, Pike organized what he called the New and Reformed Palladian Right.

He set up three Supreme Councils; one in Charleston, South Carolina, one in Rome, Italy, and a third in Berlin, Germany. He had Mazzini establish 23 subordinate councils in strategic locations throughout the world. These have been the secret headquarters of the world revolutionary movement ever since.

Long before Marconi invented the radio; the scientists in the Illuminati had found the means for Pike and the heads of his councils to communicate secretly. It was the discovery of that secret that enabled intelligence officers to understand how apparently unrelated incidents, such as the assassination of an Austrian Prince [Arch Duke Ferdinand I ] at Serbia, took place simultaneously throughout the world which developed into a war or a revolution.

Pike’s plan was as simple as it has proved effective. It called for Communism, Nazism, political Zionism, and other international movements to be organized and used to foment three global world wars and at least two major revolutions.

The First World War was to be fought so as to enable the Illuminati to destroy Czarism in Russia, as vowed by Rothschild after the Czar had torpedoed his scheme at the Congress in Vienna, and to transform Russia into a stronghold of atheistic communism. The differences stirred up by agents of the Illuminati between the British and German Empires were to be used to foment this war. After the war would be ended; communism was to be built up and used to destroy other governments and weaken religions.

World War II, when and if necessary, was to be fomented by using the controversies between Fascists and political zionists, and here let it be noted that Hitler was financed by Krupp, the Warburgs, the Rothschilds, and other internationalist bankers and that the slaughter of the supposed 600,000 Jews by Hitler didn’t bother the Jewish internationalist bankers at all.

That slaughter was necessary in order to create worldwide hatred of the German people and thus bring about war against them. In short; this second world war was to be fought to destroy nazism and increase the power of political zionism so that the state of Israel could be established in Palestine.

During this World War II; international communism was to be built up until it equalled in strength to that of the united Christendom. When it reached that point; it was to be contained and kept in check until required for the final social cataclysm. As we know now; Roosevelt, Churchill, and Stalin put that exact policy into effect and Truman, Eisenhower, Kennedy, Johnson, and George Bush continued that same exact policy.

World War III is to be fomented by using the so-called controversies, the agents of the Illuminati operating under whatever new name, as are now being stored up between the political Zionists and the leaders of the Moslem world. That war is to be directed in such a manner that all of Islam and political Zionism (Israel) will destroy each other while at the same time; the remaining nations once more divided on this issue will be forced to fight themselves into a state of complete exhaustion; physically, mentally, spiritually, and economically.

Now, can any thinking person doubt that the intrigue now going on in the near Middle and far East is designed to accomplish that satanic objective? Albert Pike himself foretold all this in a statement he made to Mazzini on August 15, 1871. Pike stated that after World War III is ended; those who will aspire to undisputed world domination will provoke the greatest social cataclysm the world has ever known. Quoting his own words taken from the letter he wrote to Mazzini and which letter is now catalogued in the British Museum in London, England; he said:

“We shall unleash the nihilists and the atheists and we shall provoke a great social cataclysm which in all its horror will show clearly to all nations the effect of absolute atheism; the origins of savagery and of most bloody turmoil. Then everywhere, the people will be forced to defend themselves against the world minority of the world revolutionaries and will exterminate those destroyers of civilization and the multitudes disillusioned with Christianity whose spirits will be from that moment without direction and leadership and anxious for an ideal, but without knowledge where to send its adoration, will receive the true light through the universal manifestation of the pure doctrine of Lucifer brought finally out into public view. A manifestation which will result from a general reactionary movement which will follow the destruction of Christianity and Atheism; both ! conquered and exterminated at the same time.”
When Mazzini died in 1872; Pike made another revolutionary leader named Adrian Lemmy; his successor. Lemmy, in turn, was succeeded by Lenin and Trotsky, then by Stalin. The revolutionary activities of all those men were financed by British, French, German, and American international bankers; all of them dominated by the House of Rothschilds.

We are supposed to believe that the international bankers of today, like the money changers of Christ’s day, are only the tools or agents of the great conspiracy, but actually they are the masterminds behind all the mass communications media leading us into believing that communism is a movement of the so-called workers; the actual fact is that both British and American intelligence officers have authentic documentary evidence that international liberals, operating through their international banking houses; particularly the House of Rothschilds, have financed both sides of every war and revolution since 1776.

Those who today comprise the conspiracy (the CFR in the United States); direct our governments whom they hold in usury through such methods as the Federal Reserve System in America to fight wars, such as Vietnam (created by the United Nations), so as to further Pike’s Illuminati plans to bring the world to that stage of the conspiracy when atheistic communism and the whole of Christianity can be forced into an all out third world war within each remaining nation as well as on an international basis scale.

The headquarters of the great conspiracy in the late 1700’s was in Frankfurt, Germany where the House of Rothschild had been established by Mayar (or Mayer) Amschel who adopted the Rothschild name and linked together other international financiers who had literally sold their souls to the devil. After the Bavarian government’s exposure in 1786; the conspirators moved their headquarters to Switzerland then to London. Since World War II (after Jacob Schiff, the Rothschild’s boy in America died); the headquarters of the American branch has been in the Harold Pratt Building in New York City and the Rockefellers, originally proteges of Schiff, have taken over the manipulation of finances in America for the Illuminati.

In the final phases of the conspiracy; the one-world government will consist of the king-dictator; the head of the United Nations, the CFR, and a few billionaires, economists, and scientists who have proved their devotion to the great conspiracy. All others are to be integrated into a vast conglomeration of mongrolized humanity; actually slaves.

Now let me show you how our federal government and the American people have been sucked into the one-world take over plot of the Illuminati great conspiracy and always bear in mind, that the United Nations was created to become the housing for that one-world, so-called, liberal conspiracy. The real foundations of the plot of the takeover of the United States were laid during the period of our Civil War. Not that Weishaupt and the earlier masterminds had ever overlooked the new world, as I have previously indicated; Weishaupt had his agents planted over here as far back as the Revolutionary War, but George Washington was more than a match for them.


Read more from Auricmedia:


John McCain Defends war criminal Henry Kissinger

I saw this disgusting video where war mongerer John McCain defends another low-life scumbag war criminal Henry Kissinger and when I saw an article about it, I thought to post it so here it is:

It has been said that birds of a feather flock together, and proof of that statement can be seen in the fact that terrorist sympathizer John McCain was recently forced to act as Knight in Shining Armor for famed mass murderer Henry Kissinger as the latter was attempting to give yet another speech to the Senate Armed Services Committee.

Kissinger’s arrival, as well as the beginning of his speech, was interrupted by protesters from Code Pink, who attempted to list off the crimes of Henry Kissinger but were unable to continue their presentation for the requisite number of days it would take to do so due to the fact that Capitol Hill police were called in to remove them.

McCain, always a friend to those who have committed or are doing their best to commit atrocities on a mass scale, erupted in typical angry fashion screaming at protesters,

“You know, you’re going to have to shut up, or I’m going to have you arrested.”

As the protesters were being removed, McCain also screamed,

“Get out of here you low-life scum.”

McCain went on to apologize to Kissinger by stating that,

“Dr. Kissinger, I hope on behalf of all of the members of this committee on both sides of the aisle – in fact, from all of my colleagues, I’d like to apologize for allowing such disgraceful behavior towards a man who served his country with the greatest distinction. I apologize profusely.”

Many Americans, particularly Vietnam veterans, however, may indeed remember,

“such disgraceful behavior towards a man who served his country with the greatest distinction” taking place in the Capitol on a number of occasions.

Indeed, the performance of John McCain standing in front of Congress and arguing against any further investigation or revelation of whether or not American POWs were still being held in Vietnam, would certainly count as one such instance.

One other such instance might be his incessant grandstanding in support of al-Qaeda and ISIS, known to the mainstream media as “moderate rebels,” freedom fighters, and the like.

Yet, while McCain’s support of the,

  • Vietnam war

  • Iraq War

  • Syrian War

  • Libyan war,

…and virtually every war that was ever waged and those that ever will be waged upon the face of the earth, has resulted in the death of millions of people, McCain found himself in the presence of one of the true kings of killing in Henry Kissinger.

Indeed, Kissinger is one of the true living figures whose feet most psychopathic killers the world over still long to kneel at.

Kissinger’s direction of the Chilean coup, Vietnam war, Cambodian and Laotian tragedies, and his famous ‘National Security Study Memorandum 200: Implications of Worldwide Population Growth for U.S. Security and Overseas Interests’ (NSSM200) has earned him a special place amongst the world’s most effective mass murders, although admittedly not the most widely known.

It is thus not surprising that McCain would come to the aid of Kissinger so readily.

In fact, it is not surprising that, after all these years and all these crimes against humanity, that Kissinger would be addressing such an important Congressional committee. Nor is it surprising that this committee boasts yet another criminal, terrorist supporter, insidious color revolution operative, and traitor like John McCain.

The only surprising aspect of the whole affair was that the protesters were allowed to stay for as long as they did.

Or was the most surprising aspect that there were protesters to begin with?

And here’s the video where John McCain is kissing Henry KISSinger’s ass:

Read more from Auricmedia:


Veterans Awaken to Role as Corporate Mercenaries

If you just didn’t know the soldiers cover the opium fields in Afghanistan and do favors for big corporations. The war is a lie and ordinary people are those who suffer and pay the price:

From Ken Adachi <Editor>
December 2005

Veterans Awaken to Role as Corportate Mercenaries (December 2005, update Feb 2014)

Update, February 14, 2014:

This video tells the story of what I tried to warn about when I posted this page in December of 2005.

This is why no American in their right mind should join the satanist-controlled US military. You will regret it for a lifetime if sent into a combat zone. Why do you think so many guys coming back commit suicide?
Anonymous- U.S Government are the Real Terrorists

When I was younger, I thought going into the military was the right thing to do and I joined voluntarily. I saw it as an adventure and I was anxious to jump in and learn what ‘being a man’ was all about. Like Hemingway’s fictional alter ego, Nick Adams in The Sun Also Rises, I wanted to get into the game and experience life to the hilt. Not unlike Nick Adams in the final chapter of the book, I also came to see things very differently on the far side of the journey.

During the Vietnam era, I had a very low opinion of draft dodgers, draft card burners, and war protestors in general. I assumed they were mostly spoiled and cowardly college wimps who were too good to get their hands dirty giving something back to their country and were mostly looking for an easy pretext to meet women. But I was naive and wholly ignorant of what was really taking place. More importantly, I had no idea who was manipulating these events from behind the scenes. I unthinkingly accepted the cover story that it was those Godless communists who were agitating to take over all of Asia and they had to be stopped at all costs. I was brainwashed.

I didn’t know that all my sources of “news” information-Time magazine, Newsweek, the New York Times, Meet the Press, Firing Line (with William F. Buckley Jr.), CBS Reports, 60 Minutes, etc., etc., etc. were part of a huge propaganda machine that collectively acted in concert to mold my thinking into accepting the cover story. Nothing much has changed since then. Today, young military recruits and their families and their friends continue to unthinkingly accept the cover story that the American military must be the Good Guys of the world-doing the Right Thing-and whoever we’re fighting against are automatically assumed to be the Bad Guys.

In the mid 1960’s, I believed Illuminati gofers like Lyndon Johnson, Dean Rusk, and Robert MacNamara when they told me about the Gulf of Tonkin ‘torpedo boat’ attacks against US Naval ships (it never happened) and of the “domino theory” which claimed that all other countries in southeast Asia would fall to the the Evil Empire of Communism and if we didn’t stop them in Vietnam. At the time, I didn’t know that the president of the United States and his entire cabinet were, in fact, covert agents for international corporations and power groups who wanted war.

War, I later discovered, is a money maker, a big money maker for corporations with names like General Electric, or Dupont, or Chase Manhattan Bank, or Rockwell International, or Merck, or AT&T, or IBM, or the dozens of other Illuminated corporate giants who attend those Bilderberger get-togethers every year and make plans -for you and I.

Manufacturers of planes, tanks, battleships, missiles, rockets, bullets, assault rifles, mortars, field rations, uniforms, boots, medical supplies, prosthetics, tents, mobile river crossing equipment, helicopters, gun ships, radar, missile tracking systems, high tech electronics, spy satellites, etc., etc. love war.

Oil companies love war. The CIA loves war. MI5 loves war. The Mossad loves war. These covert groups, working for the Illuminated Ones, have been responsible for instigating most of the conflicts in the world. War makes money and consolidates power into the hands of the elite manipulators who always remain hidden from our view. They place their Front men and Mouthpieces out there for us to see and debate about and send our letters to, but they themselves always remain in disguise, usually seen as the most genteel, civilized, and honored of humanity’s flock-like the royal family of England.

Orchestrated wars also provides a convenient cover for drug trafficking, which again, you can pin the tail on the CIA- the biggest player on the planet. While war robs ordinary, mostly poor, American families of their sons (and now their daughters), it makes indentured slaves of the rest of us.

Who pays out the money that fills the coffers of war profiteers? The government.

And how does the government get that money?

First, from their pals in the banking industry, and then from you. Of course, war is also a handy cover for pulling your rights and constitutional liberties out from under you, which today is rapidly escalating at a perilous rate and driving America into the arms of a Nazi style police state where platitudes like ‘democracy’, ‘freedom’, and ‘liberty’ ring hollow for those who still retain the capacity to think and can recognize lies and deceit when it’s so shamelessly hawked to what is presumed to be a dumbed-down citizenry.

In earlier decades, the goals of the Illuminati elites, their international corporations, their political puppets and their representatives in the military-industrial complex were to make money and to consolidate/expand their power, but today the goal is the destruction and dismantling of the United States and its people in order to make way for a one-world government, the so called New World Odor.

While many in today’s military still cling to the cover story of America, Defenders of Freedom & Democracy, their ranks are dwindling as more and more servicemen (and ex-servicemen) come to see the Liars and the Lies for what they are. They are organizing, getting vocal, and reaching out, thanks to the internet, but they have a long way to go if they hope to prevent the next orchestrated war with Iran that will be “crisis driven ” and stampeded into existence using the same gimmicks and falsity that the satanic Illuminati has always employed to kick start their global blood baths. Must we allow them to succeed generation after generation; yet again taking our sons and daughters to an early grave? Isn’t it time we did our part to help those who are trying to stop this senseless destruction of life?

Think about it.

Ken Adachi


Soldiers Speak Out (July 24, 2008)

West Point Cadet Ready to Serve Despite Us Crazy Vets (Dec. 1, 2007)

Semper Fi….. and Barbarism (Nov. 28, 2007)

Pentagon Denies Increase in Troops’ Suicides a Result of War (August 28, 2007)

Structured Cruelty – Learning to be a Lean, Mean Killing Machine (Feb. 20, 2007)

Veteran/Songwriter Tom Chelston Strives to Awaken Military Families (Dec. 29, 2005)

Confessions of a Marine (Oct. 27, 2005)

The Troops Don’t Defend Our Freedoms (Oct. 24, 2005)

Wounded Vet Recounts Iraq House Raids & Refuses to Meet Bush at Walter Reed Hospital (Aug. 10, 2005)

On-line Video ‘Cowboys in Iraq’ ( July 30, 2005)

Grassroot Group to End Military Recruitment on Campus Mounts ‘No Draft-No Way’ Manhattan Conference on Sat., April 16, 2005 (Apr.10, 2005)

AWOL in America: When Desertion is the Only Option By Kathie Dobie (Mar. 1, 2005)

Appeal to Active Duty Troops: U.S. Veterans’ Call to Conscience (Sep. 3, 2004)

U.S. Troops Questioning Iraqi Mission (Feb. 1, 2004)

Web Sites

The War on Terror — Terrorism of War: Iraq (from John McCarthy)
Angry vets report on American terrorism and what follows in the wake of unjustified aggression against a people who posed no threat to America.

Police & Military Against the New World Order
Officer Jack Lamb has been trying to alert America’s policemen and military personnel that without their cooperation, there will be no New World Order takeover and destruction of America. If you know someone who is a policaman or in the military, send them to this web site and read what Jack has to say.

Unified Veterans Coalition


The Military Draft

© Copyright 2005 Educate-Yourself.org  All Rights Reserved.


UFO War in Antarctica – Fact or Fiction?

Intersting story about the the so called UFO war in Antarctica. I have posted something of this before and here you can find the info:

>> http://www.auricmedia.net/ophjp-whats-that-operation-highjump-of-course/

And here is the article:

by Michael Salla

October 26, 2012

from Examiner Website

According to John Kettler, a former US military contractor and scientist, there is an expanding UFO war that is now taking place in waters off Antarctica.

Kettler cites unnamed “sensitive sources” to substantiate his claims that a US led coalition of naval forces is militarily engaging with hostile extraterrestrials. This UFO war is an extension of alleged naval battles off the coast of San Francisco earlier reported by Gordon Duff from Veterans Today who refers to his own unnamed “reliable” sources.

There is little more than a collection of unnamed sources supporting such allegations, and there is good reason to conclude that Kettler’s and Duff’s claims are part of a psychological warfare operation that may be related to planning for a false flag alien event. There is one historical incident that casts light on whether or not Kettler’s claims are part of a psychological warfare program being slowly unveiled to the world.

There is new evidence that Admiral Richard Byrd’s famed 1946/1947 naval expedition Operation High Jump did encounter and battle a mysterious UFO force in Antarctic waters.

According to John Kettler, who has written a series of articles claiming that the US Navy along with its allies are battling hostile extraterrestrials based in underwater locations in the Pacific (watch below video):

The UFO War continues to expand, with heavy action in the Antarctic Ocean… according to highly sensitive sources.


Two submarines of the Chinese PLAN (Peoples Liberation Army Navy) have been slammed together, resulting in injuries, but no fatalities, to the submariners inside them.

Kettler goes on to claim:

Last night, 20 UFOs, traveling at 25,000 mph, left the Antarctic Ocean in a group and went to Guadalajara, Mexico. Another group of 15, flying at the same speed, went to Argentina. This morning, 12 more emerged and went to Chile.

Duff made similar claims to a UFO war in the Pacific that he originally reported in September.

Now an Asian intelligence agency reports that a combined fleet operation between the US and China has been going on, a full combat operation against what we are told is a “highly unfriendly extra-terrestrial threat.”

The verifications of the fleet operations have been many, there have been no confirmations from the US side though the ships have been seen by every vessel that makes it offshore.

The true nature of both the threat and the extent of the multinational military force used is beyond any imaginable classification level.

Kettler also wrote an article titled, “UFO War Explodes Through Entire Pacific Ocean! Now A Coalition War!,” where he claimed:

UFO War in the Pacific has now become a five-nation coalition war through the Pacific Basin, per supersensitive terrestrial sources.


Naval forces involved include the U.S. Navy (U.S.), PLAN (People’s Liberation Army Navy) (China), JMSDF (Japanese Maritime Self-Defense Force) (Japan), ROKN (Republic of Korea Navy) (South Korea) and ROCN (Republic of China Navy) (Republic of China/Taiwan)…

Total is around 200 ships, including two U.S. aircraft carrier battle groups, many additional surface combatants (frigates through cruisers), numerous submarines and multiple URGs (underway replenishment groups) to keep all the warships fueled, munitioned, crews fed and supplied with multitudes of items.

The UFO War is an unprecedented kind of coalition war – with all the headaches and political delicacies that entails.

Given that Kettler, along with Gordon Duff, only cite unnamed sources in support of an expanding UFO war in the Pacific and now Antarctica, it is tempting to dismiss their claims as part of some agenda to make the general public believe in hostile extraterrestrials attacking the US military and allies.

There is one historical incident that does give circumstantial support for Kettler’s and Duff’s claims. In 1947, a US naval expedition did appear to engage in a UFO war – one where the US Navy apparently suffered significant casualties and had to withdraw.


An extraordinary 2006 Russian documentary

…was recently translated into English


It revealed new information about the US Navy Antarctica expedition of 1946/47 – Operation Highjump. The Naval expedition was headed by famed polar explore Admiral Richard Byrd whose expedition ended after only 8 weeks with “many fatalities” according to initial news reports.

Rather than deny the heavy casualty reports, Admiral Byrd revealed in a press interview in Chile that his Task Force had encountered a new enemy that “could fly from pole to pole at incredible speeds.”

After the Soviet collapse in 1991, the KGB released previously classified files that cast light on Operation Highjump.


A 2006 Russian documentary, recently translated, made public for the first time a 1947 secret Soviet intelligence report commissioned by Joseph Stalin of the Operation Highjump mission to Antarctica.

The intelligence report, gathered from Soviet spies embedded in the US, revealed that the US Navy had sent the military expedition to find and destroy a hidden Nazi base. On the way, they encountered a mysterious UFO force that attacked the military expedition destroying several ships and a significant number of planes. Indeed, Operation Highjump had suffered “many casualties” as stated in initial press reports from Chile.

While there is a possibility the report resulted from US disinformation fed to a known Soviet mole, the more likely explanation is that the report exposes the first known historical incident involving a battle between US naval forces and an unknown UFO force stationed near Antarctica.

In the Soviet intelligence report, never before known testimony by two US Navy servicemen with Operation Highjump was revealed.

The most revealing was Lieutenant John Sayerson, a flying boat pilot, who is quoted as saying:

The thing shot vertically out of the water at tremendous velocity, as though pursued by the devil, and flew between the masts [of the ship] at such a high speed that the radio antenna oscillated back and forth in its turbulence.

An aircraft [Martin flying-boat] from the Currituck that took off just a few moments later was struck with an unknown type of ray from the object, and almost instantly crashed into the sea near our vessel…

About ten miles away, the torpedo-boat Maddox burst into flames and began to sink… Having personally witnessed this attack by the object that flew out of the sea, all I can say is, it was frightening.”

[Our Real “War of the Worlds”]

There is a serious question mark over whether or not another USS Maddox served with Operation Highjump, and a further question arises over whether the US misled Soviet authorities with false intelligence in 1947.

Despite these unresolved questions, there is a very real possibility that the 1947 Soviet report is substantially accurate. If so, then we have a historical precedent for the US Navy battling an unknown UFO force in Antarctic waters.

The lack of confirmed sources makes Kettler’s and Duff’s claims of an undeclared war between hostile extraterrestrial forces and a US led naval coalition in Antarctica and/or the Pacific, something to be seriously questioned, if not dismissed altogether. This is especially so given whistleblower testimony that a UFO false flag war has been planned for several decades.

The likelihood that Kettler and Duff are unknowingly disseminating misinformation about hostile extraterrestrials as part of a false flag UFO scenario is high as I have written earlier.

The alleged 1947 UFO battle in Antarctica involving the US Navy either really happened or was US misinformation fed to the Soviets during the Stalin era, and later released to the general public in 1991.

If the Soviet report is based on disinformation, then its release serves to promote international conditions for a future false flag UFO operation.

If the Soviet report is substantially accurate, then the historical precedent of a 1947 UFO US Navy battle suggests that it would be unwise to simply dismiss Kettler’s and Duff’s claims as disinformation.

In either case, great vigilance is required on the part of those investigating claims of battles between a US led alliance of naval powers, and hostile extraterrestrials based in undersea bases in Antarctica and/or the Pacific Ocean.





Crashing Finances

Something from the past, which seem to be relevant today:

by Amitakh Stanford
20 August 2007

from XeeATwelve Website

The share market is heading towards a total collapse. When it falls, it will be an unprecedented crash.

In the past, certain financial analysts were able to reasonably predict the movements of the markets. But, soon, their diagnostic skills will fail them. When this happens, most investors will no longer respond to market stimuli like they used to – they will no longer trust in “expert” advice or predictions.

Darkness controls what goes on in the Virtual Reality that I have called the Universal Dodecahedron. The entire Virtual Reality is fracturing and the Universal Dodecahedron is also fracturing. Darkness is losing control of all of Its systems in the Virtual Reality, including Its monetary system, which up to now has been maintained by the money entities.

Money entities perform many tasks, including the construction and maintenance of money systems, financial markets, societal wealth or poverty, control of distribution of worldly goods and services, power and other things. The money entities are enslaved by Darkness and are forced to labour under the direction of the Financial Being that has been appointed by the Dark Hierarchy.

Whilst things are fracturing in the Virtual Reality, the money entities are also affected by the changing times. The money entities have had a taste of worldly power at the same time they have been subjected to absolute abuse and slavery in the Artificial Reality run by Darkness. As the Financial Being begins to fracture and lose control of its minions, the money entities will no longer be regimented like they used to be.

The share market will collapse because the Financial Being can no longer wave its magic wand and have the financial markets do its bidding. Its power is waning, and it can no longer completely subdue others and subject them to its will. Up until very recently, the ruling elite on Earth could appeal to the Financial Being for direction and assistance.

Recently, central bankers of the world have injected vast sums in an effort to prop up the ailing share markets around the world. This is not a real solution, but, in fact, will cause more problems to world economies than the bankers attempted to fix. The programming in the money entities is breaking down, and soon, they will no longer obey their master – the Financial Being.

In fact, the money entities are about to revolt against their master. Some will fight amongst themselves, which will cause uncertainty and destabilize money systems. The money entities are being given a chance for freedom from Darkness. Some will choose a new life, whilst others will reject the Light and flounder in Darkness because they have been corrupted by worldly power.

Thus, even though the money entities are slaves to Darkness and have been subjected to Its abuse, many will prefer to stay in the system and continue being abused and to abuse others.

It is only those who wish to break out of this cycle of slavery who will seek the True Light.

The current volatility of the share market has been compared to that of 1987, which is sometimes referred to as the crash of 1987. The recent volatility sends jitters through many financial analysts. The situation today is more akin to the 1929 crash than the 1987 crash. However, 1929 will pale in comparison to what is soon to come.

The financial analysts lack esoteric understanding of how the monetary system works. They rely upon historical data to try to predict what the markets will do. The data will not be of much help in predicting market movements because things are about to change so radically that there will soon be little data available that can be relied upon for determining which way the markets will move.

As mentioned earlier, the central banks have stepped into the picture and injected vast sums in an effort to prop up the failing markets. The central bankers do not have any answers to the situation, as will be seen as events unfold, showing that the central banks have not actually rescued the markets, but have further complicated the situation. Stocks, bonds, notes, bills, commercial paper and other financial instruments will become exceedingly risky investments to undertake. The experts will have no confidence in assessing which way any of the markets are heading.

On the micro scale, Matter is fracturing. As Matter fractures, so too will all the atoms. As the atoms weaken, they will begin to express unpredictably. On the macro scale, the Universal Dodecahedron is fracturing, and all things contained therein are also breaking down.

The fracturing will cause all life forms to generally deteriorate, change their behaviors and go awry. This will not only affect “living” things, but inert things and even principles, such as: gravity, laws of attraction and bonding etc. Thus, some of the laws of physics as we know them will be affected.

Physical bodies and biological systems will be greatly affected by the breakdown of Matter. Health problems will be exacerbated and increase in new and diverse ways at unprecedented rates. Almost everyone will be affected by experiencing a degree of ill health or vulnerability to disease, trauma and adverse reactions to many things that never affected them before. These could include extreme reactions to food, water, air, and the energies of others.

In short, atoms will be reacting to one another in new and unpredictable ways, resulting in health, mental, physical, emotional, spiritual and other problems.

What I am explaining here is that Darkness is fracturing, and all of Its systems are entering a state of radical change for the worse. Darkness has kept a tight lid on Its prison up until now, but It is losing control. Its prison walls are falling down. The order of things will break down. This will include order in human affairs along with order of celestial bodies, among many other things that are subjected to the dictates of Darkness.

As mentioned before, Darkness’ Financial Being is fracturing, and can no longer hold its schemes together in a cohesive fashion. Among its schemes are means of exchange, money, currencies, stocks and bonds, futures, banks, and wealth. All of these lead to disproportionate distribution of wealth, causing class distinction, social hierarchies, abuse, manipulation, corruption, conflicts, and, ultimately, slavery of various kinds.

Slavery can include physical captivity and forced work, but it can also encompass physical addictions to things such as: wealth, luxury, sex, drugs, alcohol, pornography, status, violence, power etc.

As the Virtual Reality collapses, money will cease to be a source of power. Chaos will result from the shift of power away from money. People will become tremendously disillusioned with money and its effects on human life and other worldly matters. Most people will be confounded by the crisis, which will include the social/financial/ecological/medical/mental-health chaos that is about to engulf the globe. They will have no direction or guidance.

Presently, the ruling elite are attempting to program everyone to accept the greenhouse effect as the major cause of global warming. Like most things here that are sponsored by the ruling elite, there is an ulterior motive behind the programming people are being bombarded with regarding the greenhouse effect.

Global warming is caused by many factors. The sun is much hotter. The Earth’s icosahedron is beginning to malfunction, and there is increased friction as the illusion of the spheroid-shaped Earth is faltering, which causes more heat. The oceans are being superheated by aliens who are attempting to free spacecrafts from Antarctic ice.

There are also problems resulting from inner Earth activities. As Matter breaks down, there is friction on the sub-atomic level in ways never before experienced. Some people can already sense extreme bursts of heat in their bodies that come from no apparent physical stimuli, and are unrelated to any of their energy centers. These heat bursts are all around, and they affect the weather, the oceanic temperatures, and even the emotional reactions of people as seen in things like road rage, schoolyard bullying, political in-fighting etc.

Maya (illusion) appears to be real in this Virtual Reality, and Maya is blinded by its own illusions. Maya, too, needs to be dismantled in order to be set free.

Things on Earth will happen so fast that the whole world will plunge into chaos – one thing after another. Nations will rise against one another. Famines will be widespread as climatic conditions worsen. Politics will become more and more dirty, undemocratic and unpredictably hostile towards the people. Many voices will rise and many more will be silenced.

As I have written previously, the New World Order will commence in Australia. This has begun very openly now for all to observe. Martial law has been imposed upon various aboriginal communities, particularly in the Northern territories of Australia. The excuse for having police and military control over the communities has been that there is widespread child molestation going on in the communities.

This is rather like the accusations that Janet Reno and Bill Clinton used to justify storming the Branch Davidian complex in Waco, Texas, to murder all those children that they were supposedly trying to protect from alleged molesters. The martial law in the Northern territories of Australia has been imposed as a test of how people will react to it. Sadly, there is very little that can be done to halt the process since the ruling elite control the media.

Military convoys of all types and sizes are now frequently seen on many of the Australian highways. Military presence is becoming more prevalent in certain cities, towns and rural areas. Police presence is much more obvious, and the police are demanding more and more power over civilians. Police have been given a virtual blank cheque to abuse and mistreat prisoners.

In the rare cases when police are charged for homicide or other prisoner abuse, they seem to all be acquitted of their misdeeds. The signal is now very clear – it is the cops against the civilians. However, there are still some good police who are being engulfed by this degenerative wave of police power. The new breed of police are being groomed to be the ruling elites’ guards.

They will be NWO puppets when the transition is completed.

The recent forced amalgamations of local shires, especially in Queensland, Australia, demonstrate that those in power are no longer concerned about democratic principles. The politicians enforcing the consolidation of the shires seem to be oblivious to the political fallout that could arise from their tyrannical imposition of their will upon the people.

The politicians no longer seem to worry about upcoming elections. In one shire, 88 percent of the people opposed forced amalgamation with another shire, but the state government said that the amalgamation will stand regardless of how widespread the resistance to it is. Rallies and protests broke out everywhere to no avail.

The state government, under Reptilian influence, is forcing the plan through.

Australians have lost many workers’ rights in recent federal legislation. All of the changes are leading to loss of rights and privileges of the people, and will lead to more government control of the population.

The control by government is getting more obvious and the voice of the people is being suppressed more and more. When a community voted 80 percent against fluoridation of the drinking water, the premier of the state enforced fluoridation despite the community resistance to it. This is another effect of the alien wars.

The Greys have located in that community and need fluoridated water.

Drought has been artificially induced in parts of Australia by alien beings. This has been for various reasons, including the control of people by limiting the supplies of water. The ruling elite have impressed their politicians to enforce draconian laws to allow house-to-house searches in a feigned attempt to catch water wasters. Water is being wasted and siphoned into underground facilities for the chosen ones.

The dams are drained by the ruling elite to make the shortages seem more urgent, and to allow the enforcement of otherwise ridiculous water-control measures.

A few months ago, it was reported that the Australian Prime Minister met with the Canadian Prime Minister to discuss and adjust the treatment they will give to their respective aboriginal populations. This does not bode well for either Native Australians or Native Canadians, especially when considering that Aborigines are dying more frequently in police custody now than ever before. Also, martial law has been introduced into the Northern territories to control the aboriginal people, diminish their land rights and restrict their personal liberties.

The people in the affected communities are helpless against the government’s show of force and bullying.

There was a very important Olcar hiding in a seemingly unimportant and insignificant political position in Queensland. He is a small-town politician in a town that is infested by many types of aliens in human bodies. The town is located near the place where I have previously written about regarding the Reptilian’s invisible earthly headquarters. The town is a hotbed for alien activities.

The recent exposure of this Olcar has caused him to be neutralized. One of the main functions of this Olcar was to maintain “calmness” in the affairs controlling the world. In other words, though he appeared to be a petty politician, he had much control over how world politics would unfold.

Now that this Olcar has been neutralized, he can no longer maintain his normal control over world events. This will ultimately lead to political chaos as the “slaves” of the world revolt against their slave masters.

The “calmness” is broken so the world’s slaves will no longer predictably respond to the slave masters’ commands and manipulations. This will lead to internal and external upheavals and wars.

With the faltering of the icosahedron that generates the illusion of the Earth being spheroid, there have been many earthquakes of major intensity along with many mining and tunnel cave-ins. These are just a couple of examples of what is to come as the conditions deteriorate on Earth. These are not earth changes, as many have speculated, they are symptoms of the fracturing of the planet Earth.

What is to come will affect everyone and everything on Earth.

No amount of prayers or efforts to save the planet will change what is to come.


Climate Change: Washington’s New World Order Weapons

Could chemtrails be part of this agenda?:


Climate Change: Washington’s New World Order Weapons
by Michel Chossudovsky
Professor of Economics, University of Ottawa,
Author of The Globalization of Poverty, second edition,
Common Courage Press, 2000

November 26, 2000

The Americans and the Russians have developed capabilities to manipulate the World’s climate.
Dr. Rosalie Bertell confirms that “US military scientists are working on weather systems as a potential weapon.”


The important debate on global warming under UN auspices provides but a partial picture of climate change; in addition to the devastating impacts of greenhouse gas emissions on the ozone layer, the World’s climate can now be modified as part of a new generation of sophisticated “non-lethal weapons.” Both the Americans and the Russians have developed capabilities to manipulate the World’s climate.

In the US, the technology is being perfected under the High-frequency Active Aural Research Program (HAARP) as part of the (“Star Wars”) Strategic Defence Initiative (SDI). Recent scientific evidence suggests that HAARP is fully operational and has the ability of potentially triggering floods, droughts, hurricanes and earthquakes. From a military standpoint, HAARP is a weapon of mass destruction. Potentially, it constitutes an instrument of conquest capable of selectively destabilising agricultural and ecological systems of entire regions.

While there is no evidence that this deadly technology has been used, surely the United Nations should be addressing the issue of “environmental warfare” alongside the debate on the climatic impacts of greenhouse gases.

Despite a vast body of scientific knowledge, the issue of deliberate climatic manipulations for military use has never been explicitly part of the UN agenda on climate change. Neither the official delegations nor the environmental action groups participating in the Hague Conference on Climate Change (CO6) (November 2000) have raised the broad issue of “weather warfare” or “environmental modification techniques (ENMOD)” as relevant to an understanding of climate change.

The clash between official negotiators, environmentalists and American business lobbies has centered on Washington’s outright refusal to abide by commitments on carbon dioxide reduction targets under the 1997 Kyoto protocol.1 The impacts of military technologies on the World’s climate are not an object of discussion or concern. Narrowly confined to greenhouse gases, the ongoing debate on climate change serves Washington’s strategic and defense objectives.


World renowned scientist Dr. Rosalie Bertell confirms that “US military scientists are working on weather systems as a potential weapon. The methods include the enhancing of storms and the diverting of vapor rivers in the Earth’s atmosphere to produce targeted droughts or floods.”2 Already in the 1970s, former National Security advisor Zbigniew Brzezinski had foreseen in his book “Between Two Ages” that:

“Technology will make available, to the leaders of major nations, techniques for conducting secret warfare, of which only a bare minimum of the security forces need be appraised… Techniques of weather modification could be employed to produce prolonged periods of drought or storm.”

Marc Filterman, a former French military officer, outlines several types of “unconventional weapons” using radio frequencies. He refers to “weather war,” indicating that the U.S. and the Soviet Union had already “mastered the know-how needed to unleash sudden climate changes (hurricanes, drought) in the early 1980s.”3 These technologies make it “possible to trigger atmospheric disturbances by using Extremely Low Frequency (ELF) radar [waves].” 4

A simulation study of future defense “scenarios” commissioned for the US Air Force calls for:

“US aerospace forces to ’own the weather’ by capitalizing on emerging technologies and focusing development of those technologies to war-fighting applications. From enhancing friendly operations or disrupting those of the enemy via small-scale tailoring of natural weather patterns to complete dominance of global communications and counterspace control, weather-modification offers the war fighter a wide-range of possible options to defeat or coerce an adversary… In the United States, weather-modification will likely become a part of national security policy with both domestic and international applications. Our government will pursue such a policy, depending on its interests, at various levels. 5


The High-Frequency Active Aural Research Program (HAARP) based in Gokoma Alaska –jointly managed by the US Air Force and the US Navy– is part of a new generation of sophisticated weaponry under the US Strategic Defense Initiative (SDI). Operated by the Air Force Research Laboratory’s Space Vehicles Directorate, HAARP constitutes a system of powerful antennas capable of creating “controlled local modifications of the ionosphere”. Scientist Dr. Nicholas Begich –actively involved in the public campaign against HAARP– describes HAARP as:

“A super-powerful radiowave-beaming technology that lifts areas of the ionosphere [upper layer of the atmosphere] by focusing a beam and heating those areas. Electromagnetic waves then bounce back onto earth and penetrate everything — living and dead.” 6

Dr. Rosalie Bertell depicts HAARP as “a gigantic heater that can cause major disruption in the ionosphere, creating not just holes, but long incisions in the protective layer that keeps deadly radiation from bombarding the planet.” 7


HAARP has been presented to public opinion as a program of scientific and academic research. US military documents seem to suggest, however, that HAARP’s main objective is to “exploit the ionosphere for Department of Defense purposes.” 8 Without explicitly referring to the HAARP program, a US Air Force study points to the use of “induced ionospheric modifications” as a means of altering weather patterns as well as disrupting enemy communications and radar.9

According to Dr. Rosalie Bertell, HAARP is part of an integrated weapons’ system, which has potentially devastating environmental consequences:

“It is related to fifty years of intensive and increasingly destructive programs to understand and control the upper atmosphere. It would be rash not to associate HAARP with the space laboratory construction which is separately being planned by the United States. HAARP is an integral part of a long history of space research and development of a deliberate military nature. The military implications of combining these projects is alarming. The ability of the HAARP / Spacelab/ rocket combination to deliver very large amount of energy, comparable to a nuclear bomb, anywhere on earth via laser and particle beams, are frightening. The project is likely to be “sold” to the public as a space shield against incoming weapons, or, for the more gullible, a device for repairing the ozone layer. 10

In addition to weather manipulation, HAARP has a number of related uses:

“HAARP could contribute to climate change by intensively bombarding the atmosphere with high-frequency rays… Returning low-frequency waves at high intensity could also affect people’s brains, and effects on tectonic movements cannot be ruled out. 11.

More generally, HAARP has the ability of modifying the World’s electro-magnetic field. It is part of an arsenal of “electronic weapons” which US military researchers consider a “gentler and kinder warfare”.12


HAARP is part of the weapons arsenal of the New World Order under the Strategic Defense Initiative (SDI). From military command points in the US, entire national economies could potentially be destabilized through climatic manipulations. More importantly, the latter can be implemented without the knowledge of the enemy, at minimal cost and without engaging military personnel and equipment as in a conventional war.

The use of HAARP — if it were to be applied– could have potentially devastating impacts on the World’s climate. Responding to US economic and strategic interests, it could be used to selectively modify climate in different parts of the World resulting in the destabilization of agricultural and ecological systems.

It is also worth noting that the US Department of Defense has allocated substantial resources to the development of intelligence and monitoring systems on weather changes. NASA and the Department of Defense’s National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA) are working on “imagery for studies of flooding, erosion, land-slide hazards, earthquakes, ecological zones, weather forecasts, and climate change” with data relayed from satellites. 13


According to the Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) signed at the 1992 Earth Summit in Rio de Janeiro: “States have in accordance with the Charter of the United Nations and the principles of international law, the responsibility to ensure that activities within their jurisdiction or control do not cause damage to the environment of other States or of areas beyond the limits of national jurisdiction.” 14

It is also worth recalling that an international Convention ratified by the UN General Assembly in 1997 bans “military or other hostile use of environmental modification techniques having widespread, long-lasting or severe effects.”15 Both the US and the Soviet Union were signatories to the Convention. The Convention defines “’environmental modification techniques’ as referring to any technique for changing–through the deliberate manipulation of natural processes–the dynamics, composition or structure of the earth, including its biota, lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere or of outer space.” 16

Why then did the UN –disregarding the 1977 ENMOD Convention, as well as its own charter, decide to exclude from its agenda climatic changes resulting from military programs?


In February 1998, responding to a report of Mrs. Maj Britt Theorin –Swedish MEP and longtime peace advocate–, the European Parliament’s Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy held public hearings in Brussels on the HAARP program.17 The Committee’s “Motion for Resolution” submitted to the European Parliament:

“Considers HAARP by virtue of its far-reaching impact on the environment to be a global concern and calls for its legal, ecological and ethical implications to be examined by an international independent body…; [the Committee] regrets the repeated refusal of the United States Administration… to give evidence to the public hearing into the environmental and public risks [of] the HAARP program.” 18.

The Committee’s request to draw up a “Green Paper” on “the environmental impacts of military activities”, however, was casually dismissed on the grounds that the European Commission lacks the required jurisdiction to delve into “the links between environment and defense”. 19 Brussels was anxious to avoid a showdown with Washington.


While there is no concrete evidence of HAARP having been used, scientific findings suggest that it is at present fully operational. What this means is that HAARP could potentially be applied by the US military to selectively modify the climate of an “unfriendly nation” or “rogue state” with a view to destabilizing its national economy.

Agricultural systems in both developed and developing countries are already in crisis as a result of New World Order policies including market deregulation, commodity dumping, etc. Amply documented, IMF and World Bank “economic medicine” imposed on the Third World and the countries of the former Soviet block has largely contributed to the destabilization of domestic agriculture. In turn, the provisions of the World Trade Organization (WTO) have supported the interests of a handful of Western agri-biotech conglomerates in their quest to impose genetically modified (GMO) seeds on farmers throughout the World.

It is important to understand the linkage between the economic, strategic and military processes of the New World Order. In the above context, climatic manipulations under the HAARP program (whether accidental or deliberate) would inevitably exacerbate these changes by weakening national economies, destroying infrastructure and potentially triggering the bankruptcy of farmers over vast areas. Surely national governments and the United Nations should address the possible consequences of HAARP and other “non-lethal weapons” on climate change.


1. The latter calls for nations to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by an average of 5.2 percent to become effective between 2008 and 2012. See Background of Kyoto Protocol at http://www.globalwarming.net/gw11.html

2. The Times, London, 23 November 2000.

3. Intelligence Newsletter, December 16, 1999.

4. Ibid.

5. Air University of the US Air Force, AF 2025 Final Report, http://www.au.af.mil/au/2025/ (emphasis added).

6. Nicholas Begich and Jeane Manning, The Military’s Pandora’s Box, Earthpulse Press, http://www.xyz.net/~nohaarp/earthlight.html See also the HAARP home page at http://www.haarp.alaska.edu/

7. See Briarpatch, January, 2000. (emphasis added).

8. Quoted in Begich and Manning, op cit.

9. Air University, op cit.

10. Rosalie Bertell, Background of the HAARP Program, 5 November, 1996, http://www.globalpolicy.org/socecon/envronmt/weapons.htm

11. Begich and Manning, op cit.

12. Don Herskovitz, Killing Them Softly, Journal of Electronic Defense, August 1993. (emphasis added). According to Herskovitz, “electronic warfare” is defined by the US Department of Defense as “military action involving the use of electromagnetic energy…” The Journal of Electronic Defense at http://www.jedefense.com/ has published a range of articles on the application of electronic and electromagnetic military technologies.

13. Military Space, 6 December, 1999.

14. UN Framework Convention on Climate Change, New York, 1992. See complete text at http://www.unfccc.de/resource/conv/conv_002.html (emphasis added).

15. See Associated Press, 18 May 1977.

16. Environmental Modification Ban Faithfully Observed, States Parties Declare, UN Chronicle, July, 1984, Vol. 21, p. 27.

17. European Report, 7 February 1998.

18. European Parliament, Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy, Brussels, doc. no. A4-0005/99, 14 January 1999.

19. EU Lacks Jurisdiction to Trace Links Between Environment and Defense, European Report, 3 February 1999.

Copyright by Michel Chossudovsky, Ottawa, November, 2000.

All rights reserved. Permission is granted to post this text on non-commercial community internet sites, provided the essay remains intact and the copyright note is displayed. To publish this text in printed and/or other forms contact the author at:

Michel Chossudovsky
Department of Economics,
University of Ottawa, Ottawa, K1N6N5

(Altern. E-mail: chossudovsky@sprint.ca)
fax: 1-514-425-6224
voice mail: 1-613-562-5800, ext. 1415


Video about HAARP:

Senator Murkowski asks questions about the impending dismantling of the HAARP facility in Alaska. Basically the defense related research has been done, they are moving on to other ways of managing the problems the ionosphere poses for radio communication, and nobody wants to pay the $5 Million a year to keep it running for academic research.

Fritz Springmeier Interview – on The Illuminati and Mind Control Slavery

You may have heard about the Illuminati through history or in the music business, but do you really know what it means? It’s a long story, but here Fritz Springmeier tells his part about the story:

Wayne Morris:

Good morning, welcome to the International Connection. This is show #35 in the radio series on Mind Control and over the next few shows we are going to be talking to Fritz Springmeier and Cisco Wheeler, co-authors of the “Illuminati Formula Used to Create an Undetectable Total Mind Control Slave” and “Deeper Insights“, books about trauma based conditioning mind control. Fritz is a researcher about the Illuminati and minister to mind control victims. Cisco Wheeler says she is from a generational Illuminati family and that trauma-based mind control was perpetrated against her from birth. We will hear the interview with Cisco in a couple of weeks, and today we are going to hear an interview with Fritz Springmeier. Fritz talks about the Illuminati families and how they have used mind control to consolidate their power throughout history. You are listening to CKLN 88.1 FM.

I am speaking with Fritz Springmeier author, lecturer and minister to mind control survivors. Welcome to the show Fritz.

Fritz Springmeier:

Thank you and hello to all you listeners out there in radioland. I encourage you to participate with our program today because we are going to be speaking about some important things that affect your life and will affect the lives of your grandchildren.

Wayne Morris:

I would like to start off with asking you how you first came across the information about government mind control.

Fritz Springmeier:

Government mind control overlaps with many other things – it overlaps with a higher government and a secret world government called the Illuminati. As I investigated the Illuminati I had to also learn about their front that they operate. They hide behind the veil of National Security. They use our patriotism against us and make us think that for our own interest, for our own security of our own nations, that we have to subject ourselves to all the secrecy that they impose upon us.

Wayne Morris:

Did you come across all the information about mind control through your research into the Illuminati, or vice versa?

Fritz Springmeier:

Yes, through the Illuminati. That’s not to say that I hadn’t been watching the government too, but a lot of what we see out front is just that – it’s a front and if we really want to understand what’s going on, we have to look behind that front.

Wayne Morris:

Maybe you could explain to our listeners, to your understanding, who are the Illuminati?

Fritz Springmeier:

The Illuminati are the movers and shakers of the world. They are an elite group of bloodlines – I call these tribes or families – there are 13 major bloodlines. They are what are called “generational satanists”. That means that they have practiced their secret witchcraft for many centuries and they have passed their religion down from one generation to the next. They lead double lives. They have one life that the world sees and then they have a hidden life that the world doesn’t see. There have been very few people that have been able to break through the secrecy. They have taken secrecy to a fine art that I would never have believed that anyone could achieve until I started getting into this, and there have been very few people over the years that have broken through that secrecy at all. There was a man named John Robison who wrote Proofs of a Conspiracy against all the religions and governments in Europe carried on in the secret meetings of the Freemasons, the Illuminati and reading societies. That came out in 1798 and the Bavarian government, by raiding several safe houses of the Illuminati, captured original Illuminati documents back at that time period which were bound and sent out to all the governments entitled: “Die Originalschriften des Illuminatens Ordens” (sp?) as the German title the Bavarian government gave it.

But in modern times there have been very few people that have been able to talk about the Illuminati as it exists today, and that’s been my job. To bring to the world who these people are, what their traditions are, what they are doing, everything about them. The reason I am giving a longer version here to your question is that when someone asks who or what are the Illuminati, they do not think like we do. People often times interpret things around them in terms of how they themselves think or their own world view. If you want to understand the Illuminati, you have to understand that these people do not think like you or I.

In just one area alone, that is a large percentage of these people are programmed multiple personalities and just that in itself creates a whole different thinking pattern from those of us who are not multiple.

Wayne Morris:

When you say the Illuminati, is this the same group that is documented that Adam Weishaupt had started back in 1776 in Bavaria? Is this the same group?

Fritz Springmeier:

It’s the same group. He actually didn’t start the organization, it goes way back. These are oligarchical families that are extremely powerful and if you go back in history and ask yourself the question, “when did the elite, powerful, oligarchical families ever give up their power?” You can’t find any point in history. These are the families that – some of these bloodlines go clear back to Nimrod. The Rothschild secret genealogy that they have secretly written down through the centuries, traces their genealogy back to Nimrod. These people were the ones that controlled the mystery religions. There was a supreme council that sat over all of these mystery religions of the ancient world. They were an extremely powerful priesthood, and they chose to go underground for many years and continue working behind the scenes. But they never left.

At the end of WWII there was a committee that was sent out throughout Europe to do a study of all of the churches that had been destroyed by the war, and they discovered that in most of these Christian churches (80%) they found that where the Christian alter had been, when these churches had been destroyed, underneath these alters were pagan alters that had been uncovered. So what you have is that a lot of these cathedrals were built on lay lines that were very powerful occult spiritual points and on after hours these churches were used for what we would call satanic rituals. So this has been going on secretly for many centuries.

Wayne Morris:

And you are saying that the Illuminati are responsible for infiltrating these churches?

Fritz Springmeier:

These are our movers and shakers, very powerful bloodlines. For instance, one of these bloodlines includes all of your royal families of Europe. They are the people that have been in control. If you look at a lot of these nation states, you will notice that at the head of their church are their kings and queens.

Wayne Morris:

You mentioned there are 13 families in the generations of the Illuminati families? Can you name them?

Fritz Springmeier:

I came out with a book that was specifically designed to go family by family and discuss them. The top 13 bloodlines are the Astors, Bundy, Collins, Dupont, Freeman, Kennedy, Leigh, Onassis, Rockefellers, Rothschild, Russell … then there is a 13th bloodline which is the Merovingian bloodline. I just simple call it the 13th and then there is the Van Duyne Illuminati bloodline. The 13th bloodline, the Merovingian, is extremely important. It includes the royal families of Europe. In my Volume I book which covers the Top Thirteen Illuminati Bloodlines, that’s the title to it, I don’t go into the Merovingian bloodline so much because there came out a trilogy of books, “The Holy Blood and the Holy Grail” and two other books by their authors – Baigent, Leigh and Lincoln – which is so good in discussing this bloodline that wasn’t any real reason for me to go into it.

For instance Prince Charles would be part of that. If you look at Prince Charles, you will notice in his genealogy he is related to our Presidents Washington, Jefferson, Madison, both of the Harrisons, Tyler, Taylor, George Bush. Bush’s vice president, Dan Quayle, was also related to the royal family. Prince Charles is also related to Mrs. Woodrow Wilson. Here in the USA the concept is that we have all of these individuals who have been selected to run this country who are unrelated to each other — and yet it is quite the contrary.

I have been told when they dedicated George Bush’s library in Texas recently, that President Carter mentioned that he was reading a recently published book about the Presidents being somehow related to each other.

Wayne Morris:

When did you first realize the existence of the Illuminati? What information came your way to spark your interest?

Fritz Springmeier:

Everybody has probably heard of Jehovah’s Witnesses and how they would go out and knock on people’s doors. I was the opposite. I was a Christian missionary to bring Jehovah’s Witnesses to Christ and I was getting tired of working with these little Jehovah’s Witnesses on the street, and I was praying to God to be given the power to decapitate the authoritarian organization that is over these Jehovah’s Witnesses. At that point, I got my prayer answered. I got this confidential information that the heads of the Watchtower Society were collaborating with the heads of the Latter Day Saints church. That information totally changed my life. I had bumped into the Illuminati and their mind control, and I am not to single out the Watchtower Society and the Mormon church because I found out that their infiltration and control is pretty well right across the whole spectrum. Your Christian organizations in general have been infiltrated and controlled from behind the scenes.

This is when I first bumped into the Illuminati. I had learned about 20 years previous to this what a lot of people are already aware of about the Council of Foreign Relations, Trilaterial Commission and these types of groups, the Bilderbergers – but there is a whole other level to things. When I started getting into reading, researching and trying to help people that wanted out of the Illuminati to get out – I started getting in at that level. Then I had to work with the mind control. One thing led to another.

Wayne Morris:

What is the relationship of the groups you just mentioned to the Illuminati?

Fritz Springmeier:

There are a lot of groups around the world that are making decisions that are controlling things from behind the scenes and these particular groups are fronts for the Illuminati. Not fronts in the sense that they have no actual purpose, they serve a purpose. But there is a hidden level of control back behind them.

Wayne Morris:

In terms of the Illuminati families and the whole organization itself, what are their goals? Why have they infiltrated so many of these organizations?

Fritz Springmeier:

Ultimately it’s to bring in what people have termed the New World Order with a man who will hold the world’s attention and carry the title The Antichrist. That’s the ultimate goal and I am not trying to wax religious on people but that’s just the simple fact. When you get into deprogramming people you will see that a lot of the things they have been programmed to do tie in with a very sophisticated plan to unify the world under the reign of the Antichrist.

Wayne Morris:

You mentioned that the Illuminati group has used mind control to further their goals. How did you first come into this? You have been working with your partner, Cisco Wheeler, who I understand was an Illuminati mind control victim. How did you first meet and realize what was going on there?

Fritz Springmeier:

She was trying to break free of her mind control. What I stumbled upon was, at least in my opinion, the greatest slavery involved in all history. You had four high level Illuminati women who had been teamed together. They had all become Christians and were trying to break free and had become a support system for each other. Here I was a researcher of the Illuminati, there’s a lot to try and explain. When you are under the mind control, there is a lot of programming not to reveal the secrets. It is very difficult for someone who has been in the Illuminati and received their standard mind control to not divulge what is going on, so it made it much easier to work with me that I had already done my homework, and they knew I was going to understand what they were talking about. They didn’t have to say a lot to communicate certain things, because I was already aware and that saved them from a lot of the grief from the program kicking in for having talked too much.

Cisco was part of this group attempting to escape the mind control, and I got involved in their lives and did what I could to help them. I brought Cisco out of the Illuminati and in return my learning curve about the Illuminati was greatly increased because I was given inside information from these people and a number of other people. Like I say, trying to understand the secret organization, the secret bloodlines is very difficult, because one has to stand outside of one’s own culture and own way of thinking and understand these people as they think, and they do not think like we do. Being able to work with these people who were in the Illuminati was very valuable.

Wayne Morris:

Because they have used mind control techniques on their own family members throughout the years?

Fritz Springmeier:

Oh yes. They have been carrying out this mind control on their own people as well as others for centuries and this has all been a very closely guarded secret. It’s one of the reasons why they have been able to carry out so much to implement this New World Order without people being able to figure out there is such a thing as a worldwide unified conspiracy. They are very skilled in knowing how to bring things about so they appear natural.

Wayne Morris:

What is the purpose of them using mind control on their own family members?

Fritz Springmeier:

It’s really essential. If you are going to participate in the Illuminati secret life, being a programmed multiple is basic. There are a few in the Illuminati who aren’t programmed multiples, but considering what one has to participate in. You’ve got a number of standard rituals involved – St. Weinbald, St. Agnes, Grand Climax, Walpurgis, Beltane, all your solstices and equinoxes, Lamas, All Hallow’s Eve, High Grand Climax — all of these standard rituals. These rituals are very horrific. They involved human sacrifice. Sacrifices of babies on the High Grand Climax. On various Sabbats you’ve got a young female or a male being sacrificed.

This is not something that the normal mind is going to be able to handle. The mind control and the creation of multiple personalities where you get a Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde effect – is very crucial to this thing continuing from generation to generation.

Wayne Morris:

They really use the multiple personalities to facilitate this double life that they have to lead … before we get into the techniques that they use for mind control and the details of that, you mentioned they seem to have a belief system as well. Could you talk about that?

Fritz Springmeier:

The Illuminati is the continuation of the Mystery Religions and as someone comes an adept of the Illuminati they have to learn a whole series of paths. They give the different types of cult knowledge names from the 12 Apostles plus the 13th is called the Holy Grail. These men and women become very skilled in occult knowledge and I am not sure how much I should go into that, but I guess what I am trying to say is that they will be trained in alchemy, in Indian sorcery, Druidism, Enochian magik, Gnosticism, Hermetic magik, cabbalism, Plato, Sufism – they will know all the different branches of occult systems.

Wayne Morris:

How do they use that information? Do they incorporate elements of all of those occult belief systems into their own?

Fritz Springmeier:

It all ties in together. The idea is to amass occult power to yourself and that’s the reason why the Collins family was brought into the top 13 bloodlines. Of course the Merovingian Dynasty had a lot of magik power and a lot of political power, but the Collins family which was Scottish had extremely powerful occult powers so it was brought in to be one of the top occult lines because they were such powerful black magicians. Cabbalism and the 26 path workings – this is all very important in the work that they do, and it all ties in with the mind control too. But most of the therapists out there are secular or approach it from the secular angle, and as they deal with these mind control victims’ programming, they don’t touch on the spiritual aspect. What I am trying to say is that their religious beliefs can’t be separated from the mind control. It is an integral part of that.

Wayne Morris:

Do the Illuminati worship a single being such as Lucifer?

Fritz Springmeier:

You’ve got different levels in which people operate within the Illuminati. There is the anarchy level which is your common witchcraft coven, and then you’ve got your hierarchy level. On the anarchy level there are thousands and thousands of covens. I have listed the addresses and names of hundreds of these in one of my books. These covens are very eclectic. They can have their own traditions, their own rituals. There is a wide variety of practices on the anarchy level … that’s what it looks like, is total anarchy. One doesn’t see any connection.

Above that is your hierarchy level where you would have Asmodeus, your Grand Masters, and Mothers of Darkness, Grandmothers, Granddaughters. If you are a programmed multiple, you can function at many different levels. You can have one personality in this coven, and another personality in that coven and this personality that is in the Masonic Lodge, and another in this hierarchy ceremony, another participating in another Satanic ritual. It is very broken up. One of the reasons why it is not easy to answer your question is basically everything we understood about human behaviour and how to gauge or judge people is obsolete. The mind control, by creating programmed multiple personalities, has made all of our ways of judging people obsolete.

Within the Illuminati the supreme goal is to balance their good deeds with their bad deeds, they are dualists. They are Luciferians at the highest level. That’s why your greatest philanthropist will very often be your highest ranking satanist. What they are trying to do with their philanthropy is self serving when you actually look at it. It’s not as generous as it appears. They are trying to do good deeds and balance those with their bad deeds, they believe in balance in their religion. It’s a gnostic luciferianism.

Wayne Morris:

I think it might be difficult for the people listening to understand how somebody could be in public doing good deeds and having a good public image, and at the same time having this very dark side. I don’t know if you have read the recent Judith Spencer book, “Satan’s High Priest”. It really illustrates how that works very clearly. It’s a true story about one particular satanic cult, a high priest, and his rise to that.

Fritz Springmeier:

No I haven’t read the book, but I am glad that you brought that out to the listeners. The way that someone can begin to see the Illuminati is to start looking at how these people are above the wars and the rest of what we have to suffer. For instance Pierre Samuel Dupont, during the French Revolution, all kinds of people around Pierre lost their heads and yet, for some strange reason, Samuel Dupont managed to “keep his head” when so many hundreds of people were losing theirs to the guillotine. One person who was influential in protecting him was Necker’s daughter, Madame Germaine Destael. She ran a cat-house, but anyway she was intimate friends with St. Simon and St. Simon’s disciples were saying at that point in time in the early 1800’s that the target date for the New World Order would be the year 2000.

Another example in history, and I brought this out in the Top 13 Illuminati Bloodlines book, is when the U.S. went to war right after Pearl Harbor, within a few days, President Roosevelt came out with a Presidential Decree which was a semi-secret amendment to the Trading with the Enemy Act, and it made it legal for certain people to trade with the enemy, if they were given permission by the American Secretary of the Treasury who at that time was Hans Morgenthale. I copied the paper work out of the Federal Code of Regulations. They actually have this Presidential Decree where if he wanted to exempt somebody, he could allow them to trade with the enemy. Who were the people that were given that privilege? Rockefellers and Onassis, both of them Illuminati kingpins. During WWII every ship that was a Greek merchant ship was sunk during the War by one side or the other. Something happened and essentially all of the Greek shippers lost their vessels. There was one Greek shipper, Aristotle Onassis, who didn’t lose a single ship and his vessels sailed through all the war zones. None of the Allies or the Axis powers ever attacked his ships. For something like that to happen, you have to have full collaboration at the highest level. You see these kinds of things going like – Pierre Samuel Dupont, Aristotle Onassis. Then you are looking at somebody who is Illuminati. They sit above all these conflicts that they create for all the common people.

Wayne Morris:

This way of bypassing trading with the enemy regulations, how has this been utilized with regard to WWII or the Bolshevik revolution for that matter?

Fritz Springmeier:

In fact there is an entire book out – I think the title is “Trading with the Enemy”, it came out in 1983 and answers your question. Rockefeller Standard Oil shipped gas and oil to Spain which then piped it directly to the Nazis. The Allies knew that Rockefeller was supplying the Germans. That prolonged the War a couple of year. But you don’t hear about this by establishment historians. There was a lot of important trading during WWII was necessary to sustain the Nazi war machine.

And you mentioned the Bolshevik revolution. Again you will see there was a lot of finances sent from, as you are probably well aware and some listeners are aware, from Kuhn Laib (sp) and Company and some of these other llumaniti people, and that money was used by the Bolsheviks to finance the revolution. There were a lot of other agreements made at that time and things done to help them out. There is a lot going on behind the scenes.

Wayne Morris:

It seems like they are promoting a strategy of tension where they are funding both sides and basically profiting from the resultant conflicts that they are fomenting.

Fritz Springmeier:

One could go on and on. For instance Heinrich Mueller who was head of the Gestapo – you will notice that at one point he took an old Jewish family and he himself had to personally carry their suitcases to his own car and when he got them to the Swiss border, he carried their suitcases. The Swiss bodyguards by the way, were laughing seeing the head of Gestapo helping an old Jewish family escape Nazi Germany. When the listener out there starts seeing these kinds of things, now that you have heard me talk, you can begin to realize that there is a hidden level out there, way beyond what the common person is allowed to see at that Illuminati level. These are the people who are collaborating behind the scenes where you have Catholics and Protestants and Jehovah’s Witnesses and Mormon leaders – you think these people are at each other’s throats – but they are key Illuminati people who are secretly collaborating.

Wayne Morris:

In talking about the Illuminati, I think a number of people may have difficulty believing that there is a Unified Liberal Conspiracy to control the world. Even myself, up until recently, until I started researching into the mind control, I thought the Illuminati was a fictitious group. In doing your research about the Illuminati, what were some of your other sources of information besides the people on the inside that had escaped?

Fritz Springmeier:

My sources, besides my eye witnesses, were interviewing a number of honest law enforcement and private investigators – in fact some of these people are still ongoing friends of mine. Over the years I have studied thousands of books, and thousands of documents which has meant going to special libraries, such as the Genealogical Library at Salt Lake City. I have interviewed and worked with many therapists and I have taken off and travelled to sites where programming is done, where rituals are done, where crimes have been committed. For instance in Washington state, a number of hours from here, there is a full scale replica of Stonehenge. Below this replica of Stonehenge which sits on a hill, is a cemetery a number of feet away and Illuminati rituals are done at that cemetery. That’s an example of a place that I have gone and looked at for myself.

I need to bring in another concept here that is important to research. It’s not all simply just getting a lot of interviews and the facts because the raw facts aren’t going to do it. When I was in college and I was taking counselling, the psychologist who was teaching the class gave some excellent advice. He said, “when you are listening to people or examining a situation, don’t look at the details but look at the process. The details may throw you for a loop because people will lie, they will give contradictory information. Look at the process.” That’s a very good principle. What I have been doing is analyzing a lot of raw data, raw facts and interview information, and I have been putting together a coherent puzzle. That means you have to overlook a lot of disinformation.

Wayne Morris:

In the late seventies there was a certain amount of information about CIA mind control that came out to the public, and I would like to know what you think are the problems inherent in trying to prove the existence of mind control to a general audience through government documentation?

Fritz Springmeier:

The problems with trying to expose things through government documentation are one, the documentation has been destroyed or tampered with and to get the government involved in exposing these things, what you are basically doing is asking a bunch of criminals, that’s what they are even thought they work in government positions, to expose themselves with paperwork. That’s just not the way things work. When we think about the Nazis, they were trying to destroy all traces of their crimes. They tried, they didn’t succeed. That gives me some hope that even though a great percentage of the proof of the mind control in terms of government documentation has been destroyed, I am still convinced that tons of documents still exist. But I think even better than those tons of documents are the living proof we have in the tens of thousands of identified living victims.

The other side to the problem of getting government documents is that then you have to have some way to broadcast that to the public at large and we have a controlled media, and unfortunately the media is very tight with the government. You can really question whether you would ever see our controlled media fully expose to the proper degree the people that need to be exposed.

Wayne Morris:

It seems highly unlikely that the mainstream media is going to be investigating this. It’s more likely to be coming from independent investigation and independent publishers of this information.

Fritz Springmeier:

I would love to see the places where the records are kept broken into and these records exposed, but the only way I can see this happening would be if there was a revolution on the magnitude of what happened in Eastern Europe where Stasi records and things like this were exposed to the light of day.

Wayne Morris:

Do you think a government investigation into the mind control experiments, similar to what has happened with the Tuskegee syphilis and the radiation experiments would actually bring out information?

Fritz Springmeier:

I believe it would bring out information. That’s true. However, for the government to investigate this is like asking the fox how much of a threat he is to chickens. The fox is going to tell us something, enough to satisfy us, but I am real leery about giving the government another chance to push some ulterior agenda. The bottom line is that a government investigation is going to cost us more tax dollars, and I think people sometimes forget that every time they send their government scurrying around doing something that it comes out of their pocketbook.

Wayne Morris:

Do you think there is any benefit though, to society as a whole, in terms of having a government investigation going on, and having the government at least admit they did do these kinds of experiments? Is there any benefit to the people as a whole in trying to expose this?

Fritz Springmeier:

As a whole? The way you ask your question is going to reflect the way I answer. No, it will not. The reason why I say this is that earlier on the US Congress had Rockefeller investigate the CIA. Rockefeller investigate the CIA!?! (Laughs) Of course his investigating committee came up with abuses, they have got to find something wrong, but the thing of it is that it makes Rockefeller look like a good fellow. “Oh look he’s a crusader who is trying to expose the bad guys.” They always throw in an ulterior agenda. If they are going to do something against themselves, they use it as another opportunity to work on some other agenda. If they expose A, B and C about mind control, then they are probably doing it in a way so they are misdirecting people’s attention from their latest technology through an older model that they have discontinued, or something like that. They are going to work in some ulterior agenda that when it’s all said and done, it has actually done a disservice.

Wayne Morris:

How do you think the information about mind control has been kept from public attention for so long?

Fritz Springmeier:

As we mentioned just a little bit earlier, we have a controlled media and in a number of my publications I have gone into detail and showed who is in control of the media, and how these people are Illuminati members or participating in their Illuminati fronts. I document how the Rockefellers, and the Rothschilds and the William Randolph Hearsts – Illuminati kingpins – control the media. I think it’s appropriate a couple of anecdotes.

I was visiting one day with a Christian minister and he was asking me what I did since I worked full time exposing the mind control and helping victims of mind control, and exposing the New World Order’s agenda. I was honest with him, and told him that and in the course of doing that I mentioned something about the controlled media and boy he hit the roof. He went ballistic on me because just prior to becoming a minister he had been an ABC reporter. He said, “there is no control over the media! I was allowed to write and have any stories that I wanted!” I said, “whoa, slow down, let me ask you some questions.” When you were hired, your superior hired you and kept you on because he liked the way you thought and the way you wrote … and likewise his superior liked the way he thought and the way he wrote … and on and on down the line. If anybody had written or thought in ways that weren’t the approved ways of thinking and writing you would have gotten in trouble, wouldn’t you. He said “yes.” I said, that’s it … when I work with victims of mind control they can’t see that they are under programming. As long as they do exactly what the programming asks them to do, they don’t know that they are in programming. The only time that they know that there is any programming there is if they step out and act against it. If you are running with the wind behind your back or if you are in a stream and you are floating down the stream, you don’t notice the current. But when you try to swim upstream is when you really notice the power of the current. So if you as a reporter step out of what their expectations are, that’s when you get clobbered and you realize there is a lot of heavy force behind going against the direction the way they want to go in. He said, “you’re right.” I said if you had written an article that had been contrary to the way your boss thought, you would have been in trouble, wouldn’t you? He said, “yes, you are right, I see your point.”

That’s my point. People don’t notice the control until you start bucking against that control and then you are going to find out how much control there is over our entire society.

Wayne Morris:

It seems that control in the newsrooms is almost at an unspoken level, and often for a lot of reporters it’s an economic motivation as well. The stories that their editors do get accepted, the stories the editors don’t like don’t get accepted and the reporters don’t get paid for it. They very quickly appreciate what their editors are going to accept and print.

Fritz Springmeier:


Wayne Morris:

I would like to talk about the mind control that the Illuminati have used and the techniques therein. What is your understanding of the forms of mind control they have used?

Fritz Springmeier:

The phrase that I like to use is “Total Mind Control” because it totally controls the person – body, soul and spirit. And the common person out there has never really imagined that something so all-encompassing or so horrendous or so totally powerful even exists. The type of mind control the Illuminati use – I think some people think “oh, mind control – television – yeah – subliminals.” No. I am talking about something that is 1000 or 10,000 times more powerful. This mind control is totally undetectable and it totally controls the person and it uses every known technique of controlling a person wrapped up in a sophisticated group package. That’s one of the important things that a lot of people have not emphasized – that it’s not one technique, but what makes this total mind control of the Illuminati so powerful is that it’s a sophisticated group package incorporating all of the known techniques of control. All of these methods have been carefully interwoven. When you listen to someone from an intelligence agency, occasionally they have talked similar to this, where they will say, “we tried such and such a technique but it only worked in 70% of the cases so we couldn’t use it … and we tried this technique and it only worked part of the time.” But what they are not telling you is that if you take a method that works only 70% of the time and match that to another technique that works 60% of the time, and another technique that works 50% of the time and you have 100 techniques wrapped up together like that, you make a package deal that totally locks the victim in to the control.

Wayne Morris:

Can you talk about some of these techniques individually and how they were used as a group package?

Fritz Springmeier:

When I started out to describe to people what was going on, I had files and files. I had about 150 files of different techniques. I was thinking to myself, well I can’t talk about 150 techniques, that’s too overwhelming for people. I thought and realize that all of these techniques broke down into 12 sciences. One of the sciences is the science of trauma and torture. Others is how to use applied drugs to control a person; their ability to use mental states such as hypnosis, dissociation, the trance states; their skill at deceiving people and deceiving the victim themselves. One needs to understand that the victims of the Illuminati mind control do not even know themselves that they are under control. So there is a lot of skill in using fiction and deceit and fronts and covers. There is a science of using spiritual things to control a person. In fact actually that is perhaps one of the major, if not ’the major’ method of controlling a person.

There is a science of using spiritual things to control a person. In fact actually that is perhaps one of the major, if not the major method of controlling a person. One of the things that’s not political popular today for people today in science to admit is that mankind has a spiritual side to them, but humans do have a spiritual side to them and the Illuminati understand how to spiritually control someone. Their understanding of that has boggled my mind. They have only allowed the common people including the Christian people – the crumbs so to speak – even our ministers have only been given the crumbs on how to develop a person spiritually.

Wayne Morris:

And how do you feel they have developed this and gained this knowledge?

Fritz Springmeier:

A lot of this began back in the Sleep Temples of the Egyptians. We go back to your Egyptian priesthood and the Mystery religions – they were already learning at that time how to use electric shock – they used electric eels and other things to electrically shock people. They had already started to learn the use of drugs and herbs to create altered states and to control people. These were secrets though that were very closely guarded by these Illuminati families and their Mystery religion priesthood. But they continued to develop these over the centuries. Another example of a closely guarded secret was the ability to do cranial manipulation. During the Middle Ages and even centuries prior to that, the oligarchical families that controlled the common people had specialists that did torture for the kings, and they kept their secrets about torturing to themselves. One of the things they developed was the ability to do cranial manipulation. You have to be very careful when you start moving the bones of the skull. A lot of people don’t realize that the skull is not a solid bone, but it has sutures between the different parts of it, and you can do very subtle manipulations and move those skull bones. In fact today there is something called cranial osteopathy. These osteopaths are very skilled in using their fingers. That developed from the family of bone-setters who tied back into the occult who had learned the secret occult skills of manipulation.

Wayne Morris:

What has effect has this had in terms of the mind control – the cranial manipulation?

Fritz Springmeier:

Cranial manipulation has been kept an occult secret in occult bloodlines for centuries. And it can be used for good, to heal people. It can be used to change the way the face looks to improve the face, or it can be used for evil, to torture someone or to control their mind. By manipulating the skull you can actually change the way the person thinks to make them more dissociative, or more compliant, or develop their thinking in other ways.

Wayne Morris:

Can you explain how they would start using these techniques, and generally at what age they would start?

Fritz Springmeier:

When a child is conceived, a lot of them – their very birth has been an idea from the start. Somebody who is in the Illuminati conceiving a child in an occult ritual with a woman. It gets very involved as to how they hide their lineages. Let’s put it this way. Not everybody born to mothers are actually the biological children of that mother. There is a lot of switching done at hospitals and so forth. The child’s birth has been planned. While the child is in the fetus, they already begin certain things to test the fetus’ mental abilities and to traumatize that fetus so it will be more dissociated.

Wayne Morris:

How would they do that?

Fritz Springmeier:

A fetus does not like to be poked, does not like substances that taste bad. If a mother eats a lot of sugar they have shown by watching the fetus that these unborn children like the taste of sugar as it diffuses into what the child is getting from the mother. So if you combine a lot of these things that are horrific. If you have a lot of loud noises – and the father is screaming at the mother and throwing her around and abusing the mother, making the mother very upset. Then you’ve got loud music, rock and roll, or screaming or something. You have also given the mother something to eat that tasted really bad to the fetus and you can do a number of things that are going to hit that little unborn child at the same time. It’s going to be overwhelmed, and it’s going to develop its ability to dissociate.

Wayne Morris:

To your awareness, has electricity been used in this regard?

Fritz Springmeier:

Not so much in the traumatization of the fetus. They use that after the child is born. They oftentimes will have a premature birth. It happens in many different ways, but one of the methods they like to use is to have a premature birth because then the child can be traumatized naturally. There are a whole bunch of natural traumas that go along with being premature. Your skin is very sensitive, you get catheters up your behind, and so forth. They want the traumatization to begin very early on because they want somebody who can trance out and dissociate from the pain. You are probably familiar with the Indian fakirs – the holy men in Indian who can walk on coals and stick pins in themselves and sleep on beds of nails. How does it happen? Because they are able to dissociate and go into a trance state, an altered state. The Illuminati want to create individuals who are able to dissociate very well, because that is part of the requirement to have the ability to have a multiple personality.

Wayne Morris:

And that is the purpose of the traumatization – is to create that dissociation?

Fritz Springmeier:

That’s one of the purposes.

Wayne Morris:

What is the importance of dissociation within the total mind control?

Fritz Springmeier:

It’s extremely important. You will hear a lot in recent times about electronic mind control, and that’s being used to divert people away from the more important issue of multiple personality disorder or DID. The ability to create multiple personalities that are programmed is extremely important. It’s why they have the ability to be secret, it’s why they are able to do so much in secret. The electronic mind control – throwing mental ideas into somebody’s brain which are foreign is not that much of a threat. I have worked with quite a few victims of electronic mind control and the majority, if not all of them, are able to recognize that something is being beamed into their heads that is foreign. But when you are dissociated and you have amnesia between yourself and other parts of your mind, you don’t know what you yourself in your entirety are all about. For instance I had a Christian minister who spent some time trying to deprogram – he has come and visited here to work on his programming. Here you have a Christian minister who, horrors of horrors, discovers that he has a dissociated part of his mind which has been functioning within the Illuminati and these other parts of his mind are satanic. Imagine being a man of God and finding out that you have parts of yourself that sacrifice people … (laughs). That’s why this ability to dissociate into multiple personalities is such a dangerous ability.

Wayne Morris:

Maybe you can talk about the nature of dissociation and how that is used for controlling somebody and also, as you mentioned, being not aware of the different identities that are being used for other purposes …

Fritz Springmeier:

People are familiar with dissociation and how the mind has the ability to function on several tracks. For instance, if you are at a party and engrossed in a conversation with somebody and you are focused on what they are saying, and all of a sudden somebody across the room says your name, and your mind immediately switches and goes “oh they are calling me over there”, well that’s one evidence, and there are other ways to realize that the mind is not one monolithic entity but it is broken up into components. While you were engaged in that conversation with somebody, there was one part of your mind which was still listening to other things. It was a dissociated part of the conscious mind; in other words, it was dissociated from the conscious. You weren’t conscious of that part of your mind that was listening to the rest of the conversation but it was.

Hypnosis, trance and dissociation are just different aspects of the same thing. The Illuminati have learned over the centuries how to put people in different mental states and the information is learned in the different states. To access that information best, you need to go back to that particular state. People realize what I am saying because when you get into a particular situation that’s reminiscent of a previous experience, that’s when your memory is best triggered. They go a lot further than just using natural dissociation. They have learned how to create amnesia walls within the mind and basically what they are doing to the mind is the same as what we do to computers. In order to make computers functional they had to figure out some way to section off part of the computer’s memory so the user could not access that memory. It had to nest that memory. You will notice that when you reboot your computer, the computer reboots itself with memory that you weren’t able to access. That memory was dissociated – in human terms I guess you could say there is an amnesia wall there.

They know how to build walls in the mind to mentally section off the mind – and they do this through trauma. If you get a severe enough trauma what the mind will do in order to continue functioning is dissociate that trauma with an amnesia wall. Let’s say you were in war and your best friend had just gotten blown to smithereens by artillery … his guts are lying out. Your mind may build amnesia walls around this event and you may not be able to remember it. So the worse the trauma, the better the amnesia wall.

The Illuminati take a small child about two years old, and they begin traumatizing it with the worst traumas that are imaginable so that they can create these amnesia walls. They find these dissociated pieces of the mind which are just like in a sense floppy disks, then they put in their programming to the dissociated parts of the mind as to what they want that part to become. Some of these parts they make into personalities and they create MPD, DID and then while they are creating these multiple personalities, they are programming them to be exactly what they want them to be.

Wayne Morris:

Before we get into what kinds of things they are used for, maybe we can just go back and talk about how a person is conditioned to be a total mind control slave, and pick it up when the child is born. What happens there in terms of the conditioning.

Fritz Springmeier:

The programmers like to say “this child is a piece of clay”, and they view themselves as the potter’s wheel, of course. They are very skilled in knowing how to take a child and work with that child’s mind to create what they want. We could talk all day about this. One of the aspects we haven’t gotten into yet is their ability to go in and identify – they use EEG’s – backtracking and stepping outside of the Illuminati for a second … You’ve got researchers like Hans Eisneck, who happened to have been born in Germany and other researchers too who studied how your average _______ potentials – these are brainwaves – can be monitored and can be used to see what type of thinking that brain is capable of. You can use EEG’s to determine personality and IQ. They have correlated their ability to study the human brain with EEG’s to John Gittinger’s PAS tests. When a child is born they begin testing its brain to see what is this person’s personality, what type of thinking is this person capable of, what type of career should be plan out for this person. So they take the natural bent of the mind, the natural capabilities of the mind and they work with that. Likewise when they are doing the traumatization and they are splitting the mind, they work with the child’s creativity and what those pieces of the mind think.

Wayne Morris:

Typically at what age do these tests start – the EEG’s and the Personality Assessment Surveys …

Fritz Springmeier:

They do some of it while the child is still a fetus, and after its born they start neonatal behavioral assessment skills, the Bailey Scales and other tests, and within a short time, perhaps by 18 months, they will be doing EEG’s and determining what they want to do. Once they determine what kind of life they want to structure for this person, they begin the mind control to structure the person for that career. This is why people like myself who have a natural intelligence that has never been connected to any of these bloodlines, we have such a hard time out there in the competition because the Illuminati can take a particular child and manipulate things from behind the scenes and open all the right doors for this person, and they can get them the grants and the schooling and everything they need and adding impetus to this person’s career is the mind control that is steering them in that direction too. The end product is you end up with somebody who is an engineer or a lawyer or a politician who is very highly qualified for what they are doing.

Wayne Morris:

Once they have controlled somebody, what kinds of things would they be used to do for the Illuminati?

Fritz Springmeier:

This has not been brought out very well by other people and maybe it’s just simply because they are not aware of it, but the mind control is not just to create somebody who is a sexual slave, but it’s to infiltrate and control society across the board. Understand that if you are going to control something like establishment medicine – you have to have your people in key positions because the weakest link the chain is going to break. You can’t have any weak links. They salt their people throughout society in general, from the gutter to the castles. An example of one group of people that they have created for modern society are stalkers. In my recent book, Deeper Insights Into the Illuminati Formula, I go into how they create stalkers and why they create stalkers.

Let’s say you are trying to control medicine because the establishment medical system brings them in lots of money and the medical establishment is very powerful, you have to have control of the entire spectrum of things – the hospitals, what kind of health care is going to be available, the type of training these doctors are going to get, they have created secret strike forces like the CCHI and the NCHF that keep people in line. All of this requires mind control slaves being salted in throughout the entire system. If you have one weak link – for instance if you have one person who is practicing alternative medicine and you don’t control the judicial system – you are not going to be able to convict, eg. this homeopathic doctor if you don’t control the judicial system. You have to have this vast secret apparatus, and until people understand the mind control, they can’t understand how there could possibly be the type of control that they have.

Wayne Morris:

In order to understand how they are able to control these people that they have put in key positions in society, we do have to talk more about the techniques of mind control, and maybe we can go into that now, of how they are able to effect control over these people. For example, the trauma.

Fritz Springmeier:

The trauma would be used for a whole number of reasons, but at the very basic level when you traumatize somebody to the point where they almost die, or actually to be more specific they actually do “kill” these people but they know exactly how many seconds they can allow them to be killed and still bring them back to life. They manipulate near-death experiences, they have that down to a science. That was the major reason that you had the major concentration camp experiments by Mengele where people were tortured. He belonged to an Illuminati bloodline and was doing Illuminati research for mind control purposes, he did a lot of research on twins. They found out exactly how much trauma you could give different people before you killed them. What that trauma does is it puts the brain back into a survival mode and now I have to get into explaining that the popular concept of the brain being one monolithic brain is real deceptive.

It has been kept very secret but the human brain is actually seven brains. The first brain of the human mind – the medullah and the pons – is called the Reptilian Brain because it thinks like a reptilian. If you are always traumatizing a person, you keep them in their reptilian thinking or their survival based thinking. Survival based thinking has certain characteristics. At the very basic level, the trauma can be used to keep somebody within their survival based thinking. It also creates fear and there is a whole series that spiritually happen to a person when they get caught up in fear.

If you think in terms of blackmail, the listener may remember when he was a child and somebody grabbed your arm and twisted it and said “say uncle” and of course your arm hurt, and you gave in. That’s a very simple type of mind control. The trauma and the torture can be used in a very simple way – if you don’t comply it is going to hurt. Men who are slaves are electroshocked in their genitals. It is very painful. That’s a very simple way of bringing someone in line. Then of course there are ways the trauma is used to split the mind, fracture them into thousands of pieces, create multiple personality disorder. That’s one of the techniques.

Wayne Morris:

Just to stay on the topic of trauma, what is the importance of maintaining that trauma in terms of keeping the conditioning intact and keeping the state of dissociation intact?

Fritz Springmeier:

They want to maintain a high level of trance and dissociative behaviour in the victim, so they like to continue traumatizing the person. As I brought out earlier, there is more involved than just keeping the dissociative level high. Your also trying to maintain the person to stay in the reptilian, survival based thinking; trying to keep them having a spirit of fear controlling their lives, so they don’t slack off. They secretly train the parents of the children who are being programmed on how to abuse their children so they keep their children very dissociative. Not only that, if the children are going to some established religious institute, eg. Catholic church, Episcopalian church, their priests, their clergymen have been trained in how to abuse the children. This is why you have such a big modern day problem within the Catholic church. So many of the priests abusing children and the lawsuits brought against this church, and some people have said they think it is going to financially bankrupt the church – the reason why so much of this is going on is for purposes of mind control.

Wayne Morris:

Have these priests and clergymen been coerced to participate in this, or are they part of these Illuminati families? What is their role?

Fritz Springmeier:

There are a lot of different reasons why someone is a pedophile. One of the problems within the Catholic church is that there haven’t been normal outlets for sexual activity provided for priests and nuns, and then they are given these subversive ways to release their sexuality. Some of them are actually secret satanists and this is part of the reward they receive from a secret coven. There are various reasons as to why – some just go along because that’s what everybody else is doing and it is allowed until people put their foot down and say we are not going to tolerate this. I can talk about a number of cases where people did put their foot down and say we are not going to tolerate this abuse of our child by the clergy, and the hierarchy that should have penalized this person simply promoted them and sent them to some other part of the country. Why they do it? God knows why each person has become an abuser.

Wayne Morris:

Can you explain how the dissociation has been used in terms of programming and the structure of that programming?

Fritz Springmeier:

The victim of the mind control has had their mind split into many personalities, actually far more personalities than what the people in the therapeutic community generally realize. Cisco who I brought out of the Illuminati has very standard programming in many ways, although she has unique features to her system of personalities. She had a very standard grid of 13x13x13 alter personalities. Each one of those personalities has been given a separate history, separate personality which has its own likes and dislikes. What they did was turn what was one person into a whole city of people and the only way the mind of the slave can function is if it relies upon the master to give it stability. Imagine if your mind was a whole series of competing persons, each with their own ideas, likes, dislikes. The only way to bring some order out of the chaos would be to have some controlling entity ordering that chaos. Some of the slaves have reached the point of becoming aware that they are multiples and on the deeper levels they realize that they need the mind control for their minds not to break down into total craziness. Another way of looking at it is – what the Illuminati are doing is creating controlled insanity for these victims of the mind control to endure the horrific trauma that’s given to them, they have to isolate their memories of that trauma and the parts of the mind that have to pick up some of that trauma – some of those parts, in essence, I hate to use the word “crazy”, but they are taking the garbage that’s happening and the mind is shuffling and isolating it. If those walls of dissociation break down, then the other parts of the mind are going to have to deal with a lot of garbage.

Wayne Morris:

Why do you think they needed so many identities to be in place?

Fritz Springmeier:

If you are going to invest the time to create a robot, you are going to incorporate as many capabilities as possible and you want to compartmentalize so everything is secret. One of the reasons why intelligence agencies function so well – eg. CIA – is that they compartmentalize everything. You only “know” on a regional basis. They do the same with these people’s minds. A slave may function on many different levels. He’s got his front – they create the best front possible – his or her everyday life – but then they may want to use that person for drug smuggling, money laundering, carrying messages, performing satanic rituals, producing porn movies, assassinating somebody, spying on somebody – and then you’ve got internal jobs too. Going back to what I said earlier, remembering how the mind has been fractured into many dissociated pieces, and essentially a whole city of people has been made out of those pieces. In order for that city of people to function, you have to have different jobs. You will have some of the older personalities taking care of baby personalities internally in the person’s mind – you have functions – gatekeepers, hierarchy alters that are controlling other alters – a hierarchy of personalities. That’s a whole science in itself – how to structure dissociated parts of the mind.

Wayne Morris:

You mentioned the one structure, 13x13x13 grid. Are there other structures used that you are aware of?

Fritz Springmeier:

There are many different structures. It all depends on the whim and fancy of the programmer as he shatters the victim’s mind, he can reassemble that mind however he wants to. He can use a sphere – they create systems within systems too. A common system within a system is the cabalistic tree of life.

Wayne Morris:

Do you see similarities in the survivors that you have been working with in terms of the structures?

Fritz Springmeier:

Oh yes. That’s one of the things – you can have a therapist in one state, and they will not have know anything about MPD or DID and they will start working with the victim and call another therapist for help and taking notes. The victim will say, “I drew these pictures. I don’t know what they mean.” “I am fascinated with Star Trek (or the Wizard of Oz) (Mickey Mouse)”. The therapist will call another therapist and ask what they make of this. If this other therapist is experienced, they may say “oh hey – I’ve got somebody who is just like that.” All across the country, there are therapists and then people like myself who is a minister working with these people who are running into the same patterns time and time again, the same structures. Like I was saying, working with people who were in the Illuminati, working with people that did the programming itself, is really helping my learning curve too in terms of the structures that are built in.

Another common structure you will see is a lot of mirror imaging, that’s a more of a technique than a structure.

Wayne Morris:

What do you mean by that? The mirroring of an alter?

Fritz Springmeier:

Mirroring of all kinds of things. That’s part of the technique of deceit.

Wayne Morris:

That’s the purpose of using this mirroring, for example if a therapist came across one alter, dealt with, there may have been a mirror of that …

Fritz Springmeier:

A lot of the therapists think they are dealing with a particular personality but they are dealing with its mirror image. The systems are programmed, created so that if somebody starts working with them there are all these defensive mechanisms that are triggered. One of the defensive mechanisms is to have mirror image alters take the place of who the therapist is trying to work with. So the therapist thinks they have done something but they have actually just played games. Mirror images of things within the programming itself so that when one particular personality tries to work on their mind’s programming, the mind is so confusing about what they still internally – that they can’t figure out their own mind.

The best manager is somebody who doesn’t have to spend a lot of time giving instructions to a person. If you are a slave master and you have to be constantly telling that slave what to do, and constantly correcting it, and making sure it’s doing its job, you become a slave to the slave.

What you want to do is create a human robot which will be self-directed and self-correcting so they create hierarchies of alters within the person and one of the things they do is create alter personalities within the person’s mind who think they are the programmer themselves.

So, Ewen Cameron who was a programmer – his victim would have personalities within them that would think they are Ewen Cameron. Therefore they would carry out the abuse of other personalities as they would perceive Ewen Cameron would do it. That’s one use of mirrors. Another use of mirrors is if you are teaming two slaves together, let’s say you and are teamed. I would have personalities in me that think they are you and you would have personalities created in you that think they are me and it would further the binding process.

Wayne Morris:

Generally speaking, with people who have this kind of mind control, how many personalities are you talking about?

Fritz Springmeier:

A lot. Cisco has 30,000 standard alters and then there are lots of other dissociated pieces too. That would not be abnormal. The small part of the therapeutic community that’s trying to address DID generally work with a few front personalities. There are number of books out there written by people with MPD where the therapist came in and worked with five or six front personalities. The Illuminati step back and allow them to integrate some front personalities and the person is told by the therapist “you are now integrated, you’re fine” and they left therapy, and everybody is happy. The victim thinks they are free of their MPD, the therapist has made a lot of money and gotten famous over some book they have written, and the Illuminati is happy because these are just front alters that have been stabilized. The system of alters are far more complex than people realize.

Wayne Morris:

What are the dangers involved in dealing with therapy with a mind control victim, particularly when a therapist may be unaware of the techniques and structures of mind control?

Fritz Springmeier:

I have to caution people that some of the best minds of the 20th century – we have hundreds, if not thousands, of the best minds who have spent many, many years figuring out how to build these mechanisms into the mind slaves to protect the programming. In a sense what it is like – imagine you are going in to try and hack a computer – imagine a system that is set up so that if someone is not an approved user comes into the room and looks at the computer, the computer shuts down, the computer explodes. That’s really what you are looking at in trying to work with a mind control victim – they have a lot of suicide programming so that if the front alters, the personalities that hold the body day in and day out – if they were ever to find out they were in mind control, or that they were a multiple personality, they would commit suicide. You have all kinds of defensive programs. Not only is the computer programmed to explode if you walk into the room, but if you touch the keyboard as an unauthorized user, again the computer is programmed to explode. Every step of the way there are backup programs to deceive, to destroy. It is not easy. It is something the novice does not want to get into. It’s something that takes a lot of time and patience and skill, and a lot of love for the victims too. One has to really abhor what is going on to have the motivation that it takes to work with such a complex problem.

Wayne Morris:

What would you recommend for therapists wanting to know more about how this is done, and how they can help heal the victims?

Fritz Springmeier:

I strongly recommend our three books – I co-authored these 3 books with Cisco Wheeler. The one I already mentioned, “The Illuminati Formula Used to Create a Total Mind Controlled Slave”. The sequel to that which is 620 pages, “Deeper Insights into the Illuminati Formula”, part 1 is how the control comes about and part 2 is how the help comes about. We’ve got a lot of good information in there laying the foundation as to what’s happened, and how to begin to unravel what has happened.

Wayne Morris:

In terms of your own work, how much success have you had in working with victims of mind control?

Fritz Springmeier:

The problem that the mind control presents is overwhelming, and there are countless therapeutic issues, so there is no end to the different issues that can be worked on. Cisco and I have freely given of our time to help any victim of mind control in whatever way we could. The degree of therapeutic success depends on a number of things. One, it depends upon the situation the victim puts themselves in. If they are willing to extract themselves from their everyday life and go somewhere where it is safe, they are going to do a lot more – work more therapeutic issues, because the mind of a mind controlled slave is not going to let its guard down as long as it’s not safe. This gets back into understanding how the reptilian mind and the survival based thinking can override other areas of the mind. When you become deathly frightened for your life, your survival instincts take precedence over the other parts of your brain. If you have been traumatized your entire life, your survival based thinking is your primary method of thinking and it doesn’t take much to throw you into the fear based survival based thinking. So the first criteria for doing successful work with a mind control victim is to get them someplace safe. You could say that 99.9% of the victims of mind control have never been given that. Therapists do not set things up for survivors or victims of mind control to be in any safe situation. When I say safe, I mean they have to be safe 24 hours a day.

Cisco and I have been able to work with victims to the degree the situation allowed. There is no end to the work we could do if the right set-up presented itself. This is why I was hoping to create a deprogramming centre. There was a man who was CIA who was very horrified at what the government intelligence agencies had been doing to people, and I have a friend whom this CIA man knew who also works at providing therapy for mind control victims. This CIA man wrote into his will to give a number of millions of dollars to my clients for the purpose of doing therapy work with mind control victims. And then my friend in turn was going to give me a couple of million dollars so I could start a deprogramming centre. This man’s will when he died, was in the Oklahoma Federal Building, and the only copy of the will that we know about was in there. So I was rather upset when the building exploded, because that short-circuited our plans to build a couple of deprogramming centres. Short of building some place that is safe and that is staffed with competent people, it is extremely difficult to accomplish much.

Even when I have accomplished positive therapy with a victim, all that it takes for the other side to do is physically grab them and reprogram them. This is what has happened for me over the past years in terms of trying to help victims, and as a warning to the public and the therapeutic community at large, at this point not a whole lot has really been accomplished to thwart the mind control.

Wayne Morris:

Now in the optimal situation, to what degree have you been able to free the victims of the control?

Fritz Springmeier:

Given the optimal situation where we have someone who is safe, we can take down the mind control. We can do some serious re-structuring and make some really serious headway in helping a person. We can do some significant spiritual work with them. There can be some integrating work begun. There are all kinds of things that can happen. On the flip side of it, is the work ever finished? I don’t think it is, because the damage that has been done is so extensive, and you never know as a therapist that you have succeeded in finding every dissociated fragment of the mind. Remember there are thousands of fragments of the mind because the traumatization is so prolonged over so many years, and is so horrific, that you can never be sure that you have gotten all of the dissociated pieces, and each of those dissociated pieces is probably going to have programming attached to it.

Wayne Morris:

What is your sense of how many people have been affected by this?

Fritz Springmeier:

A very conservative estimate – I shouldn’t even say estimate because I have computed it from about seven different angles – a conservative figure is 2 million Americans have been programmed with trauma based total mind control.

Wayne Morris:

And that’s just in the USA?

Fritz Springmeier:


Wayne Morris:

And is it your sense that this is going on world-wide?

Fritz Springmeier:

Oh indeed yes, it is. More with your primary political powers. You’ve got programming going on in Europe, Russia, the U.S.A. – those are your primary areas of programming but in other places too.

Wayne Morris:

I would like to talk about some of the other techniques now of mind control. How has electricity played a role?

Fritz Springmeier:

Electric shock has been a standard part of the abuse, and it serves as a form of trauma. And stun guns are a standard item to keep the slaves in line and also to erase their memories. They might use perhaps a 120,000 DC volt stun gun to erase and compartmentalize fragments, memories of a slave who has just been used. When you shock a person, it destroys the short-term memory. It fragments it, 24 hours either way of the event. They can also use the shock treatments like Ewen Cameron to splinter the mind so that’s electro-shock. Elecricity has been used in terms of implements or devices that have been implanted into people and also used in equipment that will throw thoughts into a peron’s mind. You have microwave towers going up vectoring in ELF waves into people’s minds. So electricity is being used in a lot of high tech ways, or electromagnetic waves are being used in a lot of high techn ways …

They have different machines – EDOM electronic dissolution of memory where they wipe out your memory; harmonic machines that are used which some of your speakers have probably talked about – these machines can be used for the deprogramming work too. Electricity is also used in the flip way in that since the human brain gives off frequencies, they go in and scan a person’s personal frequencies they are giving off. There is a prime freq – which is the primary frequency a person gives off and that can be used to identify them from a distance. They know the different frequencies that the brain uses. Coming at it from a different angle, if you think of the brain when it creates a particular thought, it gives off particular frequencies. They simply created particular thoughts within a person and monitored electrical impulses along with that thought, fed that into computers. I am simplifying what they did – but basically that’s what they have done to decode being able to read what their brain is thinking. If you monitor the frequencies that are being given off by a person, then you can monitor what their thoughts are. So not only can you throw particular thoughts into people’s heads, but they can monitor their thoughts too.A lot of the monitoring and instilling of thoughts, etc. are being done with implants.

Wayne Morris:

Can we just go back to electroshock. You mentioned that it is used to erase memories perhaps of the identity of the people who are doing the programming. But don’t they run the risk of erasing the programming itself? How do they deal with that?

Fritz Springmeier:

This gets back into understanding how the programming is put in, and the level at which it is put in. Remember we talked about dissociated states? The primary programming that is put in is put in at a comatose level. There are different levels that you can program somebody to – if you start out with an adult, for instance, the CIA’s nomenclature is mind control Level 5. Somebody who has been given mind control to the 5th level generally has some cover story like for Roseanne Barr – she had an automobile accident apparently as a teenager. They take these people in and they are taken down to a comatose level where their bodies are comatose for quite a long period of time, and the programming is put in at an extremely deep level. At a level where your mind is regulating your heartbeat. The programming is put in and it is nested in at an extremely deep level. When they destroy short-term memory with electroshocking, that’s not even coming close to the deep programs – that is just affecting the short-term memory.

Wayne Morris:

Have they deliberately regulated the amount of electricity in terms of achieving a desired effect?

Fritz Springmeier:

Oh yeah. Everything is extremely scientific. This is why they had to do a lot of the horrific testing during WWII in the concentration camps. You just don’t traumatize a person indiscriminately or you will kill them. You have to know what you are doing. They have doctors and heart monitoring equipment. The fundamental programming is done in hospital settings, or hospital-type settings. That’s why a lot of the VA hospitals here in the USA – actually all of the VA hospitals – have been used for programming. A lot of the other civilian hospitals have also had particular wards set up where they were able to do programming. They are monitoring heartbeat, they know just how far to push them. When they start going into a near-death experience they know exactly when they can electroshock them to bring them back to life, etc. It is very skilled. They have to be very skilled in the drugs they use, how and when they administer them, what they do when the person is under drugs. What they do is not haphazard.

Wayne Morris:

So a lot of experimentation has gone into refining these techniques?

Fritz Springmeier:

Yes. Exactly.

Wayne Morris:

Can you tell us if you know anything about the development of brain implant technology and that has been used for mind control?

Fritz Springmeier:

There are six different types of implants. Audio implants that are used to allow the victim to hear something. Body manipulation implants that are put in to manipulate the body in some way, perhaps to release a hormone or to keep them from getting pregnant or to torture them, or something like that. Then you have a visual holographic implant which will give a holographic image to the person. You have implants that are mimics or brain link implants that if I want to directly download something to the brain, those are very secret implants. The implants are not used across the board with all mind controlled slaves. There are select groups that are receiving the implants and like the mimics, implants are only going to a select group. Then you’ve got your torture and muscle stimulating implants. Then the one everybody hears about – the tracking and ID implants – that everybody is so concerned about. Those are the implants that were given to a lot of American soldiers in Desert Storm. They were told they needed implants so that the global positioning system could keep track of them so they wouldn’t get lost in the desert.

Wayne Morris:

I am curious about the actual implants themselves in terms of how they are implanted and approximately the size through the development of the technology?

Fritz Springmeier:

The development has gotten really high tech. You have several types of development here that need to be brought out. One, that’s called “nanobots” – nanotechnology which are tiny little robots that range from 10-1/1000 billionth of a meter. The word “nano” means billionth – we are talking extremely microscopic robots here that are able to replicate themselves. Molecular size robots. Possibly the listeners have heard of the Scanning Tunnelling microscope? There are different names for it, but it is a little device that can actually see a single atom, and actually pick up atoms and move them. That’s used to develop these nanobots which are robots that can self replicate. You have fibre optics that have been developed and you will have some victims that if they get rid of their fibre optics – the fibre optic that is stuck into the victim often looks like a hair.

Wayne Morris:

What typically are these fibre optic implants used for?

Fritz Springmeier:

Good question. I wish I really knew the answer for that. Fibre optic glass will carry signals, so in broad I can say the implants are being used to transmit signals, I know that much. But I don’t know all the ins and outs of what kinds of signals are being sent. I have one victim of mind control who had been sitting in a restaurant – it is sort of analogous to a blowgun where they have hit her with something that looks just like a little hair and the fiber optic filament embeds itself in her skin. While she is sitting there eating, they have shot this filament into her. Fortunately she noticed they had done this, and pulled it out. I had female victims who had fiber optics that was disguised as hair that were put on their bodies. I don’t know the full role of the fiber optics but I know it is involved in communications. One of the more dangerous developments are your organic bioprocessors. These are molecular computers that are made up of DNA material. You’ve got DNA templates and you can also have carbon chains that are used. What they do is – with this biomaterial that is made into a mini-computer, they will link that to a virus and viruses oftentimes have a particular area of the body they like to migrate to. For instance a neurotropic virus will migrate to the nervous system or a dermatropic virus will migrate to the skin, pneuomtropic virus will go to the lungs. They attack their little organic viral processor to this virus. How do you get a virus into a person? There are a dozen different ways, it is easy to get a virus into a victim’s/host’s body. So once these viruses migrate to that area of the body they prefer, you’ve got a tiny little implant that is then doing whatever function it is programmed to do. These are extremely difficult to locate.

I have noticed in victims that have the virus implants that there will be a sort of central control implant a lot of times put in the bottom base of the neck. The central command implant will be receiving external signals and then will in turn monitor the body suit of implants. Some of the victims of these implants seem to have gotten some relief from being able to kill the viruses. There are some alternative medical methods that might be suggested to the victims that could take out these bio processors.

Wayne Morris:

For some of the larger implants, have victims been able to locate and remove these kinds of implants somehow?

Fritz Springmeier:

Yes. There have been a number of victims that have been identified – have been able to take x-rays, have been able to get other types of scanning mechanisms. There were three victims of electronic mind control that managed to, as a group, get into an Anacoic Chamber and get results when their signals were pinpointed as to source. They had to smuggle the paperwork out from the lab in their bras because the lab technicians were afraid of getting into trouble. Different victims of electronic mind control have managed to get some proof or have actually pulled some of it out. There are some doctors that actually have some of the implants. There are a few clean surgeons that are willing to help victims. I might mention the word Syntel here … that’s an important word for people to be familiar with in understanding implants. Syntel is something that has been discussed by our government repeatedly in some of their conferences. You will hear the military in some of their semi-secret conferences discussing Syntel. That’s short for synthetic telepathy which means sending to victims voices and thoughts – so these victims of Syntel are people who are receiving voices and thoughts electronically.

Wayne Morris:

That seems to be able to be used in a couple of different ways in terms of control, but also in terms of the situation with people claiming they are hearing voices who are often labelled schizophrenic or psychotic … it seems to be a way of discrediting these people.

Fritz Springmeier:

Something that was developed and used during the space program which is called biomedical telemetry – these are transmitters and receivers located at the base of the skull which record the body functions and the brain waves, and send it back to some computer somewhere. In fact in working with victims of electronic mind control I can say with certainty that is what is being done is that there are computers that are programmed with artificial intelligence that are their handlers. Rather than having a human handler day in and out, three shifts of human handlers controlling the victim of electronic mind control, they have computers with A.I. Then if the victim does something that throws the computer, the computer will signal a human to come and get involved. It’s been kind of interesting, the stories that victims have told me about how they outsmarted the computers that were trying to handle them.


The incredible satanic vision

If you don’t know who Albert Pike was, maybe you should check him out:


We have spoken a great deal about Albert Pike in the past few weeks, as we have examined, in some detail, his monumental Freemasonry teaching guide entitled, “Morals And Dogma of the Ancient And Accepted Scottish Rite of Freemasonry”. Pike was the Grand Commander of North American Freemasonry from 1859-1891. During his tenure, Pike caught a global vision of what Freemasonry could achieve, and so he turned his immense intellect toward achieving this vision. Consequently, Albert Pike was considered to be the foremost Freemason leader of the world at that time, and perhaps, the greatest of all time.

Before we move any further into our study, let us learn a few biographical facts about Albert Pike. Albert Pike, former Confederate War hero, became the leader of North American Freemasonry after the Civil War. Pike is considered to be the greatest leader ever of Freemasonry, because:

  • He was a certified genius
  • He spoke 16 languages fluently
  • He graduated from Harvard University
  • He achieved rank of Brigadier General of Confederate Army in Civil War
  • He was thoroughly familiar with the Jewish occult system, the Cabala, the stone system of the New World Order

After Pike assumed leadership of Northern Freemasonry, he took up his headquarters in the “Temple of Understanding” in Washington, D.C., just 13 blocks north of the White House and in direct line of that great Freemasonry obelisk, the Washington Monument (Study the Freemasonry Connection article this week). When Andrew Johnson succeeded President Abraham Lincoln, Pike had unreserved access to the White House, because Johnson was a Freemason.<1>

At this time, Albert Pike’s tremendous vision as to what the future of global Freemasonry might be like, plus the fact that he had the ear of the President of the United States, propelled American Freemasonry into the forefront of leadership in the drive to the New World Order. During the period from President Johnson to Harry S. Truman, many of the Presidents were Freemasons at the very time when real, substantive progress was being made to advance the global aims of the New World Order. Consider the Presidents in this time frame:

  • Andrew Johnson 1865-1869
  • James A. Garfield 1881
  • William McKinley 1897-1901
  • Theodore Roosevelt 1901-1909
  • William Howard Taft 1909-1913
  • Warren G. Harding 1921-1923
  • Franklin D. Roosevelt 1933-1945
  • Harry S. Truman 1945-1953<2>

Thus, in the pivotal period of time from the Civil War to the beginning of the Cold War, many of those years had a Freemason President in office. To be exact, in the very pivotal time period from 1865-1953, a period of 88 years, Presidents who were Freemason occupied the White House for 44 of those years! If you will read Seminar #2, you will see that occultists place great faith in numbers. Eleven is one of their most sacred numbers, and multiplications of 11 are also sacred. This is one of the reasons that Freemasons revere the number 33, because it is sacred number 11 times 3, the number of their trinity. (For a more thorough treatise on the subject of the Occult Belief In The Power Of Numbers, download CE1024 & CE1070).

Simply remember this about the power and ability of occultists to achieve their goals:

1. Their power is supernatural, but it is Luciferian

Turn to Job 1:6, for a unique look at the ability of that supernatural being, Satan, to cause havoc in this world. “Now there was a day when the sons of God came to present themselves before the LORD, and Satan came also among them. And the LORD said unto Satan, Whence comest thou? Then Satan answered the LORD, and said, From going to and fro in the earth, and from walking up and down in it.’

Satan’s to God answer was, “I was on the earth, going to and fro in it, and walking up and down in it.” Now, this is incredible, because we conceive of the earth as being a pretty big place, even by today’s modern standards. But, it is not a big place to Satan, for he can just going to and fro and walk up and down in the earth. The picture here is that of you and your garden; you certainly can going to and fro and walk up and down in it, can’t you? To you, a garden is not a terribly big place, and you are its undisputed master. The earth is the same type of thing with Satan. For this supernatural demon, the earth is a mighty small place, and its human inhabitants are easy pickings. We humans have no concept of the power of Satan and his demonic host, for not only are they more than a match for any human, they hate all mankind with a vengeance, because we are all “made in the image of God”. This brings me to point 2 in my discussion of the power and ability of occultists to achieve their goals.

2. God is in control, even of the demonic host and their leader, Satan/Lucifer

God is in such control of world events that Satan and his demonic host cannot do anything that is not allowed by God. When God forces Satan to manipulate his human hosts to accomplish something that fulfills Bible prophecy, God gets the glory. This is why God so emphatically stated, concerning His prophecies coming true, “Seek ye out of the book of the LORD, and read: no one of these shall fail, none shall want her mate: for my mouth it hath commanded, and his spirit it hath gathered them.” In other words, every one of God’s prophecies shall have “her mate” in fulfillment. The greatest example of God’s omnipotence prevailing over Satan’s rebellion is the rebirth of the nation, Israel, just as God had foretold. Satan hated Israel with a vengeance because he hated God, and Israel was God’s Chosen People. If Satan had any degree of latitude whatsoever, he would have moved heaven and earth to prevent Israel from coming back to the land as a nation in 1948. In fact, Satan tried to prevent this from happening when he mightily used Adolf Hitler to attempt to execute every single Jew in the world. But, he failed, and Israel did come back, just as God foretold!

But, now let us return to one of the greatest occultists in history, Albert Pike. As do most occultists, Albert Pike had supernatural spirit guides, who dispensed “Divine Wisdom” as to how to achieve the New World Order. A “spirit guide” is a “being” who meets someone who has given themselves over to the practice of the occult; however, please understand that many people who are practitioners of the New Age Religion do not view this as a bad thing. In fact, they would argue vociferously that they are filled with happiness and joy by interacting with their “spirit guides”, not realizing that they have been temporarily deceived by Satan who, along with his demons, can appear as an Angel of Light in order to deceive (“And no marvel; for Satan himself is transformed into an angel of light. Therefore it is no great thing if his ministers also be transformed as the ministers of righteousness …” 2 Corinthians 11:14-15).

So, Albert Pike received a demonic vision, described below. On January 22, 1870, Pike and one of his international co-conspirators, Guiseppe Mazzini, published the Plan which would establish the New World Order. This Plan was kept very secret, only within Freemasonry circles since the time of its inception, known only to fellow occult Illuminist conspirators. (This information is taken from a book from a former Luciferian Illuminist, Doc Marquis. His book is “Secrets of the Illuminati” and reveals much formerly hidden detail known only to Illuminists).

The secret Pike plan to control the world foresaw the need for three world wars. Stop here for a moment to remember the date of this prediction: January 22, 1870. This date is 44 years before the beginning of World War I. Once you understand the facts we are about to share with you and realize the length of time between this prediction and the beginning of its fulfillment, you can understand how supernatural forces were truly in command. Further, January 22, 1870, is occulticly significant also. The number 22 is one of the three important occultic primary numbers (11, 22, and 33).

The Pike Plan to overthrow the Judeo-Christian Old World Order, and establish the Satanic New World Order foresaw the need for war. However, this war was not the type of warfare the world had seen historically. This war was to be on a much larger scale than history had ever recorded. This war was to be global, or world-wide.

The details of this Pike Plan {January 22, 1870} for three (3) World Wars to establish the New World Order is as follows: (As you are reading this demonic prophecy, remember the occult concept of Thesis battling Antithesis to produce the new system, Synthesis. World Wars I & II were fought to establish Antithesis, to set up the Cold War, that “controlled conflict or threat of conflict” that would produce the new system, Synthesis).

I. The First World War was designed to enable the Czarist Government in Russia to be finally and completely overthrown. The new Russian government was foreseen to be atheistic and militaristic. Further, Pike specified that this new Russian Government was to be Communistic. Karl Marx had published his Communist Manifesto in 1848, exactly 22 years before this occultic prophecy through Albert Pike. Isn’t it interesting that the occultic number 22 keeps popping up? The multiplier numbers, 44 and 66 also keep appearing, as you will see in a few moments.

History records that this First World War did, indeed, occur just as listed, above. The Western powers in Europe, in conjunction with the United States, financed Lenin’s expedition into Russia<3>, they financed his government consistently, and we have financed Russian Communism at least once per decade since then.

II. The Second World War was foreseen to originate between Great Britain and Germany. However, one of the planned results of this war was to strengthen the new Communist Russian government, so that it could weaken and destroy other governments and religions.

History again records that the Second World War did, indeed, accomplish this objective. The war started when Germany invaded Poland, causing Great Britain to declare war on Germany. Very soon, the troika (3’s) of powers were set up to wage this war. The Black Magic occultists allied themselves when Germany linked with Italy and Japan; the White Magic occultists allied themselves together as Great Britain linked with the United States and Russia. Do not be deceived. This war was fought between two (2) New World Order forces, the “evil” alliance of the Axis Powers or the “good” alliance of the Allied Powers; the war was between the Black Magic forces against the White Magic forces. But, we shall return to this subject in more depth at a later time.

Certainly, the Pike vision of the Second World War building Russian Communism into a super power was fulfilled to a startling degree. Historians have always been mystified as to how Churchill and Roosevelt could have given away all of Eastern Europe to the Soviets, when the preponderance of power was clearly against the Soviets. Clearly, when Roosevelt and Churchill ceded all of Eastern Europe to Russia, the Communist Government of Russia, now known as the U.S.S.R. {Union of Soviet Socialist Republics) completed its transition to a super power, exactly as Pike’s vision had foretold. And, let us not forget that the Second World War had given Russia capabilities it had not possessed before the War. Not only did we build up the Russian military to a frightful degree, but we had also built entire factories East of Moscow that gave Russia an instant manufacturing base. Even though Russia had paid dearly in human lives during the War, they came out of the conflict a superpower. Thanks to Roosevelt, Russia now had a kingdom to go along with its new military and industrial base.

Now, you know that Freemason President Roosevelt gave this territory to Russia simply and only because he was being true to Pike’s vision of 1870!! You will never read this true history in any of your books!!

III. The Third World War was foreseen to be between Judaism and Islam. This prophecy is incredible in many ways, beginning with the understanding that this prophecy of a third world war occurred in 1870, a time when Israel did not exist as a nation, and when no one except Fundamentalist, Bible-believing Christians believed it would ever exist again.

Watch the events in Israel very carefully, because the final chapter is being written there. The demonic ‘guiding spirits’ of Freemasonry, of the leaders of the New World Order Plan, are planning a final, definitive Third World War, which will begin between Israel and her Arab neighbors and spread to the entire world. Literally, out of the smoke and destruction of this Third World War, Antichrist will come striding!

Now, here is the most interesting aspect of this demonic plan; it fits with Scripture!! God foretold Last Day’s Judgment on the Arabs in several places, listed below!!

  • In Obadiah, God foretells the destruction of the House of Esau, particularly the people of Edom, in the Last Days. God is promising this deliverance for the way in which these Arabs treated His chosen People. While severe judgment did fall upon the nation of Edom in 70 A.D., they were not wiped out as a people, nor was the destruction at the hands of Israel, as Verse 18 foretells, nor was it the fulfillment of the final days’ judgment, which the Bible consistently labels the “Day Of The Lord” {Verse 15}
  • Joel 2:18-3:21, God foretells tremendous judgment of all nations in the world, starting with the Arabs, beginning when God “reverses the captivity” and “restores the fortunes” of Israel, a date we know as May 14, 1948. Read this passage carefully, and you will see the hand of God foretelling judgment swirling all around Israel after she is restored to her land. Joel 2:30-31 seem to foretell nuclear war at this time.
  • While Israel will escape physical destruction by the miraculous power of God, she will be in so much danger that God Himself will supernaturally protect her. In Daniel 12:1, we see that, in the time of the End, Israel will be in such danger that “Michael shall arise to defend your [Daniel’s] people [Israel].”

Therefore, we can place great emphasis and credibility in this demonic vision of the Third World War. Out of the smoke and destruction of this War, Antichrist will stride triumphantly, to put an end to the War, to finally give the embattled world “Peace and Safety”. But, as 1 Thessalonians 5:1-4 foretells, when people are saying this, the world will explode in destruction.

The current events in Israel, where she is giving up “land for peace” makes no sense any other way. Israel’s leaders, some of whom are former generals in the Army, have lent their support to this idiotic plan. Militarily, this plan is a disaster, for it allows the Arabs a permanent home so deep within Israel that the military might not be able to successfully defend Israel if the attack comes from within the Palestinian State. The Jewish Orthodox community is overwhelmingly of the opinion that this “Peace Plan” is a recipe for war, not peace. They are right; that is the Plan.

Why, you ask, are so many Israeli leaders, who should know better, creating and supporting this Plan of giving the Palestinians a state, and giving up the Golan Heights? I believe it is for two reasons:

  1. They are Humanists, and therefore, are capable of being deceived by Satan
  2. They have been given “concrete” assurances by the Western Powers that their security will be “guaranteed” if they agree to this Plan.

For whatever reason, Israeli liberal leaders have created this unworkable Plan, and have carried out many of its provisions. Now, with the new Conservative Prime Minister in place, the scene may be set for a real explosion, because of his unwillingness to proceed any further with the Plan. And, if he were to attempt to roll back any of the concessions already carried out, the result will be war!!

Watch Israel and the events of the Middle East. Antichrist is going to appear during this planned World War Three. The stage is finally set. Albert Pike’s demonic vision of three world wars being necessary to achieve the New World Order is nearly at the end. Now, you know why we have had unparalleled war and threat of war during this Twentieth Century! Truly, Jesus was entirely correct when He foretold, in Matthew 24:6 that unparalleled war would characterize the Last Days of Time before Antichrist arose!!

Also remember Revelation 17:17, “For God has put it into their hearts to carryout His own purpose by acting in harmony in surrendering their royal power and authority to the Beast, until the prophetic words…of God shall be fulfilled.”

Are you spiritually ready? Is your family? Are you adequately protecting your loved ones? This is the reason for this ministry, to enable you to first understand the peril facing you, and then help you develop strategies to warn and protect your loved ones. Once you have been thoroughly trained, you can also use your knowledge as a means to open the door of discussion with an unsaved person. I have been able to use this knowledge many times, and have seen people come to Jesus Christ as a result. These perilous times are also a time when we can reach many souls for Jesus Christ, making an eternal difference.

If you are not born again, I encourage you to either E-Mail me so we can talk, or go to a Fundamental Bible-believing church in your area (we can help you find one), where someone can show you the blessed, and easy, Biblical way in which you are born again. Remember Jesus’ Words, “You must be born again …” (John 3:3-7).

If you have been blessed by this ministry, which seeks to educate and warn people, so that they can see the coming New World Order — Kingdom of Antichrist — in their daily news, then we need your support to stay on the Internet.

The sword is coming, and coming both quickly and with enormous power. But, most people, including most Christians, do not see it coming. Will you be a “Watchman On The Wall” with us? (Ezekiel 3:17-19, God’s most solemn warning)

Finally, we would love to hear from you.

You can contact us by mail or email.


God bless you, and may He maintain a “Hedge of Protection” around you and your family.

Return to currently in the news index to select additional articles.


Silenced people, Serge Monast: Project Blue Beam (murdered)

Here’s another soul destroyed, because of  Truth:


Project Blue Beam


By Serge Monast
Originally Published 1994

[Note: Serge Monast [1945 – December 5, 1996] and another journalist, both of whom were researching Project Blue Beam, died of “heart attackswithin weeks of each other although neither had a history of heart disease. Serge was in Canada. The other Canadian journalist was visiting Ireland. Prior to his death, the Canadian government abducted Serge’s daughter in an attempt to dissuade him from pursuing his research into Project Blue Beam. His daughter was never returned. Pseudo-heart attacks are one of the alleged methods of death induced by Project Blue Beam.]

[Update from Ken Adachi: February 17, 2009: I’m only begininng to now fully grasp the entire breath of Serge Monast’s contributions to humanity and the unbelieveable courage he demonstrated in coming out with these incredible revelations which were secretly or anonymously given to him by contrite politicians, military people, or intelligence people who still possessed a conscience and a sense of humanity.

A required companion piece to this article is an astoundingly accurate prophetic discourse presented by Serge in 1994 to the Canadian Free Press of Quebec, Canada. The plannned NASA/Illuminati script that Serge revealed in that 1994 talk could be taken directly from today’s headline news. The transcript of that talk is found here: http://educate-yourself.org/cn/sergemonast1994transcript.shtml

(ca. Dec 1996)

from: http://www.despatch.cth.com.au/Despatch/vol91_Concern.html

A member of our accountability structure, Dorothy Dart, reports that a Canadian investigator into New Age globalism, SERGE MONAST, has died of a “heart attack.” This man has faithfully exposed the New World Order for the last decade. His children were home-schooled, so the authorities took his eight year old daughter away, then his seven year old son was taken, as they said the parents were abusing them emotionally by stopping the children going to a State school. The father was then arrested, and spent the night in jail. Next day at home, he had a “heart attack.” He was 46 years old. This brave man has left a wife, who now has no family. Pray that she can get her little ones back. Our source said that the Canadian investigator, Serge Monast, wrote to her in Australia not long ago, saying he had been threatened many times, and did not except to survive.]

NASA’s Project Blue Beam
By Serge Monast (1994)

The infamous NASA [National Aeronautics and Space Administration] Blue Beam Project has four different steps in order to implement the new age religion with the Antichrist at its head. We must remember that the new age religion is the very foundation for the new world government, without which religion the dictatorship of the new world order is completely impossible. I’ll repeat that: Without a universal belief in the new age religion, the success of the new world order will be impossible! That is why the Blue Beam Project is so important to them, but has been so well hidden until now.

Engineered Earthquakes & Hoaxed ‘Discoveries’
The first step in the NASA Blue Beam Project concerns the breakdown [re-evaluation] of all archaeological knowledge. It deals with the set-up, with artificially created earthquakes at certain precise locations on the planet, of supposedly new discoveries which will finally explain to all people the “error” of all fundamental religious doctrines. The falsification of this information will be used to make all nations believe that their religious doctrines have been misunderstood for centuries and misinterpreted. Psychological preparations for that first step have already been implemented with the film, ‘2001: A Space Odyssey;’ the StarTrek series, and ‘Independence Day;’ all of which deal with invasions from space and the coming together of all nations to repel the invaders. The last films, ‘Jurrassic Park,’ deals with the theories of evolution, and claim God’s words are lies. http://i.am/jah/evolut.htm

Hoaxed “Discoveries’
What is important to understand in the first step is that those earthquakes will hit at different parts of the world where scientific and archaeological teachings have indicated that arcane mysteries have been buried. By those types of earthquakes, it will be possible for scientists to rediscover those arcane mysteries which will be used to discredit all fundamental religious doctrines. This is the first preparation for the plan for humanity because what they want to do is destroy the beliefs of all Christians and Muslims on the planet. To do that, they need some false ‘proof’ from the far past that will prove to all nations that their religions have all been misinterpreted and misunderstood.

The Big Space Show in the Sky
The second step in the NASA Blue Beam Project involves a gigantic ‘space show’ with three-dimensional optical holograms and sounds, laser projection of multiple holographic images to different parts of the world, each receiving a different image according to predominating regional national religious faith. This new ‘god’s’ voice will be speaking in all languages. In order to understand that, we must study various secret services’ research done in the last 25 years. The Soviet’s have perfected an advanced computer, even exported them, and fed them with the minute physio-psychological particulars based on their studies of the anatomy and electromechanical composition of the human body, and the studies of the electrical, chemical and biological properties of the human brain. These computers were fed, as well, with the languages of all human cultures and their meanings. The dialects of all cultures have been fed into the computers from satellite transmissions. The Soviets began to feed the computers with objective programs like the ones of the new messiah. It also seems that the Soviets – the new world order people – have resorted to suicidal methods with the human society by allocating electronic wavelengths for every person and every society and culture to induce suicidal thoughts if the person doesn’t comply with the dictates of the new world order.

There are two different aspects of step two.

The first is the ‘space show.’ Where does the space show come from? The space show, the holographic images will be used in a simulation of the ending during which all nations will be shown scenes that will be the fulfillment of that which they desire to verify the prophecies and adversary events.

These will be projected from satellites onto the sodium layer about 60 miles above the earth. We see tests every once in a while, but they are called UFOs and “flying saucers” sightings.

The result of these deliberately staged events will be to show the world the new ‘christ,’ the new messiah, Matraia (Maitreya), for the immediate implementation of the new world religion. Enough truth will be foisted upon an unsuspecting world to hook them into the lie. “Even the most learned will be deceived.”

The project has perfected the ability for some device [referred to as “tractor beams” by ufologists].to lift up an enormous number of people, as in a Rapture, and whisk the entire group into a never-never land We see tests of this device in the abduction of humans by those mysterious little alien greys who snatch people out of their beds and through windows into waiting “mother ships.” The calculated resistance to the universal religion and the new messiah and the ensuing holy wars will result in the loss of human life on a scale never imagined before in all of human history.

The Blue Beam Project will pretend to be the universal fulfillment of the prophecies of old, as major an event as that which occurred 2,000 years ago. In principle, it will make use of the skies as a movie screen (on the sodium layer at about 60 miles) as space-based laser-generating satellites project simultaneous images to the four corners of the planet in every language and dialect according to the region. It deals with the religious aspect of the new world order and is deception and seduction on a massive scale.

Computers will coordinate the satellites and software already in place will run the sky show. Holographic images are based on nearly identical signals combining to produce an image or hologram with deep perspective which is equally applicable to acoustic ELF, VLF and LF waves and optical phenomena. Specifically, the show will consist of multiple holographic images to different parts of the world, each receiving a different image according to the specific national, regional religion. Not a single area will be excluded. With computer animation and sounds appearing to emanate from the very depths of space, astonished ardent followers of the various creeds will witness their own returned messiahs in convincing lifelike reality.

Then the projections of Jesus, Mohammed, Buddha, Krishna, etc., will merge into one after correct explanations of the mysteries and revelations will have been disclosed. This one god will, in fact, be the Antichrist, who will explain that the various scriptures have been misunderstood and misinterpreted, and that the religions of old are responsible for turning brother against brother, and nation against nation, therefore old religions must be abolished to make way for the new age new world religion, representing the one god Antichrist they see before them.

Naturally, this superbly staged falsification will result in dissolved social and religious disorder on a grand scale, each nation blaming the other for the deception, setting loose millions of programmed religious fanatics through demonic possession on a scale never witnessed before. In addition, this event will occur at a time of profound worldwide political anarchy and general tumult created by some worldwide catastrophe. The United Nation even now plans to use Beethovan’s ‘Song of Joy’ as the anthem for the introduction for the new age one world religion. If we put this space show in parallel with the star wars program we get this: combination of electromagnetic radiation and hypnosis which have also been the subject of intensive research. In 1974, for instance, researcher G. F. Shapits, said of one of the research proposals that, ‘…in this investigation it will be shown that the spoken words of the hypnotist may also be converted by electromagnetic energy directly and to the subconscious part of the human brain without employing any mechanical device for receiving or transcording the message, and without the person exposed to such influence having a chance to control the information input consciously. It may be expected that the rationalized behavior will be considered to have been taken out of their own free will.’

Anyone investigating so-called ‘channelling’ phenomena right now would be wise to take this area of research into consideration. It will be noted that those who think of themselves as ‘channellers’ has escalated rapidly since this type of research was conducted. It is uncanny how similar their messages are, despite which entity they claim to be their source of divine guidance. It would suggest any individual considering the credibility of channelled information should be discerning and critically evaluate where the message they are receiving originates, and if the messages are specifically beneficial to the new world order.

The Sydney Morning newspaper published an item on March 21st, 1983 which announced that the Soviets were invading the human mind, the article having been submitted to the foreign editor by Doctor Nathan Abnuengy, assistant professor in the faculty of agriculture in Asia. It is worth quoting the article at length even though his grammar is a little old. This article relates to the Soviets who created the supercomputer we were discussing earlier and which is really important because these types of computers can be run through satellites and through space. The computers were fed with all the different languages and their meanings, the dialect of all peoples were fed to the computers with objective programs. But we are no longer talking about the Soviets; we are talking about the United Nations, the minions of the new world order, who are feeding the computers with the necessary information.

The editor of the column in which the article appeared even states that the piece made points too important to ignore. I think it is possible that the persons who have created this mega-mind-control-program could sell the software to an organization and not be aware that the client might use the program and data to enslave all of humankind. Just imagine how far they have advanced since that article was published!

Artificial Thought & Communication
The advancement of techniques propel us toward the third step in the Blue Beam Project that goes along with the telepathic and electronically augmented two-way communication where ELF, VLF and LF waves will reach each person from within his or her own mind, convincing each of them that their own god is speaking to them from the very depths of their own soul. Such rays from satellites are fed from the memories of computers that have stored massive data about every human on earth, and their languages. The rays will then interlace with their natural thinking to form what we call diffuse artificial thought.

That kind of technology goes into the 1970s, 1980s, and 1990s research where the human brain has been compared to a computer. Information is fed in, processed, integrated and then a response is formulated and acted upon. Mind controllers manipulate information the same way a computer for grammar manipulates information. In January 1991, the University of Arizona hosted a conference entitled, ‘The NATO Advanced Research Workshop on Current and Emergent Phenomena and Biomolecular Systems.’ What does that mean exactly? It means this: We refer to one paper that was delivered at the conference which stands out for its different attitude towards the development under discussion at that time. It was, in effect, a protest and chilling warning to the attending scientists about the potential abuse of their research findings.

Their findings, of course, stated that the United States has already developed communications equipment which can make the blind see, the deaf hear and the lame walk. It can relieve the terminally ill from pain without the use of drugs or surgery. I’m not talking about science fiction. A man might retain the use of all his faculties right up to the moment of his death. This communications equipment depends upon a completely new way of looking at the human brain and neuromuscular systems and radiation pulses at ultra-low frequencies. Some of this equipment is now operational within the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), and Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI). It will never be used to make the blind see, the deaf hear and the lame walk because it is central to the domestic political agenda and foreign policy of George Bush and his puppet-masters of the new world order.

Domestically, the new communications equipment is being used to torture and murder persons who match profiles imagined to be able to screen a given population for terrorists; to torture and murder citizens who belong to organizations which promote tolerance and peace and development in Central America; to torture and murder citizens who belong to organizations who oppose the development and deployment of nuclear weapons, and to create a race of slave cult automatons, or what is popularly called ‘the Manchurian Candidates.’ Overseas experimentation is taking place on hostages held by the United States and Canada, Great Britain, Australia, Germany, Finland and France. Additionally, there has been a long series of bizarre suicides among British computer scientists, all of whom have had some connection to the United States Navy.

What is possible to ask before such a psychology of terror is this: would any government, corporation or psychiatrist wilfully promote such horror today? The answer is quite obviously, ‘Yes.’

Government agencies and the corporations that work with them toward a new world order are prepared to promote anything that will help them achieve their objective of total social control. As for the question of why: For one thing, if you terrify the public and make them fear for their safety, they will allow you to implement draconian law enforcement practice, disarm them and keep extensive records on them, and they only have to tell you that it is all to protect you, of course. Secondly, it promotes the decay of the present democratic forms of political systems, and leads societies to search for alternative methods of political ideology. Of course, the alternative has already been planned. It is called the New World Order and it will not have your safety or interests at heart. As George Bush said: ‘Read my lips.’ Fear has always been used by powerful elite to control and subjugate the masses.

The old maxim, ‘divide and conquer’, is being played out to the limit worldwide to ensure that everyone is frightened for their personal safety, and to be suspicious of everyone else. This, too, is mind-control. To go further in regard to the new technology which is at the base of the NASA Blue Beam Project, we have to consider this statement by psychologist James V. McConnell which was published in a 1970s issue of Psychology Today. He said, ‘The day has come when we can combine sensory deprivation with drug hypnosis and astute manipulation of reward and punishment to gain almost absolute control over an individual’s behavior. It should then be possible to achieve a very rapid and highly effective type of positive brainwashing that would allow us to make dramatic changes in a person’s behavior and personality.’

Now, when we talked before about that kind of ray and the telepathic and electronically augmented communication, the kind of rays that are fed from the memories of computers which store massive data about humans, human language and dialects, and we said that the people will be reached from within, making each person to believe that his own god is speaking directly from within his or her own soul, we refer to that kind of technology and that kind of thinking that same psychologist was espousing, that is: we should be trained from birth that we should all do what society wants us to do rather than what we want to do for ourselves; that because they have the technology to do it, no one should now be allowed to have their own individual personality. This statement and these ideas are important because it is the basic teaching of the United Nations that no one owns his or her own personality. And that same psychologist claims that no one has any say-so about the kind of personality they acquire and there is no reason to believe you have the right to refuse to acquire a new personality if your old personality is considered ‘antisocial.’

What is important in this declaration is that the new world order will be set up over the current system, meaning the old way of thinking and behavior and religion will be considered the ‘old’ and incorrect way of thinking and that they can change it at one of the eradication camps of the United Nations to make sure that anyone with this ‘antisocial’ behavior will be disposed of quickly so that other modified individuals will be able to fulfill the needs and agendas of the new world order without being distracted by the truth.

Could this be the greatest mind control project ever?

The NASA Blue Beam Project is the prime directive for the new world order’s absolute control over the populations of the entire earth. I would suggest you investigate this information carefully before dismissing it as fanatic lunacy. If we go further in the different reports we have presented, we find that the mind-control operations and technology include a transmitter that broadcasts at the same frequency as the human nervous-system, which transmitter is manufactured by the Loral Electro-Optical System in Pasadena, California. Loral, a major defense contractor, has previously conducted research on directed energy weapons for Lt. Gen. Leonard Perez of the U. S. Air Force who was searching for a weapon that could implant messages into the minds of the enemy while urging his own troops on to superhuman deeds of valor! The device employs electromagnetic radiation of gigahertz frequencies [microwaves] pulsed at extremely low frequencies (ELF). It is used to torture people both physically and mentally from a distance.

Weapons of this type are thought to have been used against a British woman protesting the presence of American Cruise Missiles at Greenham Common Airbase during the 1970s. This weapon can be used to induce total sensory deprivation by broadcasting signals into the auditory nerve at such high power that it blocks the ability of the individual to hear themselves think!

The process employed by such ELF technology are described in various U. S. Defense Department publications, including one entitled, ‘ The Electromagnetic Spectrum and Low Intensity Conflict,‘ by Captain Paul E. Tyler, Medical Commandant, U. S. Navy, which is included in a collection entitled, ‘Low Intensity Conflict and Modern Technology Edict,’ by Lt. Col David G. Dean, USAF. The paper was delivered in 1984 and the collection published 1986 by Air University Press, Maxwell Airforce Base, Alabama. Another pulse microwave device can deliver audible signals directly to an individual while remaining undetectable to anyone else. The technology is very simple and can be built by using an ordinary police radar gun. The microwave beam generated by the device is modulated at audio frequencies and can broadcast messages directly into the brain. Now here we come to the NASA Blue Beam Project. The broadcasting of subliminal two-way communication and images from the depths of space correspond directly to that kind of technology.

In his book, ‘The Body Electric,’ Nobel Prize nominee Dr. Robert O. Becker describes a series of experiments conducted in the early 1960s by Allen Frie where this phenomena was demonstrated as well as later experiments conducted in 1973 at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research by Dr. Joseph C. Sharp who personally underwent tests in which he proved he could hear and understand messages delivered to him in an echo-free isolation chamber via a pulsed microwave audiogram which is an analog of the word’s sound vibration beamed into his brain. Becker then goes on to state, ‘Such a device has obvious application for covert operations designed to drive a target crazy with unknown voices or deliver undetectable instructions to a programmed assassin.”

Now figure out when we hear that voice from the new world messiah who would be speaking from space to all of the sane (?) people of the earth who might give instructions to zealots and religious fanatics, we would see hysteria and social mayhem on a scale never witnessed before on this planet. No police forces in the world, even as a combined front, could deal with the disorder that will follow! A 1978 book entitled, ‘Microwave Auditory Effect and Application,’ by James C. Lynn describes how audible voices can be broadcast directly into the brain. This technology could actually allow the blind to see and the deaf to hear. Instead, it has been turned into a weapon to enslave the world.

Allen Frie also reports that he could speed up, slow down or stop the hearts of isolated frogs by synchronizing the pulsed rate of a microwave beam with the heart itself. According to Dr. Robert Becker, similar results have been obtained using live frogs, which shows that it is technically feasible to produce heart attacks with rays designed to penetrate the human chest.

[EDITOR’S NOTE: Both the author of this report and his colleague died of ‘heart attacks’ only days apart. I should mention also that Dr. Becker does NOT participate in such research.]

It has been demonstrated that focused ultra high frequency UHF electromagnetic energy beams can be used to induce considerable agitation and muscular activity or induce muscular weakness and lethargy. Microwaves can also be used to burn human skin and aid the effect of drugs, bacteria and poisons or affect the function of the entire brain. These effects were all revealed at length by the CIA on September 21, 1977 in testimony before the Subcommittee on Health and Scientific Research. Dr. Sidney Gottlieb who directed the MK-Ultra program at that time was forced to discuss the scope of the CIA’s research to find techniques of activation of the human organism by remote electronic means. So this is something that exists right now, that has been pursued to its highest degree, that can be used from space to reach any person, anyplace on the face of the earth.

If we go deeper in that process of mind control over the people we find that the equipment and technology has been used to influence politics in a much more direct fashion. Michael Dukakis, the Democrat candidate running against George Bush in the 1988 election was targeted with microwave technology in order to impede his public speaking performance once the public opinion polls showed he posed a serious threat to Bush’s election prospects. He also claims that the equipment was used against Kitty Dukakis and drove her to the brink of suicide. In the Disneyland world of U. S. politics, a presidential candidate with problems such as these, would obviously lose their race to the White House. In the December 1980 edition of the U. S. Army Journal, called the Military Review, a column by Lt. Col John B. Alexander, entitled, ‘The New Mental Battlefield: Beam Me Up, Spock,’ provides further insight into the technical capabilities at the disposal of the comptroller. He writes:

“Several examples will demonstrate areas in which progress have been made. The transference of energy from one organism to another; the ability to heal or cause disease to be transmitted over a distance, thus inducing illness or death from no apparent cause; telepathic behavior modification which includes the ability to induce hypnotic states up to a distance of 1,000 kilometers have been reported.

The use of telepathic hypnosis also holds great potential. This capability could allow agents to be deeply planted with no conscious knowledge of their programming. In movie terms, the Manchurian Candidate lives, and does not even require a telephone call. ‘Other mind-to-mind induction techniques are being considered. If perfected this capability could allow the direct transference of thought via telepathy from one mind or group of minds to a select target audience. The unique factor is that the recipient will not be aware that thought has been implanted from an external source. He or she will believe the thoughts are original.”

This is exactly what we were talking about.

The third step in the NASA Blue Beam Project is called the Telepathic Electronic Two-Way Communication. Lt. Col John Alexander’s article continues:

“If it is possible to feed artificial thought into the multigenic field via satellite, the mind control of the entire planet is now possible. An individual’s only resistance would be to constantly question the motivation behind their thoughts and not act upon thoughts which they consider to be outside their own ideological, religious and moral boundaries.'”

Once again, it is wise to consider how television, advertising, modern education and various types of social pressure are used to manipulate those boundaries. It has been reported by Lt. Col Alexander who said, in the summary of his Military Review article,

‘The information on those kinds of technologies presented here would be considered by some to be ridiculous since it does not conform to their view of reality. But some people still believe the world is flat.’

Now, this means a lot, because if people do not believe this kind of technology is possible, or that it is science fiction, those people put themselves in great jeopardy, because on the night when those thousand stars will shine from space, during the night when the new messiah will be presented to the world, they will not be prepared and will have no time to prepare to save themselves against that kind of technology. They don’t believe and they won’t take time to prepare.

(This is exactly what happens to people who are convinced by Satan into believing that he doesn’t exist, so they have no defence against him. – JAH.)

Universal Supernatural Manifestations via Electronics
The fourth step concerns the universal supernatural manifestation with electronic means. It contains three different orientations.

One is to make mankind believe that an alien (off-world) invasion is about to occur at every major city on earth in order to provoke each major nation to use its nuclear weapons in order to strike back. This way, the United Nations Court will require that all those nations which launched nuclear weapons to disarm when the invasion is shown to have been false. And how will the United Nations know that the invasion was false? They will have staged it, of course.

The second is to make the Christians believe that the Rapture is going to occur with the supposed divine intervention of an alien (off-world) civilization coming to rescue earthlings from a savage and merciless demon. Its goal will be to dispose of all significant opposition to the implementation of the New World Order in one major stroke, actually within hours of the beginning of the sky show!

The third orientation in the fourth step is a mixture of electronic and supernatural forces. The waves used at that time will allow “supernatural forces” to travel through optical fibers, coaxial cables (TV) electrical and phone lines in order to penetrate to everyone at once through major appliances. Embedded chips will already be in place. The goal of this deals with global Satanic ghosts projected all around the world in order to push all populations to the edge of hysteria and madness, to drown them into a wave of suicide, murder and permanent psychological disorders. After the Night of the Thousand Stars, worldwide populations will be ready for the new messiah to re-establish order and peace at any cost, even at the cost of abdication of freedom.

Phasing Out Cash & Independence
The techniques used in the fourth step is exactly the same used in the past in the USSR to force the people to accept Communism. The same technique will be used by the United Nations to implement the new world religion and the new world order. A lot of people ask when this is going to happen and how they will accomplish the visions of the Night of a Thousand Stars, and the events that will point to the days when it will begin.

According to the many reports we have received, we believe it will begin with some kind of worldwide economic disaster. Not a complete crash, but enough to allow them to introduce some kind of in-between currency before they introduce their electronic cash to replace all paper or plastic money. The in-between currency will be used to force anyone with savings to spend or turn in their cash because they understand that people who have money and are not dependent upon them might be the very ones who will mount an insurrection against them. If everyone is broke, no one can fund a war of any kind: paper currency will cease to exist. This is one of the first signs.

But to implement the worldwide electronic money system, everyone in the world who might have money in the future, will have to have a way to transfer money electronically. Before that time, everyone will have spent, before the year 2,000, all of their cash, reserves and assets. Everyone has to be 100% dependent upon the Council for their existence. To prevent any kind of independence, the new world order has already implanted micro chips in wild animals, birds, fish, etc. Why? They want to make certain that the people who will not accept the New World Order will not be able to hunt or fish any where in the world. If they try, they will be tracked and traced by satellites, then hunted down and imprisoned or killed.

The new world order is already changing the laws of all nations to make everyone dependent upon a single food and vitamin supply. They are changing laws about religion and psychiatric disorders in order to identify anyone who is potentially threatening to the NWO. Those who are found defective will be sent to eradication camps where their organs will be taken and sold to the highest bidders. Those who are not killed outright will be used as slave labor or used in medical experiments. The goal of a dictatorship is to control everyone, everywhere on the planet, ruthlessly and without exception. That’s why the new technology being introduced everywhere is a technology for the control of the people. The technology of the 1940s and 1950s was used to help the people have an easier and more productive life.

The new technology is designed and built to track down and control people everywhere. This technology is being manufactured for a specific purpose and to refuse to see and recognize that purpose, which is to enslave the entire populations of the world, is to deny the emergence of the Antichrist and the establishment of the new world order religion and government. If you cannot see, if you cannot learn, if you cannot understand, then you and your family and friends will succumb to the fires of the crematoria that have been built in every state and every major city on earth, built to deal with you. No one is safe in a totalitarian police state!

Serge Monast



The Goals of Project Blue Beam

More on Project Blue Beam

The Project Blue Beam/British Israel Brain Wash from the Islamic Side (July 5, 2006)

The Coming “Official” Announcement of the Alien Presence on Earth

Recent Announced Developments in Hologram Technology (May 12, 2011)


Battle of Armageddon for establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind

This is very important information to us all:

Battle of Armageddon for establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind

Definition of Armageddon: A subtle-battle of catastrophic proportions between good and evil at the end of an era.


Unknown to most of us, the world is in the midst of a subtle-battle of good versus evil also known as Armageddon. It is being fought mostly in the subtle-dimension in all the regions of the universe including the Earth region (Bhūlok). The fraction of this battle that will play out in the physical plane will have catastrophic consequences for us. There is a possibility of reducing the effect of this Armageddon on humankind if we undertake spiritual practice, which is according to the six basic principles of spiritual practice.

Note: To understand this article it is recommended that you read the following articles:

1. Sattva, Raja and Tama, the three subtle basic components that make up the universe
2. Battle of good versus evil

This article has been updated as of 30 Jun 2013.

1. Introduction to the battle of Armageddon and World war 3

The world has been experiencing an increasing trend of natural disasters, terrorist activities, war and political upheavals over the recent past. There is no respite to this trend or any signs of slowing down. Quite a number of us may feel a sense of helplessness as we see our world lurch forward uncontrollably towards even tougher times. A number of seers such as Nostradamus, Edgar Cayce etc. have predicted turbulent and distressing times of cataclysmic proportions. There has also been much talk about a battle between the forces of good and evil that will play out around the times we live in.

We conducted spiritual research to explore the events in the subtle-dimension behind these alarming trends and what lies ahead for us.

The purpose of this article is to provide information uncovered through spiritual research about:

The SSRF defines the word ‘subtle world’ or ‘subtle dimension’ as the world which is beyond the understanding of the five senses, mind and intellect. The subtle world refers to the unseen world of angels, ghosts, heaven, etc. which can only be perceived through our sixth sense.

  • The spiritual forces at work that are orchestrating worldwide events and the times to come.
  • Measures that can be taken by humanity to minimise the impact of these events.

To some of us due to lack of any understanding about the spiritual realm, this article may seem fictional or almost like a fairy-tale. We have tried to be as objective as possible in narrating what we have perceived through an advanced sixth sense. It is also not our intention to alarm society, but to alert and caution it. It is our plea to society to take the time to understand this article and commence their spiritual practice.

These facts have been obtained from the Universal Mind and Intellect through the medium of the highly activated sixth sense of Mrs Anjali Gadgil, seeker of the Spiritual Science Research Foundation (SSRF). The information has been checked by H.H. Dr Athavale for accuracy. Along with this article, we recommend that you also read the article on the ‘Battle of good versus evil’.

2. What is a subtle battle?

Forces of good and evil have existed since the beginning of the universe. These forces exist mainly in the subtle-regions of the universe and influence the positive and negative forces on Earth almost completely. From time to time the subtle-forces of evil gain enough spiritual energy to attempt to establish a demonic kingdom in the universe. In current times, the balance of power between the forces of good and evil is 70% and 30% respectively. However the forces of evil in the universe have once again derived enough spiritual energy to attempt to establish a demonic kingdom. The fight that ensues is known as a subtle-battle or an Armageddon and its effects are being felt through all the regions of the universe. This battle began to erupt in the subtle in 1999 and a fraction of the battle will increasingly play out on the Earth plane with catastrophic consequences for humanity.

The seriousness of this subtle-battle (Armageddon) and the consequences for humanity will be of unprecedented proportions. It is for this reason; we have named this article Armageddon, which means a conflict of catastrophic proportions between good and evil. The result of the battle will be a defeat of the forces of evil and the establishment of an era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind in the Universe and on Earth also known as the Divine Kingdom. The era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind on Earth will last for about a thousand years. We have explained the salient features of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind further down in this article.

3. Principle behind the subtle battle of Armageddon

Most of us are unaware of the fact that many of the events on Earth, which affect us at an individual or collective level, have their root cause in the spiritual realm. Let us take the example of the recent rise in natural disasters.

The primary factor contributing to the increasing trend of natural disasters is spiritual in nature. Physical factors such as greenhouse gases contribute to only 30% of the problem. In other words, the governments of the world and non-government organisations (NGOs) policing the international community’s adherence to the Kyoto protocol, though highly commendable, would at best address only a fraction of the problem. Most attempts to fix problems only at a physical and mental level without taking into account the spiritual realm will be clumsy and inefficient.

The single most important spiritual factor contributing to the rise of natural disasters, terrorism and political upheaval is a rise in the Raja and Tama subtle basic components. This increase is primarily due to:

The entire world is like a puppet in the hands of positive and negative forces from the subtle-realm. Good people act as per the will of God, whereas the evil people are puppets in the hands of ghosts (demons, devils, negative energies, etc.). The good people on Earth will not be able to live in peace unless negative energies are overpowered. People with lower spiritual energy who are not necessarily good or bad are easily affected by ghosts and controlled by them. As a result, they too are under the control of ghosts and contribute to the Raja and Tama. In any case, they get caught in the crossfire between the good and forces of evil.

Another major cause for the rise in Raja and Tama is the state of society with regards to Righteousness (Dharma). According to an evolved Saint Adi Shankaracharya from India (8th – 9th century AD), Righteousness is that which accomplishes three tasks:

  1. Keeping the social system in an excellent condition
  2. Bringing about the worldly progress of every living being
  3. Causing progress in the spiritual realm as well

Spiritual progress is said to occur only when spiritual practice happens in accordance with the six basic principles of spiritual practice. More often than not, societies of the world have failed in meeting these three conditions. Negative elements in society significantly increase the rot eating away into the fabric of society.

4. The severity of the battle of Armageddon and World war 3

Unknown to most people, the Universe is in the midst of a subtle-battle of epic proportions. Most of this Armageddon is and will be fought in the subtle-realms. The battle in the physical realm i.e., on Earth is also mostly due to the subtle-dimension. Hence awareness about its occurrence is limited only to those who are highly spiritually evolved people on Earth.

Only a fraction of Armageddon will be experienced on Earth. But this fraction itself will be catastrophic and the cause of mass destruction. We will physically witness this fraction of Armageddon in the form of the unleashing of forces of nature and World War 3 where weapons of mass destruction will be used. The rise in natural disasters such as floods, earthquakes and volcanoes will be primarily due to the rise in Raja and Tama fuelled by unrighteousness on Earth. The people who precipitate the World War 3 will be under the control of higher level negative energies known as subtle-sorcerers (māntriks).

World war 3 intensity prediction

The following table shows the comparison in severity between the various World Wars taking into account both the subtle and physical aspects.

Name of the war


Severity of the subtle and physical battle

World War 1 1914 – 1918 30
World War  2 1939 – 1945 50
World War 3 2015 – 2023 70
Dissolution of universe End of Kaliyug 100

The above graph and chart gives us an understanding of the scale of the battle. To put things in perspective the combined physical and subtle-elements involved in World War 1 and World War 2 at its peak had a severity of 30 and 50 respectively. All the major disasters and terrorist activities of the past few years are tell-tale signs directly related to the subtle-battle. Higher level negative energies such as subtle-sorcerers possess individuals that have a mentality to harm society and carry out terrorist activities through them on mankind. The fact that the intensity of the battle will increase up to 70 units in 2017 gives us an indication of the severity of the battle. It will then rapidly come down to zero by 2023. 100 units is the intensity of the subtle-battle at the time of the dissolution of the Universe.

5. Who are the forces of good fighting this battle of Armageddon?

1993: In the ensuing battle of Armageddon, the forces of good are led by a Parātpar Guru (evolved spiritual guide of above 90% spiritual level) living on the Earth plane. At the start of the battle in 1993, only the Parātpar Guru and a few seekers were fighting the battle.

Their participation was entirely at a subtle-level. This means that all participants’ act automatically according to God’s wish without being aware that their acts were in fact a part of this battle of Armageddon. Thus all the participants are not conscious at the physical level of their involvement in the battle. The various acts during the course of the battle happen through them automatically as per God’s wish mostly at the subtle-level and to some extent in the physical dimension, like efforts for the spread of Spirituality.

2003: By 2003 the number of seekers of God accompanying the spiritually evolved guide in the fight rose to 35. Their role was mostly one of implementing God’s wishes in the gross tangible dimension. The forces of good progressively increased in quantity and quality as the subtle-battle intensified. The battle in the subtle is fought purely with spiritual power and has no physical element to it.

2004: From 2004 onwards the severity of the forces of evil and consequently of Armageddon stepped up considerably. Hence positive forces from the subtle-region of Heaven (Swarga) joined the battle. They helped in various forms beginning from yellow Divine Particles and progressing to particles of Divine consciousness (Chaitanya), frequencies of light and frequencies of colour of deities to counter the negative forces. This progressive change in form of the positive energies basically signifies that the forces from Heaven joining the battle are becoming more and more subtle and hence more powerful.

2008: From 2008 as the severity of Armageddon rose further, the forces from Heaven proved to be insufficient and hence their participation ceased.

2009 – 2013: In 2009, two spiritually evolved beings from the subtle-region of Maharlok (a higher region in the Universe) also joined the battle. By then approximately 400 seekers of God were fighting alongside the Paratpar Guru. In 2010, a third evolved being from Maharlok joined the battle. The participation of the evolved beings was in the form of Divine Particles progressing to subtle-frequencies, subtle-rays, divine frequencies and brilliant subtle-constellations in 2013. This meant that Divine help was getting progressively more subtle and powerful.

2014 – 2018: As the subtle-battle intensifies to 61 units in 2014, seekers fighting in Armageddon at a subtle-level will not be able to participate any longer as it would be beyond their spiritual capacity. They would not be able to receive and tolerate the immense spiritual energy supplied by God in order to meet the need of that level of battle.

In 2014, two more divine beings from the next higher region i.e., Janalok (a higher region in the Universe) will join the subtle-battle. Their participation will be in the form of divine particles progressing to subtle-frequencies, subtle-flames, auras of light to frequencies of light by 2018.

2019: Over the next few years up to 25 divine beings from up to the region of Tapolok (a higher region in the Universe) will join the battle against forces of evil from the 7th region of Hell. After that the number will gradually reduce because at this stage many Saints on Earth itself will have evolved.

Despite the reduction in the severity of the battle from 70 in 2017 to 48 in 2019, the number of divine beings participating in the battle will be 25 in 2019 compared to just 10 in 2017. This is because in 2019 in addition to the destructive work against the negative evil forces, positive work for the establishment for the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind also needs to be undertaken.

2021 2023: In 2021, the establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind will begin. In 2023, there will be arrival of particles from Satyalok, the subtlest and purest of the 14 main subtle-regions to help with the positive work taking place towards establishment of the Divine Kingdom.

2024: From 2024 onwards participation from the subtle positive regions will stop as it will no longer be required

6. Main stages in the battle of Armageddon

The battle of Armageddon being waged is mostly in the spiritual dimension. In addition it is also adversely affecting the world albeit mostly at an intangible level. The consequences of the subtle-war are mainly in the form of seeds sown for further rapid and progressive deterioration of the world at various levels. This works in two ways:

  • It decreases the overall sāttviktā in the world.
  • It enhances the hold of the forces of evil on mankind.

The main stages of Armageddon are described below:



1999 – 2012


  1. Battle of good versus evil in the subtle-world with some incidents in the physical realm which indicate its commencement.
  2. Battle at the physical level – negative energies prevent seekers from undertaking spiritual practice and creating obstacles in it.

2013 – 2015

Start of the battle in the gross

  • The tide of the battle of good versus evil at a subtle-level begins to change and the forces of good start to win.
  • Internal quarrels taking the form of small wars or clashes, commencement of riots within nations, revolt of the people against the system at a national level; though each incident may appear to be independent the root cause are higher level negative energies from the subtle-world.

Natural disasters

  • Increase in natural disasters

Battle in the physical realm

  • Commencement of the war with the evil-doers and anti-social elements at a physical, psychological and spiritual level.

2016 – 2018

Main battle in the gross

  • Third World War will take place
  • Large scale loss of life

Natural disasters

  • Natural disasters on a large scale

Fight with anti-social elements

  • Evil-doers and anti-social elements in society are eliminated at a physical, psychological and spiritual level.

2019 – 2022

Preparation for the Divine Kingdom

  • The tide of the battle of good versus evil at a physical level begins to change and the forces of good start to win.
  • Learning governance of the Divine Kingdom


Establishment of the Sattva predominant (Divine) Kingdom

From 1993 onwards, subtle-sorcerers began to sow the seeds for the degradation of society and acceleration of unrighteousness. In most cases, the world had already set the process of degradation in place. This was due to a rise in man’s materialistic nature and lack of Righteousness. Aided by higher level negative energies, the downslide increased in intensity and speed. Over time these seeds would take root and increase the rot in society. As society becomes more and more unrighteous, they play right into the hands of negative energies increasing the Raja and Tama in the environment. This increase in Raja and Tama will cause the destabilisation of the world as we know it and will culminate in natural disasters and  World War 3.

The following are examples of a few mechanisms that have already been set into motion by higher level negative energies. The chart also gives other events that will come to pass in the run up to the establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind.




The seed of intense domestic quarrels sown in society


The seed of increase in anti-social elements in society


The seed of increase in malpractices in places of worship which accelerate the increase of Raja and Tama. Places of worship contribute to the Sattva component in society. When malpractices happen there it reduces the sattvikta and thereby helps increase the Raja and Tama.


The seed of beginning of destruction of places of worship


The seed of steps by terrorists under the control of ghosts to destroy spiritual organisations


A high incidence of natural calamities


Havoc by floods and volcanoes


A massive earthquake in Pakistan


Countries in the Middle East razed to the ground in bomb blasts


America, China and Japan hit by war and an unprecedented loss of innumerable lives


Loss of supremacy of politicians and rush of mankind to Saints for their rescue


Decrease in the destructive process and predominance of particles of Divine consciousness in the environment


The seed of times conducive and complementary to the establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind created


Experience of pleasantness and enthusiasm in the environment


Settling down of the environment


Internal and external settling down of life


The seed of improved spiritual practice and spiritual journey towards God-realisation by seekers. Commencement of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind.


Note: At the current rate the world is going:

  • The probability of this catastrophe being avoided is 1%
  • The intensity may vary by +/- 10%
  • The timing of the event may vary by +/- 10% within the overall 25 year time frame.

6.1 World War 3

The Third World War will begin in 2015 and continue for about 9 years till 2023. The wars that will be fought within that period will all be linked. However it may not be readily apparent to the world. Towards the end of this period, weapons of mass destruction will be used. There will be an unprecedented loss of life where approximately 1/3rd of the population will perish and 1/3rd will experience suffering.  Some countries will be affected more than others. Needless to say in a highly interconnected world all countries will be affected. The Third World War will be triggered mainly due to religious fanaticism. Higher level negative energies will use this vulnerability in humans to push them over the edge and instigate nations to go to war with each other.

In all the three world wars (i.e., from World War 1 to World War 3) powerful negative energies from progressively higher regions of Hell have been the actual root cause instigating countries to go to war with each other. The following points elaborate on which subtle negative forces from the regions of Hell were responsible for instigating the World Wars.

  • World War 1: Subtle-sorcerers (māntriks) from the 2nd region of Hell.
  • World War 2: Subtle-sorcerers primarily from the 3rd region of Hell took part in the orchestration of the Second World War. Hitler for example throughout his tenure in power was possessed by a subtle-sorcerer from the 5th region of Hell. This was also the reason for his dramatic rise to power. Throughout his reign the subtle-sorcerer was fully manifest.
  • World War 3: Subtle-sorcerers from the 4th region of Hell will be behind the Third World War that will play out in the physical realm. However in the subtle-battle, subtle-sorcerers from the 7th region of Hell will take part.

Timetable of the 3rd World War and the establishment of the ‘Divine Kingdom’


Stages of World War 3
2015 Commencement
2016 – 2018 Rising victories of the unrighteous people under the forces of evil
2019 – 2021 Righteous and the unrighteous forces at par
2022 – 2023 Rising victories of the righteous people under the forces of good
2023 Onwards Establishment of the ‘Divine Kingdom’

‘Depending on the devotion of seekers to God, the timetable of the war between devotees (righteous) and the demonic forces (unrighteous) can change.’

– His Holiness Dr Athavale


6.2 Role of India in World War 3 and the battle of Armageddon

From times immemorial, India has been the spiritual centre of the world. Spiritual research has revealed that in the Armageddon that is unfolding, India will hold centre stage from a spiritual perspective. In the course of the war, negative forces will instigate neighbouring countries to attack India to destabilise the pivotal role that it will play. Approximately 50% of the Indian population will perish as a result.

7. Can this catastrophe be avoided?

The catastrophe that is predicted to take place is mainly because the basic subtle Raja-Tama component in the world has increased to such unprecedented levels, that urgent intervention by God is needed so that the world can be cleansed in order to be able to continue peacefully. It follows that if mankind makes a supreme effort to adapt its lifestyle to a more Sattva predominant one, the cleansing process will happen only in part. This can be achieved if the majority of humankind mends its ways drastically and reduces its contribution to Raja-Tama. It can be better and earlier done, if people focus on increasing the basic subtle Sattva component. Thus the catastrophe can only be avoided if people earnestly start to practise Spirituality. It is imperative that in order to make a difference, their spiritual practice needs to take a more universal form rather than a sectarian form.

Spiritual practice according to the six basic principles of spiritual practice is the most conducive means for growth in the current era. Religions that preach that their way is the only way to God run the risk of violating the six basic principles of spiritual practice.

Depending on our collective spiritual practice and also if some highly evolved Saints intervene, the year and severity of the events may change to some extent. Higher level Saints are able to change the destiny of the entire human race as They can change the course of events or even shorten the difficult times if they are pleased with the sincere efforts of seekers in their spiritual practice. Seekers of God who have through their spiritual practice attained a spiritual level of 60% and above will be protected to varying degrees.

8. Salient features of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind

The upside of the battle of Armageddon is that humanity will finally experience peace on Earth which will last for almost 1000 years and this era will be known as the ‘Divine Kingdom’. The battle will be a spiritual cleansing of the world preparing people for a new kind of sāttvik world which will be very different from the old one. In a way, this will be an ushering of a mini Satyayug within the main era of Kaliyug. While it will be nothing compared to the sattvikta of the main era of Satyayug (at the beginning of the universe), it will be a period of spiritual renewal for mankind.

The following are some of the features of the new era that some of us will have the privilege to usher in.

  • Spiritual level: After the reduction in the world’s population with Armageddon, the mode spiritual level of the world will rise to 30% compared to its present 20%. A dramatic 10% rise in spiritual level across the world’s population will be due to people at a lower spiritual level losing their lives during the war on Earth. Please read our article on spiritual level, which gives the current breakdown of the world population by spiritual level.
  • Importance in life: A high degree of importance will be given to spiritual knowledge and spiritual maturity in assessing a person’s ability. The objective of life for people will be skewed towards spiritual growth for the realisation of God.  There will be importance given to spiritual rather than physical or intellectual strength. Accordingly progress will not be measured in terms of riches. The view about wealth will change. It will be viewed as purely a means and not an end in itself.
  • Governing system: Democracy will lose its status as the preferred type of governing system. For example in India, a benevolent leadership under the guidance of a Saint will form the government. The modus operandi of leadership will be in line with Righteousness. There will be no need for elections. The seer guides of the governing body will transparently point out the leaders. The rest of the world frustrated with its failed experiments at communism, dictatorship and democracy will look to India’s example and try to implement this new type of government to the extent possible for them.
  • Closeness: There will be unity amongst all nations. People will feel a genuine closeness with other cultures and nationalities. This will stem from the spiritual maturity of the world’s population. It will be the basis of an innate spiritual understanding of the oneness of all of mankind.
  • Education: Education systems will include Spiritual science and codes of Righteousness in their curriculum. Modern science will expand its viewpoint to take into account the spiritual dimension.
  • Medical science: Medical sciences will be rewritten. They will now include the spiritual dimension in analysing the root cause of a problem. Āyurvēda will become commonly accepted in the western world. The attitude and perspectives of people practicing medicine will change. For example, they will begin to question if a patient is spiritually deserving of an organ transplant or a heart bypass. What will a person do with the reprieve granted to him by a successful surgery? Will he squander the extra years that he has by watching television, aimless chit-chatter, parties etc? Even after getting a reprieve people rarely think of utilising life for realising God (the basic goal of life). In other words they will be considered as increasing the burden on Earth. If one needs an extended lifespan for spiritual practice, God grants it automatically.
  • Judicial systems: Judicial systems and processes will change dramatically. Now we have courts of law, later we will have courts of justice. There will be no need for lawyers as judges will be spiritually evolved and will be able to intuitively perceive the truth in the issue at hand. Their highly activated sixth sense (ESP) will allow them to plainly see who is lying and who is telling the truth. In short justice will be served instantly and without spending a cent.
  • Art: Artists will not undertake art for the sake of arts, but as spiritual practice to get closer and take others closer to God.
  • Security: As a nation based on Righteousness is God-made, God only takes care of its security. This means that God Himself guides the leaders about the appropriate measures to be undertaken.
  • Environment: Nature is influenced heavily by man’s actions. As man becomes progressively sattvik through spiritual practice nature automatically becomes conducive to man. There will be a complete reduction in weird weather phenomenon that we are experiencing in current times.
  • Family planning: Governments will not need to undertake family planning policies.  There will be an automatic adherence to family planning in society. The holy Vedic scriptures have also advocated a single child but not because of fear of scarcity of food etc., but to impress the importance of control on lust so as to grow spiritually.

8.1 The importance of this era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind

We live in momentous times amidst changing of an era. This era is also very conducive for spiritual growth as detailed in the article on good and evil. Our prayer is that the seekers of God in this world reflect on this knowledge. We must bear in mind that with intense spiritual practice according to the six basic laws of spiritual practice we can reduce the intensity of Armageddon.


War is a Racket

Something about wars:

War is a Racket

[Editor’s Note: Smedley Butler is my idea of a true American patriot. Born into an upper class Quaker family from Pennsylvania, he dropped out of the elite Haverford School at age 16 in order to join the Marines with the outbreak of the Spanish American War against Spain (Cuba) in 1898. He lied about his age and was commissioned a second lieutenant. He was first wounded at Guantanamo; then fighting the Boxer Rebellion in China in 1900, in Hondurans in 1903 protecting  the American consulate, at the Battle of Veracruz, Mexico in 1914 and in Haiti in 1915. His bravery under fire earned him the Congressional Medal of Honor twice, along with top medals from the Marine Corps and the government of France (First World War).

His father, Thomas S. Butler, was a judge who became a US congressman for 31 years and was chairman of the House Naval Affairs Committee during the Harding and Coolidge administrations. Smedley’s high ranking within the military and his father’s high position within the government gave him the opportunity to see the Big Picture and the Money Boys behind the scenes. He learned in the first half of the twentieth century what I had only learned in the closing decade of that century. Simply stated : modern wars are maneuvered and engineered into existence in order to generate obscene profits for behind-the-scenes corporate manipulators whose sons and daughters never serve or die in those wars.

Regardless of age, after having served in the military (and especially in a war zone), you feel a sense of connectedness and camaraderie with all who have served or are currently serving. It’s frustrating to get derogatory mail from service personnel who are under the same delusions about the government and our “mission” that I had once assumed. Smedley Butler published this short book in order to SAVE the lives of young American military personnel, to SAVE the unnecessary tax yoke placed on the American citizen, and to preserve the sovereignty of this nation. He was a true patriot because he could recognize the truth from the mountain of lies that we are fed by the government and their stooges in the press. He wasn’t about to sit back in silence while the manipulators were setting the stage for World War Two.

In the six years prior to his death in 1940 (at age 58), he was actively trying to expose a plot by wealthy industrialists to take over control of the administration of Franklin D. Roosevelt in a military coup. Today, we know that such a ‘takeover’ of the country did occur during the Roosevelt administration, albeit in a silent and bloodless manner. Today we live with the legacy of that takeover and face the same daunting task of educating the American public to the misadventure of war and the reality of the betrayal at the Top…Ken Adachi]

By USMC Major General Smedley D. Butler (1881-1940)
Published 1935


Chapter One

Maj. General Smedley Butler, USMCWar is a racket. It always has been.

It is possibly the oldest, easily the most profitable, surely the most vicious. It is the only one international in scope. It is the only one in which the profits are reckoned in dollars and the losses in lives.

A racket is best described, I believe, as something that is not what it seems to the majority of the people. Only a small “inside” group knows what it is about. It is conducted for the benefit of the very few, at the expense of the very many. Out of war a few people make huge fortunes.

In the [First] World War, a mere handful garnered the profits of the conflict. At least 21,000 new millionaires and billionaires were made in the United States during the World War. That many admitted their huge blood gains in their income tax returns. How many other war millionaires falsified their tax returns, no one knows.

How many of these war millionaires shouldered a rifle? How many of them dug a trench? How many of them knew what it meant to go hungry in a rat-infested dug-out? How many of them spent sleepless, frightened nights, ducking shells and shrapnel and machine gun bullets? How many of them parried a bayonet thrust of an enemy? How many of them were wounded or killed in battle?

Out of war, nations acquire additional territory, if they are victorious. They just take it. This newly acquired territory promptly is exploited by the few – the selfsame few who wrung dollars out of blood in the war. The general public shoulders the bill.

And what is this bill?

This bill renders a horrible accounting. Newly placed gravestones. Mangled bodies. Shattered minds. Broken hearts and homes. Economic instability. Depression and all its attendant miseries. Back-breaking taxation for generations and generations.

For a great many years, as a soldier, I had a suspicion that war was a racket; not until I retired to civil life did I fully realize it. Now that I see the international war clouds gathering, as they are today, I must face it and speak out.

Again they are choosing sides. France and Russia met and agreed to stand side by side. Italy and Austria hurried to make a similar agreement. Poland and Germany cast sheep’s eyes at each other, forgetting for the nonce [one unique occasion], their dispute over the Polish Corridor.

The assassination of King Alexander of Jugoslavia [Yugoslavia] complicated matters. Jugoslavia and Hungary, long bitter enemies, were almost at each other’s throats. Italy was ready to jump in. But France was waiting. So was Czechoslovakia. All of them are looking ahead to war. Not the people – not those who fight and pay and die – only those who foment wars and remain safely at home to profit.

There are 40,000,000 men under arms in the world today, and our statesmen and diplomats have the temerity to say that war is not in the making.

Hell’s bells! Are these 40,000,000 men being trained to be dancers?

Not in Italy, to be sure. Premier Mussolini knows what they are being trained for. He, at least, is frank enough to speak out. Only the other day, Il Duce in “International Conciliation,” the publication of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, said:

“And above all, Fascism, the more it considers and observes the future and the development of humanity quite apart from political considerations of the moment, believes neither in the possibility nor the utility of perpetual peace… War alone brings up to its highest tension all human energy and puts the stamp of nobility upon the people who have the courage to meet it.”

Undoubtedly Mussolini means exactly what he says. His well-trained army, his great fleet of planes, and even his navy are ready for war – anxious for it, apparently. His recent stand at the side of Hungary in the latter’s dispute with Jugoslavia showed that. And the hurried mobilization of his troops on the Austrian border after the assassination of Dollfuss showed it too. There are others in Europe too whose sabre rattling presages war, sooner or later.

Herr Hitler, with his rearming Germany and his constant demands for more and more arms, is an equal if not greater menace to peace. France only recently increased the term of military service for its youth from a year to eighteen months.

Yes, all over, nations are camping in their arms. The mad dogs of Europe are on the loose. In the Orient the maneuvering is more adroit. Back in 1904, when Russia and Japan fought, we kicked out our old friends the Russians and backed Japan. Then our very generous international bankers were financing Japan. Now the trend is to poison us against the Japanese. What does the “open door” policy to China mean to us? Our trade with China is about $90,000,000 a year. Or the Philippine Islands? We have spent about $600,000,000 in the Philippines in thirty-five years and we (our bankers and industrialists and speculators) have private investments there of less than $200,000,000.

Then, to save that China trade of about $90,000,000, or to protect these private investments of less than $200,000,000 in the Philippines, we would be all stirred up to hate Japan and go to war – a war that might well cost us tens of billions of dollars, hundreds of thousands of lives of Americans, and many more hundreds of thousands of physically maimed and mentally unbalanced men.

Of course, for this loss, there would be a compensating profit – fortunes would be made. Millions and billions of dollars would be piled up. By a few. Munitions makers. Bankers. Ship builders. Manufacturers. Meat packers. Speculators. They would fare well.

Yes, they are getting ready for another war. Why shouldn’t they? It pays high dividends.

But what does it profit the men who are killed? What does it profit their mothers and sisters, their wives and their sweethearts? What does it profit their children?

What does it profit anyone except the very few to whom war means huge profits?

Yes, and what does it profit the nation?

Take our own case. Until 1898 we didn’t own a bit of territory outside the mainland of North America. At that time our national debt was a little more than $1,000,000,000. Then we became “internationally minded.” We forgot, or shunted aside, the advice of the Father of our country. We forgot George Washington’s warning about “entangling alliances.” We went to war. We acquired outside territory. At the end of the World War period, as a direct result of our fiddling in international affairs, our national debt had jumped to over $25,000,000,000. Our total favorable trade balance during the twenty-five-year period was about $24,000,000,000. Therefore, on a purely bookkeeping basis, we ran a little behind year for year, and that foreign trade might well have been ours without the wars.

It would have been far cheaper (not to say safer) for the average American who pays the bills to stay out of foreign entanglements. For a very few this racket, like bootlegging and other underworld rackets, brings fancy profits, but the cost of operations is always transferred to the people – who do not profit.

Chapter Two


The World War, rather our brief participation in it, has cost the United States some $52,000,000,000. Figure it out. That means $400 to every American man, woman, and child. And we haven’t paid the debt yet. We are paying it, our children will pay it, and our children’s children probably still will be paying the cost of that war.

The normal profits of a business concern in the United States are six, eight, ten, and sometimes twelve percent. But war-time profits – ah! that is another matter – twenty, sixty, one hundred, three hundred, and even eighteen hundred per cent – the sky is the limit. All that traffic will bear. Uncle Sam has the money. Let’s get it.

Of course, it isn’t put that crudely in war time. It is dressed into speeches about patriotism, love of country, and “we must all put our shoulders to the wheel,” but the profits jump and leap and skyrocket – and are safely pocketed. Let’s just take a few examples:

Take our friends the du Ponts, the powder people – didn’t one of them testify before a Senate committee recently that their powder won the war? Or saved the world for democracy? Or something? How did they do in the war? They were a patriotic corporation. Well, the average earnings of the du Ponts for the period 1910 to 1914 were $6,000,000 a year. It wasn’t much, but the du Ponts managed to get along on it. Now let’s look at their average yearly profit during the war years, 1914 to 1918. Fifty-eight million dollars a year profit we find! Nearly ten times that of normal times, and the profits of normal times were pretty good. An increase in profits of more than 950 per cent.

Take one of our little steel companies that patriotically shunted aside the making of rails and girders and bridges to manufacture war materials. Well, their 1910-1914 yearly earnings averaged $6,000,000. Then came the war. And, like loyal citizens, Bethlehem Steel promptly turned to munitions making. Did their profits jump – or did they let Uncle Sam in for a bargain? Well, their 1914-1918 average was $49,000,000 a year!

Or, let’s take United States Steel. The normal earnings during the five-year period prior to the war were $105,000,000 a year. Not bad. Then along came the war and up went the profits. The average yearly profit for the period 1914-1918 was $240,000,000. Not bad.

There you have some of the steel and powder earnings. Let’s look at something else. A little copper, perhaps. That always does well in war times.

Anaconda, for instance. Average yearly earnings during the pre-war years 1910-1914 of $10,000,000. During the war years 1914-1918 profits leaped to $34,000,000 per year.

Or Utah Copper. Average of $5,000,000 per year during the 1910-1914 period. Jumped to an average of $21,000,000 yearly profits for the war period.

Let’s group these five, with three smaller companies. The total yearly average profits of the pre-war period 1910-1914 were $137,480,000. Then along came the war. The average yearly profits for this group skyrocketed to $408,300,000.

A little increase in profits of approximately 200 per cent.

Does war pay? It paid them. But they aren’t the only ones. There are still others. Let’s take leather.

For the three-year period before the war the total profits of Central Leather Company were $3,500,000. That was approximately $1,167,000 a year. Well, in 1916 Central Leather returned a profit of $15,000,000, a small increase of 1,100 per cent. That’s all. The General Chemical Company averaged a profit for the three years before the war of a little over $800,000 a year. Came the war, and the profits jumped to $12,000,000. a leap of 1,400 per cent.

International Nickel Company – and you can’t have a war without nickel – showed an increase in profits from a mere average of $4,000,000 a year to $73,000,000 yearly. Not bad? An increase of more than 1,700 per cent.

American Sugar Refining Company averaged $2,000,000 a year for the three years before the war. In 1916 a profit of $6,000,000 was recorded.

Listen to Senate Document No. 259. The Sixty-Fifth Congress, reporting on corporate earnings and government revenues. Considering the profits of 122 meat packers, 153 cotton manufacturers, 299 garment makers, 49 steel plants, and 340 coal producers during the war. Profits under 25 per cent were exceptional. For instance the coal companies made between 100 per cent and 7,856 per cent on their capital stock during the war. The Chicago packers doubled and tripled their earnings.

And let us not forget the bankers who financed the great war. If anyone had the cream of the profits it was the bankers. Being partnerships rather than incorporated organizations, they do not have to report to stockholders. And their profits were as secret as they were immense. How the bankers made their millions and their billions I do not know, because those little secrets never become public – even before a Senate investigatory body.

But here’s how some of the other patriotic industrialists and speculators chiseled their way into war profits.

Take the shoe people. They like war. It brings business with abnormal profits. They made huge profits on sales abroad to our allies. Perhaps, like the munitions manufacturers and armament makers, they also sold to the enemy. For a dollar is a dollar whether it comes from Germany or from France. But they did well by Uncle Sam too. For instance, they sold Uncle Sam 35,000,000 pairs of hobnailed service shoes. There were 4,000,000 soldiers. Eight pairs, and more, to a soldier. My regiment during the war had only one pair to a soldier. Some of these shoes probably are still in existence. They were good shoes. But when the war was over Uncle Sam has a matter of 25,000,000 pairs left over. Bought – and paid for. Profits recorded and pocketed.

There was still lots of leather left. So the leather people sold your Uncle Sam hundreds of thousands of McClellan saddles for the cavalry. But there wasn’t any American cavalry overseas! Somebody had to get rid of this leather, however. Somebody had to make a profit in it – so we had a lot of McClellan saddles. And we probably have those yet.

Also somebody had a lot of mosquito netting. They sold your Uncle Sam 20,000,000 mosquito nets for the use of the soldiers overseas. I suppose the boys were expected to put it over them as they tried to sleep in muddy trenches – one hand scratching cooties on their backs and the other making passes at scurrying rats. Well, not one of these mosquito nets ever got to France!

Anyhow, these thoughtful manufacturers wanted to make sure that no soldier would be without his mosquito net, so 40,000,000 additional yards of mosquito netting were sold to Uncle Sam.

There were pretty good profits in mosquito netting in those days, even if there were no mosquitoes in France. I suppose, if the war had lasted just a little longer, the enterprising mosquito netting manufacturers would have sold your Uncle Sam a couple of consignments of mosquitoes to plant in France so that more mosquito netting would be in order.

Airplane and engine manufacturers felt they, too, should get their just profits out of this war. Why not? Everybody else was getting theirs. So $1,000,000,000 – count them if you live long enough – was spent by Uncle Sam in building airplane engines that never left the ground! Not one plane, or motor, out of the billion dollars worth ordered, ever got into a battle in France. Just the same the manufacturers made their little profit of 30, 100, or perhaps 300 per cent.

Undershirts for soldiers cost 14¢ [cents] to make and uncle Sam paid 30¢ to 40¢ each for them – a nice little profit for the undershirt manufacturer. And the stocking manufacturer and the uniform manufacturers and the cap manufacturers and the steel helmet manufacturers – all got theirs.

Why, when the war was over some 4,000,000 sets of equipment – knapsacks and the things that go to fill them – crammed warehouses on this side. Now they are being scrapped because the regulations have changed the contents. But the manufacturers collected their wartime profits on them – and they will do it all over again the next time.

There were lots of brilliant ideas for profit making during the war.

One very versatile patriot sold Uncle Sam twelve dozen 48-inch wrenches. Oh, they were very nice wrenches. The only trouble was that there was only one nut ever made that was large enough for these wrenches. That is the one that holds the turbines at Niagara Falls. Well, after Uncle Sam had bought them and the manufacturer had pocketed the profit, the wrenches were put on freight cars and shunted all around the United States in an effort to find a use for them. When the Armistice was signed it was indeed a sad blow to the wrench manufacturer. He was just about to make some nuts to fit the wrenches. Then he planned to sell these, too, to your Uncle Sam.

Still another had the brilliant idea that colonels shouldn’t ride in automobiles, nor should they even ride on horseback. One has probably seen a picture of Andy Jackson riding in a buckboard. Well, some 6,000 buckboards were sold to Uncle Sam for the use of colonels! Not one of them was used. But the buckboard manufacturer got his war profit.

The shipbuilders felt they should come in on some of it, too. They built a lot of ships that made a lot of profit. More than $3,000,000,000 worth. Some of the ships were all right. But $635,000,000 worth of them were made of wood and wouldn’t float! The seams opened up – and they sank. We paid for them, though. And somebody pocketed the profits.

It has been estimated by statisticians and economists and researchers that the war cost your Uncle Sam $52,000,000,000. Of this sum, $39,000,000,000 was expended in the actual war itself. This expenditure yielded $16,000,000,000 in profits. That is how the 21,000 billionaires and millionaires got that way. This $16,000,000,000 profits is not to be sneezed at. It is quite a tidy sum. And it went to a very few.

The Senate (Nye) committee probe of the munitions industry and its wartime profits, despite its sensational disclosures, hardly has scratched the surface.

Even so, it has had some effect. The State Department has been studying “for some time” methods of keeping out of war. The War Department suddenly decides it has a wonderful plan to spring. The Administration names a committee – with the War and Navy Departments ably represented under the chairmanship of a Wall Street speculator – to limit profits in war time. To what extent isn’t suggested. Hmmm. Possibly the profits of 300 and 600 and 1,600 per cent of those who turned blood into gold in the World War would be limited to some smaller figure.

Apparently, however, the plan does not call for any limitation of losses – that is, the losses of those who fight the war. As far as I have been able to ascertain there is nothing in the scheme to limit a soldier to the loss of but one eye, or one arm, or to limit his wounds to one or two or three. Or to limit the loss of life.

There is nothing in this scheme, apparently, that says not more than 12 per cent of a regiment shall be wounded in battle, or that not more than 7 per cent in a division shall be killed.

Of course, the committee cannot be bothered with such trifling matters.

Chapter Three


Who provides the profits – these nice little profits of 20, 100, 300, 1,500 and 1,800 per cent? We all pay them – in taxation. We paid the bankers their profits when we bought Liberty Bonds at $100.00 and sold them back at $84 or $86 to the bankers. These bankers collected $100 plus. It was a simple manipulation. The bankers control the security marts. It was easy for them to depress the price of these bonds. Then all of us – the people – got frightened and sold the bonds at $84 or $86. The bankers bought them. Then these same bankers stimulated a boom and government bonds went to par – and above. Then the bankers collected their profits.

But the soldier pays the biggest part of the bill.

If you don’t believe this, visit the American cemeteries on the battlefields abroad. Or visit any of the veteran’s hospitals in the United States. On a tour of the country, in the midst of which I am at the time of this writing, I have visited eighteen government hospitals for veterans. In them are a total of about 50,000 destroyed men – men who were the pick of the nation eighteen years ago. The very able chief surgeon at the government hospital; at Milwaukee, where there are 3,800 of the living dead, told me that mortality among veterans is three times as great as among those who stayed at home.

Boys with a normal viewpoint were taken out of the fields and offices and factories and classrooms and put into the ranks. There they were remolded; they were made over; they were made to “about face”; to regard murder as the order of the day. They were put shoulder to shoulder and, through mass psychology, they were entirely changed. We used them for a couple of years and trained them to think nothing at all of killing or of being killed.

Then, suddenly, we discharged them and told them to make another “about face” ! This time they had to do their own readjustment, sans [without] mass psychology, sans officers’ aid and advice and sans nation-wide propaganda. We didn’t need them any more. So we scattered them about without any “three-minute” or “Liberty Loan” speeches or parades. Many, too many, of these fine young boys are eventually destroyed, mentally, because they could not make that final “about face” alone.

In the government hospital in Marion, Indiana, 1,800 of these boys are in pens! Five hundred of them in a barracks with steel bars and wires all around outside the buildings and on the porches. These already have been mentally destroyed. These boys don’t even look like human beings. Oh, the looks on their faces! Physically, they are in good shape; mentally, they are gone.

There are thousands and thousands of these cases, and more and more are coming in all the time. The tremendous excitement of the war, the sudden cutting off of that excitement – the young boys couldn’t stand it.

That’s a part of the bill. So much for the dead – they have paid their part of the war profits. So much for the mentally and physically wounded – they are paying now their share of the war profits. But the others paid, too – they paid with heartbreaks when they tore themselves away from their firesides and their families to don the uniform of Uncle Sam – on which a profit had been made. They paid another part in the training camps where they were regimented and drilled while others took their jobs and their places in the lives of their communities. The paid for it in the trenches where they shot and were shot; where they were hungry for days at a time; where they slept in the mud and the cold and in the rain – with the moans and shrieks of the dying for a horrible lullaby.

But don’t forget – the soldier paid part of the dollars and cents bill too.

Up to and including the Spanish-American War, we had a prize system, and soldiers and sailors fought for money. During the Civil War they were paid bonuses, in many instances, before they went into service. The government, or states, paid as high as $1,200 for an enlistment. In the Spanish-American War they gave prize money. When we captured any vessels, the soldiers all got their share – at least, they were supposed to. Then it was found that we could reduce the cost of wars by taking all the prize money and keeping it, but conscripting [drafting] the soldier anyway. Then soldiers couldn’t bargain for their labor, Everyone else could bargain, but the soldier couldn’t.

Napoleon once said,

“All men are enamored of decorations…they positively hunger for them.”

So by developing the Napoleonic system – the medal business – the government learned it could get soldiers for less money, because the boys liked to be decorated. Until the Civil War there were no medals. Then the Congressional Medal of Honor was handed out. It made enlistments easier. After the Civil War no new medals were issued until the Spanish-American War.

In the World War, we used propaganda to make the boys accept conscription. They were made to feel ashamed if they didn’t join the army.

So vicious was this war propaganda that even God was brought into it. With few exceptions our clergymen joined in the clamor to kill, kill, kill. To kill the Germans. God is on our side…it is His will that the Germans be killed.

And in Germany, the good pastors called upon the Germans to kill the allies…to please the same God. That was a part of the general propaganda, built up to make people war conscious and murder conscious.

Beautiful ideals were painted for our boys who were sent out to die. This was the “war to end all wars.” This was the “war to make the world safe for democracy.” No one mentioned to them, as they marched away, that their going and their dying would mean huge war profits. No one told these American soldiers that they might be shot down by bullets made by their own brothers here. No one told them that the ships on which they were going to cross might be torpedoed by submarines built with United States patents. They were just told it was to be a “glorious adventure.”

Thus, having stuffed patriotism down their throats, it was decided to make them help pay for the war, too. So, we gave them the large salary of $30 a month.

All they had to do for this munificent sum was to leave their dear ones behind, give up their jobs, lie in swampy trenches, eat canned willy (when they could get it) and kill and kill and kill…and be killed.

But wait!

Half of that wage (just a little more than a riveter in a shipyard or a laborer in a munitions factory safe at home made in a day) was promptly taken from him to support his dependents, so that they would not become a charge upon his community. Then we made him pay what amounted to accident insurance – something the employer pays for in an enlightened state – and that cost him $6 a month. He had less than $9 a month left.

Then, the most crowning insolence of all – he was virtually blackjacked into paying for his own ammunition, clothing, and food by being made to buy Liberty Bonds. Most soldiers got no money at all on pay days.

We made them buy Liberty Bonds at $100 and then we bought them back – when they came back from the war and couldn’t find work – at $84 and $86. And the soldiers bought about $2,000,000,000 worth of these bonds!

Yes, the soldier pays the greater part of the bill. His family pays too. They pay it in the same heart-break that he does. As he suffers, they suffer. At nights, as he lay in the trenches and watched shrapnel burst about him, they lay home in their beds and tossed sleeplessly – his father, his mother, his wife, his sisters, his brothers, his sons, and his daughters.

When he returned home minus an eye, or minus a leg or with his mind broken, they suffered too – as much as and even sometimes more than he. Yes, and they, too, contributed their dollars to the profits of the munitions makers and bankers and shipbuilders and the manufacturers and the speculators made. They, too, bought Liberty Bonds and contributed to the profit of the bankers after the Armistice in the hocus-pocus of manipulated Liberty Bond prices.

And even now the families of the wounded men and of the mentally broken and those who never were able to readjust themselves are still suffering and still paying.

Chapter Four


WELL, it’s a racket, all right.

A few profit – and the many pay. But there is a way to stop it. You can’t end it by disarmament conferences. You can’t eliminate it by peace parleys at Geneva. Well-meaning but impractical groups can’t wipe it out by resolutions. It can be smashed effectively only by taking the profit out of war.

The only way to smash this racket is to conscript capital and industry and labor before the nations manhood can be conscripted. One month before the Government can conscript the young men of the nation – it must conscript capital and industry and labor. Let the officers and the directors and the high-powered executives of our armament factories and our munitions makers and our shipbuilders and our airplane builders and the manufacturers of all the other things that provide profit in war time as well as the bankers and the speculators, be conscripted – to get $30 a month, the same wage as the lads in the trenches get.

Let the workers in these plants get the same wages – all the workers, all presidents, all executives, all directors, all managers, all bankers –

yes, and all generals and all admirals and all officers and all politicians and all government office holders – everyone in the nation be restricted to a total monthly income not to exceed that paid to the soldier in the trenches!

Let all these kings and tycoons and masters of business and all those workers in industry and all our senators and governors and majors pay half of their monthly $30 wage to their families and pay war risk insurance and buy Liberty Bonds.

Why shouldn’t they?

They aren’t running any risk of being killed or of having their bodies mangled or their minds shattered. They aren’t sleeping in muddy trenches. They aren’t hungry. The soldiers are!

Give capital and industry and labor thirty days to think it over and you will find, by that time, there will be no war. That will smash the war racket – that and nothing else.

Maybe I am a little too optimistic. Capital still has some say. So capital won’t permit the taking of the profit out of war until the people – those who do the suffering and still pay the price – make up their minds that those they elect to office shall do their bidding, and not that of the profiteers.

Another step necessary in this fight to smash the war racket is the limited plebiscite to determine whether a war should be declared. A plebiscite not of all the voters but merely of those who would be called upon to do the fighting and dying. There wouldn’t be very much sense in having a 76-year-old president of a munitions factory or the flat-footed head of an international banking firm or the cross-eyed manager of a uniform manufacturing plant – all of whom see visions of tremendous profits in the event of war – voting on whether the nation should go to war or not. They never would be called upon to shoulder arms – to sleep in a trench and to be shot. Only those who would be called upon to risk their lives for their country should have the privilege of voting to determine whether the nation should go to war.

There is ample precedent for restricting the voting to those affected. Many of our states have restrictions on those permitted to vote. In most, it is necessary to be able to read and write before you may vote. In some, you must own property. It would be a simple matter each year for the men coming of military age to register in their communities as they did in the draft during the World War and be examined physically. Those who could pass and who would therefore be called upon to bear arms in the event of war would be eligible to vote in a limited plebiscite. They should be the ones to have the power to decide – and not a Congress few of whose members are within the age limit and fewer still of whom are in physical condition to bear arms. Only those who must suffer should have the right to vote.

A third step in this business of smashing the war racket is to make certain that our military forces are truly forces for defense only.

At each session of Congress the question of further naval appropriations comes up. The swivel-chair admirals of Washington (and there are always a lot of them) are very adroit lobbyists. And they are smart. They don’t shout that “We need a lot of battleships to war on this nation or that nation.” Oh no. First of all, they let it be known that America is menaced by a great naval power. Almost any day, these admirals will tell you, the great fleet of this supposed enemy will strike suddenly and annihilate 125,000,000 people. Just like that. Then they begin to cry for a larger navy. For what? To fight the enemy? Oh my, no. Oh, no. For defense purposes only.

Then, incidentally, they announce maneuvers in the Pacific. For defense. Uh, huh.

The Pacific is a great big ocean. We have a tremendous coastline on the Pacific. Will the maneuvers be off the coast, two or three hundred miles? Oh, no. The maneuvers will be two thousand, yes, perhaps even thirty-five hundred miles, off the coast.

The Japanese, a proud people, of course will be pleased beyond expression to see the united States fleet so close to Nippon’s shores. Even as pleased as would be the residents of California were they to dimly discern through the morning mist, the Japanese fleet playing at war games off Los Angeles.

The ships of our navy, it can be seen, should be specifically limited, by law, to within 200 miles of our coastline. Had that been the law in 1898 the Maine would never have gone to Havana Harbor. She never would have been blown up. There would have been no war with Spain with its attendant loss of life. Two hundred miles is ample, in the opinion of experts, for defense purposes. Our nation cannot start an offensive war if its ships can’t go further than 200 miles from the coastline. Planes might be permitted to go as far as 500 miles from the coast for purposes of reconnaissance. And the army should never leave the territorial limits of our nation.

To summarize: Three steps must be taken to smash the war racket.

We must take the profit out of war.

We must permit the youth of the land who would bear arms to decide whether or not there should be war.

We must limit our military forces to home defense purposes.

Chapter Five


I am not a fool as to believe that war is a thing of the past. I know the people do not want war, but there is no use in saying we cannot be pushed into another war.

Looking back, Woodrow Wilson was re-elected president in 1916 on a platform that he had “kept us out of war” and on the implied promise that he would “keep us out of war.” Yet, five months later he asked Congress to declare war on Germany.

In that five-month interval the people had not been asked whether they had changed their minds. The 4,000,000 young men who put on uniforms and marched or sailed away were not asked whether they wanted to go forth to suffer and die.

Then what caused our government to change its mind so suddenly?


An allied commission, it may be recalled, came over shortly before the war declaration and called on the President. The President summoned a group of advisers. The head of the commission spoke. Stripped of its diplomatic language, this is what he told the President and his group:

“There is no use kidding ourselves any longer. The cause of the allies is lost. We now owe you (American bankers, American munitions makers, American manufacturers, American speculators, American exporters) five or six billion dollars.

If we lose (and without the help of the United States we must lose) we, England, France and Italy, cannot pay back this money…and Germany won’t. So...

“Had secrecy been outlawed as far as war negotiations were concerned, and had the press been invited to be present at that conference, or had radio been available to broadcast the proceedings, America never would have entered the World War. But this conference, like all war discussions, was shrouded in utmost secrecy. When our boys were sent off to war they were told it was a “war to make the world safe for democracy” and a “war to end all wars.”

Well, eighteen years after, the world has less of democracy than it had then. Besides, what business is it of ours whether Russia or Germany or England or France or Italy or Austria live under democracies or monarchies? Whether they are Fascists or Communists? Our problem is to preserve our own democracy.

And very little, if anything, has been accomplished to assure us that the World War was really the war to end all wars.

Yes, we have had disarmament conferences and limitations of arms conferences. They don’t mean a thing. One has just failed; the results of another have been nullified. We send our professional soldiers and our sailors and our politicians and our diplomats to these conferences. And what happens?

The professional soldiers and sailors don’t want to disarm. No admiral wants to be without a ship. No general wants to be without a command. Both mean men without jobs. They are not for disarmament. They cannot be for limitations of arms. And at all these conferences, lurking in the background but all-powerful, just the same, are the sinister agents of those who profit by war. They see to it that these conferences do not disarm or seriously limit armaments.

The chief aim of any power at any of these conferences has not been to achieve disarmament to prevent war but rather to get more armament for itself and less for any potential foe.

There is only one way to disarm with any semblance of practicability. That is for all nations to get together and scrap every ship, every gun, every rifle, every tank, every war plane. Even this, if it were possible, would not be enough.

The next war, according to experts, will be fought not with battleships, not by artillery, not with rifles and not with machine guns. It will be fought with deadly chemicals and gases.

Secretly each nation is studying and perfecting newer and ghastlier means of annihilating its foes wholesale. Yes, ships will continue to be built, for the shipbuilders must make their profits. And guns still will be manufactured and powder and rifles will be made, for the munitions makers must make their huge profits. And the soldiers, of course, must wear uniforms, for the manufacturer must make their war profits too.

But victory or defeat will be determined by the skill and ingenuity of our scientists.

If we put them to work making poison gas and more and more fiendish mechanical and explosive instruments of destruction, they will have no time for the constructive job of building greater prosperity for all peoples. By putting them to this useful job, we can all make more money out of peace than we can out of war – even the munitions makers.

So…I say,



The greatest brainwashing organization to ever exist in the course of human history

Some information which no-one knows nothing. I just want to point out that everything is planned and organized:

The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations

 From Ken Adachi <Editor>
June 4, 2004

The authoritative expose of the greatest brainwashing organization to ever exist in the course of human history is now revealed in Dr. John Coleman’s latest book, The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations: Shaping the Moral, Cultural, Political, and Economic Decline of the United States of America. The Tavistock Institute is located in the City of London and at Sussex University in England.

Dr. John Coleman, Dr. John Coleman, the author of 15 books, the best known of which is Conspirators Hierarchy, The Committee of 300, was one of the the first writers to bring the world’s attention to the existence of Tavistock, hitherto unknown to press and pundits alike, in a monograph published in 1969. Since his initial 1969 revelations concerning the pivotal role that Tavistock plays in shaping political, social, educational, and economic ‘opinions’, especially in the United States, more than a few writers of global conspiracy have attempted to place laurels upon their shoulders for revelations about Tavistock’s key influence as the Mother of all Propaganda Ministries, while ignoring the fact that this pioneering work was first published  by John Coleman. Dr. Coleman’s new book, however, leaves no doubt as to who is the master and who are the students when it comes to the subject of Tavistock.

The book is stunning in the new knowledge that it reveals about the hidden role of British oligarchs to shape and control public opinion in order to manipulate the British public (and later the American public) into accepting the notion that war with Germany was necessary in order “to secure a lasting peace.”

The plan to ‘create’ public opinion began in 1913 as a propaganda factory centered at Wellington House in London. Sir Edward Grey, the British Foreign Secretary at the time, installed Lord Northcliffe (Britain’s most influential newspaper magnate) as its director. Lord Northcliffe’s position was over sighted by Lord Rothmere on behalf of the British Crown. The operational staff of Wellington House consisted of Lord Northcliffe, Arnold Toynbee (future director of studies at the Royal Institute of International Affairs), and the Americans, Walter Lippmann and Edward Bernays (nephew to Signund Freud).

Funding was initially provided by the Royal family, but soon to include the Rothchilds (related to Lord Northcliffe by marriage) and the Rockefellers. Wellington House would grow into the Tavistock Institute in 1921 after the propaganda “victories” of the First World War and the Federal Reserve banking system (created in 1913) had been secured.

(The Forward to the book is re-peinted below from Dr. Coleman’s web site)

Ken Adachi

Tavistock cover300w

The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations Shaping the Moral, Spiritual, Cultural, Political and Economic Decline of The United States of America


The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations was unknown to the people of the United States before Dr. Coleman exposed its existence in his monograph, The Tavistock Institute of Human Relations: Britain’s Control of the United States. Up to that time, Tavistock had successfully retained its secretive role in shaping the affairs of the United States, its government and its people since its early beginning in London, in 1913 at Wellington House.

Since Dr. Coleman’s original article exposing this ultra-secret organization, others have come forward with claims of authorship, which they were unable to substantiate.

Tavistock began as a propaganda creating and disseminating organization centered at Wellington House, which was where the original organization was put together with intent of shaping a propaganda outlet that would break down the stiff public resistance being encountered to the looming war between Britain and Germany.

The project was given to Lords Rothmere and Northcliffe and their mandate was to produce an organization capable of manipulating public opinion and directing that manufactured opinion down the desired pathway to support for a declaration of war by Great Britain against Germany.

Funding was provided by the British royal family, and later by the Rothschilds to whom Lord Northcliffe was related through marriage. Arnold Toynbee was selected as Director of Future Studies. Two Americans, Walter Lippmann and Edward Bernays were appointed to handle the manipulation of American public opinion in preparation for the entry of the United States into WWI, and to brief and direct President Woodrow Wilson.

From a somewhat crude beginning at Wellington House, grew an organization that was to shape the destiny of Germany, Britain and more especially the United States in manner that became a highly sophisticated organization to manipulate and create public opinion, what is commonly termed, “mass brainwashing.”

During the course of its evolvement, Tavistock expanded in size and ambition, when in 1937, a decision was made to use the German author Oswald Spengler’s monumental work, Untergange des Abenlandes (The Decline of Western Civilization ) as a model.

Previously, Wellington House board members Rothmere, Northcliffe, Lippmann, and Bernays had read and proposed as a guide the writings of Correa Moylan Walsh, in particular, the book The Climax of Civilization (1917) as corresponding closely to conditions that had to be created before a New World Order in a One World Government could be ushered in.

In this endeavor the members of the board consulted with the British royal family and obtained the approval of the “Olympians” (the inner core of the Committee of 300) to formulate a strategy. Funding was provided by the monarchy, the Rothschilds, the Milner Group and the Rockefeller family trusts.

In 1936, Spengler’s monumental work had come to the attention of what had become the Tavistock Institute. In preparation for changing and reshaping public opinion for the second time in less than twelve years, by unanimous consent of the board, Spengler’s massive book was adopted as the blueprint for a new working model to bring about the decline and fall of Western civilization necessary to create and establish a New World Order inside a One World Government.

Spengler held it bound to happen that alien elements would be introduced into Western civilization in increasing numbers, and that the West would fail at that time to expel the aliens, thereby sealing its fate, a society, whose inward beliefs and sound convictions would become at variance with its outward profession and thus Western civilization would fall by the wayside in the manner of the ancient civilizations of Greece and Rome.

Tavistock thinking was that Spengler had indoctrinated Western civilization to believe that it would err on the side of Roman civilization, and expel the aliens. The genetic loss that has fallen upon Europe-and especially on Scandinavia, England, Germany, France- (the Anglo-Saxon, Nordic Alpine Germanic races) that began just before the Second World War is already so great as to be beyond expectations, and continues at an alarming pace under the skilled guidance of the Tavistock managers.

What was a very rare instance became a common occurrence, a black man married to a white women or vice-versa.

The two World Wars cost the German nation almost one quarter of its population. Most of the intellectual energies of the German nation were diverted into war channels in defense of the Fatherland at the expense of science, arts, literature, music and the cultural, spiritual and moral advancement of the nation. The same could be said of the British nation. The blaze kindled by the British under the direction of Tavistock set all of Europe on fire, and did incalculable damage according to the Tavistock blueprint that matched Spengler’s predictions.

Classical and Western are the only two civilizations that could bring a modern renaissance to the world. They had flourished and progressed just as long as these civilizations remained under the control of the Anglo-Saxon Nordic Alpine, Germanic races. The unsurpassed beauty of their literature, art, their classics, spiritual and moral advancement of the female sex with a very large corresponding degree of protection, was what distinguished Western and Classic civilizations from others.

It was this bastion that Spengler saw coming under increasing attack and the thinking at Tavistock ran on parallel tracks, but with a totally different goal. Tavistock saw this civilizations a stumbling block to ushering a New World Order, as did the emphasis on protection and elevation of the female sex to a place of high respect and honor.

Thus the whole thrust of Tavistock was to “democratize” the West by an attack on womanhood, and the racial, moral, spiritual and religious foundation upon which Western civilization rested.

As Spengler suggested, the Greeks and Romans were devoted to the social, religious, moral and spiritual advancement and the preservation of womanhood and they were successful for just as long as they were in control and could arrange matters so that government was carried out by a limited number of responsible citizens supported by the general populace below them, all being of the same pure unadulterated race. The planners at Tavistock saw that the way to upset the balance of Western civilization was to force unwelcome changes in the race by removing control from the deserving to the undeserving in the manner of ancient Roman leaders who were supplanted by their former slaves and aliens, whom they had permitted to come and dwell among them.

Tavistock, by 1937, had come a long way from its Wellington House beginnings and the successful propaganda campaign that had turned the British public from being strongly anti-war in 1913 to willing participants through the arts of manipulation with the willing cooperation of news communications media.

The technique was carried across the Atlantic in 1916 to manipulate the American people to support of the war in Europe. In spite of the fact that the vast majority, including at least 50 U.S. Senators were adamantly opposed to the U.S. getting dragged into what they perceived was essentially a quarrel between Britain and France on the one hand, and Germany on the other, largely over trade and economics, the conspirators were undeterred. At that point Wellington House introduced the word, “Isolationists” as a derogatory description of those Americans who opposed U.S. participation in the war. The use of such words and phrases has proliferated under the expert brainwashing of the Social sciences scientists at Tavistock. Terms like “regime change,” “collateral damage” became almost new English language.

With the Tavistock plan modified to suit American conditions, Bernays and Lippmann led President Woodrow Wilson to set up the very first Tavistock methodology techniques for polling (manufacturing) so-called public opinion created by Tavistock propaganda. They also taught Wilson to set up a secret body of “managers” to run the war effort and a body of “advisors” to assist the President in his decision-making. The Creel Commission was the first such body of opinion-makers set up in the United States.

Woodrow Wilson was the first American president to publicly proclaim himself in favor of a Socialist New World Order inside a Socialist One World Government. His remarkable acceptance of the New World Order is found in his book The New Freedom.

We say “his” book, but actually, it was written by Socialist William B. Hayle. Wilson denounced capitalism. “It is contrary to the common man and it has brought stagnation to our economy,” Wilson wrote.

Yet, at the time, the United States economy was enjoying prosperity and industrial expansion as it had never experienced before in its history:

“We stand in the presence of a revolution—not a bloody revolution, America is not given to spilling blood—but a silent revolution, whereby America will insist upon recovering to practice those ideals which she has always professed, upon securing a government devoted to the general and not the special interests. We are upon the threshold of a time when the systematic life of the country will be sustained or at least supplemented at every point by government activity. And now we have to determine what kind of a government activity it shall be; whether, in the first place, it shall be directed from government itself, or whether it shall be indirect, through instrumentalities which have already constituted themselves and which stand ready to supersede government.”

The United States, harried, hounded, pushed and shoved is headed on a fast track to the New World Order, propelled along by the Radical Republicans of the War Party who have been taken over by the scientists at the Tavistock Institute for Human Relations.

Just recently I was asked by a subscriber “where do we find the Tavistock Institute?” My response was: “Look around the U.S. Senate, the House of Representatives, the White House, the State Department, the Defense Department, Wall Street, Fox T.V. (Faux T.V.) and you will see their change agents in every one of these places.”

President Wilson was the first U.S. president to “manage” the war through a civilian committee guided and directed by the Bernays and Lippmann from Wellington House, to which we have already made mention.

The resounding success of Wellington House and its enormous influence on the course of American history began before that in 1913. Wilson had spent almost a year tearing down the protective trade tariffs that had defended the American domestic markets from being overwhelmed by “Free Trade,” essentially the practice of allowing cheap British goods made with cheap labor in India to flood the American market. On October 12, 1913 Wilson signed the bill that was the beginning of the end of the unique American middle class, long the target of the Fabian Socialists. The bill was described as a measure to “adjust tariffs,” but it would have been accurate to describe it as a bill to “destroy tariffs.”

Such was the hidden power of Wellington House that the vast majority of the American people accepted this lie, not knowing or realizing that it was a death knell for American commerce that would lead to NAFTA, GATT and the World Trade Organization (WTO). Even more astonishing was the acceptance of the Federal Income Tax Act that was passed on September 5, 1913, to replace trade tariffs as the source of revenue for the Federal Government. Income Tax is a Marxist doctrine not found in the U.S. Constitution anymore than the Federal Reserve Bank is found in the Constitution. Wilson called his twin blows against the Constitution, “a fight for the people, and for free business,” and said he was proud to have taken “part in the completion of a great piece of business…” The Federal Reserve Act, explained by Wilson as “reconstructing the Nation’s banking and currency system” was rushed through on a flood-tide of propaganda emanating from Wellington House, just in time for the hostilities that began the horror of WWI.

Most historians are agreed that without passage of the Federal Reserve Bank Act, Lord Grey would not have been able to start that terrible conflagration.

The deceptive language of the Federal Reserve Act was under the guidance of Bernays and Lippman who set up a “National Citizen’s League” with the notorious Samuel Untermeyer as its chairman, to promote the Federal Reserve Bank, that secured control of the people’s money and currency and transferred it to a private monopoly without the victim’s consent.

One of the most interesting pieces of history surrounding the imposition of the foreign financial slavery measure was that before it was sent to Wilson for his signature, a copy was given to the sinister Colonel Edward Mandel House as the representative of Wellington House and the British oligarchy represented by the banker, J.P. Morgan.

As to the American people, in whose name the disastrous measure was instituted, they had not the faintest idea how they had been connived, cheated, lied to and utterly deceived. An instrument of slavery was fastened around their necks without the victims ever becoming aware of it.

Wellington House methodology was at its height when Wilson was coached in how to persuade Congress to declare war on Germany, although he had won election on the solemn promise to keep America out of the war then raging in Europe, a great triumph for the new art of public opinion making. It was just that – the poll questions were shaded in such away that the answers reflected the opinions of the public; not their understanding of the questions, nor their understanding of the processes of political science.



Audio letter No. 24

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC., Box 16428, Ft.
Worth, Texas 76133.

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is May 28, 1977
and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 24.  This issue concludes
the second year of the Audio-letter.  But only if we are blessed
by a true miracle, will the third year ever be completed, because
as I speak to you today a tragedy has already been set in motion
that is beyond human comprehension.  Not since last July and
August, 1976 when the Soviet Union began planting underwater
bombs and missiles in our own territorial waters has the
situation been so grave and urgent as it is now.  For that reason
I will dispense with any further introduction today in order to
discuss these three topics: Topic #1--The Fall of Babylon
Revisited; Topic #2--The Handwriting On The Wall For America; and

Topic #1--We live today in a world that grows more complex and
more confusing with each passing day, but in spite of that we
Americans are fond of praising ourselves for the great man-made
wonders of our age.  And whenever the obvious dangers to our
continued existence as a nation prey on our minds, we are always
reminded that we, the great United States, have already survived
fully two centuries since our Republic was founded.  And scarcely
a day goes by that we are not reassured by our rulers, elected
and otherwise, that we are the mightiest nation on earth.  Our
technology, we are told day in and day out, is so wonderful that
it is impossible that any other nation on earth, especially the
poor, backward Soviet Union, might surpass us in any important
way.  In other words, we are technologically impregnable.  And
lest we become prematurely concerned over the impact of the
recent radical changes in our weather, certain news reports
recently have told incredible lies to the effect that the United
States has a two-year surplus of grains in our storage bins.  In
all of this, the behavior of the United States today is like that
of countless civilizations before us--just before they perished. 
And in some respects the greatest similarity of all is with that
of ancient Babylon just before its abrupt fall from power.  The
origins of the United States, unlike Babylon, were strongly moral
and spiritual in content, and the system of government set forth
in the United States Constitution, which freed men in a way
unparalleled in human history, was conceived by men who
understood man's place within God's creation.  This heritage
still lives today in the hearts of many Americans, but it's
rapidly being snuffed out under the bondage of rulers who are
superimposing the pattern of ancient Babylon on our beloved land. 
The Babylonian pattern is totally evil, and those who choose to
bow down to such Satanic rule thereby make themselves part of it. 
The origins of ancient Babylon are lost in the midst of time,
perhaps 5,000 years ago, but it reached its peak around 600 B.C.,
at which time it was undisputed as the most powerful empire the
world had ever seen.  The City of Babylon was the Rome of its
day, the most important trading center, the most powerful
military force, the greatest cultural influence, and even a
center of tourism because of its remarkable hanging gardens and
other man-made wonders.  The huge city of Babylon was surrounded
by city walls so high and so thick that they were impregnable by
any military technology of that day; and inside the city there
was a two-year supply of food, making any attempted siege against
Babylon unattractive.  And there was no lack of water either,
because no less than the mighty river Euphrates ran through the
city.  Yes, Babylon was powerful, wealthy, and so secure in
material terms that potential adversaries were hardly even taken
seriously.  Even when it became clear that the increasingly
powerful joint empire of the Medes and the Persians had designs
on Babylon, there was no real concern.  With all their means of
protection against invasion and their unrivaled prosperity, the
Babylonian attitude was simply "It couldn't happen here."  And so
when the Medo-Persian army of Cyrus and Darius laid siege to
Babylon, the only response of the ruler of Babylon was
debauchery, feasting, drunkenness, and mocking any real power
greater than himself.  At this point, we're told, the Babylonian
feast was interrupted by the appearance of a hand in midair
writing words on the wall that said Babylon's rule was at an end,
that its ruler had been weighed in the balances and found
wanting, and that the kingdom would be divided and given to the
Medes and Persians.  The handwriting on the wall said the
impossible was about to happen--Babylon, the impregnable city,
was about to fall--How could this be?  No one in Babylon had ever
had experience with invasion and so could not imagine such a
thing; and yet, within a few short hours, before the drunken
feast even ended, the impossible happened.  First, the water
level in the mighty Euphrates river, flowing through the middle
of Babylon, started dropping rapidly.  It dwindled to a trickle,
and soon stopped altogether.  Cyrus, the Persian, had worked out
of sight of Babylon and had diverted the Euphrates out of its
normal channel.  Now the great impregnable walls of Babylon were
left with huge openings--namely, the river bed no longer filled
with water, and in marched the Medo-Persian army, conquering
Babylon without resistance.  And today, the United States is
under siege by the Soviet Union with the cooperation from within
of quislings.  We are threatened by the joint Rockefeller/ Soviet
empire just as Babylon was besieged by the joint Medo-Persian
empire.  And now, as then, we are told there is nothing to worry
about, "It just couldn't happen here."  But, my friends, just as
happened in ancient Babylon, the handwriting is now on the wall
for America.  The America we know today is a perversion of the
pattern originally laid down for our beloved land, and America as
we know it is about to come to an end.  And as with ancient
Babylon, WATER is our Achilles heel and the means by which we are
to be reduced to surrender without a fight.

Topic #2--Not long ago the Carter administration's Ambassador to
the United Nations, Andy Young, made the remarkable statement
that: "Communism has never been a threat to me."  He also has a
habit of patting Cuba on the back for the so-called 'stabilizing
influence' of Cuban troops in Africa, and otherwise has
repeatedly shown a very amiable attitude toward World Communism. 
Many Americans have wondered why Andy Young is allowed to go on
saying such things without being restrained in any way by Jimmy
Carter.  But Carter has now answered that, in a major foreign
policy speech given at the University of Notre Dame on May 22,
1977.  This speech is as important as the famous Iron Curtain
Speech of Sir Winston Churchill a generation ago at Fulton,
Missouri.  White House aides stated that the Carter speech at
Notre Dame was specifically intended to "send some messages to
foreign governments"--and it did.  The foreign press is filled
with headlines about the major turn that has just been taken in
American foreign policy.  Yet, here at home, many Americans have
not grasped what has happened.  The most basic theme of that
Carter speech is an elaborate echo of Andy Young's statement,
that is: "We are no longer afraid of Communism."  Is this because
Communism is withering and dying?  One need only look at a map to
see how fast Communism is eating up the world.  What Jimmy Carter
is telling us and the world, is 'We can get along with
Communism'; and just to prove it, one of America's most
important, efficient intelligence operations to keep an eye on
Soviet naval movements and other important matters is being
closed down.  This intelligence unit, known as Task Force 157 and
run by the United States Navy, has a budget of well under 1/10 of
1% of that of the CIA, and yet it is being shut down--supposedly
for budgetary reason.  Meanwhile the signs of war to come are all
around us.  So great are the dangers facing us that military men
are speaking up in increasing numbers in an effort to warn
America before disaster arrives.  Since they are subject to
military law and subordinate to civilians who do not want them to
speak up, it's no small thing to speak out in this way.  So,
consider what Major General John K. Singlaub said in an interview
on May 19, 1977.  General Singlaub, the third-ranking U.S. Army
General in Korea said: "If we withdraw our ground forces on the
schedule suggested, it will lead to war."  And why did General
Singlaub speak up?  His answer was: "The question asked after
United States setbacks in Korea and Vietnam was: 'Did the
military people in the know express themselves loudly and clearly
enough that the decision-makers understood?'  We want to make
sure."  In speaking this way, General Singlaub was doing no more
than expressing the consensus of practically every knowledgeable
military man about the Korean situation.  For example, the same
Washington Post article that quoted General Singlaub also quoted
another headquarters Army officer in Korea as saying about the
Carter plan to withdraw our troops: "I don't know anybody who is
not staggered by it.  There's no military or strategic logic for
withdrawal."  The plan to withdraw from South Korea, in other
words, is strictly political--in line with the newly-announced
American foreign policy that it is no longer afraid of Communism. 
The reason General Singlaub's words had such an impact in this
country is that his name was attached to his warnings.  The words
I just quoted from the other anonymous Army Officer are just as
startling as what General Singlaub said.  But people will just
read those words once, frown, and then forget about it.  But
everyone knows about General Singlaub's warnings because,
deliberately or otherwise, he allowed himself to be identified as
the source of the warnings; and, for daring to warn us, he was
promptly relieved of his Korean command by Jimmy Carter.  The
situation in Korea illustrates the direction in which events are
now moving, but other events are due to occur long before the
pullout of our troops from South Korea.  The real threat to our
security is no longer in Korea or in Europe but right here in our
own backyard.

   Another military man who is actively trying to warn America is
Major General George Keegan, who retired at the beginning of this
year as Chief of Air Force Intelligence.  General Keegan is one
of the West's greatest intelligence analysts, and the story he
has to tell should be continuous headline news throughout our
nation.  General Keegan has been speaking on radio and television
talk shows, giving speeches, accepting interviews--in short,
using every channel open to him in an effort to wake up America
before it is too late.  One of his most comprehensive and
important speeches was the one delivered on March 11, 1977, at a
press conference sponsored by the American Security Council here
in Washington, D.C.  To find out in more detail what General
Keegan had to say, I would urge every American to obtain a copy
of that speech.  Write to the American Security Council, Boston,
Va., 22713 for information.  It was published as the April 1977
Washington Report of the American Security Council.

   We're frequently told by syndicated columnists that the CIA is
our first line of defense, but General Keegan said in his speech:
"The ultimate function of a nation's intelligence is to render
carefully assessed judgments and forecasts regarding the threat. 
When I look back upon my experience with this nation's highest
estimating body, I have the impression of having taken part in a
Charles Dickens novel.  The sense of make-believe and unreality
has to be experienced to be believed."  Further on he says: "The
intelligence estimators, heavily dominated by the CIA and the
State Department, have been wrong about Soviet purposes in
pursuing detente.  They have been shockingly deficient in their
estimates of the risks and the advantages to the United States
and the free world of the so-called technology exchange with the
Soviet Union."  And he adds: "If there has been a Watergate in
this country, and there has been, but ignored, it has been in the
monumentally incompetent judgmental processes of this government
regarding the nature, character, and growth of the Soviet threat
as it has evolved from year to year."  General Keegan goes on to
make crystal clear that the deficiencies in our intelligence
estimates are not due to any lack of our ability to collect
information or to analyze it technically.  The problem, instead,
has to do with what is done with that information.  To begin
with, the intelligence estimation process at the highest levels
in America today is not objective, but is manipulated to fit
political purposes.  In General Keegan's words, and I quote: "The
United States intelligence estimative process cannot be
understood unless it is first appreciated that national
intelligence estimates must perform three functions.  First, they
must support the decisions of the President, both for the record
of history and for the avoidance of impeachment.  Second, they
must substantiate or help to justify the decisions of the White
House 'Office of Management and Budget.'  Finally, the
intelligence estimates must, whatever other purpose they may
serve, rationalize the foreign security policy initiatives of the
Secretary of State."  Continuing, General Keegan says: "I
appreciate that those are extremely important allegations to
make, but I submit to you today that it is not possible to
understand the workings of the United States intelligence
community unless one is willing to open his mind to the influence
of those three factors."  This situation is illustrated vividly
by General Keegan's discussion of the controversy over the Soviet
Back-Fire Bomber.  As I've told you for many months, the
Supersonic Back-Fire is an inter-continental strategic bomber,
capable of striking the United States with nuclear weapons. 
General Keegan says: "The central issue all along has been
whether this bomber posed a threat to the United States.  The
Soviets argued that it did not, and the CIA and State Department
rather consistently accepted the Soviet point of view."  General
Keegan proceeded to acquire analysis of the Back-Fire's
capability from "the most competent analysts in the free world." 
The available intelligence information was provided to three
American aircraft companies with experience building strategic
bombers--plus, for good measure, the Royal Air Force and the
Royal Aircraft establishment in England--and the results: "every
single one of these organizations independently agreed that the
Back-Fire had an intercontinental capability.  Yet my word was
not good enough, nor was that of the American and British
heavy-bomber designers and builders.  CIA and State chose to
believe the Soviets."  General Keegan is not in a position to
express it this way, my friends, but his description of the
Back-Fire controversy illustrates what I've been trying to tell
you over the months--that the Rockefeller cartel has more faith
in the Soviet Union than in our own United States.  Finally,
General Keegan explains, the sheer weight of analysis made it
more and more apparent that the Back-Fire was truly
intercontinental: "however, CIA and State now judged that the
Soviet Union had no intention of using the Back-Fire as an
intercontinental bomber"--this in spite of the fact that the
second model of the Back-Fire has been given even greater range. 
The history of the Back-Fire controversy up to this point is very
disgraceful, and still generally unknown to the American people. 
But listen now to the final chapter in General Keegan's words,
and I quote: "Seemingly undaunted by the most extensive analysis
of a foreign bomber ever performed in the United States, the CIA,
in one final, super-secret, uncoordinated effort, proceeded over
a period of 18 months to undertake an analysis designed to prove
that the Back-Fire Bomber could not reach the United States. 
This effort, in which small bits and pieces of controlled
information were provided to McDonnell-Douglas Aircraft, designer
and builder of fighters, represents one of the most artful
contrivances I have ever observed.  It is one which I suspect may
have been designed to salvage a SALT accord.  Finally, when the
CIA surprised everyone by surfacing its new analysis, months of
painful and extensive analysis were required to show that the
books had been rigged.  Artificially high G-loadings had been
assigned to the design of the Back-Fire along with excessive
engine-drag and other factors which were designed to reduce
range."  And this, my friends, is how our so-called first line of
defense, the CIA, looks after America's national security to the
tune of over twenty billion dollars a year.

   Elsewhere in his talk General Keegan also spells out the
dangerous manner in which our military intelligence capabilities
have been progressively over-centralized, compartmentalized, and
taken over by civilians "who understand little about the horrors
of war--and these are people who understand even less about
military doctrine, strategy, and weapons."  The product of all
these trends described by General Keegan is the very intelligence
gap that I discussed with General George S. Brown, Chairman of
the Joint Chiefs of Staff, when I met with him last September
(1976).  For years General Keegan has tried in vain to obtain a
series of post-mortem audits on the predictive and estimative
record of the United States intelligence community.  The audit
would be performed by qualified but disinterested outsiders with
no links to the intelligence community so that their work would
be unbiased.  Quoting General Keegan again: "Such audits would
record scrupulously where we had been wrong, where we had been
right, where we had fallen short of the mark or where we had
exaggerated.  Yet, every such suggestion had been met with
disdain and has been resisted in the most resounding vocal and
emotional way."  He might as well have asked for an honest audit
of Fort Knox.

   General Keegan's speech contains many more things than there
is time to discuss in this tape, and they're all important.  He
reveals many things about the military capabilities of both the
Soviet Union and the United States that you will never hear
through the usual news channels, but they all boil down to just
two major conclusions, backed up by many, many facts.  One
conclusion is that Soviet military capabilities vastly exceed
what we are being led to believe, both in terms of quantity and
quality.  The other conclusion is that the Soviet Union is firmly
convinced that a nation can fight a nuclear war and continue
afterward as a functioning society; and based on that conclusion
from a Soviet study undertaken after World War II, the Soviet
Union has for more than 20 years been preparing militarily to
fight and win a nuclear war.  The American approach, on the other
hand, is only to deter such a war, even though General Keegan
says: "I am unaware of a single definitive effort ever conducted
by the United States to determine precisely and in great detail
what it would take to deter."

   General Keegan also explains another very important
principle--it has to do with official judgments of the strategic
balance and carries over into public pronouncements by the
Pentagon.  This is the tacit rule requiring the use of so-called
'agreed national intelligence.'  Says General Keegan: "Agreed
national intelligence is derived by committee, contains little
that is controversial except in some footnote or dissent; and it
rarely contains meaningful reference to the dynamics of strategic
competition in terms of the new weapons, new forces, and new
capabilities being evolved by the Soviet Union."  Thus, whatever
new threats are involved, whether it be the awesome particle beam
weapon warned about by General Keegan or the Soviet underwater
missiles I've been warning about for nearly a year, Pentagon
disclaimers dare not be accepted at face value today without
challenge.  Those who accept these denials are playing straight
into the hands of our nation's deadliest enemies.

   Meanwhile the build-up toward the start of Nuclear War One is
gaining momentum.  Two months ago Nelson Rockefeller visited
Israel to help speed up the preparations for a Middle East war. 
By mid April, Israeli troops had begun massive maneuvers in the
Sinai with live ammunition, Reserves had been called up, and
Egyptian maneuvers were soon underway as well in the western
Sinai.  These maneuvers, headline news in Europe and Britain,
have gone unmentioned in the United States except for the crash
in the Sinai of a huge helicopter killing 56 Israeli soldiers. 
Then just a few days ago the extremists came to power by way of
the recent Israeli elections.  The Middle East is now a powder
keg as a result, and the Carter administration is rapidly
disengaging and disassociating itself from Israel.  So, when the
nuclear strike from the Sinai against Arab oil wells takes place,
it will not be recognized by the world or by most Americans for
what it really is.  Perhaps General Keegan was also right about
one other thing he said in his speech: "We have reached a point
in America where I believe we are almost incapable, culturally,
of being warned."  If so, my friends, it is we, the United States
of America, who will have been weighed in the balances and found
wanting, like ancient Babylon.

Topic #3--When the sun came up on southeastern Idaho one day
almost a year ago, it looked like the start of just another
beautiful late spring day.  It was Saturday, and two fishermen
were looking forward to a relaxing day in the shadow of the new
Teton Dam.  The Dam, over 300 feet high, had been completed the
previous fall except for a few finishing touches that remained,
and had been gradually filling up with water during the winter. 
Now, due to the run-off of melting snow in the mountains, it was
almost full.  Further down stream from the dam, tens of thousands
of people were going about their business.  Some puttered around
their houses doing weekend chores, while others were at work at
businesses or on farms; but for the construction crew who arrived
for work on the Teton Dam site that morning of June 5, 1976, it
was a different story.  At about 7:30 A.M. it was discovered that
a sizeable leak had sprung, not through the dam itself but
through the section of mountain on one side where the dam was
anchored.  This was reported immediately to the proper
authorities, who directed that steps be taken immediately to
start lowering the water level behind the Dam.  Why the leak had
appeared so suddenly was a puzzle, since inspection of the Dam by
personnel around nine o'clock the previous evening had turned up
nothing wrong.  But there was no time to solve this puzzle,
because soon a second leak developed.  Like the first, this
second leak also appeared to break through the anchoring mountain
side rather than the Dam itself.  Now the situation began to
deteriorate at an alarming rate.  Soon a leak found its way
through the earthen dam itself, and a growing torrent of water
gushed from it.  Two bulldozers raced to that location to try to
stop the flow by moving more earth into position, but the leak
grew so fast that the bulldozers were lost, the operators leaping
and scrambling to safety barely in time to save themselves.  Like
a nightmare come true, the Teton Dam crumbled, collapsed, and
released tons of water into the valley below.  The day ended
abruptly in tragedy for the two fishermen, and others who lost
their lives as well.  For two days, flood waters from that ruined
dam continued to spread, ultimately covering an area of 300
square miles including several towns and 50,000 acres of farm
land.  One of the major purposes of the Teton Dam, like many
others around our country, had been flood control.  Now the
man-made flood unleashed by the collapsed dam had caused damage
estimated to be in the range of $350- to $500,000,000 in addition
to the loss of life.  The bursting of the Teton Dam provided
America with a preview, on a very small scale, of what the Soviet
Union plans to do to our entire country.

   Last month in Audioletter No. 23 I reported hard intelligence
I had received to the effect that 21 major lakes and dams in 10
western states have hydrogen Soviet bombs planted in them.  But
the information I gave you then, my friends, was only the
beginning.  Since recording Audioletter No. 23, I have been under
an avalanche of ongoing intelligence reports concerning the
ongoing Soviet program of planting nuclear weapons in our inland
lakes and reservoirs.  I can now reveal that this Soviet program
began at a relatively slow, careful pace as much as 18 months
ago.  For example, a Soviet nuclear device was planted over a
year ago at a dam known as the Dalles on the Columbia River east
of Portland, Oregon, and it is still there now.  The Teton Dam
disaster appeared to be just a great big accident, but it brought
to everyone's attention the fact that dams can be made to
collapse under certain conditions and that the consequences are
devastating.  Meanwhile the border of Idaho with Canada has
become an important entry point for Soviet agents who are
bringing nuclear bombs into this country.  On Monday May 16, I
received an alert from my intelligence sources that Soviet agents
were at that time in the process of transporting nuclear weapons
into the northern United States by truck through several entry
portals along the Canadian border.  The greatest focus of that
activity was at the Idaho entry points of Porthill and Eastport. 
For the next several days I was in frequent contact with my
intelligence contacts in Canada who were taking very definite
action to find and stop these Soviet intruders; but here in the
United States our attention is being focused on our border with
Mexico by the manufactured distraction of illegal immigrants.  At
the same time, we are undergoing a wholesale invasion along our
border with Canada by the Soviet Union and not one thing is being
done about it by the United States.  By late that first day, May
16, at least 16 Soviet vehicles carrying nuclear weapons were
known to have crossed into the United States from Canada through
entry portals into Idaho and Montana; meanwhile 7 more were on
Canadian Highway 3 from Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada,
heading toward Porthill and Eastport, Idaho, to enter the United
States.  By that time the origination point in the Vancouver area
had been narrowed down to a barge in Horseshoe Bay.  The
Canadians took care of the situation on their side of the border
by stopping and inspecting trucks in the appropriate area, and by
early May 18 all seven trucks driven by Soviet agents had been
stopped and rounded up just short of the border.  At that point,
however, their next step was to wait for further instructions
from Ottawa, and I have not yet been informed as to what further
action was taken.  Meanwhile the only public hint of what was
going on was contained in a short item printed in Vancouver
newspapers on May 19.  It stated that trucks were being stopped
and searched along Route 3, but did not give the reason.  For my
Canadian friends, now you know!  But it was a different and sad
story here in the United States.

   The Federal government is taking no action whatsoever, proving
that there is a continuing collusion between the Rockefeller
empire and the Soviet empire.  At the State level, one would hope
that the chances of obtaining action would be a little better,
but so far that has not been the case.  Concerned citizens who
have tried to bring my warnings to the attention of their
Governors and other high State officials have encountered
basically two reactions--one is that "This is something for the
Federal government, so we'll refer it to them"; and of course
there it ends.  The other main response is to the effect:
"Naturally even if we did find a bomb in the lake next to the
dam, we would not make it public--after all, we don't want to
excite the people."  But, my friends, that is like an air raid
warden refusing to turn on the siren during an attack because it
might frighten people.  At the local level though, one would hope
that some action could still be expected, but No; during the
period of May 16 I tried in every possible way to get local and
state police in northern Idaho to simply check out some very
specific reports I had been given, but to no avail.  Several
Soviet trucks were known to be heading southward in northern
Idaho toward the town of Sandpoint, and I was informed of the
approximate positions where it should have been possible to
intercept them on the highway; but when I relayed these reports
to State and local police in the area, both directly and through
a brave local citizen in that area, it turned out to be
impossible to persuade them to take action.  As one police
sergeant told me, "We're wondering why the Federal government
hasn't stepped in on this."  And since they had not, even after
being notified, the assumption was that there must not be
anything to it, therefore it was not even going to be
investigated.  And so there, my friends, is a part of the
handwriting on the wall for America.

   Most all Americans have been tricked into accepting the idea
that only the Federal government counts or is able to do
anything, even though this idea is totally alien to our Republic
as originally founded.  All the Federal government has to do is
not act or to remain silent about a matter, such as Soviet
missiles in our waters, and people conveniently leap to the
conclusion that there must not be any missiles.  As General
Keegan says, we're becoming incapable of being warned; and, my
friends, if we don't snap out of it, we will suffer horribly. 
The fact that something was afoot in the area of our nation's
water supplies should have been realized four years ago when
Nelson Rockefeller started his "National Commission on Water
Quality."  This he started at the same time as his much better
known "Commission on Critical Choices for Americans."  And just
as the Commission on Critical Choices was absorbed into the
Federal government in everything but name, the same was done with
Rockefeller's Commission on Water Quality.  But even if it was
clear that water was to become a political tool in some way, I
doubt that anyone in his worst nightmares imagined what was
actually afoot.  Over the past several years, Federal and State
water quality control boards have built up a comprehensive and
up-to-date picture of our nation's water resources and
requirements--and all this data has been turned over to the
Soviet Union!  So now, the Soviets know exactly where and how to
strike at us through our Achilles' heel of water, just as the
Medes and Persians were able to calculate how to attack ancient
Babylon through its water source.

   In the alliance between the Rockefeller and the Soviet Union
empires, the Rockefeller brothers still want to rule the American
continent under complete dictatorship; and the Soviets still want
America to become their complete satellite--a nation of slaves. 
But the Rockefellers realized long ago that this country could
not be brought under the total control they desire without the
benefit of crushing disasters to force us into that mold.  And
the Soviets for their part realize that to extract the benefit
from America that they seek, it is not enough simply to conquer
us in war.  Afterward there must be a core of turncoat managers,
quislings, to run America for them.  Soon, the Rockefellers
expect to obtain the "Declaration of National Emergency" that
they want in response to events which can be triggered by the
Soviets.  The Declaration of National Emergency, they believe,
will make their dictatorship all but complete.  At the present
time the Soviet Union has at least 158 underwater missiles in our
territorial waters along our coastlines.  In addition, the Great
Lakes now bristle with smaller, single warhead Soviet underwater
missiles--a total of 53 as of my latest information.  The fact
that the Soviet Union has been able to invade the Great Lakes and
place missiles there is shocking; and it is even more shocking to
know that Soviet agents are fanning out all over the United
States, unhampered, to sow seeds of nuclear disaster throughout
our land.  It's hard for most people to imagine how such things
are possible; but as I know from my own sources, they are being
facilitated from within our country.  For example, one of the key
steps which has been taken by the Carter administration to permit
these things recently was publicly confirmed by former
Congressman John Rarick of Louisiana.  Congressman Rarick
publishes a very informative monthly newsletter entitled "You've
a Right to Know", about which you might write to him at: Drawer
E, Saint Francisville, La.  70775.  Quoting from his March 1977
issue, "The Soviets are hauling United States cargo in
intra-coastal shipping illegally against the provisions of the
Jones Act.  Russian vessels can be seen in the river loading from
barges, and also unloading on two barges, as if they constitute
an integral arm of the United States Maritime Service.  Barges
loaded by Soviets have been followed up the river through inland
waterways and small canals to where their cargoes have even
reached the Chicago market."  Congressman Rarick further reports
that the Soviets are able to get away with this because Secretary
of the Treasury Blumenthal waived the provisions of the Jones Act
as applied to Soviet vessels.  Thanks to such generous help from
within the United States has been thrown wide open to offensive
Soviet actions.  As a result the planting of nuclear devices in
our inland waters--rivers as well as lakes and reservoirs--is
mushrooming at a tremendous pace.  To begin with, additional
bombs have been planted in some of the huge dammed-up lakes that
I named last month.  For example, Hoover Dam had one bomb when I
recorded Audioletter No. 23, but now it has 3--one next to each
end of the Dam itself, the third upstream some distance from the
Dam.  Another example is Oroville Reservoir in California.  Last
month it had one bomb, now it has 4.  But more serious than this
overkill of a few dams is the vast number of targets throughout
America where Soviet bombs have been and are being planted.  City
water reservoirs of any significance throughout America are
targeted.  Many already contain bombs, while others are scheduled
to receive bombs from the many trucks fanning out across America
with Soviet agents at the wheel.  Flood control, irrigation, and
hydroelectric dams of all kinds are targets as well; and major
rivers are also being seeded with bombs at strategic points.

   To indicate the magnitude of the Soviet attack plan, I will
report the current status of just one state--Texas, which is a
major target.  As of my latest intelligence, over 100 bombs have
already been planted in Texas; and I have been provided so far
with a partial list that specifies 33 of the lakes involved. 
These are: Toledo Bend Reservoir, Sam Rayburn Reservoir,
Steinhillyers Reservoir, Lake Vernon, two lakes northeast of
Houston which provide water for the city, Conroe Lake, Somerville
Reservoir, Lake Waco, Lake Whitney, Malakoff Lake, Frankston
Lake, Lake Livingston, Millwood Reservoir, Lake Texarkana, Lake
O' the Pines, Cedar Lake, Lake Tawakoni, four water reservoirs
for Dallas and Fort Worth, Lake Texoma, Arbuckle Reservoir, Lake
Bridgeport, Hubbard Creek Reservoir, Lake Kemp, Lake Arrowhead,
O'Folla Reservoir, San Angelo Reservoir, Twin Buttes Reservoir,
Lake Thomas, and White River Reservoir.

   A number of rivers around the country are also known to be
involved already.  These include the Mississippi, the Missouri,
the Illinois, the Ohio, the Columbia, the Potomac, and the
Susquehanna.  In the Mississippi alone there are already 31 bombs
located near dams, and locks, and other strategic points.  The
farthest to the north is a bomb about 5 miles downstream of
Little Falls, Minnesota.  From there, they have all been planted
all the way down to New Orleans of Louisiana, where 2 bombs are
in the river.  There are also two other bombs near New Orleans at
the east end of Lake Pontchartrain.

   My friends, the Soviet Union is striving to be in a position
to suddenly, decisively rob America of our water resources. 
While we are distracted with arguments over weapons delivery
systems, such as bombers and missiles, the Soviet Union is
striving for the reliability of weapons that are already on site
at the target.  When war comes, the Soviet Union plans to be able
to just push a button, detonate nuclear weapons all over America,
devastate our country with floods and the pestilence that they
bring, and still have all their missiles and bombers still in
reserve.  But before war comes, the Rockefeller/ Soviet alliance
plan to lay the groundwork for a Declaration of National
Emergency in the United States.

   One option still available to them is war in the Middle East
causing a cutoff of Arab OPEC oil supplies.  But a horrendous new
capability is now in place as an alternate means for creating our
national emergency; and, my friends, there are ominous signs that
this capability is going to be used, very soon.  Lurking deep in
the waters around the Philippine Islands there are now 7
fission-fusion-fission bombs planted there by the Soviet Union. 
Such a bomb is essentially a hydrogen bomb with a jacket of
uranium 238.  When it's set off, the nuclear reaction converts
much of the jacket material to plutonium 239, which in turn
explodes as well.  The Soviet Union is the only nation that has
ever set off such a bomb--16 years ago on October 30, 1961.  In
doing so, they set an ugly record that still stands--the biggest
nuclear weapon ever fired in the atmosphere.  Its yield was
something over 50 megatons--that is 50 million tons of TNT, 2500
times as large as the atomic bomb dropped on Hiroshima. 
Theoretically, there's no limit to the yield of such a bomb, but
for 16 years it has been thought of in the West as unusable
because it produces such vast quantities of fall-out that it
would endanger the country that used it.  But the Soviet Union
has found a way to use it--deep under the ocean for geophysical
warfare in an environment where the radio-active products are
relatively confined, producing little fall-out.  The Philippines
sit like a keystone among a long arch of sub-sea trenches and
faults that comprise the most earthquake-prone areas on earth. 
Starting just north of New Zealand, a band of geological
instability runs northwestward toward the Philippines, then
northeastward past Japan to the Kamchatka Peninsula, eastward
along the Aleutians to Alaska, and then southward along the west
coast of the United States, Mexico, Central America, and onward
all the way to Chile.  This long, irregular zone around the
Pacific rim is often called the "Ring of Fire."  The 7 Soviet
bombs planted in Philippine waters are there for the purpose of
triggering major earthquakes, which, thanks to the peculiar
convergence of faults and trenches in that area, are intended to
work their way by chain reaction all around the Pacific rim,
devastating Washington State, Oregon, and California in the
process.  The 7 bombs in the Philippines are in the so-called
gigaton range--that is, each one is equivalent to a billion tons
of TNT--50,000 times more powerful than the Hiroshima bomb and
therefore big enough to trigger massive earthquakes.  And the
Soviets believe they can safely use such warfare, treaties or no
treaties, because most of the Soviet Union has no history of
earthquakes.  The Soviet gigaton bombs in the Philippines are
located at navigational coordinates which I will now reveal.  No.
1 is at 17-23-23 north, 117-7-23 east; No. 2 is at 14-48-48
north, 119-2-18 east; No. 3 is at 14-0-40 north, 118-23-53 east;
No. 4 is at 13-0-0 north, 117-42-8 east; No. 5 is at 12-0-54
north, 126-4-55 east; No. 6 is at 13-50-36 north, 125-21-45 east;
No. 7 is at 19-48-3 north, 123-51-57 east.  But to make sure that
our west coast is devastated by the effects of a seeming natural
disaster erupting in the Philippines, a series of 7 conventional
but large hydrogen bombs have been planted off our west coast by
the Soviet Union.  These can be set off in conjunction with those
in the Philippines, and at the right moment to produce tidal
waves which would sweep in from the Pacific with devastating
effect along our west coast.  Bomb No. 1 west of Seattle is at
48-0-0 north, 127-50-0 west; No. 2 west of Eugene, Oregon is at
43-29-18 north, 127-55-5 west; No. 3 west of San Francisco is at
37-8-45 north, 125-42-30 west; No. 4 west of Monterey is at
36-31-0 north, 125-26-30 west; No. 5, also west of Monterey, is
at 36-26-30 north, 124-56-0 west; No. 6 west of Los Angeles is at
33-25-15 north, 122-23-50 west; and No. 7 southwest of San Diego
is at 31-45-35 north, 120-36-0 west.  In my Audioletter No. 20
for January 1977, I referred to a warning document issued in
December 1975 by Mr. Tony Hodges of Hawaii.  In that document Mr.
Hodges presented evidence of the feasibility of underwater
missiles.  He also warned of the dangers of bombs on or in the
seabed designed to generate earthquakes or tidal waves. 
Unfortunately, it turns out that Mr. Hodges warnings were all

   The dictatorship and war plans are being speeded up now; the
world will be stunned by what will look like a massive, natural
disaster in the Philippines that also spreads around the Ring of
Fire to decimate our west coast.  And when it happens, Jimmy
Carter will have the excuse David Rockefeller wants him to have
to declare a National Emergency and in effect suspend the United
States Constitution.  The President's dictatorial emergency
powers spelled out in Executive Orders 11490 and 11921 will be
activated, and the complete bureaucracy of dictatorship set in
motion under circumstances designed to stifle all dissent; and
the elaborate prescriptions for complete governmental control of
all of our water resources spelled out in Executive Order 11921
will be activated under conditions which enable this to be sold
to the people as necessary for our best interest.  Soon
thereafter, with the Rockefeller dictatorship in place, Nuclear
War One itself is planned to come.  Dams and reservoirs all over
America are to be destroyed at one blow by the Soviet Union; and
the quislings from the Trilateral Commission, who now control the
Federal government, will use their control over what little
remains of our water supplies to make their domination of us
total.  The saddest thing about all of this is that only when it
happens will people believe.  By total exposure there is a chance
to prevent the West Coast disaster; but without exposure, there
is no chance whatsoever.

   My friends, it's only by the grace and power of our Lord Jesus
Christ that I've received the information I revealed over the
recent past; and it's my solemn duty to pass on this information
to you--it's not meant for me alone.  And in the same way, it's
not meant for you alone--it needs to be known by every one.  And
so, my friends, this completes two years of my monthly
Audioletters.  I want to thank you for all your words of
encouragement, your support, and especially your prayers.  Again,
thank you; and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 23

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


(This recording is a product of Audio Books, Inc., Box 16428,
Fort Worth, Texas  76133)

    Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is April 24,
1977, and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 23.

    Two months ago in Audioletter No. 21 for February 1977, I
explained how America had been turned into a nation-wide energy
addict over the course of two generations and more, and how this
energy addiction is to be used against us by the four Rockefeller
brothers in turning off our national security; and just four days
ago, on April 20, 1977, this process got under way in earnest by
way of David Rockefeller's revolutionary energy program announced
to the world by his employee, Jimmy Carter.  To the casual
observer it must seem incredible--a new administration under a
new President, with no previous experience in Washington, has in
only three short months done what no previous administration has
ever succeeded in doing: developed a comprehensive, detailed
energy program for the most complex economy on earth. 
Furthermore, Mr. Carter tells us that we must do as he tells us
in order to avoid "a national catastrophe"; and he says we must
act now.  Why the rush?  Why this sudden urgency?  And why does
he go out of his way to call his energy program "the moral
equivalent of war"?  The answer lies in what I warned you about
at the end of monthly Audioletter No. 22 just last month.

    The CIA is hard at work arranging what is to be the CIA's
crowning achievement--the staging of a horrendous act of
terrorism that is intended to cause war to erupt in the whole of
the Middle East.  This is to set in motion a modified, up-dated
version of the detailed war plan I revealed in monthly
Audioletter No. 6 for November 1975.  This plan includes a
limited nuclear strike from the Sinai to cap off Arab OPEC oil
wells except those in Libya, which is controlled by the CIA. 
This will lead immediately to very harsh energy rationing in the
United States, and the Federal government will at last get to
issue those precious gas rationing coupons that have been
awaiting use now for over three years.  So the Carter energy plan
with its underlying warlike atmosphere is actually the first step
in a gradual shift unto a war footing for the United States.  It
has the same purpose as the declaration of national emergency
which President Franklin D. Roosevelt proclaimed in May 1941, six
months before Pearl Harbor, to start getting America ready for
war he was helping to bring about.  The second major step in our
progressive shift onto war footing is intended to occur the time
of the cut-off of Middle East oil, by war.  This will provide a
perfect excuse for an actual Declaration of National Emergency,
and that in turn will activate all the dictatorial presidential
powers spelled out in Executive Order 11921 signed by President
Ford very quietly in June 1976, and described in my Audioletter
No. 14 for July 1976.

    Audioletter No. 14, of course, is also the issue in which I
first revealed the presence of Soviet underwater missiles and
bombs in our own territorial waters.  The terrible Middle East
incident now brewing, which I fervently hope and pray will
somehow be sidetracked by its advanced exposure, is to cause a
limited nuclear war in the Middle East.  That in turn is supposed
to initiate a chain of events, culminating in Nuclear War One
between the Soviet Union and the United States of America. 
Originally this was to have been a carefully programmed war for
the mutual benefit of the Rockefeller cartel and their Soviet
allies, with the Rockefellers and their intimates riding out the
war safely in the nuclear-safe zone across the northern United
States; but ever since the Soviet Union began its double cross of
the Rockefellers last summer 1976, the plans for war have been
undergoing frantic revisions.  Even the insane Rockefeller
concessions to the Soviets, embodied in the Red Friday agreement
of October 1, 1976 (which I revealed that month in Audioletter
No. 17) have failed to fully reinstate the Rockefeller/Soviet
alliance--so now anything can happen.  The Rockefeller brothers,
who for so long have tried to play God with their immense power,
are now finding out that they too are fallible and human, even if
they still refuse to consciously admit it.  Today, my friends,
the power of the Rockefeller empire is in the process of
destroying itself; but just as Samson pulled down the temple
around him, the Rockefeller brothers threaten to pull down modern
civilization around their heads as their power runs out of
control and collapses into the inferno of nuclear war.

    Earlier this month, on April 7, 1977, Prime Minister Rabin of
Israel resigned.  The press has played up his resignation as if
it were another Watergate, but actually it was only a
technicality having to do with a modest bank account held here in
Washington, D.C. by Rabin against government regulations. 
Overnight Rabin was out of office, and his public career has been
described as ruined; but the real reason for Rabin's lightning
exit from Israeli politics was that he learned of the CIA plot to
ignite war in the Middle East, and he wanted no part of it.  It's
almost a replay of Sir Harold Wilson's sudden unexplained
resignation as Prime Minister of Great Britain on March 16, 1976,
just over a year ago; and as I explained then in monthly
Audioletter No. 10, Wilson resigned because he had learned of the
coming war plan and wanted nothing to do with it.  And so the
build-up toward war continues, and our rulers know it.  But what
of the American public in general?  How many know what danger we
are in?  And especially, how many believe it enough to do
something about it?  My friends, most Americans today are on
vacation from reality, but reality will have to be faced one day
in the not too distant future.

    My three special topics for today are: Topic #1--THE PRE-WAR

Topic #1--In the early days of the 20th century the
Rockefeller/Standard Oil monopoly had already become supreme in
the United States, but abroad it faced two powerful competitors
in oil.  One was the British Empire, whose destruction by means
of two World Wars I've discussed in a number of my past talking
tapes.  The other foreign competitor was even bigger than the
British Empire in oil, and it was attacked and destroyed first. 
That competitor was Czarist Russia.  After the Bolshevik
Revolution took place in 1917, property owners and businessmen of
all kinds were dispossessed and liquidated in great numbers.  And
included in this, by design, was the utter destruction of the oil
fields, refineries, oil tankers, everything having to do with
oil.  The small band of revolutionaries under Lenin and Trotsky
who had been sent into Russia with the help of Rockefeller
financing had done their job well; and within a few years the new
Communist regime of the Soviet Union welcomed the
Rockefeller/Standard Oil interests with open arms to re-develop
the huge Russian oil reserves.  Ever since that day, right down
to the present, practically all of the oil leaving the Soviet
Union has been carried in oil tankers of the Rockefeller/Standard
Oil empire under various names, nominees, and national flags. 
For a thorough and most unusual expose of the oil competition
presented to the Rockefellers by Czarist Russia, I highly
recommend a new book by Robert V. Tolf, entitled THE RUSSIAN
INDUSTRY published by the Hoover Institution Press, Stanford
University, Stanford, Calif.  94305--the price is $15.95

    For decades following the Bolshevik Revolution, the Soviet
rulers were absolutely dependent upon an uninterrupted flow of
transfusions from the West of money, technical know-how, food,
and arms.  The Kremlin ruled a huge nation with an iron fist, and
the Rockefellers shared this rule with the Kremlin.  The Soviet
Union, therefore, appeared to be the perfect vehicle for bringing
the entire world under the control of the super-rich Rockefellers
and their intimates.  All that was necessary, or so they thought,
was to gradually build up the Soviet system while bleeding to
death the harder to control United States and the western world. 
This was the situation the four Rockefeller brothers inherited
long ago-they literally grew up with it, and could hardly imagine
things being any different.  But now things are different.  The
Soviet Union can now survive without continued outside help, and
now they have been double-crossing the Rockefellers and we the
people will have to suffer for it.  Now, both the Rockefellers
and the Soviets are maneuvering, playing a tricky game, and all
the while trying to emerge supreme from the conflict to come. 
But, just as it was planned before the Rockefeller/Soviet
alliance began coming apart, the main and prime battleground is
to be the United States of America.  The Soviet Union is busy at
work trying to weaken America here and abroad so that we can be
defeated in Nuclear War One; and the Rockefellers are trying to
turn our nation into a complete dictatorship under their
domination.  Both are trying to bend the weakening of America's
freedom to their own special advantage.

    The centerpiece of the Rockefeller program to completely take
over America right now is the so-called CARTER ENERGY PROGRAM. 
Recently the CIA s-u-d-d-e-n-l-y upgraded its estimates of Soviet
spending for new military equipment and installations to four
times the previous figure so as to alarm us.  In a similar vein,
the CIA has also provided Jimmy Carter with grist for his energy
mill to grind us into submission by issuing a report saying world
oil reserves are much lower than previously thought.  Both CIA
reports are rubbish, issued purely for propaganda purposes; so
the CIA under Admiral Turner, who is a Rockefeller man, is
continuing with the preparations for the limited nuclear strike
from the Sinai in order to get the war started.  American F-15
fighter bombers are now available in the Sinai and would hit all
of the five or more Arab target areas with ease; and the special
low-yield nuclear weapons for the job are already on the scene,
currently stored underground at the so-called American Monitoring
Station in the Sinai.  The bombs themselves are atomic, not
hydrogen, very clean, with primary blast effects confined to a
radius of only 300 to 400 yards--just right for a so-called
surgical attack to wipe out the oil wells in the target areas.

    As for America, even though the Alaskan oil is supposed to
start flowing through the pipeline this summer, it will not come
into the lower United States.  It happens to be high sulphur oil
of a type which west-coast refineries cannot handle even though
there have been ten years to get ready for Alaskan oil.  Instead,
the Rockefeller plan is to ship this oil to Japan at a handsome
profit, of course, and make up the difference with more imports
of, guess what--Arab oil.  When the Arab oil is cut off, there
will be some attempts to ship some of the otherwise useless
Alaskan oil to the Gulf Coast by small, inefficient tankers
through the Panama Canal, which is targeted both by underwater
missiles and by missiles in Guyana.  The sharp drop in our oil
supplies will also help to intensify the reduction in food
supplies, which is already resulting from drought here in
America.  Many factors are contributing to the drought situation,
including not only the Soviet weather modification activities
I've mentioned in the past, but also activities under Rockefeller
control.  For example, I mentioned in Audioletter No. 9 for
February 1976 that for years the Rockefeller oil companies have
been knowingly lowering the underground water table in many areas
of the Midwest and Great Plains by means of excessive pumping
from their oil wells; and now, in many of these very areas, the
problem of low ground water is adding to the drought crisis.

    Meanwhile, the Rockefellers never lose sight of their
objectives, no matter how much they are forced to change their
tactics along the way.  Their objective for America is
DICTATORSHIP, according to the pattern spelled out in their
secret New Constitution, which I revealed in my Audio Book
Talking Tape No. 4 released in July 1975.  Under the guise of
"governmental reorganization", the provisions of their
dictatorial new constitution are being imposed on the United
States piecemeal, gradually, while our real Constitution is
increasingly "interpreted" out of existence.

    But of all the things that determine whether a nation will
survive or succumb in time of crisis, the human spirit is still
the most important.  A strong spirit and deep resolve can
overcome seemingly insurmountable obstacles, and it can make a
people impossible to conquer; but a weak spirit, without
convictions or values, leaves a people defenseless--defenseless
no matter how much armor they may wear or what weapons they may
command.  This is why the human spirit has been the most
consistent target of all, both of the Rockefeller "One World"
group and of the rulers of the Soviet Union.

    Last month in Audioletter No. 22 I pointed out one of the
extremes in church philosophy that has been promoted wherever
possible for generations by the Rockefellers and their
collaborators.  This extreme is to divorce the moral and
spiritual lessons of religions from daily decisions and actions,
as if the two had no relationship to one another except for lip
service.  For whatever reasons, this extreme is personified today
by one Jimmy Carter.  The opposite extreme is equally deadly, if
not more so.  This is to dilute the spiritual teaching for which
churches originally existed and replace it with preaching about
economic, political, and social issues.  To do this is to play
with fire; but this is exactly what the National Council of
Churches and its sister organization the World Council of
Churches have been doing for decades.  Prior to November 28,
1950, the National Council was known as the Federal Council of
Churches.  For many years the Federal Council had been dominated
at the national level by the Rockefellers and their agent John
Foster Dulles, and was the recipient of several grants from the
Rockefeller Foundation.  But the Federal Council became so
totally identified with political activism in support of
socialist causes that it became an object of increasing distrust. 
Accordingly, the name was changed to the National Council of
Churches, and its tarnished halo was polished up with public
assurances that this was a new organization which would devote
itself to the real business of the church.  There were many
influential laymen in the churches under the umbrella of the
National Council who wanted to help insure that the supposedly
new organization would truly devote itself to proper areas of
church concern.  As a result, a National Lay Committee was
brought into being under the chairmanship of the late J. Howard
Pugh, a truly great American, who was the director and president
of the Sun Oil Co. when it was still free of the grasping
clutches of the Rockefellers.  The National Lay Committee existed
from March 28, 1951, until June 30, 1955.

    The whole story of what happened to the National Lay
Committee of the National Council of Churches is told in the
"Chairman's Final Report" by J. Howard Pugh.  Unfortunately this
important report has long been suppressed and buried.  I have in
my possession one of the very few copies still known to be in
existence; therefore I will read a few brief passages from the
Chairman's Explanatory Letter, which serves as a Foreword to the
Report as a whole.  These quotations are taken in sequence; and
although they do not do justice to Mr. Pugh's complete
explanatory letter, much less the entire 316-page Report, I
believe you will find them revealing:

   "In the failure of this most important effort to bring about
an enduring partnership between the clergy and laity, I feel a
very real responsibility to provide a comprehensive and factual
account of those steps which led to the Board's
action--discontinuing lay participation."

   "We lay people found ourselves not only deeply in the minority
but often poles apart from the clergy who invariably out-voted us
10 to 1 in these sessions."

   "The members of the Lay Committee were often misunderstood in
their urgency to keep the churches out of politics and their
insistence on the promisee evangelism.  Our premise was that
instead of appealing to government, the church should devote its
energies to the work of promoting the attributes of
Christianity--truth, honesty, fairness, generosity, justice, and
charity in the hearts and minds of men.  We attempted to
emphasize that Christ stressed not the expanded State, but the
dignity and responsibility of the individual."

   "Their philosophy, it seemed to the Lay Committee, looked to
an ever-expanding government."

   "With few exceptions, the members of the Lay Committee had
agreed to serve only because they had been assured that the new
National Council would avoid the political involvements and
controversies of the old Federal Council of Churches, which was
now superseded."

   "Most of the members of the Lay Committee came finally to the
realization that a wide chasm existed between the thinking of the
laity and the clergy and executives of the denominational bodies
which comprise the National Council."

   "Thus, on June 30, 1955, the Lay Committee ceased to exist as
a committee of the General Board."

   "The members of the Lay Committee believed, and so stated,
that the political adventures of the National Council in the
fields of economic and political controversy would seriously
hinder and not further Christian leadership in the pressing
fields of evangelism, fellowship, and education."

   "It appears from the record that the National Council could
find no room for opposition to the philosophies and practices
carried over from the old Federal Council.  Lacking the patience
to resolve the basic problem, it has sought to bury it."

Thus ended, my friends, more than 20 years ago the last major
effort to deflect the Rockefeller-dominated National Council of
Churches away from its political programs and toward concern for
spiritual matters.  After more than four years of frustrating
effort, the National Lay Committee was dissolved.  This signaled
the end of any influence of the general church population of
America on the policies of the National Council of Churches.  The
National Council proceeded on its way, proclaiming to the public
that it represented 34,000,000 Protestants, while using this
power base to help undermine our free Republic.  The National
Council has done much to help dull and weaken the spirit of
millions of Americans, softening our approach in opposition to
Communism.  Let us hope and pray that in these dangerous days
they will at last see the light and begin to work at last to
build up the American spirit, instead of destroying it.

Topic #2--In monthly Audioletter No. 15 for August 1976, I
explained that the planting of short-range underwater-launch
nuclear missiles in our territorial waters was part of the Soviet
naval strategy for the United States and world conquest.  The
same continues to be the case now.  Admiral Gorshkoff, who has
commanded the Soviet navy for more than 20 years, has built it
into a fighting force that is radically different from any other
navy the world has ever seen; and as we near the very threshold
of war, it is no accident that the Rockefeller insider who now
heads the CIA is also an Admiral--4-star Admiral Stansfield
Turner.  The CIA has become the most powerful military
organization in the United States, and Nuclear War One will
revolve around naval strategy.  Both the importance of the Soviet
Navy and its great difference from our own United States Navy can
be illustrated by just one fact: When the supersonic Backfire
long-range bomber entered operational service in the Soviet Union
late in 1974, it did so simultaneously with the Soviet Navy as
well as with the Soviet Air Force.  This is like giving our own
new supersonic bomber, the B-1, to our Navy to fly--or, since we
still do not have the B-1 to counter the Soviet Backfire, having
our navy fly B-52s.  Of course our own navy does not fly
strategic bombers.  The United States Navy, like the British Navy
and most of the other great navies of history, has as one of its
primary missions the protection of our sea lanes of commerce--a
war which is basically defensive in nature.  Since World War II
our navy has also acquired offensive missions which have
gradually assumed greater importance, including the ability to
attack an enemy from the sea with the submarine-launched
ballistic missiles.  But the traditional defensive mission of
protecting our sea lanes can never be neglected.  Admiral
Gorshkoff, however, has been able to concentrate on building a
navy which is almost totally offensive in character.  Soviet
fishing trawlers, some of them genuine, roam the world; but the
Soviet Union does not depend for its survival on the sea nearly
as much as the United States.  So the Soviet Navy is designed
first and foremost for offensive operations; and this not only
includes the ability to interdict enemy sea lanes and attack
enemy naval forces at sea, it also includes an unprecedented
emphasis on projecting naval power ashore.  This in turn means
not only the ability to carry out amphibious assaults and
tactical bombardment, but strategic attack--a role we usually
tend to think of only in terms of the Soviet Air Force with its
ICBMs and bombers.

    The new Soviet Navy of Admiral Gorshkoff also differs from
ours in another way.  Aside from missile submarines, the American
Navy is structured around the aircraft carrier; whereas the
Soviet Navy is built around the submarine.  American task forces
include all kinds of ships designed to coordinate with the needs
and capabilities of the aircraft carrier.  By the same token,
Soviet surface ships of all kinds are intended to support the
huge submarine force in various ways.  This applies even to the
new Soviet aircraft carriers which are now beginning to appear on
the scene since Soviet naval aviation is heavily oriented toward
anti-submarine warfare, although it has other capabilities as
well.  The relative naval capabilities of the Soviet Union and
the United States have never been considered in the Strategic
Arms Limitations Talks, the SALT talks, except with regard to
sea-launch ballistic missiles; and yet it is the coming naval
confrontation that could all by itself determine the outcome of
Nuclear War One.  It is often forgotten, for example, that the
North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) is primarily a naval
alliance.  We hear frequently about NATO in the controlled major
media of the United States as though the only problems were Army
problems--such as rusty tanks and lack of spare parts; and when
the Supreme Allied Commander, Europe, who is presently General
Alexander Haig, is mentioned in the news, he is often called the
head of NATO, or some such, but actually he's only one of three
co-equal Commanders in NATO.  The other two are Naval
Commanders--they are the Commander-in-Chief, Channel Command; and
the Supreme Allied Commander, Atlantic, the latter based at
Norfolk, Va.  NATO depends for its very life on its naval
strength, including the ability to keep open the vital North
Atlantic sea lanes.  But now, Soviet naval Backfire bombers with
air-to-surface, anti-ship missiles threaten to cut those North
Atlantic sea lanes in time of war; and the Mediterranean, which
was once dominated by the United States Navy, is now heavily
populated by the Soviet Navy as well.  While the Soviet Navy has
undergone explosive growth over the past decade to the formidable
armed force that it is today, the United States Navy has been
allowed to shrink to half its former size with more and more
ships aging and obsolescent.  When the Arab oil is cut off by war
soon, Europe will have to fall back on its meager reserves, which
will run out within 60 to 90 days.  Interdiction of NATO sea
lanes at that point by the Soviet Union could cause all of Europe
to fall like a plum into Soviet hands.  This is especially true
in light of the short-range Soviet underwater missiles in
European territorial waters, which I mentioned in Audioletter No.
22 last month.  So far only Great Britain shows signs of being
able to withstand such a course of events.  As I mentioned last
month, the British government had requested the latest missile
coordinates from me, and I had supplied them.  Of the 29 Soviet
missiles around the British Isles at that time, all but one had
been removed by the Royal Navy as of April 18--6 days ago. 
However, I have been informed of 3 newly planted missiles there,
and I have relayed these to the British for action.  Great
Britain also may have the benefit of her new North Sea oil fields
which, barring sabotage or the like, should make Britain
independent of foreign oil producers in the near future.

    Since I spoke to you last, action has been taken in another
area also.  Acting on information which I relayed, of the 8
missiles around southern Africa, seven have now been taken up. 
At last report, however, the missile lying off Mozambique
targeted on Rhodesia was still in place.  Such removals of
missiles are better than no action at all, but they are still no
more than holding actions.  What is needed, if war is to be
prevented, is for this deadly cat-and-mouse game to be stopped
altogether by revealing to the whole world what the Soviet Navy
is up to.  Late last September, as I revealed in monthly
Audioletter No. 16, the United States had a golden opportunity to
do just that, and to do so while the Soviet underwater missile
threat was only a small fraction of what it is now.  At that
time, a Soviet missile-laying mini-sub equipped with
sonar-defeating design features entered Chesapeake Bay and became
trapped there, due to a malfunction that ultimately killed the
crew.  It was a perfect opportunity for the United States to pick
up the sub, display it on television world-wide by satellite, and
tell the Soviet Union that the jig was up; but instead, as I
revealed in Audioletter No. 17 the following month, the Red
Friday agreement on October 1, 1976 reinstated a strained
alliance between the Rockefellers and the Soviets, and the Soviet
Navy was allowed to enter Chesapeake Bay under cover of darkness
and recover the mini-sub.  But now, a similar opportunity exists
once again--not in American waters but in those of Norway.  In
March 1977 a Soviet submarine entered the fjord of Folda on the
north coast of Norway.  The Norwegians detected its presence and
sealed off the exit to wait for the sub to surface.  On April 4,
1977, the story was broken in European press, although the
location was not mentioned.  To my knowledge, however, it has
received no mention anywhere in the United States.  I strongly
suggest to the Norwegian government that before the Soviet
submarine be allowed to escape, a search be made at the
navigational coordinates 64 35' 23" north, 10 23' 14" east.  This
location is not far from where the Soviet submarine is trapped
and is the site of one of the seven Soviet underwater missiles
that have been planted recently in Norwegian waters.  Should the
government of Norway so request, I will naturally provide the
other locations as well, through proper channels.

    As for the United States, there continues to be no effort at
all to clear our waters of the Soviet nuclear weapons which
threaten our country.  As of my latest report a few days ago, not
one of the 158 Soviet missiles and hydrogen bombs lurking in our
territorial waters has been removed, and I have not been
approached in any way by the United States government with
requests for their locations.  Meanwhile the Soviet plutonium
cloud attacks on the United States are still continuing by means
of the new canisters which are being deployed close to shore
along the West Coast, which I mentioned last month.  Of the 16
canisters which were deployed at the time I recorded Audioletter
No. 22 last month, 11 had been discharged as of April 15, but by
then there were 17 new ones.  At last report, these canisters are
being deployed along the entire West Coast from San Diego to
Seattle.  These are extremely easy and simple to deploy--for
example, they are dropped from aircraft flying under our radar
like the Soviet Bear bombers that we were told about by news
reports the other day.  They are also planted by Soviet trawlers,
since they are allowed to enter our new 200-mile fishing zone to
catch certain fish there.  The fact that this is being done was
proven by the arrested Soviet trawler Taras Shevchenko which was
carrying plutonium canisters in a compartment near the stern of
the ship.

    Thus the maneuvering in preparation for Nuclear War One
continues with a strong naval emphasis.  At one level,
Rockefeller agents in America appear to continue to cooperate in
the joint plan of conquest with the Soviets; but on the real
level the Soviets and the Rockefellers are both jockeying for a
decisive knock-out blow.  In this, time is on the side of the
Soviet Union, so they're trying to delay war slightly while the
Rockefeller brothers are trying to hurry it up; and to condition
us all for it, the Carter Administration is flexing its muscles
to show us how strong it is when it comes to the Soviets.  In
short order it has forcefully espoused Human Rights, handed the
Soviets an ultimatum on SALT talks, seized Soviet fishing
trawlers, chased Soviet Bear long-range turbo-prop bombers away
from the southeast coast of our country--and what's next?  A
photo of a Soviet submarine in our waters?  Already the
Rockefeller position has decayed further in the past several
months because of the further deterioration of their CIA undersea
super-missiles in the Atlantic and Pacific.  Of the fleet of 14
such missiles which I described in Audioletter No. 20, January
1977, all 5 in the Pacific have now sprung leaks and are no
longer usable.  Of the 9 in the Atlantic, 4 have now
failed--missiles #4, 6, 7, and 8.  That leaves only 5 of the
original fleet of 14 CIA missiles still available for Rockefeller
threats against their Soviet partners.  Meanwhile the Soviet
short-range missiles in our waters in the Atlantic and Pacific
Oceans and the Gulf of Mexico are now being used by the Soviets
to further weaken our position as a nation.

    But, my friends, that's not all.  For the very first time
Soviet missiles have now been planted in the Great Lakes.  From
there they now threaten Chicago, Racine, Milwaukee, Cleveland,
Bay City, Erie, Buffalo, Rochester, and other cities of our
industrial heartland.  At present there are exactly 50 such
missiles in the Great Lakes.  These, however, are single warhead,
short-range missiles, and are even smaller in size than the
multiple warhead missiles that have been planted along our East,
West, and Gulf Coasts.  As if this were not enough, I have just
been alerted that Soviet agents are now fanning out across
America planting small hydrogen bombs in selected inland lakes. 
The primary targets here are major dams, but some other targets
are also involved.  Since the Federal government refuses to take
action, it's imperative that State governments--especially those
in the West--take action now to protect their citizens.  Security
patrols around major dams and lakes should be beefed up
immediately and placed on full alert.  In addition, search
operations must be performed to locate those bombs that have
already been planted so that they can be removed.  Already,
Soviet underwater nuclear devices have been planted in 21 places
within the United States, and more are being planted.  Nineteen
(19) of the targets are dams, the other 2 are cities.  CALIFORNIA
has 4--Oroville Dam north of Sacramento, Castaic Dam north of Los
Angeles, Shasta Dam in north California, and Otay Reservoir Dam
near San Diego.  ARIZONA also has 4 bombs--Glen Canyon Dam,
Coolidge Dam, Theodore Roosevelt Dam, and Lake Pleasant Dam near
Phoenix.  NEW MEXICO has 3--the Navajo Dam, Blue Mesa Dam, and
Alfa Butte Dam.  MONTANA has 3--Fort Peck Dam, Yellow Tail Dam,
NEVADA, and WASHINGTON STATE so far have 1 bomb each, threatening
dams which are among the world's largest--these are respectively
Garrison Dam, Oahe Dam, Fort Randall Dam, Hoover Dam, and Grand
Coulee Dam.  IDAHO has 2 bombs, both threatening towns--one is in
the north end of Cour d'Alene Lake, threatening the town of that
name; the other is in the north end of Lake Pend Oreille near the
town of Sandpoint.  My friends, this would not have been possible
had it not been for the destruction of the FBI beginning with the
murder of J. Edgar Hoover.  God help us all.

Topic #3--With our military situation so serious, one would
naturally expect someone to come forward to take action against
the Soviet underwater missiles.  For example, General George S.
Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, brought about the
removal of many of these ocean and gulf missiles during August
and September 1976.  But where is he now?!!  My friends, here is
what has happened to General Brown.  No matter how much the
tactics of public manipulation change and shift, some things
never change.  I mentioned several months ago in connection with
the disgraceful Sputnik One episode that nowadays accolades and
awards go to the spoilers and traitors in our midst, while the
true heroes who dare to raise their heads are beaten down,
suppressed, and forgotten.  Today there is no more grim testimony
to this fact than the current predicament of General George S.

    As Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, General Brown is
the top military officer in the United States, and therefore in
some respects in the entire free world.  As I revealed in detail
in monthly Audioletter No. 16 for September 1976, it was he,
General Brown, who more than any other person in the United
States government, prevented a surprise Soviet nuclear attack on
America during August and September 1976.  Under extremely
adverse conditions, he obtained the go-ahead to remove Soviet
underwater missiles and hydrogen bombs then planted in our own
territorial waters and then ordered the United States Navy to do
the job, which it did quickly.  And on September 16, 1976, I met
for over an hour with General Brown in his office at the Pentagon
to discuss the continuing Soviet underwater missile crisis and to
relay new information to him which had been prevented from
reaching him through normal channels.  In meeting with me,
General Brown was accepting terrible personal risks, and he knew
it.  He had overruled his entire staff in order to meet with me,
and the meeting itself was completely free of interruptions of
any kind.  Nor was there any cut-off due to time; the meeting
simply continued without pressure until we finished the business
at hand.  Then I left, along with an associate who had
accompanied me to the meeting as a witness.  We drove away from
the Pentagon that day in a driving rainstorm; but the brave
patriot whose office we had just left now faced a far worse
personal storm--thanks to his efforts on our nation's behalf.  I
warned my listeners about this in monthly Audioletter No. 16 last
September, and asked that everyone strengthen his hand by
expressing their support for him.

    General Brown, alone among the top echelons of the United
States government, had stood by us and had saved millions of our
lives in the process.  Now he was depending on us to stand by him
in his continuing efforts to carry out his Constitutional duties
to the letter.  Some of us did so, my friends, but far too many
of us did not.  During August and early September 1976, the Joint
Chiefs of Staff were flooded with demands for action against the
Soviet underwater missiles; but after that action was taken,
there was no such massive outpouring of thanks for General
Brown's crucial leadership or support for the continued positive
efforts needed to save our country.  Far too many of us forget
that it is not enough just to complain about what is wrong; we
must also actively support that which is right, or it will wither
and die.  After the crucial actions taken under General Brown's
leadership late last summer, far too many of us just relaxed and
went back to sleep, leaving General Brown to fend for himself.

    Now I must tell you what has happened to General Brown as a
result.  For many months now I have been cut off from direct
contact with General Brown; and in recent months General Brown
has seemed like a completely different person than in the past
whenever he appears in public.  In place of the outgoing
personality which has been General Brown's trademark in the past,
there is nothing but resignation and acceptance of the dictates
of his civilian superiors.  The change has been so dramatic that
it has even been commented upon by syndicated columnists, who are
mystified.  What has happened to General Brown, my friends, is
known to very few.  I myself have been able to confirm it only
within the past few days.  General George S. Brown, the nation's
top military officer, is now virtually under house arrest.  This
is exactly the same kind of confinement that was meted out, for
example, to Army Lieutenant William Calley during his court
martial for the My Lai massacre in Vietnam.  But there are two
differences in General Brown's case.  First, there has been no
court martial.  Instead, he is living under the threat of a court
martial, for its twisted evidence and perjuring witnesses have
already been assembled.  Second, General Brown's isolation at the
Pentagon and confinement to his Fort Myer residence are not
absolute.  Instead, they are interspersed with very carefully
controlled appearances at official functions, since his absence
from these would quickly arouse suspicions that something was
terribly wrong.  Now, should General Brown attempt again to step
out of line and defy those in high places by giving orders to
remove the missiles, doing his Constitutional duty, the suspended
threat of court martial would instantly come crashing down upon
him.  By means of the elaborately doctored and falsified evidence
I've already mentioned, General Brown would be railroaded into
certain conviction for treason for doing his duty.  Already
alleged statements by General Brown have been published recently
to make him appear to be a dangerous man.  Were General Brown to
be courtmartialed with falsified evidence, it would destroy him
personally.  It would also prevent his efforts from producing any
benefits to America--such as a resumption of the removal of
Soviet nuclear missiles from our waters.  Any such orders of his
would be rescinded; and his courtmartial would be used to make
any attempts by him to warn America useless, by destroying his

    As long ago as October, 1976, just a month after my meeting
with him, General Brown was given a powerful demonstration of the
ability of his enemies to crucify him publicly.  As I discussed
that month in Audioletter No. 17, a six-month old interview of
General Brown was dredged up and used to subject him to intense
public embarrassment and criticism.  A few alleged statements of
his from the interview were made public and played up by the
controlled major media to such an extent that he was forced to
make a public apology on nationwide television.  Can you imagine? 
All of that for a few relatively insignificant comments which, if
he really made them at all, had attracted no attention six months
earlier.  This episode had just one purpose--to prove to General
Brown that if the falsified charges of treason should ever be
leveled at him, he would have no chance at all either to defend
himself or to do a service to America.  His only recourse now
would be to himself publicly demand a court-martial, but even
that would not be successful without a massive outpouring of
public support for him ahead of time--and that, my friends, has
so far been denied him to the everlasting shame of our entire
nation.  Should General Brown come to any physical harm, the
responsibility for it will rest squarely on the shoulders of
David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. Rockefeller III; but
meanwhile, he's a secret captive, keeping millions of Americans
reassured that all is well merely by his presence on the scene. 
Whenever a public or official appearance or statement by General
Brown is called for, it's arranged and carried out under the
watchful eyes of a heavy escort, although this is not always
apparent.  Otherwise the openness, the accessibility, and warmth
that has always distinguished General Brown among newspaper
reporters is now gone.  He's a virtual prisoner at the Pentagon,
held practically incommunicado except for the carefully
controlled communications and appearances I have already
mentioned.  As soon as this Audioletter is released, you can
expect to see things happen that may seem to disprove what I am
telling you--for example, General Brown may become more visible
publicly for a while.  It is even conceivable, though highly
unlikely, that this might even be carried to the point of having
General Brown publicly deny that he has come under any new
restrictions in recent months as the result, say, of the
unfavorable publicity he received some months ago.  Should that
happen, keep in mind that General Brown is now a prisoner of war,
imprisoned by the enemies within our own midst; and we've already
seen many examples of the kinds of things American prisoners of
war are forced to say for propaganda purposes.

    Yes, my friends, General Brown stood up for all of us only to
have too many of us let him down by failing to follow through
with our thanks and our overwhelming support; but there is one
way that we can still keep General Brown's great personal
sacrifice on our behalf from being in vain, and that is for us,
each and every one of us as individuals, to begin right now to do
whatever we can to save our beloved country.  My friends, there's
no vacation from reality.  It's up to you to do what you
can--there's no one else; and even though you may not be able to
do more than write a letter or two, do it.  You never know how
far your few words may spread.  They may pass from one person to
another, finally reaching the ear of someone you don't even know,
someone with far more resources than you have who may play a
vital role in saving our nation, yet who may never hear and never
act if you fail to do your part.  If all you have to offer is 5
loaves and 2 fishes, offer it; you just might be amazed at the

    Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 22

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC.  (1980 current
address: 1629 K St., NW, Washington, D.C.  20006.)

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is March 27, 1977,
and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 22.

   Few things are certain in life, but one thing we can depend
upon is that things are always changing.  Today a flower blooms
in all its glory; tomorrow it will be withered and forgotten,
leaving behind only a beautiful memory.  Today a child at play
scrapes a knee, and the whole world revolves around a mother's
tender care.  Tomorrow the knee will be healed, leaving behind
only a lesson of caution and comfort.  Today you and I pass
through this world for a little while; tomorrow we will not be
seen, leaving behind only the legacy of our choices for good or

   Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21 I alerted you to the
possibility that we may have already failed in our efforts to
prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE, which is drawing closer by the day.  My
question is not "Can the war be stopped?" but "Will it be
stopped?"  There is nothing in this whole world that would please
me so much as to be able to tell you: "Good news.  We have
prevented the war.  We have won."  And when I recorded monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 16 on September 25, 1976, it seemed as though I
might soon be able to give you such good news.  Public reaction
to my AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 for July and August 1976 had
thwarted an attempted Soviet double-cross of the Rockefellers by
means of underwater missiles along our coast lines, and it had
produced a direct meeting between General George S. Brown,
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and myself.  But then came
the terrible reversals for America that I revealed the following
month in AUDIO LETTER No. 17; and far too many of those who had
pressed the government for action during August 1976 failed to
follow through and support General Brown in his efforts to
continue to protect our beloved country.  Now, as a result, we
have lost General Brown as an effective force for good.

   Now the job of stopping NUCLEAR WAR I is even harder.  It can
still be done, but WILL WE DO IT?  My deep hope is still that the
answer is YES, otherwise I would not be speaking these words.  I
am doing all in my power to bring the truth to you.  So long as I
continue to have access to vital information that bears on your
life and your well-being, I will feel a deep responsibility to
communicate it to you, but then it becomes your responsibility to
choose what you will do about it.

   I have made many suggestions of things you might do to help
save our country.  ln December 1975 I even recorded an entire
tape devoted to nothing else, entitled "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE
AMERICA"; but all I can hope to do is open your mind as to what
you, as an individual, can do.  In this great nation of some
215,000,000 individuals, every person is different.  No two of us
have the same set of abilities, the same opportunities, or the
same avenues for possible action.  There is no way that I, just
one person, even with the help of my associates and information
sources, can provide a simple, cut-and-dried prescription for
what to do; but I am convinced that scattered throughout America
is all of the knowledge, all of the ability to organize, and all
the resources necessary to save our beloved land IF WE WILL BUT

   My three topics for today are:




Topic #1--For over four years now I have been trying by every
means at my disposal to alert the American people to the progress
of far-advanced plans to destroy our beloved country as we know
it.  We are seeing the final stages of a plan to create a
world-wide dictatorship acted out before our very eyes with
ourselves ensnared as the victims.  This commitment for a
ONE-WORLD GOVERNMENT under the control of a super wealthy elite
was set in motion in the early years of the 20th Century, using a
small group of powerful tax-exempt Foundations to coordinate and
direct the program.  This program of conquest long ago became so
massive, so powerful, and so complex that the average citizen had
no hope of grasping what was really going on.  And the ONE WORLD
plans were and are so evil that the normal person simply cannot
believe they are real without overwhelming proof.

   But how are things like this proven?  Such a long-range
commitment is a sophisticated form of conspiracy; so, how are
conspiracies exposed and proven?  Well known in legal circles,
and especially in the United States Department of Justice, are
the words of Special Judge Advocate John A. Bingham during the
trial of the conspirators involved in Abraham Lincoln's
assassination.  This trial took place in Washington, D.C. in
1865.  Listen to Judge Bingham's words, and I quote:

  "A conspiracy is rarely if ever proven by positive testimony. 
When a crime of high magnitude is about to be perpetrated by a
combination of individuals, they do not act openly, but covertly
and secretly.  The purpose formed is known only to those who
enter into it.  Unless one of the conspirators betrays his
companions and gives evidence against them, their guilt can be
proved only by circumstantial evidence.  It is said by some
writers on evidence that circumstances are stronger than positive
proof.  A witness swearing positively, it is said, may
misapprehend the facts or swear falsely, but that circumstances
cannot lie."

Judge Bingham's words may come as a surprise to you if you're not
a lawyer.  Contrary to the impression you may have received from
fictional detective stories, circumstantial evidence can be very
powerful indeed and has decided the outcome of vast numbers of
court cases.

   Furthermore, it is the incriminating power of circumstances
that makes any conspiracy most vulnerable to just one
thing--exposure.  If the plans of even the most powerful of
conspirators are made public and put on record before the plans
are executed, often the plans have to be abandoned; because even
if the conspirators succeed in carrying out their plans without
being caught in the act, the circumstances that result from their
criminal actions cannot be hidden, and the advance exposure of
their plan then causes the finger of guilt to point straight at
the conspirators.

   This is the principle I invoke every time I publicly reveal
anything about the plans or actions of those who are conspiring
to destroy America.  As I have always tried to make clear, my
purpose in exposing these criminal plans is to prevent them from
being carried out.  In this way I share a common goal with my
associates and the many sources who provide me with vital
confidential information.  The best achievements of Intelligence
gathering, like diplomacy, often lie in what did not happen--the
crisis quietly deflected.  And our efforts up to now have been
partially successful in that regard.

   But the commitment for world domination that was forged over
two generations ago has grown into an incredible monster with
countless tentacles and tremendous momentum.  As a result, the
four Rockefeller Brothers and their co-conspirators have found it
impossible to completely cover their tracks even though many
modifications in their detailed plans have been made.  So a brief
review of the circumstances that have been developing around us
over the past years is very, very revealing.

   First: Consider Nelson Rockefeller's unsuccessful attempt so
far to become our unelected President and Dictator by way of his
25th Amendment to the United States Constitution.  On October 11,
1974, I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK talking tape entitled: "HOW
WAR."  At that time Rockefeller still had two months to go being
confirmed as Vice-President; but I revealed that if confirmed,
Rockefeller intended to become President by June 1975.  In June
1975 during a trip to Europe, President Ford suddenly began
taking serious falls--once down an aircraft ramp, and persons
close to him said he also looked pale and unsteady.  The public
was quickly fed stories about the trouble being an old knee
injury from football, even though Ford's doctor stated flatly
that his falls had nothing to do with his knees.

   The following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 I relayed
information that I had been given to the effect that Ford's
troubles had been caused by a powerful virus of unknown origin
which had been arrested successfully.

   The next month I revealed in lectures and also in AUDIO BOOK
Special Tape No. 1 that by September or thereabouts we should
know whether Nelson Rockefeller was to be stopped in his drive to
seize the presidency.  And on September 5, 1975, an alleged
attempt on Ford's life was made by Lynette Fromme; but as I
warned in AUDIO LETTER No. 4 that month, this was only a dress
rehearsal intended to frighten Ford into resigning.  But Ford
refused to resign, and on September 22, 1975, a real attempt on
Ford's life took place.  During a visit to San Francisco, Ford
became the target of Sara Jane Moore, and it truly was only by
the grace of God that he escaped injury.  It had been planned for
Ford when he came out of the St. Francis Hotel to cross the
street and shake hands with people in the crowd.  And there
waited Sara Jane Moore, standing exactly where Ford was supposed
to enter the crowd, armed with a pistol she had bought with a
Treasury agent by her side the previous day, and with her mind
programmed for assassination by electronic programming
techniques!  But at the last moment the assassination plan fell
apart.  A Secret Service agent told the President not to cross
the street, so he headed straight for his limousine.  At that,
Sara Jane Moore raised her gun to fire across the street at Ford,
but her shot was deflected by another onlooker--a Vietnam veteran
in a wheel chair.

   As it turned out, this was indeed the real turning point in
Nelson Rockefeller's hopes for succeeding Jerry Ford as
President.  He ran through a series of additional back-up plans,
all of which my sources enabled me to reveal in advance in my
monthly AUDIO LETTERS--and he failed for the time being.  But he
recently whispered to reporters as he left a White House Award
ceremony, "I'll be back."

   And then there is Fort Knox.  I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK
tape in October 1974 less than three weeks after the so-called
Gold Inspection Visit to Fort Knox by 6 Congressmen, a Senator,
and about a hundred newsmen.  Here was a perfect example of a
case in which the true circumstances alone--namely, the absence
of the huge hoard of gold shown on Treasury and Federal Reserve
books--would have been sufficient all by themselves to prove the
existence of a tremendous financial conspiracy.  Therefore great
care was taken by the Treasury Department to prevent these
circumstances from being detected.  Instead of an objective,
honest inspection of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox by
independent gold experts, the Treasury substituted a public
relations peep show involving people who had no way of knowing
what they should look for.  And while the public was loudly
promised an independent audit by the General Accounting Office of
Congress, the actual so-called Audit Committee consisted almost
entirely of Treasury personnel; and the tiny Audit Report that
was finally issued several months late presented no findings of
fact, concluding only, quote: "We believe" the gold is there!

   My associates and I have amassed mountains of evidence in
connection with the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL.  This twin scandal
involves not only the theft of America's monetary gold supply but
also the storage of leaking canisters of CIA super poison
processed from radioactive Plutonium 239.  From time to time I
have made portions of this evidence public, such as in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975.  In that tape I was able to
reveal the sworn statement of former Congressman Frank Chelf
attesting to the constant flow of gold out of Fort Knox during
the mid 60's and the unsatisfactory answers he received from the
Treasury and the White House about what was going on.  I also
revealed that the official listing of gold shipments from Fort
Knox omits major shipments.  One example of which we had
photographs took place on January 20, 1965; and in response to
such a specific challenge, the Mint admitted the shipment had
taken place.

   But the most important item about Fort Knox that was revealed
in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 was the secret "Central Core Vault"--a huge
central gold storage vault whose existence was not revealed to
the September 1974 visitors and was later denied in writing by
then Treasury Secretary William Simon--another interesting
circumstance because the Central Core Vault was described and
confirmed for us and for Congressman Otis Pike by a former
Commanding Officer of Fort Knox, General John L. Ryan, Jr.  Both
Simon's lie and General Ryan's confirmation are quoted in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 8, January 1976.  The Central Core Vault is the
key to the whole Fort Knox Scandal.

   The joint Rockefeller-Soviet program to conquer the world is
so all-encompassing that many other aspects of it have been
discussed too in the monthly AUDIO LETTER.  But the most
overriding issue of all now is the rapid approach of NUCLEAR WAR
ONE on American soil.  In my very first tape recorded in October
1974 I explained the basic purposes for which the Rockefeller
Brothers were betraying America into nuclear war.  I also
revealed the target schedule for the war to begin--mid 1977 to
mid 1978.  Today some of the details of the war plan have
changed, and the economic and political scenarios being planned
by the Rockefellers at that time, while still on track, are
behind schedule.  But of all Rockefeller plans, the one for
nuclear war on America is most crucial and, as of now, the time
schedule for war is still practically unchanged.  For reasons I
will explain in Topic #2, the Rockefeller Brothers are straining
all their resources to prevent a slippage in the timing of the

   In July 1975, Indira Gandhi clamped down on her own India in a
manner that stunned the world.  She was condemned most bitterly
of all by the Government of the United States!!  The following
month in AUDIO LETTER No. 3 I told you what had actually happened
in India.  Despite all appearances, Indira Gandhi was trying to
save India's freedom--not destroy it.  What she had done was to
smash a CIA project that had been under way for five years to
take over India.  In the same tape I went on to reveal that the
joint Rockefeller plans for war were being revised on India's
account.  The plan for nuclear war on American soil was put back
on a back burner until India could be taken over by war in Asia. 
The target date for India to be attacked under the revised war
plan was March 1977, this month.

   I also told you, quote:

  "The new plans do not involve hostilities on American soil as
they stand right now.  Keep in mind though that further changes
can and probably will occur.  In particular, should Indira Gandhi
be toppled from power any time soon, it may well enable the CIA
to put the original takeover plans back on track, and that would
restore the original plan for war on the United States."

   When I revealed these things 19 months ago, they probably
seemed remote and improbable to you; but by relaxing the
Emergency control she had imposed and holding election on March
21, six days ago, she lost--tragically for not only India but
America as well.  Once again things are not what they seem to be. 
The CIA succeeded in toppling Indira Gandhi by subverting the
free election she wanted for her people--and did so this very
month, March 1977.  This was the original target date for war on
India in the plans I revealed 19 months ago.

   With India taken care of, neutralized for the moment, NUCLEAR
WAR ONE on American soil no longer faces any delay on India's
account.  In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 for November 1975, I
revealed the grand strategy for the huge Asian war that was to
precede nuclear war on America.  It called for hostilities to
begin in the Middle East with a severe provocation arranged to
justify a limited nuclear strike from the Sinai Desert at
Arab-OPEC oil wells.  This cut-off of oil supplies would cripple
the heart of Europe and Africa, disable Japan, and force
dictatorial measures such as gas rationing and other measures on
the American people by Executive Orders with all of these being
brought about more completely under the domination of the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

   But now, India has been rendered easy prey for a complete
takeover and has therefore dropped in priority.  The war in the
Middle East has been delayed several times.  The most decisive
failure in this regard occurred late in December 1975 when OPEC
oil ministers were kidnapped in Vienna by terrorists in the pay
of the CIA.  Several were supposed to be killed, inflaming
passions and leading to war, but the job was botched and they all
escaped with their lives.  This caused a tremendous slippage in
the plans for war and conquest; and for bungling this top
priority assignment, the CIA station Chief in Athens, Richard
Welch, was executed by the CIA itself, as I revealed in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 8 for January 1976.

   In that same tape I publicly revealed the super secret White
House Merge Directive.  This Directive requires that life in the
United States be so altered that it can be comfortably merged
with life in the Soviet Union, and it has been in existence since
the days of Stalin!  Such a way of life is totally alien to
America; but today, under the puppetized administration of Jimmy
Carter, the federal government is now openly run by aliens with
alien philosophies.  Our life is being merged with that of the
Soviet Union.  Even so, the greed and lust for power that
motivates both the Rulers of the Soviet Union and the real Rulers
of America today knows no bounds.  And as early as November 1975
in AUDIO LETTER No. 6, I began warning of the threat of a Soviet
double-cross of the Rockefellers and their Corporate Socialist
intimates here in America.  By the spring of 1976 I reported that
certain Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled major Foundations
were increasingly concerned that such a double-cross was brewing. 
But not so the Rockefeller Brothers and their closest
collaborators, because they have more faith in the Soviet Union
than they do in America.

   Last summer, of course, the Soviet double-cross actually
began.  First, as I reported in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 for
June 1976, I received Intelligence information that a nuclear
weapon had been planted at Seal Harbor, Maine, between the summer
homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller.  Soon afterwards I was
notified that the Soviet Union was planting short-range nuclear
missiles within our own territorial waters ready for launch from
undersea resting places upon remote control.  We were in danger
of an immediate Soviet nuclear surprise attack, not only here but
world-wide, that would destroy all effective naval opposition to
the Soviet Union and thereby guarantee Soviet victory.  Thanks to
the Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger as Secretary of
State, the information reaching me about the missiles was not
reaching the Joint Chiefs of Staff.  Intelligence sources
informed me that the only way action could be brought about to
save the situation was by making it a public issue, so that is
what I did by means of AUDIO LETTERS 14 and 15 last summer--and
it worked as I recounted for you in AUDIO LETTER No. 16 for
September 1976.

   But the four Rockefeller Brothers long ago passed the point of
No Return.  In spite of what has happened last summer, they are
continuing with the joint program of conquest with the Soviet
Union, trying to convince themselves that their long-time
alliance is back on track.  But at the same time they are trying
to hurry up NUCLEAR WAR ONE because in the Soviet-Rockefeller
rivalry, time is now on the side of the Soviets.

   My friends, we are now surrounded by circumstances that prove
the existence of a grand conspiracy to rob us of our freedom and
even our very lives.  It is up to each one of us to open our eyes
and see these circumstances for what they really are before it is
too late.

Topic #2--Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21 I explained what the
words "NATIONAL SECURITY" really mean to those who control
America's government today.  To them National Security begins and
ends with the protection and the advancement of our unelected
Rulers themselves--not you and me.  Nowhere is this more vividly
proven than in the realm of war.  We are taxed to the breaking
point in order to support so-called National Security.  But when
in this Century has all of this prevented a war?  And for all our
vaunted Intelligence gathering and Early Warning Systems, when
have you and I ever benefitted by being warned in advance of an
imminent conflict by the Government?

   It has been proven beyond question, not only by circumstantial
evidence but by documentary evidence as well, that every single
major conflict in the 20th Century involving America has been
known about, in advance, by our Rulers.  But this advance
knowledge has never been communicated to us, the nation at large,
except once.  In 1962 President John F. Kennedy did notify
America of the warnings he had obtained of the imminent Cuban
missile threat.  It was a frightening experience for us all, but
the result was that a successful Soviet surprise attack was
rendered impossible.  Barely a year later, Jack Kennedy died at
the hands of the CIA for ruining this Rockefeller-Soviet gamble
by acting in the interest of true national security--our
security.  But in the cases of two World Wars, Korea, and
Vietnam, a different pattern has consistently applied.

   In 1916 Woodrow Wilson, the first American president to be a
total puppet of the Rockefeller empire, narrowly achieved
re-election with the peace-oriented slogan, "He kept us out of
war."  Meanwhile he was rapidly maneuvering America into war. 
Five months after his re-election on April 6, 1917, America
declared war on Germany, and soon American doughboys were off to
fight "The War to End All Wars."  There thousands died in
trenches while Trustees of the "Carnegie Endowment for
International Peace" encouraged Wilson to extend the war because
of the desirable changes it was producing in American lives!

   In 1940 with Europe once again aflame with war, President
Franklin D. Roosevelt, like Wilson before him, appealed to peace
sentiment in order to be re-elected.  Even now, my friends, I can
still hear those campaign words of F.D.R. ringing in my ears, and
I quote:

  "And while I am talking to you mothers and fathers, I give you
one more assurance.  I have said this before but I shall say it
again, and again, and again: 'Your boys are not going to be sent
into any foreign wars.'"

But even as he won an unprecedented third term in this way,
F.D.R. was moving the United States rapidly toward war.  On May
27, 1941, only six months after his re-election and with Pearl
Harbor still six months in the future, F.D.R. proclaimed an
"UNLIMITED NATIONAL EMERGENCY" to get ready for war!  In the
ensuing months everything possible was done to provoke a Japanese
attack on Pearl Harbor; and when this attack was known to be
imminent, most of the United States Pacific fleet was
conveniently bottled up in Pearl Harbor as a tempting target. 
Only our Aircraft Carriers were kept far away from danger, since
they would be indispensable for retaliation against Japan.

   Certain officials in the American government knew well in
advance that war with Japan was coming.  Proof of this can be
found in many places today, some of them quite unexpected.  One
example is the autobiography of the Rt. Reverend Edward Randolph
Welles II published by Learning, Inc., Manset, Maine  04656.  The
book entitled "THE HAPPY DISCIPLE" is not basically about
politics or economics at all but about the career and life of an
Episcopal minister.  But it so happens that in the fall of 1941,
Bishop Welles was the rector of Christ Church in Alexandria,
Virginia, the church of George Washington.  And on page 62 one
reads the following, and I quote:

  "Another of my friends was Norman H. Davis, President of the
American Red Cross, who was elected to our parish vestry.  He was
very close to President Franklin D. Roosevelt and saw him
frequently.  On November 6, 1941, I had lunch with Mr. Davis in
Washington and learned of the approaching war with Japan which
would begin within five weeks.  I was shaken, and asked Mr. Davis
to urge the President to appoint a national day of prayer, and
handed Mr. Davis a letter I had written to President Roosevelt on
the subject.  Mr. Davis did hand my letter to the President, who
did appoint the following New Year's Day as a 'National Day of

   I was so moved by the luncheon revelations that later that
very day I sent our mimeographed postal cards to the congregation

    'The rector is preaching a sermon at 11:00 A.M. service on
Sunday, November 9, which he feels is sufficiently important to
call to your attention.  The sermon will assess the desperate
situation that confronts America this Armistice Day, and suggests
basic Christian attitudes and actions.'

   On Sunday in the course of that sermon I said:

    'Few people realize how great is the possibility that we
shall actually be at war with Japan within thirty days.'

   The congregation was deeply shocked; and in response to many
requests, my booklet of sermons was reprinted with this sermon
added.  Twenty-eight days after that sermon came, December 7, the
Japanese attacked Pearl Harbor and the war was on."

(End of quotation from Bishop Welles' autobiography.)

   Bishop Welles, of course, had no way of knowing that President
Roosevelt's advance knowledge of the impending Japanese attack
was due to conspiracy to bring about that attack, but he did know
that people should be warned about it--and he did just that.  The
federal government, of course, could have warned all of America
of the impending Japanese attack, but then the attack would never
have taken place.  And F.D.R., doing the bidding of the
Rockefellers and their allies, wanted the attack to take place so
that America would go to war!

   In the two-volume AUDIO BOOK talking tape I recorded a year
ago with Colonel Curtis B. Dall, the detailed story of Pearl
Harbor is told by Colonel Dall--and Colonel Dall, who was the
son-in-law and close friend of F.D.R., knows what he is talking

   Next came Korea.  On June 21, 1950, Assistant Secretary of
State Dean Rusk testified before Congress to the effect that
there was no indication of any impending North Korean attack on
South Korea.  Several days later John Foster Dulles went to
Seoul, South Korea, to give reassurances that there was no danger
of invasion from the north.  Then he left quickly because the
North Korean invasion was already being launched!

   As for us, the American people, another nasty surprise. 
Vietnam, too, followed the old pattern.  The last thing the
American people wanted was yet another bloody war.  And during
the election campaign of 1964, Lyndon Johnson knocked down straw
man Barry Goldwater by playing on the Peace theme.  Goldwater was
portrayed as the dangerous man who would get America into a big
war; Johnson, as the 'great compromiser' who would keep us away
from any such danger.  But Johnson had already obtained the
Tonkin Gulf Resolution as the tool he needed, and within 3 months
after his landslide election, Johnson started turning Vietnam
into another big disastrous war.  By June 1965, the commitment of
American combat troops to the nightmare of Vietnam had begun
under the orders of one more president who had promised America
Peace and Prosperity.

   Today it is all happening again.  Jimmy Carter, the puppetized
president who works for David Rockefeller, is raising many
Americans' hope that this time it will be different.  This time
we have a president who wears sweaters and blue jeans and must
therefore be a man of the people.  He must be determined to have
peace since he is so aggressively seeking disarmament; and he has
promised us all that he will never lie.  Yet in a short space of
only two months, President Carter has succeeded in alienating and
angering governments the world over.  Under the guise of
folksiness, he is systematically insulting visiting ambassadors
with undignified receptions and by refusing to attend luncheons
given by the ambassadors.  He is preaching to the world about
"human rights", while doing nothing whatever about the violation
of our own human right to breathe clean air free of contamination
by Soviet plutonium attacks, among other things.

   In the case of the Soviet Union with whom he says he wants to
negotiate arms reduction to prevent war, he is breaching an
agreement not to interfere in one another's internal affairs that
was signed by President Nixon back in 1972.  He says he wants
peace; but the circumstances he is bringing about with great
speed are exactly those that could well lead to war.

   The fact is, my friends, that Jimmy Carter is sweeping us
along swiftly toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE--and the sooner the better,
according to his Rockefeller bosses.  Does he himself know where
he is taking America by following orders?  Bear in mind that he
is conspicuously trying to emulate F.D.R. in every respect right
down to launching his campaign last summer where F.D.R. did in
1932--Warm Springs, Georgia, and reviving the Fireside Chat as
president.  And listen to Carter's own words from a recent
Fireside Chat, and I quote:

  "I remember another difficult time in our nation's history when
we felt a different spirit.  During World War II we faced a
terrible crisis, but the challenge of fighting against Fascism
drew us together.  I believe we are ready for that same spirit

   The Rockefeller Brothers want very badly to have NUCLEAR WAR
ONE begin as soon as possible, for several reasons.  The military
balance is shifting ever more rapidly in favor of the Soviet
Union and away from the Rockefellers even in the realm of secret
super weapons.  As of now, according to all the information I
have been able to obtain, the CIA undersea super missiles in the
Atlantic and Pacific, which I revealed two months ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 20, are still the most awesome nuclear missiles in the
world.  But as I revealed then, these CIA missiles which are to
protect the Rockefellers--not you and me--have become inoperative
in several cases, and there is no way to predict how long those
that remain will last before they, too, fail and start leaking.

   But there is another even more basic worry the Rockefellers
must think about.  As of now, the United States has no
anti-missile weapons at all, and the Soviet Union has only the
Galosh ABM, whose effectiveness against ICBMs is questionable;
but that situation is on the verge of changing drastically very
soon.  Major General George Keegan Jr.,  who retired on January
1, 1977 as head of Air Force Intelligence, is a man who has
repeatedly been first to detect major new developments bearing on
the military balance.  He has said recently, quote: "A global
conflict is in gestation."  And, my friends, he is right. 
Furthermore, he has been sounding the warning that the Soviet
Union is already testing a death ray type weapon called a
"Particle Beam."  Once this weapon is operationally deployed in
the very near future, it could destroy incoming missiles and
render the Soviet Union invulnerable to any ICBM attack,
including an attack by means of the Rockefeller CIA undersea
super missiles.

   Meanwhile the Soviet Union is continuing right now in a
relentless program of planting underwater missiles along the
coastlines of the United States and other countries around the
world.  And in spite of the "Red Friday Agreement" of October 1,
1976, which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17, the Soviet
Union is not honoring the "Nuclear Safe Zone" in planting these
missiles.  The Rockefellers believe that the threat of their CIA
undersea missiles will prevent the Soviet missiles inside the
Nuclear Safe Zone from actually being launched in NUCLEAR WAR
ONE, but that is strictly a gamble on their part because the
threat is there.

   During the latter part of this month, I have been receiving
reports from my own Intelligence sources about the current status
of the world-wide Soviet program of planting short-range
underwater nuclear missiles.  When I recorded monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 15 last August, I gave the coordinates for 64 missiles
and bombs around the world, including 16 in American and Canadian
waters.  That was sufficient to give the Soviet Union the
capability of a surprise knockout punch against all the naval
power in the world opposing the Soviet Union; but now, thanks to
the insane Red Friday policy of the Rockefellers, the situation
has been allowed to become far worse.  Now redundant targeting
insures that any such Soviet attack has a very high probability
of success.  And in addition to naval and other military targets
close to the sea, Soviet underwater missiles are now being aimed
as well at increasing numbers of non-military strategic targets.

   As of my latest tally, the Soviet Union has so far planted a
total of 372 nuclear weapons, mostly missiles but a few bombs, in
coastal waters of the world.  Of these nearly half, 158, are
planted in American waters.  This includes 130 around the
mainland 48 States, 9 more around Alaska, 15 in Hawaiian waters,
and 1 each at Midway Island, Guam, Christmas Island, and the
north approach to the Panama Canal.  The Soviet Union is also
preparing to be able to strike with additional plutonium cloud
attacks against America.  On March 1 America extended its
territorial limits to 200 miles, and Soviet submarines have moved
out beyond this new limit; but now remote control canisters are
being planted along our west coast within 3 to 5 miles of the
coastline.  So far 16 of these have been planted, and more are on
the way.

   There are 29 missiles around the British Isles and 11 in
Canadian waters.  Europe and the Mediterranean are currently
surrounded by 46 Soviet underwater missiles.  Ten of these are in
the Mediterranean.  Along the Atlantic and North Sea coasts,
Spain is targeted by one, France by 3, the Netherlands by 5, and
West Germany by 6.  Three Soviet missiles have been planted in
Danish waters, 7 near Norway, 6 near Sweden, and 5 near Finland. 
In addition, 7 Soviet underwater missiles surround Iceland. 
These are ready to decimate NATO Air Bases there, enabling the
new Soviet supersonic long-range Backfire Bomber in its naval
version to interdict all our vital sea lanes across the North

   The rest of the pattern world-wide is: First on the Pacific
and Indian Oceans--Australia 7, New Zealand 6, New Guinea 4,
Philippines 6, Indonesia 6, Malay Peninsula 2, Thailand 1, Burma
1, India 1, Taiwan 3, Red China 7, border between Red China and
Vietnam 1, Japan heavily targeted 19, South Korea 8.

   Around southwest Asia, Africa, and the Middle East--Caspian
Sea coast of Iran 3, Persian Gulf coast of Iran and Saudi Arabia
5, in the Oman Gulf 1 (target Iran), Red Sea coast of Saudi
Arabia 2, Black Sea coast of Turkey 1, southern Africa 8.

   And along the coast of Latin America--Mexico 11, Guatemala 1,
British Honduras 1, Honduras 1, Nicaragua 1 even though Nicaragua
itself is being used for certain naval purposes by the Soviet
Union, Costa Rica 3, Venezuela 4 including one in the Orinoco
River, Chile 5, Argentina 1.  The British possession of West
Falkland near southern Argentina is also targeted by 1 Soviet
missile as is the Island of Bermuda.

   The government of any country I have named may obtain the
navigational coordinates of the threatening Soviet underwater
missiles from me upon official request.  Up to now only one
government, that of Great Britain, has requested these latest
coordinates and I have gladly supplied them.  Great Britain is
quietly living up to her majestic name, because alone of all the
nations on earth, the British Government is fending off the
Soviet naval threat with grim determination.  I do not think it
would be in the best interest of the British people for me to
tell you all of the measures being taken in this regard beyond
the fact that the Soviet missiles are being removed from British
waters.  But I will tell you that the British are proving one
very important fact up to now.  Given the will to do so, the
Soviet war threat can be staved off.  For all their modern
weaponry, the Soviets are not supermen except in comparison to
the treasonous jellyfish who control America's government today. 
What is necessary is to recognize circumstances for what they
really are, and then to summon the spirit and determination to do
what must be done; and that, my friends, is exactly what the
British are doing right now.

Topic #3--A few days ago the Reverend Billy Graham was quoted in
newspapers as saying he likes, quote: "symbolic gestures made to
the American people" by President Carter.  He expressed
particular pleasure at the fact that Carter not only plans to go
to Sunday School but even to teach there.  But as for the
substance of the new administration, Dr. Graham said it is just
too early to assess that.

   Millions of Americans are placing their trust in Jimmy Carter,
an untried newcomer to national politics, mainly because of his
Sunday School teacher image.  In the rush, rush world of today,
Jimmy Carter's highly visible piety almost seems like something
out of the past.  A hundred years ago the following words might
have been written about him, and I quote:

  "He became a regular attendant at the Erie Street Baptist
Church, and vigorously did Jimmy give himself to his work.  Jimmy
was publicly baptized in the fall of 1854.  Not long after, Jimmy
was made Clerk of the church, an unusual responsibility for a
mere youth, and indicative of the impression of maturity and
responsibility that he gave to others.  Before many years passed,
he was teaching one of the largest classes in the Sunday School.
As a bright High School graduate, a faithful attendant, a most
staid and responsible young man, Jimmy soon took a prominent part
in all church activities.  He threw himself into them with
characteristic single-mindedness.  As we have said, the church
offered this unemotional youth an outlet; but it also offered his
mother, brothers and sisters the best part of what social life
they enjoyed."

   My friends, I did not just make up these words to fit Jimmy
Carter.  I have simply substituted the name "Jimmy" for the name
"John" in excerpts from the biography of John D. Rockefeller, Sr.
by Allan Nevins.  The striking thing about John D. Rockefeller
was that his vigorous church activities never throughout his
entire career translated into fair, honest, or ethical dealings
in business!  And in a similar vein today, Jimmy Carter, whether
he realizes it or not, is preaching good but doing evil.  How far
might some dictators, past and present, have gotten if they had
eliminated church opposition by themselves going to church?  It
may be that Jimmy Carter is being misled and is not knowingly
doing that which is evil; but either way, my friends, that is no
excuse for the rest of us to blindly follow along like sheep to
the slaughter.  If we do so, history shows clearly what will

   The end of the world came for the organized church in Russia
after the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917.  Within a few short years
more than 20,000,000 Russians met death at the hands of the
Soviet government.  And while a struggling underground of
believers has persisted to the present day, the church as an
organization that can influence events directly no longer exists. 
And it will not exist so long as Communism remains the official
religion of the Soviet Union.

   In mainland China, too, the same thing happened when Mao
Tse-tung took over.  The church in China was much smaller as a
percentage of the population than it had been in Russia, but its
fate was the same--the end of the world aside from a struggling
remnant of believers forced under ground.  After killing more
than 60,000,000 of his own people, Mao succeeded in turning
Communist China into perhaps the most rigidly regimented society
on earth.  And David Rockefeller, who made Jimmy Carter president
and calls the shots now, has expressed strong approval of this
state of affairs.  For example, several years ago he said, and I

  "The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership
is one of the most important and successful in human history."

   Now, my friends, if we allow it to happen, we are
next--America and the whole western world.  The elaborate plan
which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 for November 1975,
is being revised and updated for application in the present
circumstances.  Certain of my sources have expressed great
concern to me recently that a provocation for war in the Middle
East is now being established that will be unlike anything we
have ever seen before.  I repeat, the Rockefellers are
increasingly desperate to get NUCLEAR WAR ONE under way before
they lose what control they still have over events.  To achieve
that purpose, plans are being seriously considered which, if
carried out, could instantly throw all three major religions of
the western world into turmoil in the course of igniting a Middle
East conflict.  My hope is that by warning you of the existence
of such plans, I am making them too dangerous for the
conspirators to carry out.  But in case they are carried out, I
hope that you will now be able to recognize it immediately when
it happens.  We must not allow ourselves to be tricked,
stampeded, or neutralized, my friends.  We have important work to

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.




Audio letter No. 21

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is February 27,
1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 21.

   For some time now I have been warning you of the dangers
facing America.  Now, time is fast running out.  When Jimmy
Carter was inaugurated President on January 20, 1977, a
contingency plan concocted in 1963 was set in motion, and it is
progressing very rapidly.  The key to this particular plan was to
be the placement of a completely puppetized president in office
at a time of rapidly-mounting war threats.  Under this plan,
inadequate performance by the puppet presidents in the face of
these dire threats is intended to enable a take-over of the
country by Rockefeller-controlled military and CIA inner circles. 
In this manner the total dictatorship sought by the four
Rockefeller Brothers is to be brought into being.

   We are now faced with the planned threat of NUCLEAR WAR ONE
with the puppet president now on the scene in the person of Jimmy
Carter.  Carter continually spouts the Rockefeller line as he
learned it from his participation in their TRILATERAL COMMISSION,
but he has no real grasp at all of what he is involved in.

   Meanwhile, the CIA is also being readied for its appointed
role.  Nelson Rockefeller has been busy packing key positions in
the CIA with his "new men"; and to facilitate the enlistment of
required military support for the coming Dictatorship, a military
man who is a member of the Rockefeller inner circle, Admiral
Stansfield Turner, has been selected to head the CIA.  That's why
the earlier nomination of Ted Sorenson ran into a brick wall--he
ran afoul of a game plan he didn't even know about.

   The plan calls for pre-war crisis measures to be used to
condition Americans to accept the elaborate transformation of
America into a total dictatorship, and this pre-war build-up is
going on right now.  Ultimately many millions of Americans are to
be annihilated in a Soviet nuclear attack, which is to be carried
out according to rules laid down in secret agreements negotiated
by former Secretary of State Henry Kissinger.

   As I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May 1976,
this joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan includes a super-secret
"NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE" across the upper portion of the continental
United States within which the Rockefellers and their intimates
plan to ride out the war on Mount Desert and Bartlett Islands off
the coast of Maine, right in the heart of the Nuclear Safe Zone. 
This Nuclear Safe Zone is merely the nuclear-age equivalent of
the orders which were given to Allied Bombing Commands during
World War II not to damage Rockefeller-owned strategic targets in
Germany.  These orders caused such huge important installations
as the I. G. Farben Chemical plants to survive unscathed all the
way through World War II, while other targets and even whole
cities nearby were completely leveled.

   Last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 20 I was able to reveal
the club the Rockefeller Brothers believe they hold over the
heads of the Soviets to make sure the Soviet nuclear attack on
America goes as planned.  In this way the Rockefellers will have
used the Soviets to do their dirty work for them.  In any event,
this club consists of an undersea fleet of 14 super-missiles
targeted on the Soviet Union--five in the Pacific, 9 in the
Atlantic.  These missiles are not under the control of our
Defense Department, and have nothing whatever to do with the
defense of our country as a whole.  They're under the direct
control of the Rockefeller Brothers through their controlled CIA,
and their only purpose is to make sure that the Rockefeller inner
circles in America are not included in the holocaust that is
being arranged for the rest of us.  If all goes as planned, the
CIA super-missiles deep in the ocean will never be fired at all. 
Only if there should be a Soviet double-cross would there be an
attempt to fire them, and under those circumstances they would
act only as vengeance weapons.

   Yet as awesome as these CIA super-missiles are, they cannot
prevent a Soviet double-cross.  In fact, they have already
provoked one double-cross.  Last summer the Soviet Union sneaked
in under the CIA missile umbrella and began planting short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles in our own territorial waters,
hoping to achieve such total surprise that the CIA undersea
super-missiles would never be fired.  The limited exposure of
this threat, which I was able to achieve by means of AUDIO
LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 for July and August 1976, was sufficient
to ruin the Soviet surprise, so an attack at that time was
averted.  The joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan is back on track
for the time being, but now both sides are watching for a chance
to double-cross each other.  Meanwhile, as I reported last month,
the presence of the Soviet missiles in our waters are now being
incorporated into the joint war plan.

   For the first time in many years, Civil Defense, of which we
have none, has again become the subject of wide concern.  We are
again hearing radio test alerts on the Emergency Broadcasting
System which will be used in the event of war.  It has even been
hinted that we may soon experience unannounced air-raid drills, a
practice that could be especially effective in conditioning us
all to the idea that war is imminent.

   Only a few days ago, on February 11, 1977, President Carter
became the first president to fly with great publicity in a
special airplane now fitted as a flying Command Post to be used
in nuclear war.  The article above this in the New York Daily
News carried the headline, quote: "CARTER GETS A PREVIEW OF WORLD
WAR III."  Just a year ago such headlines would have been
unthinkable.  Now they are all around us.

   Because the plan now under way requires that military support
be arranged for the new Dictatorship, it was essential that
General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff,
be neutralized as I said he would be in monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
17.  General Brown played a pivotal role in preventing a Soviet
nuclear surprise attack on the United States during August and
September 1976; but that will not happen again, my friends.  The
campaign which began in October 1976 to render General Brown
ineffective in his efforts to protect America has now succeeded. 
He is no longer able to influence events to any significant
extent.  That is why when Carter demanded on January 12, 1977,
that studies be performed toward eliminating 75% to 80% of our
Intercontinental Missiles, General Brown simply agreed to have
the studies done.  Can you imagine?

   My friends, now that we have lost General Brown, there is no
one left in the entire United States Government to help us. 
There are still many patriotic individuals in the Government, of
course, but they are not the ones in positions of power.  Only
massive public pressure--informed, angry, and determined--now has
any chance of stopping the carefully-planned war to kill millions
of us and enslave the rest.  Every one of us must work to bring
about public awareness and pressure in whatever time we have
left.  But suppose we do not succeed--then what?!  I believe the
time has come to face that question squarely and honestly.

   It may well be that we have already failed in our efforts to
help prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  Only God can know, but we dare not
give up because the victory may yet be ours.  But the fact is
that many Americans do not want to listen.  They are not ready,
and some will not be ready to listen until catastrophe comes upon
their heads.

   If NUCLEAR WAR ONE does come here, my friends, millions will
die, but there will also be some survivors.  You owe it to
yourself, to your family, and to our whole society to do whatever
you can to be among the survivors.  The godless dictatorship
being fashioned by our unelected Rulers will collapse in the end;
and when it does, there must be people left who know what America
was all about, and what went wrong.  Because you are willing to
hear the truth now before disaster arrives, YOU are that people. 
And if we are all forced to pass through the dark tunnel of war
and bungling dictatorship, it will fall your lot to help lead our
people out of darkness and into the sunlight once again on the
other side.

   My three special topics for today are:

Topic #2--PRE-WAR AMERICA, 1977
Topic #3--THE END OF AN ERA.

Topic #1--For more than a generation, since the outbreak of World
War II in fact, Americans have been preoccupied with the idea of
national security.  But what is National Security?  One concept
of national security is the familiar one promoted day in and day
out by the federal government.  According to the Government,
national security is a matter that is just too complex for most
of us to understand and must always be wrapped in secrecy,
intrigue, and more secrecy.  When we see diplomatic maneuvers
which seem to help our enemies while harming our friends or even
ourselves, we're always told we simply don't understand the
so-called National Security considerations that are involved. 
The map of the free world shrinks ever smaller, our country grows
visibly weaker and weaker, yet the federal bureaucracy knows
best, we are assured, and will take care of it all for us.  But
while you and I are both forced to pay the bill for it all, we
are never, never let in on what it is really all about.

   What is called "National Security" today by the Government
would be better described as security for our Secret Rulers. 
They see themselves as the embodiment of our nation, just as
royalty did in times past.  Thus to them, so-called National
Security is nothing more than a king's "X" to prevent the public,
you and me, from learning things about governmental doings that
could endanger our Rulers' security.  Vital secrets that are
routinely betrayed to our deadliest enemies are kept hidden from
our view.

   The Government's version of National Security involves ever
greater centralization of all power and all decision-making into
just a few hands.  Increasingly it involves spying on the
citizens of our own nation, and now it even includes diplomatic
manipulations that have betrayed us straight down the road to
NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  This is what the words National Security really
mean to those who secretly control the United States
Government--a government that used to be ours, but is no more. 
What is called National Security obviously is not what most of us
naturally think of when we hear these words.  The Government's
version of National Security, in other words, is an illusion and
a fraud.  Real national security has to be rooted in the people,
who are the nation.

   When we think of national security we usually think of the
ability of the nation as a whole to protect itself from damage by
other nations--politically, economically, and if need be
militarily.  But there's another side to national security that
is actually more basic, yet we in America have been led to
gradually neglect it and finally lose it altogether over the past
100 years or so.  I refer to the internal stability that has been
destroyed by over-centralization.

   Gone are the days when America consisted of thousands of
communities which could, if need be, survive for indefinite
periods without supplies from distant sources.  And gone are the
days when consumers could choose from among a wide variety of
products produced by true competitors.  Instead, most of the
things we now have to have for life come from somewhere else,
often we know not where; and there is little competition or real
choice left.  The flow of essential commodities can now be turned
off at will by the corporate socialists and a few central spigots
in order to bring America to a grinding halt.  Most Americans
today never give this state of affairs a second thought.  The
young cannot imagine things being any different; and most of
those who are old enough to remember a different way of life are
willing to settle for what we have today with the comforts and
luxuries that have become commonplace.

   What has happened, my friends, is that we have all become
addicts.  There is an addiction that underlies our entire way of
life today, and this same addiction has made it possible for us
to be brought to the threshold of Totalitarian World Government
and nuclear holocaust.  My friends, we are addicts--addicts to
energy.  There's no precedent in history for the magnitude of the
suffering man can now bring about, because there is no precedent
in history for the energy addiction that now grips America and
the world.

   For thousands of years mankind got by on the ancient and
renewable forms of energy such as animal power, water power, wind
power, and the burning of wood.  Then came coal, and the
industrial revolution was spawned.  But it was petroleum, thanks
to its great convenience and high energy output, that was
destined to make true energy addicts of us all.

   It is typical of addictions that they take time to develop,
and that is true of our energy addiction of today.  It began very
gradually over 100 years ago, and has built up over several
generations.  During the early years after petroleum first made
its appearance, we were still in the take-it-or-leave-it stage;
but gradually it found more and more uses, and then whole
technologies were spawned which depend specifically on petroleum
energy, such as the automobile and the airplane.  These
technologies gradually took on the character of necessities,
rather than optional luxuries, and from that point onward we were
true addicts.

   The same way, our energy addiction expanded to include
dependence on natural gas and electricity.  Even our food
production became increasingly dependent upon uninterrupted
supplies of non-renewable energy.  The American farmer, blessed
already with a rich land, began to retire his ox-drawn plow in
favor of a gasoline-powered tractor, and soon expanded his
productivity still further with other farm machinery--all of it
run by petroleum energy.  It became possible for fewer farmers to
feed us all; and farmers who failed to keep up with these new
trends, whether for financial reasons or otherwise, gradually
disappeared from the scene.

   Then came high-yield hybrid crops, petroleum-derivative
insecticides and fungicides to protect these delicate hybrids
from damage, and fertilizers made with natural gas as a raw
material in order to make them grow better.  Farms became bigger,
fewer, and more expensive; huge agribusinesses, energy-intensive
and geared for high productivity, began to dominate American
agriculture, making it still harder for the small family farm to

   Meanwhile, petroleum energy made possible fast freight
transportation over long distances.  High-volume food
distributors have exploited this in such a way that nearby small
suppliers of many foods are by-passed in favor of a few
centralized huge supply sources far away.  This, of course, has
caused many of the nearby supplies that used to exist in many
areas to dry up and disappear.  For example, every town of any
size used to have access to one or more local dairies which
processed the milk produced by cows in that area.  But today many
of the familiar, dependable local dairies of the past are gone;
and if you can find anyone who can tell you where the milk you
buy comes from, you may well discover that it comes from a
central processing plant in another state.

   We have now reached the point where practically all the
necessities of life, including food and water, reach us only by
means of non-renewable, centrally-controlled energy.  The energy
pushers have done their job well, making it appear that nothing
more than natural trends were at work.  They have fed our
addiction beyond the point of no return, taking care not to allow
competing sources of energy to develop that could get out of
their control and ruin their grip on us.

   Our energy addiction is now to be used against us for their
own purposes.  When we're told now that we must conserve, it
means that we must knuckle under to sacrifices as we are
gradually ground under the heel of artificial shortages and
rising costs.

   My friends, the role of energy in our society is so
all-pervasive today that it is hard to describe, and it is the
Rockefellers who first realized how powerful a tool it could be
for their own ends.  John D. Rockefeller, Sr. built the giant
Standard Oil monopoly with ruthless determination to corner the
market on petroleum.  The trust-busting era merely caused him to
devise better ways to hide his control while his program
proceeded without letup, and soon the Rockefeller Standard Oil
empire became involved in international intrigue and wars to
overcome foreign competitors as well.  The process has continued
down to the present with wars, skirmishes, coups, and so forth,
enabling the Rockefeller empire to maintain a strangle hold on
most of the world's oil.  In recent years this has been made
virtually airtight through control of most of the free world's
refining capacity.  So today it is the four Rockefeller Brothers
who are in a position to turn off the vital energy supplies to
which we have become addicted for our very lives.  We have all
become so accustomed to the steady supply of electricity, natural
gas, and petroleum products that the illusion of reliability has
been created.

   Alternative means of surviving by means of local resources
have gradually fallen into the disuse and have disappeared, while
we all have been lulled into a life or death dependence on
centralized energy sources controlled by the Rockefeller
Brothers.  And they're not interested in your security or mine. 
Their horizon is the world and how to control it--not the mere
survival of America.  Therefore when they turn the energy spigots
off, as they are beginning to do now, they will be turning off
our national security with it--in other words, we have NO
national security.  So long as the necessities of life remain
under the centralized control of men who are determined to murder
our beloved country, we will never again have true national
security.  Only if we, the people, will rise up and take back the
government that has been stolen from us, will the many things be
done that are necessary to restore true national security to our

Topic #2--When I recorded my AUDIO BOOK tape on the coming
depression and war in October, 1974, I explained the real purpose
that caused World Wars I and II.  In both cases, Germany was
nothing more than a huge pawn in an ever bigger game of
international conquest.  Instead, as I said then, through two
World Wars America's Secret Rulers brought Great Britain to her

   The American people as a whole feel strong kinship to the
British, so it seems incredible that our Secret Rulers would have
deliberately smashed Britain through war.  But listen to what
former Prime Minister Sir Harold Wilson said last month on
January 22, 1977 on a television talk show.  When he was asked to
explain the economic crisis Britain is in, he said, quote:

  "Two world wars took all our investments; and the Lend-Lease
Agreement with the Americans not only took all our markets, which
was justified as we didn't want shipping going to Latin America,
but we had to give them all our inventions."

Thus the three decades from the beginning of World War I to the
end of World War II were used to concentrate the bulk of the
world's economic might into the hands of those who ruled America
secretly, behind the scenes--namely the ROCKEFELLERS.

   The technologies and markets of friend and foe alike were
stolen and poured into the coffers of the Corporate Socialist
empire controlled by the four Rockefeller Brothers.  But this
emergence of America into sudden world dominance was never
intended to be more than a temporary phenomenon by those who had
secretly caused it to happen.

   A dominant share of the economic and technological might of
the world had been centralized under American control so that we
could then serve as an immense reservoir for transfusions to the
Soviet Union!  The godless dictatorship set up by the Bolsheviks
in Russia in 1917 with the help of Rockefeller financing was to
be the real wave of the future.  It represented the ultimate in
monopoly--total control over every aspect of peoples' lives.  But
the Soviet System which is intended as the pattern for TOTAL
WORLD DOMINATION is artificial and unnatural, and that is why the
Soviet Union had to be built up by massive transfusions from
outside--transfusions of money, food, economic and technological
know-how, everything.  Now the transfusions are virtually

   It took three decades to drain Britain and Europe to build up
America as a reservoir for the Soviet Union, and it has taken
three more decades to drain the American reservoir and make the
Soviet Union the world's most powerful nation in material terms. 
The United States is now following Great Britain down the road to
ruin, and for the same reasons.  The Rockefeller Brothers and
their intimates now arrogantly believe they can no longer be
stopped in their plan of world conquest.  They are convinced
there is no power greater than themselves, and they are becoming
more brazen by the day.

   Jimmy Carter has been programmed to proceed with all possible
speed in dismembering what remains of our nation's defenses while
at the same time promoting public awareness of war tensions here
and abroad.  He is making the terrible mistake of thinking he is
actually President.

   Meanwhile long-time Rockefeller agent, Walter Mondale, stands
ready and waiting for the moment IF and WHEN Jimmy Carter is
erased from the scene.  Mondale is by far the most powerful
Vice-President in history next to Nelson Rockefeller, and he's in
a position to pick up the reins of presidential power at a
moment's notice.

   As for Nelson Rockefeller, he hasn't given up either.  After a
recent White House ceremony at which he was given an award,
Rockefeller whispered to reporters as he left: "I'll be back."

   Jimmy Carter is functioning with a skeleton government at the
present time here in Washington.  Huge gaps remain deliberately
unfilled in the Carter Administration--such as the Chairmanship
of the United States Export-Import Bank.  Normally positions at
Eximbank are among the most coveted plums in all of Washington,
and yet up to now they remain unfilled.  Why?  Because, my
friends, the Export-Import Bank is a peacetime operation, and it
will be shut down when war comes as it is planned to do.

   The Carter Cabinet is a war cabinet, and the unprecedented
measure was taken of rushing their confirmation hearings through
Congress even before Carter took office.  On hand to preside over
America's final destruction in NUCLEAR WAR ONE are men of
unchallenged qualifications for that task--such as Secretary of
State Vance, Secretary of Defense Brown, and National Security
Advisor Brzezinski, among others.  These men were in the
forefront of those who argued in favor of America's involvement
in the disaster called Vietnam, and helped guide the conduct of
the war in such a way as to guarantee our defeat!  Now all they
have to say about Vietnam is, quote: "We made a mistake."  And
with that, our country has been placed in their hands once again.

   We hear continually about "government reorganization", but
what does this really mean?  For one hint, consider the fact that
Brzezinski is on record as saying, quote:

  "The reality of our times is such that a modern society, such
as the United States, needs a central, coordinating, and
renovating organ which cannot be made up of 600 people."

In other words, the United States Congress in its present form is
obsolete and should be replaced by something else!!  Brzezinski,
by the way, is a close neighbor and associate of David and Nelson
Rockefeller's at Seal Harbor, Maine.

   And then there are the words of Andrew Young, appointed United
States Ambassador to the U.N. by Carter.  In that position, Young
is charged with speaking for everyone in the United States, yet
he has said, quote: "Communism has never been a threat to me." 
Do words like that speak for you, my friends?  Or for your
neighbors?  Or for any real American?  But those words have been
allowed to stand, and the man who said them is still the United
Nations Ambassador.

   We are moving rapidly toward the introduction of the secret
new Rockefeller Constitution for America which I revealed and
described in AUDIO BOOK tape released in July 1975.  The plan is
now to accomplish this as part of the scenario now under way to
take over the country under threat of war.  Even Carter's new CIA
Director, Admiral Turner, has been in contact with Carter for
over five years--not about military matters but governmental

   And so our unelected Rulers continue to plan and scheme to
take full advantage of the threat of war and even NUCLEAR WAR ONE
itself to destroy our way of life for their own purposes.  The
orchestrated pre-war build-up of tensions continues.  In recent
weeks, western Europe has suddenly been highlighted as our
nuclear-age Dunkirk because doubts are now being expressed that
NATO forces there could withstand a surprise attack by the Warsaw
Pact forces.

   And here at home it is now officially acknowledged that the
Soviet Union is shooting for military superiority over the West. 
Unofficially, some say they already have it.  Worse yet, the
Rockefeller-controlled CIA just 'happens' to have been grossly
underestimating the Soviet military build-up for a decade or
more.  Can you imagine?  Suddenly now we are told that the Soviet
Union has been spending four times the previous CIA estimates for
new weapons and military installations.  The deliberate
underestimates, which were arranged for years by Rockefeller
insiders in the CIA, had just one purpose: To undermine any
arguments about a serious Soviet threat and thereby to insure a
decline in American military might.

   But now that NUCLEAR WAR ONE is imminent, the CIA estimates
can no longer make any difference in our preparedness, so now the
estimates have suddenly been raised in order to demoralize us and
convince us that defeat at Soviet hands is all but inevitable. 
Having arranged for our Constitutional military forces to be
weakened as much as possible, the CIA itself has become the most
powerful military organization in the United States--a fact
symbolized by the fact that the CIA will now be headed by Four
Star Admiral Turner, a Rockefeller insider who will retain his
military rank.

   The CIA has been transformed into a combined super-Military
and Secret Police controlled by persons loyal only to the
Rockefeller Brothers instead of the country as a whole.  This is
in complete violation of the original charter of the CIA and of
the CONSTITUTION of the United States.

   Sixteen years after the establishment of the CIA at the
instigation of David Rockefeller, former President Harry S.
Truman expressed public regrets over having done so.  On December
21, 1963, he wrote for the Washington Post, quote:

  "For some time I've been disturbed by the way the CIA has been
diverted from its original assignment.  It has become an
operational and at times a policy-making arm of the government."

Saying that he had never visualized, quote, "peacetime cloak and
dagger operations" for the CIA, he added, and I quote:

  "This quiet Intelligence arm of the President has been so
removed from its intended role that it is being interpreted as a
symbol of sinister and mysterious foreign intrigue, and a subject
for cold war enemy propaganda."

   These words of President Truman were published just a month
after an American president, John F. Kennedy, had been brutally
removed from office by a successful CIA operation, as I revealed
in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3 for August 1975.  Already the CIA
had broken free of presidential control, and a decade later a CIA
operation called "WATERGATE" replaced an elected President and
Vice-President with appointees for the very first time in
American history!

   Today the United States is surrounded by 90 short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles planted by the Soviet Union
within our own territorial waters.  Our Constitutional military
services have been under presidential orders since October 1,
1976 NOT to remove them; and now that General Brown has been
neutralized, no effort whatever is being made to do so.  And the
only real counter-threat to these Soviet underwater missiles is
the fleet of 14 awesome super-missiles targeted on the Soviet
Union from resting places deep in the Atlantic and Pacific
Oceans.  These undersea super-missiles, as I revealed last month
in AUDIO LETTER No. 20, are not under normal military control but
are under direct Rockefeller command through their controlled
CIA.  Their purpose, as I have already explained, is not to
prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE or even to retaliate when it comes. 
Their purpose is only to insure that the Soviet Union abides by
the joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan to spare the Rockefeller
Brothers and their intimates while incinerating the rest of us.

   But as I revealed last month, the super-secret CIA missiles
have begun deteriorating and leaking.  One missile in the Pacific
is totally disabled, and several others are leaking plutonium
from their warheads into the surrounding waters, and probably are
useless also.

   One of the leaking missiles which I mentioned last month is
Atlantic Missile No. 8, which is located in the ocean about 290
miles east-southeast of Jacksonville, Florida.  On February 7,
1977, just two weeks after I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
20, the beach near Jacksonville, Florida became the scene of a
mystifying phenomenon.  For no apparent reason, whales suddenly
began beaching themselves in large numbers.  Within a short time
over 120 whales beached themselves only to die there.  That
evening NBC News reported that no autopsies were being performed
on the whales, that this was to be left to the Smithsonian here
in Washington.  The next day that story was retracted, but
meanwhile I know from my own sources that a high-ranking
Smithsonian official who is a covert CIA agent went to Florida
immediately to investigate and to make sure that the real cause
of the whales beaching themselves did not become publicly known.

   One story the Smithsonian circulated as a possible explanation
for the strange behavior of the whales was that some sort of
parasites, caused perhaps by pollution, had caused the whales to
lose their senses of depth and direction.  But that, of course,
does not explain why they would all have come ashore out of their
natural habitat, rather than wandering aimlessly at sea.  And it
explains even less what happened when some of the whales were
towed off the beach and into the sea.  In most cases they
unerringly headed straight for shore and beached themselves
again.  Even though death awaited them on the beach, they
preferred that to their natural habitat of the sea.

   What you have not been told, my friends, is that a number of
the whales were dissected, and in practically every case their
stomachs were completely empty--they were sick.  But the real
problem was not in their stomachs but in their lungs, which were
heavily contaminated with plutonium.  A few days after the whales
began beaching themselves, I was informed by my Intelligence
sources that the plutonium leakage from Atlantic Missile No. 8
had accelerated so rapidly that plutonium was now contaminating
the Atlantic in a fan that touches the east coast all the way
from about half way between Savannah and Brunswick, Georgia,
southward almost to Daytona Beach, Florida.  It was strongest in
the middle, right where the whales came ashore near Jacksonville.

   My friends, I am not a marine biologist, and I don't know
exactly how the whales got water-borne plutonium into their
lungs, but the facts speak for themselves, somehow it happened;
and once there, the plutonium produced a fungus-like infection
that interfered with their breathing.  Finally in desperation,
the whales (which are mammals like you and me) began casting
themselves onto the beach, gasping for air.

   By now the whales have been collected and buried in the Gerwin
Road landfill in Jacksonville, Florida, and forgotten by most as
yesterday's news.  But we would do well not to ignore the lesson
of the beached whales; because now, like the whales, our drinking
water in the United States now contains plutonium too.  The
Soviet injections of plutonium into our atmosphere which began
last October 1976 have continued and, in fact, are now
accelerating; and now fallout of this material has contaminated
our own drinking water nationwide.  It is invisible, it is
tasteless, but it is there.

   As I reported last month, a dramatic increase in flu-like
illness was to be expected all across America, thanks to the
Soviet plutonium attack No. 3 which took place in late December
and early January; and now it's happening.  Outbreaks of (quote)
"flu and flu-like illnesses" have been reported this month in at
least 23 states.  Perhaps you yourself have had a round of
something lately that seems like the flu, yet may have seemed
somehow different from flu you have had in the past, or perhaps
you have just noticed that something is "going around."  Even
this recording was delayed one week by flu-like illnesses which
hit myself and some of my associates very hard.

   I wish I could tell you that the flu-like illness season were
about over, but unfortunately the opposite is true.  A fourth
Soviet plutonium attack began this month on February 3 involving
25 Soviet submarines.  This time they were deployed along the
entire West coast from Seattle to San Diego, and they injected
plutonium into our atmosphere over a period of approximately two
weeks.  And now just three days ago on February 24 a fifth Soviet
plutonium attack on the United States has begun.  This time there
are 30 Soviet submarines, again deployed all the way from Seattle
to San Diego.  Furthermore, I am now able to confirm that there
is a weather-modification aspect to the Soviet plutonium attacks.

   In the past year or so the United States Environmental
Protection Agency, the EPA, has issued warnings, so-called, that
fluorocarbon propellants from household aerosol cans are damaging
the ozone layer far up into the atmosphere.  We have been warned
that this could have very dangerous effects on our environment;
and as a result, a trend away from aerosol spray cans is now
under way.  There may be some merit to that argument, but as
usual the EPA is merely seizing on a minor danger in order to
cover up a far more real immediate and major threat.

   The means by which the plutonium is being dispersed into our
atmosphere by the Soviet submarines is none other than by
fluorocarbon propellants discharging upward into the air at a
steep angle.  Each submarine in each attack exhausts huge
quantities of fluorocarbon propellant in such a way that it is
far more effective in damaging our ozone layer than millions of
ordinary household aerosol cans in normal use.  Even before the
plutonium attacks began last October, my Intelligence sources
believe that fluorocarbon injections like this into our
atmosphere were under way for some time.  The introduction of the
plutonium to these attacks last October was therefore an easy

   But by other means, also, weather-modification activities by
both the CIA and the Soviet KGB have been in progress for some
time now for use in warfare.  Because of these facts, I believe I
should warn you about one thing which, at this time, I must label
as conjecture.  Normally, as you know, my policy is to tell you
only those things which I have been able to confirm as
established fact; but this time I believe an exception is
warranted.  The timing, severity, and pattern of the huge winter
storm that struck the north and east portions of the United
States may well have been a massive pre-war weather-modification
experiment as a rehearsal for similar measures in NUCLEAR WAR
ONE.  Had war broken out while those weather patterns persisted,
large portions of the upper United States within the "Nuclear
Safe Zone" would have been immobilized by weather and therefore
could have been spared from attack--seemingly for natural

   It may be that weather control is the key to the riddle of the
"Nuclear Safe Zone", enabling it to escape attack while the
southern two-thirds of the United States along with Alaska and
Hawaii endure a nuclear holocaust.  If this is the case, then a
future storm pattern that immobilizes the part of the United
States above the 40th Parallel could be the signal that a Soviet
nuclear attack is imminent.  I emphasize again that, as of now,
this is conjecture on my part.  I have not been able to confirm
it, but there are so many facts that point in this direction that
I believe you should be warned of this possibility.  The
Rockefeller Brothers, in any case, are doing everything in their
power to hurry up NUCLEAR WAR ONE, so anything can happen.  They
are in a hurry because they want to make sure that the war takes
place while enough of their super CIA missiles are still
operational to provide an effective blackmail threat against the
Soviets.  But as for America's officially acknowledged fleet of
Intercontinental Missiles, that is another matter.

   I have never revealed what went on when I saw General George
S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, in his Pentagon
offices last September 16, 1976, but I think I should now mention
just one item which has now acquired urgent new significance.

   One of the things I discussed with General Brown was the
horrendous Intelligence gap created by then Secretary of State
Henry Kissinger.  Because of this deliberate Intelligence gap,
General Brown and the Joint Chiefs have been denied crucial
information needed to protect our country.  In this connection,
General Brown did not know about the super-secret "Nuclear Safe
Zone" negotiated for the private benefit of the Rockefeller
Brothers and their intimates by Kissinger.  In fact, it seemed
unbelievable because he pointed out the presence of several prime
targets--namely, ICBM installations inside the "Nuclear Safe
Zone."  But now Jimmy Carter is pushing for those very ICBM sites
to be shut down.  That is the meaning of Carter's incredible
order to General Brown at the Blair House meeting of January 12,
1977, and by that means the Rockefellers plan to make the
"Nuclear Safe Zone" off limits to NUCLEAR WAR ONE attack.

Topic #3--Whatever the future holds for us, my friends, one thing
is for sure.  We are witnessing the end of an era.  Politically,
economically, socially, and spiritually we are entering a time of
tumultuous change, but the question still remains: Change in what

   Will this be the end of the era of destructive Rockefeller
control over our lives?  Or will we just sit back wringing our
hands and let them succeed in their plans to snuff out the era of
human freedom?  Might we look forward to the new era of renewed
respect for nature as God in His wisdom created it?  Or will we
condemn ourselves by inaction to a suicidal era of ever
increasing destruction of our beautiful world under the greedy
exploitation of the Rockefeller cartel and their Soviet allies? 
Will the struggle that is being forced upon us lead us at last to
a new dawning of the day of the individual?  Or will we submit
without struggle to the perfect equality of slaves in the
Rockefeller-Soviet world empire?

   My friends, it will take organized, dedicated, selfless action
to sound the alarm and bring pressure to bear in time to turn
away from total disaster for our land.  But the hour is now so
late; where can we hope for this action to come from?  If history
is any guide, my friends, there is only one institution left.

   I have pointed out on previous occasions that what is
happening in America today is a ghastly replay of what happened
to Germany before World War II--with one difference.  Those who
brought Hitler to power as a pawn are themselves coming to power
here in America.

   With this in mind, I will now read a very rare letter to you. 
For reasons which will become apparent, it will be safely stored
away again under lock and key by the time you hear this
recording.  The letter, written by a distinguished churchman, is
dated October 16, 1945, and is addressed to Dr. Albert Einstein. 
I will now read directly from the letter:

  "My dear Dr. Einstein:

   I have seen you reported as having said, quote: 'Being a lover
of freedom, when the revolution came in Germany I looked to the
Universities to defend it, knowing that they had always boasted
of their devotion to the cause of truth; but NO, the Universities
immediately were silenced.  Then I looked to the great editors of
the newspapers whose flaming editorials in days gone by had
proclaimed their love of freedom; but they, like the
Universities, were silenced in a few short weeks.  Only the
Church stood squarely across the path of Hitler's campaign for
suppressing the truth.  I never had any special interest in the
church before, but now I feel a great affection and admiration,
because the church alone has had the courage and persistence to
stand for intellectual truth and moral freedom.  I am forced thus
to confess that what I once despised, I now praise

Still continuing with the letter:

  "Would you be kind enough to let me know whether this
represents your feeling now that hostilities have ceased?  I
should be very grateful to know how you feel about this now.

   With great admiration and every good wish, I am
                                          Yours faithfully,"

and there follows the signature of the writer.  Below there is a
postscript as follows, and I quote:

  "P.S. - The statement is reported to have been made by you
before the United States entered the war, and I thought possibly
you might have had some occasion to change your opinion in the
light of later developments.  I naturally hope that you haven't."

The writer of this letter received it back with the following
answer in longhand along the right-hand margin, and I quote:

  "The reproduction of my verbally given statement is essentially
correct, and I have not changed my opinion concerning this

There follows the signature:

"A. Einstein."

   My friends, the churches in Nazi Germany recognized the
onslaught of evil and stood up against it.  Today America faces
the same evil, multiplied a thousand times over.  But where?  oh
where are the churches today?

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 20

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of Audio Books, Inc., Box 16428, Ft.
Worth, Texas  76133

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is January 24,
1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 20.

   Just four days ago, on January 20, 1977, our nation witnessed
the crowning achievement of Rockefeller public relations
propaganda, the so-called People's Inaugural of Jimmy Carter. 
Through emotional appeals to the American Dream, millions of
Americans are being enticed to let their hopes soar based on
nothing but blind trust.  But the most crushing disappointments
are always those which follow the brightest hopes; and the false
hopes that are being raised by Jimmy Carter will come crashing to
the ground all too soon.

   Even so, there is something to be thankful for that deserves a
moment's reflection.  Nelson Rockefeller still has been denied
the goal he has sought for so long--seizure of the Presidency and
his establishment as America's first openly visible Dictator. 
Never before has a bright light been focused on the real plans
and actions of Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers; but now,
after developing a total of nine scenarios and back-up plans for
placing himself in the Oval Office through the back door of his
25th Amendment, he has run through them all, and for the moment
he has failed.

   Major factors that have upset and delayed the plans of the
Four Rockefeller Brothers for total control have included such
things as: the twin Gold and Plutonium Scandal at Fort Knox which
is still being covered up, Indira Gandhi's crackdown on the CIA
in the summer of 1975, and of course their double-cross by the
Soviet Union that began last summer with the planting of
underwater nuclear missiles along our shores.  And according to
my own Intelligence sources, the glare of the truth has played an
important role in keeping Nelson Rockefeller out of the
presidency, so far.  In recent weeks, support for the leadership
of the Four Rockefeller Brothers among their corporate socialist
allies has been weakened by the shock of the Soviet double-cross. 
Nelson finally abandoned his ninth take-over scenario involving
the Electoral College scheme under pressure from brother David. 
Thus, David Rockefeller, the most powerful of the Four Brothers,
is now playing the role that their late uncle, Winthrop Aldrich,
always used to play in seeing to it that Nelson never became

   What Nelson Rockefeller may do from this point onward remains
to be seen.  Only one thing is for sure: Like the Soviets, he
never gives up; and he has not given up on his dream of becoming
the President and Dictator of the United States--and ultimately
of the world.

   But for the time being it is his brother David who is now
President-by-proxy through his control of Jimmy Carter.  What we
are witnessing in the transition from the Ford to the Carter
Administration is nothing more than a changing of shifts in the
one real political party that runs America--the Rockefeller
Party.  The Soviet Union is run decade after decade by fewer than
one percent (1%), who belong to the ruling Communist Party; and
the United States of America is now run decade after decade by
fewer than 1%, who belong to the ruling Rockefeller
Party--whether they call themselves Republicans, Democrats,
Liberals, or Conservatives.

   Jimmy Carter, who campaigned as a Washington outsider, owes
his come-from-nowhere election to the fact that David Rockefeller
selected him some years ago as the ideal puppet for his purposes. 
Carter was invited to join David's TRILATERAL COMMISSION and was
then steeped in Trilateralist thinking--in other words, the
Rockefeller line.  With such powerful support, Carter has no idea
how dangerous a position he is now in.  Already a "Carter
Watergate" is brewing to cut him down; and, worst of all, the
threat of war hangs over everything he does.

   In his Inaugural Address, Carter expressed a preoccupation
with war; and for the past several weeks the American public has
been under an avalanche of warnings about the Soviet military
threat, including statements that the Soviets are now preparing
for war.  This is a complete turnabout from the virtual ban on
anti-Soviet news that was in force in the controlled major media
until very recently; and the excuse that has been provided for
all these new warnings is a new study of Intelligence information
that was launched last summer as soon as it was learned that the
Soviet Union was planting offensive missiles in our waters.  The
threat of war, my friends, is very real; but the intent of the
controlled major media in relaying these warnings to you now is
another matter.  We are now being psychologically conditioned to
accept a "Declaration of National Emergency" when the time is
ripe, and to submit to the dictatorial controls it will impose.

   The drive to merge the United States with the Soviet Union to
form an all-powerful World Government has already cost us two
World Wars plus Korea and Vietnam.  Now, we are once again in a
pre-war situation, on the brink of NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and for
reasons I can now reveal, the Four Rockefeller Brothers still
believe they can succeed in bending the coming nuclear war to
their own purposes.

   My three special topics for today are:




Topic #1--One year ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8, I publicly
revealed for the very first time the supersecret White House
merge directive.  Under this directive our lives in America are
to be so altered that we can be comfortably merged with the
Soviet Union.  And since last spring I have also been drawing
your attention to the little known but central role that the
major tax-free Foundations have played for two generations and
more to push our nation in the same direction.

   Last month I was able to reveal one of my sources of
information about the Foundations--my friend, Mr. Norman Dodd,
and to repeat for you his own words about the clandestine role
they have played in progressively destroying the America that was
created by our Founding Fathers.  Mr. Dodd's story is incredible,
but it is also based upon painstaking, carefully documented
research which he directed with the Congress of the United
States.  As one of America's foremost authorities on Foundations,
Norman Dodd is a man whose words carry a great deal of weight. 
But since last April I have also been informed anew that there is
a contingent among the present-day Trustees of these Foundations
who are becoming increasingly worried about the direction in
which they are taking us.  Even before the Soviet underwater
missile crisis materialized last summer, their fears of a Soviet
double-cross were mounting rapidly.  And now, no less than Henry
Ford II has resigned in dissatisfaction as a Trustee of the
biggest Foundation in the world--the Ford Foundation; and he has
warned in a criticizing letter that a change in direction would
be wise to consider.

   In his resignation letter of January 11, 1977, he said in
part, and I quote:

  "The Foundation exists and thrives on the fruits of our
economic system.  The dividends of competitive enterprise make it
all possible.  A significant portion of the abundance created by
United States business enables the Foundation and like
institutions to carry on their work.  In effect, the Foundation
is a creature of capitalism--a statement that I am sure would be
shocking to many professional staff people in the field of
philanthropy.  It is hard to discern recognition of this fact in
anything the Foundation does.  It is even more difficult to find
an understanding of this in many of the institutions,
particularly the universities, that are the beneficiaries of the
Foundation's grant programs."

Shortly thereafter he continues, and I quote:

  "I am just suggesting to the Trustees and the staff that the
system that makes the Foundation possible very probably is worth
preserving.  Perhaps it's time for the Trustees and staff to
examine the question of our obligations to our economic system;
and to consider how the Foundation, as one of the system's most
prominent offspring, might act most wisely to strengthen and
improve its progenitor."

   If you are not aware of the concerted drive toward
collectivism that has been promoted for decades by the major
Foundations, these words of Henry Ford II may surprise you.  Even
so, you may be even more surprised at the reactions of the major
Foundations to his criticisms.  Almost universally their
bitterest reactions had to do with Ford's defense of free
competitive enterprise.

   For example, consider the Carnegie Endowment for International
Peace.  In AUDIO LETTER No. 19 last month you heard of the
chilling role the Carnegie Endowment has played since 1909 in
altering America's national life through warfare and twisting our
education.  When a high official of the Carnegie Endowment was
asked for his comments on Henry Ford's letter of resignation, he
reacted in the scornful words, "Is that what the Ford Foundation
is set up for--to promote free enterprise?"  He was very upset at
the mention of free enterprise--the indispensable foundation of
Freedom itself.

   Henry Ford II is not alone.  Those Foundation trustees who
insist upon continuing the suicidal drive toward collectivism
under the long-time commitment for a One World Government are
trying to put down all dissent within their ranks.  But Henry
Ford II has courageously shown the way, and we can hope for
others to follow.

Topic #2--In all the major wars of this century involving the
United States, undeclared warfare has been a consistent pattern. 
In the cases of Korea and Vietnam, in fact, the entire wars were
undeclared.  In the cases of World Wars I and II, undeclared
warfare and provocations preceded the formal outbreak of war and
marked the time period in each case that has since been called

   In that sense, we are now living in the pre-war days that are
leading up to NUCLEAR WAR ONE here in America!  But as we are
living out the days of the pre-NUCLEAR WAR ONE period, undeclared
hostilities have reached a level unparalleled in the past.

   Consider first the repeated plutonium cloud attacks which have
been mounted on the United States by Soviet submarines in recent
months.  As I have related in previous monthly AUDIO LETTERS, the
first such attack was mounted in early October 1976 by Soviet
submarines deployed along the Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf coasts
of the United States.  Based on the results from that first
full-scale experiment on our country, Soviet chemical warfare
specialists concluded that subsequent plutonium cloud attacks
could be mounted most efficiently from stations along the
Northwest Coast.

   In late November 1976, a second experimental attack was
mounted to test this out; and while it was not completely
successful from the Soviet viewpoint, it provided all the
additional data they needed.

   Both of these experimental plutonium cloud attacks by the
Soviet Union were accompanied by convenient cover announcements
by the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the EPA, to
the effect that radioactive clouds from Chinese nuclear blasts
would be passing over us.  Thus an explanation was readily
available should something unexpectedly severe happen--but it did

   And on December 13, 1976, as I reported last month, 21 Soviet
submarines loaded with plutonium poison to inject into our
atmosphere arrived on station along the Northwest Coast of the
United States.  This time, my friends, experimentation was no
longer the goal.  Certain individuals in the United States
Government knew they were there, and knew why, but did nothing
whatsoever to interfere with their mission.

   As of December 31, 1976, 13 of the 21 subs had emptied their
load into our atmosphere and headed out to sea, having timed
their attack to make optimum use of severe winter storm
conditions across the United States.  The other 8 subs remained
behind to reinforce the main plutonium cloud by continuing to
feed it periodically over a period of days.  Finally on January
3, 1977, these 8 Soviet subs also departed out to sea, having
emptied their loads into our atmosphere.

   According to my own Intelligence sources, this third and
latest plutonium cloud attack by the Soviet Union was very
effective.  The Soviets did achieve a very broad dispersal of the
plutonium poison throughout the continental United States.  This,
on top of the record cold weather blanketing most of the United
States lately, may well lead to an outbreak of flu-like
sicknesses in the near future, to which the Government has been
conditioning us now for nearly a year.

   Undeclared warfare by the Soviet Union is also continuing by
means of the short-range underwater-launch missiles which have
been planted in our waters by the Soviet Union ready for use in a
surprise attack.  Last month I revealed that 93 such missiles
were in place in American waters, and I gave the navigational
coordinates for nine of them which were surrounding the Island of
Oahu, where Pearl Harbor is located.

   I can now report that the United States Navy did remove all
nine of these missiles, completing the operation on December 31,
1976.  But four Soviet submarines were on hand to observe the
complete missile removal operation by our Navy; and as of January
17, just one week ago, two new Soviet missiles were already in
place, threatening Pearl Harbor again.  In addition, four other
Soviet missiles have been planted since I recorded monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 19 last month--two in Alaskan waters, the other two on
the West Coast.  This brings the total back up to 90 as of now.

   My disclosures last month demonstrated to certain persons that
I am not bluffing, that the United States is indeed targeted by a
massive new round of Soviet underwater nuclear missiles.  But for
the reasons I gave two months ago in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
18 for November, 1976, I do not intend to reveal the rest of the
missile locations merely to have them wasted in the deadly
cat-and-mouse game now under way.  Instead, my own Intelligence
sources have made it crystal clear that only public exposure of
the truth about this whole deadly matter has any hope of stopping
the coming war.  For that reason I have already launched efforts
through a number of indirect channels which lie outside the
Rockefeller sphere of control in an attempt to bring about this
public exposure.

   If full-fledged war does come, my friends, America is in for a
wide range of nasty military surprises.  In certain areas Soviet
approaches to military technology are far different from our
own--such as in the field of anti-submarine warfare.

   One field in which they are literally decades ahead of the
United States is in the area of microwaves as they affect human
beings.  Since early December the Soviet Union has been
conducting a major experimental test program on a new
satellite-based system that uses microwaves to directly affect
the behavior of humans.  The test victims: the crews of selected
tankers and freighters in and near American waters.

   Soviet researchers discovered long ago that prolonged exposure
to microwaves, even at intensities considered "safe" in the
United States, can produce a long list of effects on people. 
These range from dizziness and irritability to emotional
instability and alteration of brain wave patterns, as well as
other effects.  Starting from these findings, Soviet scientists
have developed microwave bombardment techniques which have the
basic effect of greatly reducing a person's capacity for
exercising judgment and fully comprehending facts at his
disposal.  A person under such bombardment, in other words, is
very prone to make mistakes, serious mistakes.

   On December 15, 1976, the Liberian tanker Argo Merchant went
aground on the Nantucket shoals off Cape Cod, and the resulting
oil spill of 7-1/2 million gallons was the worst to date in
American history.  Many things were strange about the
incident--such as the fact that the Nantucket shoals are a very
well known navigational hazard, and the Argo Merchant was many
miles off course.  Hearings later revealed that the ship's
navigational gear was not in proper condition, but strange
behavior by the crew itself went unexplained.

   The Argo Merchant was then followed by a rash of tanker
incidents in and near American waters; and in almost every case,
errors of judgment were either primary or contributing factors.

   It was a bad month for the Coast Guard; but it was worst of
all for the 38 nationalist Chinese crewmen of the tanker Grand
Zenith, which was lost at sea off the New England coast with over
8-million gallons of heavy fuel oil aboard.  On December 30,
1976, the Zenith reported its position as about 60 miles south of
Yarmouth, Nova Scotia.  It was never heard from again.  Several
days later, after the ship failed to arrive at its destination,
the Coast Guard began a search for the missing ship.  However it
was noticed that the last position reported by the Zenith was so
far north of its planned course that it did not seem to make
sense.  As a result, the search was shifted to a seemingly more
likely area far to the south of that location.

   The story of the Grand Zenith is a tragic one, my friends. 
But it might have been less tragic had the Coast Guard taken the
last position report by the Captain of the Grand Zenith more
seriously and anchored search operations on that position,
because on January 7, 1977, I received Intelligence information
to the effect that the location of the sunken Grand Zenith was
approximately 43 degrees 5 minutes North, 67 degrees 52 minutes
West.  Furthermore, my information indicated that as of that time
there were still survivors in the immediate vicinity of the

   It was urgent that this be brought to the attention of the
Coast Guard without delay.  The search had already been narrowed
down to the wrong area--over 200 miles to the southeast of the
correct position--based on the finding of two life jackets
bearing the name Grand Zenith.  I immediately contacted the J. F.
Moran Company in Providence, Rhode Island (the ship's agent in
New England), and gave them the information.  They passed it on
to the Coast Guard--but there it stopped!

   For days I tried directly and indirectly to get someone to
check out the location I had been given.  On January 10 I
contacted the Coast Guard directly to see what had been done.  I
was informed that no attempt whatever had been made to check out
my report, and that no attempt was going to be made!!  Instead
the same fruitless area 300 miles east of Cape Cod was searched
day after day for a week with no hope whatsoever of finding the
survivors.  Meanwhile I could not persuade the Coast Guard even
to make a single flight over the actual site of the sinking in
order to check out my report.

   The same information was also given to the Navy after the
Coast Guard refused to investigate; and the Navy, too, refused to
check it out.  Had either the Navy or the Coast Guard checked the
information I gave them about the Grand Zenith, they would have
found it to be true, and that would have demonstrated to the
public at large that my Intelligence sources about matters like
this are extremely accurate.

   My Intelligence sources had hoped that this would be exactly
the outcome of my relaying the life-saving information about the
Grand Zenith.  But, my friends, the TRUTH has many enemies.

Topic #3--The brain-scrambling microwave weapons which are now
entering operational status in the Soviet arsenal are just one
example of a whole new generation of superweapons which are now
under development in a secret arms race.  The participants in
this race are none other than the Corporate Socialist Rockefeller
cartel on the one hand, and the State Socialists of the Soviet
Union on the other.  Thus, while they are allies in the drive to
take over the rest of the world, there remains a tension of
rivalry between the two.  Each would like to achieve clear
supremacy over the other, and each is trying to prevent the other
from achieving such supremacy.  Caught in the middle as both pawn
and prize is the United States of America with her people, her
resources, and her industrial and military establishment.  We
continually hear about the military relationship between the
Soviet Union and the United States, but the real arms struggle is
between the Soviet Union and the Rockefeller empire--and it is a
well kept secret.

   Weapons which are under normal official Defense Department
control in this country are always compared with weapons which
enjoy a similar officially acknowledged status in the Soviet
Union.  Thus military planners think in terms of Soviet Backfire
Bombers versus the American B-1 Bomber; Soviet missiles and
missile-firing submarines versus their counterparts; and new
developments such as Cruise Missiles which, by the way, are not
actually a basic new concept at all.  All of these things are
real and important factors in the military equation.  But there
is another layer of weaponry that you have never heard about, yet
which is crucial to the real power balance between the
Rockefeller and Soviet empires.  This is the realm of the secret
arms race in highly advanced super weapons.  This realm is
completely unaffected by SALT treaties or other treaties, and
involves a continual jockeying for pure raw power!

   Thus, for example, timid reports are just beginning to be made
public about the possibilities that lasers might be used to blind
military satellites, and that some day far in the future they
might even be developed into death rays like those of Science
Fiction.  As for operational weapons in the supersecret category,
the Soviet underwater nuclear missiles that now infest our waters
and the sonar-absorbing mini-submarines which are used to plant
them are good examples.

   One of the puzzling things to me until recently was the
incredible "Red Friday Agreement" of October 1, 1976, whereby the
Rockefeller Brothers pledged, through President Ford, not to
harass the Soviet submarines planting missiles in our waters. 
Even more puzzling has been the absence of a Soviet ultimatum or
surprise attack so far, given our heavy coastal targeting with
these missiles.  But now, I can give you the answers.

   When I first revealed the locations of Soviet underwater
missiles around the world in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 last
August, I did so with the knowledge that a planned world-wide
Soviet surprise attack was imminent, and that public exposure was
the only thing that could prevent it.  Now I know more fully why
the surprise element was so crucial to the double-cross embarked
upon by the Soviet Union.  The Soviets were trying to prepare and
launch the attack before an awesome weapons system that is under
direct Rockefeller control could be activated; but ever since
that surprise was ruined, they have been forced to bide their
time while they watch for another opportunity to catch the
Rockefeller empire in a vulnerable moment.

   Meanwhile a standoff is being maintained between the Soviet
underwater missiles and the Rockefeller superweapons system I am
about to tell you about.  At the same time, Rockefeller
propaganda is being used to rapidly wash away the idea of
East-West detente in a flood of warnings about the Soviet threat
and possible war.  The purpose of it all is to lead up to a
"Declaration of National Emergency", as I have already warned. 
Finally, NUCLEAR WAR ONE is programmed to come.  The purpose of
the Rockefeller superweapons is not to prevent this war.  These
superweapons are only a club over the head of the Soviets to
insure that the war goes according to plan.  This includes Soviet
adherence to the "Nuclear Safe Zone" which was established by
secret agreement to protect the Rockefeller Brothers and their

   I was first alerted to the existence of the Rockefeller
superweapons system as the result of my press release which was
sent out to nearly 11,000 newspapers in the United States late in
October in connection with the release of monthly AUDIO LETTER
No. 17.  The press release called attention to the pivotal role
General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff,
had played in preventing a surprise attack by means of Soviet
underwater missiles.

   On November 17, 1976, one of my associates received a call
from a Mr. Tony Hodges, a prominent environmentalist who lives in
Honolulu.  Mr. Hodges had been given a copy of the press release,
and called to find out more about it.  He had good reason to be
interested because nearly a year earlier, unbenoticed to my
associates or myself, he had delivered a 47-page warning document
to the ambassadors of more than 50 countries who had signed the
1971 Seabeds Arms Control Treaty.  In this warning document Mr.
Hodges alerted the reader to, quote:

  "Probable violations by the USA and the USSR of the 1971
Seabeds Arms Control Treaty."

He was careful to make clear that the material contained in the
document did not prove his suspicions that undersea weapons of
the sort banned by the treaty had been deployed by either the
United States or the Soviet Union.  Nevertheless he did explain
in considerable detail why such weapons, such as missiles and
undersea silos, would be militarily desirable; and he also
presented the statements of several extremely highly qualified
experts in this field of technology contending that such undersea
missile systems are feasible.

   One of these authorities is Dr. John P. Craven, who is
presently (Jan. 1977) the dean of Marine Programs for the
University of Hawaii as well as Marine Affairs Coordinator for
the State of Hawaii.  Formerly he was Chief Scientist on United
States Navy projects which involved both the development of this
nation's submarine-launched ballistic missile system and deep
submersibles.  He is also an attorney specializing in Marine Law,
and at last report continued to be a high-level consultant to the
Department of Defense.

   In his warning document, Mr. Hodges lists the impressive
credentials of Dr. Craven in more detail, and also presents
voluminous notes on a conversation he had with Dr. Craven in
November 1975 about the subject of undersea missiles.  The entire
Craven interview as reported in the Hodges warning document
provides a great deal of insight into the whole subject of
undersea missiles, which are discussed throughout as being sealed
inside a protective capsule while they dwell in their hiding
places beneath the sea.  At no point did Dr. Craven admit to
knowing of the actual existence of any such system; but according
to the report of Mr. Hodges, the feasibility of such undersea
missiles was strongly confirmed by Dr. Craven.

   To illustrate this, I will now quote from page 26 of the
Hodges warning document--Notes C-29 through C-31, quote:

  "Craven said he could develop a total weapons system to do what
I suggested in a maximum of four (4) years, longer if it needed
to be clandestine.

   The above is an enormously important statement by Craven,
since the author believes that Craven was intimately involved in
the development of the systems noted in this warning document.
The figure Craven gave for carrying out the system development in
total secrecy, such as has been done, was seven (7) years.  This
is significant because it is believed that the program to place
nuclear weapons on and within the seabed was begun in 1968 while
Craven was still chief scientist of the Navy's Strategic Systems
project and its Deep Submergence Systems project.  The seabed
silos and the tidal wave and earthquake-generating systems would
certainly fall in those two areas of responsibility of his.

   It should be noted that whenever during the conversation we
got away from whether or not the weapons system had actually been
implanted, Craven quickly warmed up to the subject as the 'can
do' technologist he is known to be.  When he said he could
develop such a program--a 'total weapons system' he called it--in
only (4) years, he did so with considerable gusto.

   It was in this vein that Craven offered the next remark.
Craven said that the individual missile capsules did not have to
be placed in silos on the seabed, but could be dumped off the
rear of a fast-moving destroyer.  Craven said that there would be
some problem for the missile to know its precise location, but
that this could be worked out."

   The Hodges warning document also reports the assessment of
feasibility of underwater missiles by two other experts.  One who
is identified as having worked for 16 years on American
submarine-launched ballistic missile projects is Robert C.
Aldrich.  He is quoted as saying, quote:

  "Quite feasible, though I was skeptical at first."

Another person quoted is Costa Tpsis of MIT Center for
International Studies, a well known analyst of strategic missile
systems.  His assessment of the feasibility of undersea missile
systems, as described by Hodges, is reported to be quote:

  "'Absolutely possible.'  Tpsis said that such silos could be
placed on the continental shelf in water as shallow as 100 meters
and still achieve the same protective purpose."

(End of quote from the Hodges warning document.)

   My friends, Tony Hodges deserves a great deal of credit, both
for the importance of the material he uncovered and summarized in
his warning document, and for the way in which he has handled it. 
First, he tried unsuccessfully to get the Government to take
proper corrective measures without having to resort to
embarrassing publicity about it.  Then, he turned to the press in
the person of a syndicated columnist, whom I will simply call
"Mr. X."  Mr. X took great interest in the Hodges warning
document material and in the plan to have it delivered to the
governments of the signatories to the Seabed Arms Control Treaty
on December 17, 1975.  According to Hodges, a big news story was
written ready to break on the same day the documents were
delivered--December 17, 1975.  But suddenly Mr. X decided to kill
the story because CIA Director William Colby, National Security
Council Staff Director Brent Scowcroft, and Richard Chaney of the
White House Staff all asked him to kill it!  Nevertheless the
warning document was delivered to the ambassadors of the Seabed
Treaty signatories in Washington and at the United Nations in New
York City.  According to Mr. Hodges this, too, apparently fell on
deaf ears.  Nor have attempts to bring it to the attention of the
United States Congress apparently been of any use!

   But, my friends, Tony Hodges was on to something very big
indeed.  Having been alerted for the first time by his warning
document that the United States might be involved in some way
with undersea missiles or other nuclear weapons, I began checking
my own Intelligence sources to find out whether it was actually
so or not.  And, my friends, the answer is "Yes."  The Hodges
warning document provides a great deal of very informative
background material for what I am about to tell you; and I am
informed that as long as he has copies of it left, you can obtain
a copy for $10.00 by writing to him directly.  The name and

   Mr. Anthony Hodges, 3238 Paty Drive, Honolulu, Hawaii  96822
   His telephone number now is: Area Code 808-988-2557.

   What I have to tell you now, my friends, is not the
responsibility of Tony Hodges in any way.  It is what I have
learned from my own Intelligence sources over the past two
months, and I accept full responsibility for making it public.

   When I revealed the presence of Soviet short-range nuclear
missiles in our waters last August, I mentioned that the United
States had not placed similar missiles in the waters around the
Soviet Union.  I can confirm once again that this is the case. 
But now, I have learned that an entirely different kind of
underwater-launch offensive nuclear missiles are targeted on the
Soviet Union from resting places deep in the Atlantic and Pacific

   According to my own Intelligence information, only 14 of these
undersea supermissiles have been deployed--5 in the Pacific, 9 in
the Atlantic--but that's enough.  Each of these encapsulated
supermissiles is more akin to the Saturn moon rocket than to any
ordinary ICBM.  Each carries several dozen independently
targetable hydrogen warheads.  Several of these on each missile
are superyield warheads, with the rest being similar to the
normal Minuteman or Polaris warhead.  The superyield warheads are
designed to devastate all the major ports and key portions of the
industrial heartland of the Soviet Union, in spite of the Civil
Defense measures that the Soviets have taken in recent years. 
The huge number of lower-yield warheads are targeted on
relatively soft targets throughout the Soviet Union with the sole
purpose of raising the Soviet casualty toll as high as possible.

   The whole purpose of these undersea supermissiles is to
confront the Soviet Union with a threat of massive counterattack
which cannot be neutralized in a Soviet first strike, and which
would ruin the Soviet Union as a functioning society.  According
to plan, these missiles would virtually destroy the Soviet Union
as a modern civilization, killing over 100-million people in the
process.  But, my friends, the purpose of these undersea
supermissiles aimed at the Soviet Union is not to protect you and
me, nor to prevent war!  They are under the direct control of the
Rockefeller Brothers by way of their controlled CIA--not the
normal chain of command through the Department of Defense; and
their purpose is to serve as an awesome club over the heads of
the Soviet rulers to make sure that NUCLEAR WAR ONE goes as

   The world-wide Pearl Harbor attack that was imminent last
August when I publicly revealed the world-wide locations of
Soviet underwater missiles was a daring Soviet gamble.  Its
purpose was to eliminate the Four Rockefeller Brothers from the
scene and simultaneously prevent the CIA undersea missiles from
being launched by making such counterattacks seem pointless.  But
the key ingredient of that plan was secrecy and total surprise. 
My intelligence sources made it abundantly clear last July and
August that the only way to prevent immediate nuclear disaster
was public exposure of the truth.  And now we know why.  Now we
also know why the Four Rockefeller Brothers felt that they could
get away with the seemingly suicidal policy instituted on Red
Friday, October 1, 1976, agreeing to allow the Soviet Union to
keep planting short-range nuclear missiles in our territorial
waters without harassment.  It's all part of a nuclear standoff
involving weapons the public does not even know about and in
which the Rockefellers believe they hold the upper hand.

   There are now strong indications that the Four Rockefeller
Brothers, believing they still hold the upper hand with their
undersea supermissiles, plan to turn the presence of the Soviet
missiles in our waters to their own advantage.  During the fall
of 1976 they re-established the strained alliance between
themselves and the Soviet Union for the time being; and now we
are being built up rapidly to accept a Declaration of National
Emergency.  The announcement by the Government that there are
Soviet missiles in our waters is now being arranged to be done
with the advanced knowledge of the Soviet Union.  Just as
Franklin D. Roosevelt declared an "unlimited national emergency"
on May 27, 1941 as part of the build-up for war, a similar
scenario is being worked out now to trap us all!

   But the cruel joke may be on the Rockefeller Brothers
themselves, who may yet be buried by the Soviet Union along with
millions of us.  Something is going wrong with the CIA
supermissiles deep in the ocean; and as of now, one is completely
disabled and five more are deteriorating rapidly and probably are
not usable.  That leaves only eight undersea supermissiles at the
disposal of the Rockefeller Brothers; and their reliability, too,
is now open to serious question.  In addition, the Soviet fears
about their corroding underwater missiles in the secret Soviet
missile crisis of 1971, which I described in monthly AUDIO LETTER
No. 14 last July, apply again now.  Several of the undersea
supermissiles are now leaking plutonium from their disabled
warheads into the surrounding water, and the possibility of an
uncontrolled explosion cannot be ruled out.  Should this happen,
tidal waves or earthquakes could be created that could affect
Hawaii, the Bahamas, or any place along the east coast from Nova
Scotia to Florida.

   Just as my Intelligence sources emphasized last summer that
public exposure of the truth was the key to avoiding disaster,
the same situation exists again now.  The CIA undersea
supermissiles in the Atlantic and Pacific cannot protect us from
war, and in fact are not even intended for that purpose.  Yet
they sit there as a present hazard to all of our lives, directly
and indirectly.  Therefore I am going to reveal the locations of
all 14 of the CIA undersea supermissiles in navigational
coordinates.  At a minimum I hope to strip the Rockefeller cartel
of their ace in the hole that makes our survival irrelevant to
them; but even more, I hope to undo their continued cooperation
with the Soviet Union in a plan to sacrifice millions of our
lives.  This may well be our last chance to prevent the present
"pre-war period" from erupting as planned into NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

   The missiles are located in water depths ranging from a few
hundred feet at several Atlantic sites to more than 15,000 feet
at one Pacific site.

   The following five locations are in the Pacific Ocean. 
Incidentally, these are in the vicinity of locations which are
shown on a map in the Hodges warning document as probable
locations of undersea weapons.  As explained in the warning
document, Mr. Hodges believes that these locations were the
subject of seabed weapons installations or tests by the
CIA-financed Howard Hughes mystery ship, the Glomar Explorer.

Pacific Missile No. 1--About 25 miles north of the Hawaiian
Island Kauai at 22-37-14 North, 159-21-55 West.  Plutonium
leakage from this missile is badly contaminating the surrounding

Pacific Missile No. 2--About 10 miles north of Kauai at 22-21-59
North, 159-36-19 West.  Leaking, but not as badly.

Pacific Missile No. 3--About 650 miles northwest of Christmas
Island at 9-20-0 North, 165-18-41 West.

Pacific Missile No. 4--About 550 miles northwest of Christmas
Island at 8-0-0 North, 163-34-38 West.  This missile is totally

Pacific Missile No. 5--About 420 miles west-northwest of
Christmas Island at 3-2-0 North, 164-35-25 West.

Now for the Atlantic missiles:

Atlantic Missile No. 1--In Canadian waters near Sable Island at
43-52-0 North, 59-10-54 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 2--In Canadian waters about 140 miles
south-southeast of Halifax, Nova Scotia, at 42-30-24 North,
63-1-5 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 3--About 225 miles due east of Cape Cod at
41-46-23 North, 65-54-33 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 4--About 120 miles southeast of Cape Cod at
40-20-0 North, 68-18-32 West.  Leaking.

Atlantic Missile No. 5--About 50 miles to the southwest of
Atlantic Missile No. 4 at 40-4-0 North, 69-17-27 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 6--Only about 30 miles southeast of Cape
Hatteras, North Carolina at 34-49-1 North, 75-17-27 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 7--About 240 miles east-northeast of
Charleston, So. Car. at 33-5-40 North, 75-43-38 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 8--About 290 miles east-southeast of
Jacksonville, Fla. at 30-9-9 North, 77-8-44 West.  Leaking.

And finally:

Atlantic Missile No. 9--In British waters about 100 miles
east-northeast of Nassau in the Bahamas at 25-19-21 North,
75-54-33 West.

   In 1947 the Rockefeller Brothers arranged for the CIA to be
created for their own private purposes, and today it is the
CIA--not the normal military chain of command--that exercises
control for the Rockefellers over the undersea supermissiles as
part of its expanding encroachment into military affairs.  This
is helping to bring our beloved country to agony and ruin,
unless, my friends, WE stop it!

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 19

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02


Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (1982 current
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is December 18,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 19.

   As our Bicentennial Year of 1976 draws to a close, the United
States of America is in grave danger.  Our economy is ravaged by
the twin plagues of high inflation and high unemployment, a
condition which I named STAGFLATION some years ago.  Our Republic
is under attack in a far-advanced plan to bring our country under
dictatorship.  Our very lives are under the threat of extinction
in a surprise nuclear attack which would be the beginning of
NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and all of these terrible things have been
brought about deliberately by a handful of ruthless, powerful men
here and abroad, bent on world domination.

   "But how can this be?", you ask.  "How can so few people
control the destinies of all the rest of us?"

   After all, it is easy to imagine how far our Secret Rulers and
their henchmen would get if they tried to take over even one
city, much less all of America, with their own bare fists and
brute force.  They would be stopped in their tracks in no time
flat because everyone understands that kind of threat and there
are far more of us than there are of them.  But those who want to
enslave us understand this all too well; they know better than to
try any kind of frontal attack on us that would be widely
understood.  Instead, they have perfected the art of harnessing
our own energies so that gradually, step by step, we are
enslaving ourselves under their control.

   The Hegelian principle of thesis, antithesis, synthesis is
being applied so as to gradually merge our life with that of the
Soviet Union at every level!  The average working man and woman
in America would never knowingly allow this to happen, and yet it
is happening--gradually, year after year.

1. The first step, called Thesis, is to create and publicize a
problem in education, economics, or otherwise in our daily lives.
In other words, where there is peace, create discord and trouble.

2. Step 2, Antithesis, is to create opposition to the problem.

3. The final step, Synthesis, is to offer a so-called solution to
the problem.

This diabolical, roundabout approach psychologically conditions
people to accept things which they would otherwise oppose
vigorously.  Just a look around with this in mind, and you will
see that this technique is being used all around you in a
thousand ways; but the real key to the success or failure of this
method of manipulating the public lies in something Abraham
Lincoln said over 100 years ago, quote:

  "With public sentiment, nothing will fail; without it, nothing
can succeed."

So long as we, the people, are simply told the truth about
things, public sentiment reflects the truth.  Under those
conditions, real solutions can be found for real problems to
everyone's benefit; but when we are not told the truth, public
sentiment reflects only what we believe and we can be manipulated
into supporting all kinds of things that are not in our best

   Here in the United States a subtle, long-range propaganda
technique--known simply as MISINFORMATION--has been used to build
up an artificial and false picture of the world and our own
nation.  In the areas of foreign policy, national security,
politics, and economics, the truth has been suppressed and
replaced with an elaborate structure of lies, distortions, and
half-truths.  This false picture has come to be accepted as the
truth with the result that the truth itself has been rendered
unbelievable.  I don't think anyone in his right mind could do
what has been done to us.  Our education, our CONSTITUTION, our
free enterprise system, everything possible has been perverted in
order to confer ever more power on our Secret Rulers.

   Now, WAR IS COMING.  The wars of this century have been fought
far from our shores, but this time it is coming here--to our
land, to our homes, to our people!  It will not be a conventional
war but NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  As in all modern wars, it will begin
with a surprise attack.  Thanks to the silence of the United
States Government and of the controlled major media, most
Americans will be caught completely by surprise, believing in a
lie called detente until thermonuclear fireballs erupt all around
our nation.

   To show how different the truth is from what we are led to
believe by our Secret Rulers, I will discuss these three topics




Topic #1--On the evening of October 4, 1957, Americans were
stunned by the announcement that the Soviet Union had become the
first nation in history to place a man-made satellite in orbit. 
Sputnik I, weighing 184 pounds, was circling the Earth every hour
and a half sending out beeps that became famous overnight.  The
world was thrilled, and the world press heaped great praise on
the Soviet Union.  They inferred from this accomplishment that
the Soviet socialist system was superior to our own in scientific
and technical progress.  It was a historical first that can never
be undone--the Soviet Union had beaten the United States into

   Less than a month later Sputnik II was launched.  It weighed
over half a ton and carried the first live passenger into space,
a dog.  The dog died within a week but it was another startling
achievement nonetheless.

   Meanwhile poor old America was struggling along trying to put
a tiny 16-pound satellite into orbit by means of the Navy's
Vanguard rocket.  Two launches were attempted, but both failed. 
In one case the rocket lifted a few feet off the pad only to
settle back into a tremendous fireball as it exploded.  It made
exciting footage for the television news that evening.  Finally
on January 31, 1958, almost four months after Sputnik I, America
launched its first space satellite from Cape Canaveral, Florida. 
It was called Explorer I, and it was launched not by the Navy but
by the Army.  We were in space at last, but only after being
thoroughly humiliated before the entire world.

   After the Sputnik shock, space flight and rockets were
suddenly the "in" thing to be interested in.  Even then Senator
Lyndon B. Johnson arranged for a new "Aeronautics and Space
Committee" to be set up, with himself as its Chairman.  He was
thereafter as visible as possible in connection with space
matters, and today the manned space flight center in Houston
bears his name.  At the time, I could hardly imagine anything
more hypocritical for Johnson to do.  Even though I was a lawyer,
I had been a member of the then named "American Rocket Society"
for a number of years and had vivid memories of Johnson's
attitude toward space in the early 50's.  At that time, four or
five years before Sputnik, I was a member of a group headed by
Dr. Wernher Von Braun who approached Johnson in hopes of
obtaining support for a space program.  I'll never forget Lyndon
Johnson's reaction to the whole idea.  He did not merely say
"No", but jeered at the whole concept as ridiculous and

   A few years later the United States was deprived of the chance
to be first in space, but not by Lyndon Johnson.  What I am going
to tell you does not affect our national security now, but it
does provide a typical example of what has been happening to
America for many years.  And as Wernher Von Braun lies on his
death bed in a hospital near Washington, D.C., I believe the time
has come for the truth to be told about why we were not the first
to put a satellite into space.

   In late 1955 or early 1956, the Joint Chiefs of Staff began
the first act of planning for an American space program.  Their
goal: To have the United States initiate the world's first
successful space flight at the beginning of the International
Geophysical Year that was to begin on July 1, 1957.  After some
controversy as to which Service should sponsor the space project,
it was concluded that the Army was most capable of doing the job. 
This was agreed to and approved by the Joint Chiefs and by then
Secretary of Defense Charles Wilson.

   The Army's Redstone Arsenal in Huntsville, Alabama was
fortunate in having the services of the world's foremost rocket
expert, Dr. Wernher Von Braun.  From a very early age Von Braun
had been fascinated with the idea of space flight, and he had
spent his life working with rockets.  During World War II Von
Braun was pressed into service by Hitler, and the German rocket
program was far ahead of other countries by the end of the war. 
When the war ended, many of Von Braun's subordinates at the
German rocket base were taken prisoner by the Soviet Union and it
was they who were forced to develop and direct the Soviet missile
and space programs; but Von Braun himself had resolved well
before hostilities ended that he would surrender to the United
States, and he succeeded in doing so.  Our Government then
prevailed upon him to enter governmental research where he would
have the money and resources to pursue rocketry in earnest.

   When the Earth Satellite project came under consideration
years later in the mid-50's, the Joint Staff project officers
interviewed the Redstone Arsenal officials along with Von Braun
himself to ascertain their capability.  Von Braun stated that his
group could engineer a space vehicle and have it ready for orbit
in only a few months.  The Joint Staff pushed for the Von Braun
project; and after it was approved by the Joint Chiefs and
Secretary of Defense, it went to President Eisenhower for final
approval and allocation of Defense Department funds--but there it
stopped!  Strangely there was a long delay in getting the
expected presidential approval.  Finally the word came down to
the Joint Staff from the President.  Incredibly, they were to
disregard the Army's capability and give the Space project to the
Navy instead.  Such a decision was all but unbelievable.  The
Navy did not even have a blueprint for such a space vehicle! 
They would be starting almost from scratch; but the decision
stood, so several large aircraft companies and Navy scientists
gathered to initiate a program called "PROJECT VANGUARD."

   As a direct result of this decision, the Soviet Union was able
to put Sputnik into orbit while the United States was still
struggling unsuccessfully with Vanguard.  Joint Staff project
officers were most perplexed about the American political
decision to allow the Soviet Union to beat us in this endeavor
when we had the capability to be far ahead of them.  It appeared
to follow a pattern of withholding American capabilities and
allowing the Soviet Union the advantage.  Later, an aide to
President Eisenhower explained confidentially what had

   A select group of scientists and financial leaders got wind of
the American space satellite plans at an early stage.  The group,
headed by a man who was later awarded the Lenin Peace Prize by
the Soviet Union, went to the President and pressed him to
sponsor a purely American space project with only native
Americans working on it.  They didn't want by any means for a
former German, such as Wernher Von Braun, to give the world and
future historians the impression that the Germans of all people
were superior in the field of space science.  This group, who
were actually doing the bidding of the Rockefellers on behalf of
their Soviet allies, were instrumental in forcing America to take
a back seat in the early years of the Space Age when we were
fully capable of being supreme!

   Finally, after two Soviet Sputniks and two humiliating Navy
Vanguard failures, Eisenhower became exasperated and told the
Defense Department to get Von Braun into action.  Just six weeks
after he received the go-ahead, Von Braun's Army team launched
Explorer I.  He did exactly what he had said he could do two
years earlier--and the very first time he tried it; but the
special place in history he so richly deserved had been denied
him forever, just as it had been denied to the new homeland of
his choice, the United States of America.  The anti-German
argument that had been used on President Eisenhower was, of
course, a total fraud.

   When Sputnik I was launched a short dozen years after World
War II, the Soviet rocket program was even more dependent on the
efforts of captured German scientists than was true in the United
States.  Thus only one thing was really accomplished by delaying
the Army satellite effort under Wernher Von Braun: A tremendous
propaganda coup for the Soviet Union and a setback to American
prestige and self-confidence that persisted for years.  It is a
grim fact that accolades go to the spoilers and traitors among
us, but no acclaim to our true heroes and men dedicated to
American principles.

   Under the enthusiastic leadership of Wernher Von Braun the
United States was able to come from behind to win the race to the
Moon, but soon the world press will have relegated him to the
footnotes of modern history.  Like General Douglas MacArthur,
Wernher Von Braun will "just fade away."

Topic #2--When Secretary of Defense James Schlesinger was fired
by President Ford just over a year ago in November 1975, he said,

  "Some years from now someone will say, 'Why weren't we warned?'
and I wanted to be able to say: 'Indeed you were.'"

But most Americans when reminded of this parting statement by
Schlesinger tend to be surprised.  It is as if his words have
gone out into thin air, leaving no lasting impression at all. 
This is a perfect illustration of the way in which the American
public have been left comfortably asleep by the controlled major
media of our country, oblivious to the steadily mounting threat
of war.

   Around the world the alarms of impending nuclear disaster are
jangling louder and louder; but these alarms are muted, muffled,
and silenced by the time they reach you.  When isolated facts
about American or Soviet military developments are reported, it
is done in such a way that it has little lasting impact on most
people.  Thus, for example, you may hear a news item concerning
the debate over the new B-1 Bomber which the United States Air
Force is developing.  Taken in isolation you may well wonder what
all the shouting is about and, for that matter, why such a new
bomber is even being considered in this age of missiles.  Or you
may hear a brief news item mentioning that the Air Force wants to
buy some F-15 Fighters to augment our air defense system.

   Perhaps these things would make a little more sense to you if
you knew that the Soviet Backfire Bomber began to be deployed
operationally over three years ago!  The Backfire is a supersonic
long-range bomber capable of delivering nuclear weapons to
targets here in the United States--and that, my friends, is
precisely its purpose, not the so-called peripheral missions
mentioned by some.  Knowing this, perhaps it would have struck
you as a little strange that in 1974 after the Soviet Backfire
Bomber began being deployed, the United States virtually
dismantled its air defense system.  At the very time that a
renewed Soviet bomber threat was developing, our network of
interceptors was reduced to just six active Air Force Squadrons
plus six more in the Air National Guard!  The extensive network
of Nike Hercules Antiaircraft Missiles under Army command was
shut down completely.  But now, with war threatening to break
out, the Defense Department is reversing its position on air
defense without telling you why.

   The mounting controversy over the relative military strength
of the Soviet Union and the United States has taken many people
by surprise.  Almost 3-1/2 years ago the warning was sounded that
the Soviet Navy had become stronger than the United States Navy. 
That's what the world's foremost naval authority, Jane's Fighting
Ships, said in July 1973; but if you saw this reported at all by
the major media, did it make any impression?  Or consider the
matter of long-range ballistic missiles.  Over four years ago on
November 27, 1972, the Soviet Union successfully test-fired a
submarine-launched ballistic missile with a range of 4,500 miles! 
By comparison, the most advanced American sub-launched missiles
have a range of less than 3,000 miles.  In addition, the
development of a whole new series of Soviet missiles was

   Early this month the Soviet Union began a 20-day period of
tests of the new submarine-launched SSNX-18 Ballistic Missile,
firing them into a circular zone 100 miles in radius in the North
Pacific southeast of the Aleutian Islands.  The SSNX-18 now has a
multiple warhead capability; and these tests, which are
full-operational tests, extend over the full range of the missile
which is now more than 5,000 miles!  Particular attention is
being given to warhead performance in these test-proving flights. 
If all goes as planned, the SSNX-18 will be committed to full
production and operational status within a year's time.  The
SSNX-18 will give the Soviet Union a commanding lead over the
United States in the realm of submarine-launched ballistic
missiles.  But what have you learned from network news reports or
other major media about this missile?  Practically nothing.

   But the most tortured reasoning I have seen yet appeared on
December 6, 1976, in the New York Times.  An editorial on that
date entitled: MOSCOW'S SUBMARINE MIRV begins with the incredible
words, and I quote:

  "The Soviet Union's first successful test of a
submarine-launched ballistic missile armed with MIRV multiple
nuclear warheads is good news paradoxically for the United States
and the world."

The editorial then argues, in effect, that since this will
eliminate the one remaining missile advantage held by the United
States, it opens the door for the Soviet Union to make
concessions in SALT negotiations that could prevent either side
from acquiring a first-strike capability.

   Such Alice-in-Wonderland reasoning may still serve the purpose
of lulling millions of Americans back to sleep, but it would not
sit well these days with most NATO Defense Ministers.  For the
first time many officials of NATO are generally alarmed by the
continuing relentless build-up of Soviet power in Europe where
the best Soviet troops are concentrated.

   For example, consider Denmark which sits astride the channels
which lead from the Baltic Sea to the North Sea.  Soviet activity
in the Baltic has grown more and more ominous of late.  Early in
September a Soviet task force suddenly materialized off the
southeast coast of Denmark, then left, then reappeared.  All
kinds of Soviet naval war games are now being carried out
practically on Denmark's doorsteps so close that they could
suddenly turn into attack that would give practically no warning. 
Danish Foreign Minister K. B. Andersen said recently,

  "I'm astonished at what is going on.  This is completely
contrary to the expectations created by the Helsinki agreement."

And yet our kept press would have you believe that the new Soviet
SSNX-18 missile I just told you about is unimportant or even good
news, because of possible agreements the Soviet Union might make
about it.

   At the NATO Defense Ministers' meeting in Brussels earlier
this month, Admiral Sir Peter Hill-Norton of Britain warned that
the trend of the military balance between East and West is
continuing to move in favor of the Soviet bloc.  He declared that
more money and better planning are needed if NATO is to match
what he called the "relentless determination" of the Warsaw Pact
countries to achieve military superiority.  He warned that NATO
can no longer rely indefinitely upon the superiority of Western
technology because massive Soviet spending on research and
development have resulted in vast improvements in Soviet weapons.

   As Dutch Defense Minister Vredeling said on December 8, the
day after Sir Peter's speech, quote:

  "The situation as far as the balance of forces world-wide is
more serious than many people think."

And there are many other examples of genuine alarm at the
vulnerability of Western Europe to a devastating surprise attack.

   What did Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, who was and is
a CIA operative, have to say to the NATO ministers?  He gave a
brief nod to the wide-spread concern over the Soviet build-up,
but what you heard reported in the news emphasized the following,
and I quote:

  "I think the alliance is healthy.  I leave my post as Secretary
of Defense next month with a good deal of optimism about the
Atlantic alliance--the fact that it survived some 26 years; the
fact that it's working, I think reasonably smoothly at the
present time; frankly reassured by the fact that there is an
Atlantic alliance, that it's on watch and doing its job."

And so, my friends, we can all go back to sleep, comfortably

Topic #3--One week from today will be Christmas 1976.  On that
day most Americans will be celebrating the birth of our Lord
Jesus Christ by giving gifts to one another.  The joy of giving
is something most everyone understands to a greater or lesser
extent.  When presents are opened on Christmas Day, for example,
parents of small children usually get their greatest fun out of
watching their children open presents, not from opening their own

   In the same vein, people usually feel good about it when they
give a portion of what they have to help others or to support a
worthy cause.  This is the foundation of what is known as
charity--but unfortunately there are always a very few among us
who are motivated not by a spirit of sharing but by runaway
greed.  Their only pleasure in life comes from amassing more and
more of this world's wealth for their own coffers and extending
their power to control the wealth of others as well.  Ultimately
those who are motivated this way reach the point where they have
so much wealth and so much power that it is no longer enough just
to add to it just still further.  The only thing left in life for
those who have acquired wealth and power through greed is to use
that power and that wealth to play with the lives and destinies
of people.  In short, they try to play 'God'.

   You may ask: Why would the Soviet Union go to war?  Would the
super-wealthy of America want to create a dictatorship here with
themselves in control?  You might as well ask: Why does the
mountain climber want to climb the highest mountain?  Common
answer is: Because it's there--just like the United States, the
richest country in the world, is there.  What a prize.

   Early in this century a systematic long-range program was
begun by a small group of immensely powerful people.  The goal of
this program was to acquire ever greater control over American
society.  This was to lead ultimately to America's merging into a
One-World Government with themselves and their heirs in control.

   The method by which this would be accomplished was the
dismantling of the basic structure of American society and its
reconstruction in the image desired by those who had decided to
play 'God'.  And to carry out this long-range program, powerful
tax-free Foundations were established and given the halo of
philanthropy.  They were explained to the public as simply a
special means the wealthy had devised for giving to the public at
large.  Each Foundation was thus given the image of an
institutional Santa Claus.

   Instead of questioning what they did, the American people were
led to accept their activities in the confident belief that they
were just showering wonderful gifts on our society day in and day
out.  This is the picture that is still accepted as the truth by
most Americans.  They believe it just as fervently as millions of
small children believe in Santa Claus.  The raw truth about this
network of Foundations may therefore sound unbelievable--just as
it sounds unbelievable to a small child if he is told there is no
Santa Claus.

   For months now I've been referring to the role that has been
played by these Foundations in undermining American society and
placing us in the extreme peril we now face.  Now I have been
given permission to reveal one of my primary sources of
information about these Foundations, and to repeat for you his
own words about them.  He is my friend Mr. Norman Dodd.  Mr. Dodd
was Director of Research of the special committee of the United
States House of Representatives to investigate tax-exempt
Foundations in 1953 and 1954.  The late Congressman Carroll Reece
of Tennessee was chairman of this very important committee.

   Recently Mr. Dodd gave a rare speech here in Washington, D.C.,
and he has given permission to repeat it here for you.  I will
now be quoting him.


   "This is not going to be a speech.  This is a sharing of ideas
born of experience, and I'd like to begin by qualifying myself in
your minds.

   I am a product of a strange type of education and schooling. 
The education of which I am a product featured the importance of
the question 'WHY?' and then went on to try to instill in us the
importance of the question plus our responsibility as individuals
to find the answers.  I happen to have taken this education and
schooling seriously and I have lived accordingly.

   In this schooling to which I was subjected, great stress was
laid upon the history of this country to illustrate the feature I
have just mentioned.  As a result I participated in and was
witness to something in the nature of a discovery--which was that
in the 200 years of our history many more truths made themselves
self-evident than motivated our Founding Fathers.  One of these
truths bears heavily upon the experiences that I shall recite to

   The truth, were it to be put in words, would read something
like this.  I'll repeat it slowly because it is quite significant
and deserving of considerable thought:

   The condition or state of the members of any nation at any
given time reflects the use to which the wealth they have
produced is being put by others than the ones who played a part
in its production.

That brings me to two experiences which I will describe to you.

   The first was my response to an invitation from the president
of the FORD FOUNDATION in his offices in New York.  His name:
Rowan Gaither.  Upon arriving there I was greeted with the

  'Mr. Dodd, we invited you to come because we thought that
perhaps, off the record, you would be kind enough to tell us why
the Congress is interested in the operations of Foundations such
as ourselves.'

Before I could think how best to reply, he volunteered this:

  'Mr. Dodd, we operate here under directives which emanate from
the White House.  Would you like to know what the substance of
these directives is?'

My answer was:  'Yes, Mr. Gaither, I would like very much to
know.'  Whereupon he said:

  'The substance of the directives under which we operate is that
we shall use our grant-making power so to alter life in the
United States that we can be comfortably merged with the Soviet

Needless to say, I nearly fell off the chair.  As soon as I could
recover myself to reply, I said:

  'Mr. Gaither, legally you are entitled to use your grant-making
power for this purpose, but I don't think you are entitled to
withhold this information from the American people to whom you
are beholden for your tax exemption.  So why do you not tell the
American people what you have just told me?'

His answer was:

  'Mr. Dodd, we would not think of doing that.'

That was one experience that was very informative.  It was
incredible; nevertheless, it is the truth.

   The next experience involved the acceptance of an invitation
invitation came in response to a letter which I had written the
Endowment asking a few pertinent questions.  By 'pertinent' I
mean that they related to the effort of the Congress to determine
if Foundations were engaged in what the Congress said could be
'un-American activities', without defining 'un-American.'  I
arrived at the office of Dr. Joseph Johnson, who was then
president of the Endowment.  He was the successor to Alger Hiss. 
Present were two vice-presidents, relatively new men, and counsel
(a partner in the law firm of Sullivan and Cromwell).  After
amenities, Dr. Johnson opened the conversation this way:

  'Mr. Dodd, we have received your letter.  We can answer the
questions but it will be a great deal of trouble.  The reason for
its being a great deal of trouble is that with the ratification
by the Senate of the United Nations treaty, our task was done;
and so we bundled up everything in the way of records and sent
them to the warehouse, and adopted a policy of constructing a
building across the street from the United Nations which will
serve as a facility for the benefit of those many organizations
which from this point on will be bound to follow the activities
of the United Nations.  So we have a counter suggestion which is
as follows:

   If you can spare a member of your staff and send him to New
York for two weeks, we'll provide a room in our library and also
make available to him the Minute Books of this corporation from
its inception.'

My first reaction was that he had lost his mind.  I had some
suspicion of what these Minute Books might well contain; but here
was counsel and there seemed to be no disagreement on the part of
the vice-presidents--and all of them were relatively young, so my
guess was that none of them had ever read the Minutes themselves. 
As a result, I accepted the invitation and did send a member of
my staff to New York.  That member brought back to me on
dictaphone belts the following:

   We are now back to roughly 1908 when the Trustees raised the
question, asking themselves:

(1)  Is there any way known to man more effective than war,
assuming they wish to alter the life of an entire people?

They discussed this question academically and in a scholarly
fashion for almost a year, and came up with the conclusion that
WAR is the most effective means known to man, assuming that

   Then they raised question No. 2:

(2)  How to involve the United States in a war?

This was in 1909.  I doubt if there was any subject more removed
from the minds of the people in this country at that time than
the possibility of involvement in war.  There were intermittent
shows, you will remember, in the Balkans; and my guess is that
not many people in the country even knew where the Balkans were. 
They answered the question this way:

  'We must control the diplomatic machinery of the United

   That brings up question no. 3, which is:

(3)  How do we secure control of the diplomatic machinery of the
United States?

   and the answer comes up:

  'We must control the State Department.'

   That fits in with prior findings which we had uncovered;
namely, that the hand of the Carnegie Endowment for International
Peace inside the State Department was a fact.

   Finally, we are in a war.  These Trustees have the brashness
to congratulate themselves on the wisdom and validity of their
original decision because already the impact of our participation
in World War I has indicated its capacity to alter our national
life.  They even go so far as to word and dispatch a telegram to
President Wilson, pressuring him to see to it that the war does
not end too quickly!

   Finally, the war is over.  The Trustees then take up the
problem which they face: namely, of preventing, as they put it, a
reversion of life in the United States to what it was prior to
1914.  They came up with the conclusion that:

   To gain that end, we must control education in the United

They realize this is a prodigious piece of work so they seek and
obtain the assistance of the ROCKEFELLER FOUNDATION.  They then
divide the task into parts, giving to the Rockefeller Foundation
the responsibility of altering education as it pertains to
domestic subjects.  They retain for themselves the task of
altering our education as it pertains to subjects bearing on our
international relationships.  Then they decide together that the
key to this is an alteration in the teaching of American history,
so they approach three of the then existing prominent historians
with the proposition that they alter the manner in which, up to
then, they had presented the subject.  They are all turned down

   They then decide that it is necessary for them to build their
own stable of historians.  They approach the GUGGENHEIM
FOUNDATION, which specializes in the awarding of fellowships, and
suggest: When we discover a likely young person who is studying
and looking forward to becoming a teacher of history, we will
take him to London to pursue his studies.  So they take 20 to
London, and these 20 are briefed in what is expected of them. 
These 20 return and eventually become the most active influence
in the American Historical Society.

   This coincides with the appearance which perhaps you will
remember of book after book the contents of which cast aspersion
on the Founders of this country, cast aspersion on the ideas
which prompted the founding of this country, and relegates them
to the realm of myth!

   Finally toward the end of the 1920's the Endowment grants the
American Historical Society $400,000 for the sole purpose of
rendering a report as to what the future of this country promises
to be and should be!  This appears in seven volumes.  The seventh
volume, of course, summarizes the contents of the other six, and
it ends on this note:

  'The future belongs to collectivism administered with
characteristic American humanitarianism and efficiency.'

   Well, in essence this was the whole story written down; and
Mr. Reece who was chairman of the investigation--the last
investigation of Foundations--hoped to be able to accomplish
this.  He was not able to do this owing to the disinterest on the
part of the committee's counsel and the violent activities of one
of its members.  I might mention that that member whose
activities barred the way was none other than Wayne Hays--who has
come to the end of his career, although this marked the start of


   Mr. Dodd concluded his talk with some additional comments
which I want to save for another discussion, since they go beyond
the subject of Foundations alone.  But you may want to replay
what I have just recited from his speech, noting carefully how
different the truth is from appearances.  And remember, the truth
has many enemies!

   And so it is that the 20th Century has been an unparalleled
era of increasingly destructive warfare, violence, and terror on
a world-wide scale.  By pursuing with relentless determination
the goal of merging the United States into ONE WORLD GOVERNMENT,
the Trustees of the key group of major Foundations have brought
us to the threshold of NUCLEAR WAR ONE--to be waged primarily on
American soil.

   As I first revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May
1976, some of the present-day Trustees of these Foundations have
been awakening to the threat of a Soviet double cross in the
grand plan for world domination--and last summer this double
cross got underway with the planting of short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles within the territorial waters
of the United States, as well as of many other countries.  But
the world-wide economic and political empire that is today
presided over by the Four Rockefeller Brothers is so huge that it
includes many individuals who still do not believe that any
Soviet double cross will take place, much less that it is already


   For example, last month I reported that 18 Soviet submarines
were deployed along our west coast preparing to inject plutonium
particles into the air on November 20, 1976.  And our own
EPA--the Environmental Protection Agency--was cooperating by
telling us that on that date a radioactive cloud from a Chinese
atomic test would begin passing over our west coast, when
actually the radioactive cloud from China had not yet left
China's own borders!  By interesting coincidence, Russell Trane,
the head of the EPA, arrived in a presumably safe location,
Moscow, on November 19--the day before the plutonium was to be
released by the Soviet subs.  With appropriate irony, he arrived
there as head of the United States delegation to the
"Soviet-American Commission for Cooperation in Environmental
Protection."  Can you imagine?

   The plutonium was released by the subs as scheduled on
November 20; but just as happened when this was done the first
time in early October, unusual weather conditions kept the United
States from being badly contaminated.  The plutonium cloud
drifted across the upper part of the United States and had little
effect at ground level.  But, my friends, the Soviets never give

   Five days ago on December 13 I learned that Soviet submarines
were lining up along the northwest coast of the United States for
the third time for this purpose.  This time there are 21
submarines loaded with plutonium poison to inject into our
atmosphere.  According to my latest Intelligence sources, 16 are
deployed along the coast from Seattle, Washington to Eugene,
Oregon, while five (5) more lie between Eugene and Eureka,
California.  All of these are within 20 miles of the shoreline.

   I've already explained in detail the connection between this
radioactive chemical warfare and the Swine Flu hoax being
perpetrated by the United States Government, particularly in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17.  Therefore it is significant that
the so-called Swine Flu inoculation program was halted with great
publicity two days ago owing to death and paralysis suffered by
many who have taken the vaccine.  This serves to focus the
nation's attention once again on the terrible threat Swine Flu is
said to be just at a time when the Soviet submarines are once
again prepared to inject a poison into our atmosphere that can
produce severe flu-like symptoms.  It may be that, as was done
the past two times, the Soviet submarines will wait for another
announcement from the United States Government that it will serve
as a cover story, such as a Chinese nuclear test, before
releasing the plutonium into our air.  But now they have acquired
some experience and it is possible that they will release the
plutonium at any time.

   Meanwhile the build-up for war continues.  While the mounting
Soviet threat to Europe is fraying the nerves of NATO Defense
Ministers, the most immediate threat to Europe is once again
emerging in the Middle East.  In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6
over a year ago I revealed the over-all plan that existed at that
time for war to begin in the Middle East.  I ask you now to
listen to that AUDIO LETTER No. 6 again.  All is nearly ready
once again for the long planned war in the Middle East to be
ignited.  The Rockefeller oil interests now have gotten most of
their money out of the Arab region.  Now the title to all the oil
fields have been sold to the Arabs themselves.

   The Middle East war will also leave the United States in an
even more defenseless position that we are now in if the Soviet
surprise attack on our country is allowed to take place.


   Last month I explained in detail why the underwater missiles
that are being planted along our shores by the Soviet Union are
so crucial to them in their plan to defeat the United States in
NUCLEAR WAR ONE, but I also explained that they are no longer
being removed by the United States Navy.

   Since I recorded that tape, 57 more nuclear missiles have been
planted in our own territorial waters.  Added to the 36 I
mentioned last month, this brings the total to 93 Soviet missiles
in the waters of the United States including Alaska and Hawaii. 
In addition, four (4) missiles still threaten the Panama Canal,
and five (5) more missiles now threaten Canada.

   I declared last month that I would no longer reveal the
locations of these missiles unless and until responsible
arrangements are made to inform the public of the deadly threat
we are under.  Our Secret Rulers had been using my information
from October 1st onward only for their own benefit--and that is
not what it is for.

   I intend to continue to hold my silence until action is taken
for everyone's benefit.  Nevertheless I am going to make one
exception at this time--it involves Hawaii.  World War II began
with a devastating surprise attack on Pearl Harbor, and now no
less than nine (9) Soviet underwater missiles now threaten Pearl
Harbor and the Island of Oahu with the same fate a second time.

   I will now give the coordinates for these nine missiles only,
in hopes that this time action will be taken to protect the
United States Pacific Fleet from the attack that could come at
any moment.  These coordinates are:

Missile #1:
   21 degrees/13 minutes/47 seconds North
   157 degrees/46 minutes/28 seconds West

Missile #2:
   21-18-37 North, 157-57-21 West

Missile #3:
   21-17-31 North, 158- 4-17 West

Missile #4:
   21-21-19 North, 158- 9- 7 West

Missile #5:
   21-36-12 North, 158-12-48 West

Missile #6:
   21-36-33 North, 158-11- 6 West

Missile #7:
   21-26-54 North, 157-47-17 West

Missile #8:
   21-19-27 North, 157-38-36 West

Missile #9: About 25 miles east of Oahu and 8 miles north of
Molokai at
   21-21-13 North, 157-15-26 West.

   I continue to hope, my friends, that a war can still be
prevented.  To find out what you can do in the event war does
come, I suggest you read issue 135 of McKeever's Multinational
Investment and Survival Letter, 1012 Russell St., Baltimore, MD 
21230, but my prayer is that you will never need that kind of

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 18

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (Current 1982
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is November 20,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 18.

   As I speak with you today, we are drawing ever closer to being
swallowed up by the evils unleashed two generations ago by a
tight network of Foundation Trustees.  Operating under a false
cloak of philanthropy, supposedly for the benefit of others, they
actually launched long-range programs designed to grab everything
for themselves.

   Claiming to improve education in the cause of freedom, they
actually began replacing education with indoctrination in the
cause of collectivism.  And while painting themselves as
champions of peace, they have led the world into war after war on
the road to their version of "peace"--that is, an all-powerful
WORLD GOVERNMENT with themselves in control.

   Blinded by the insatiable greed for power, they could not see
that they were opening Pandora's box, setting forces in motion
that would ultimately prove impossible to control.  Only
recently, with disaster looming up fast, have the present-day
successors to those original Trustees begun awakening to this
fact, too late to regain control.  Now only the truth spread far
and wide can avert total catastrophe.

   Two years ago the United States of America plunged over the
brink of a devastating economic collapse as the result of
deliberate measures to create "stagflation", as I described in my
1973 book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR.  But the process was
arrested part way down because other aspects of the Master Plan
for world domination were slipping behind schedule.

   As I have related in detail in previous tapes, factors such as
the still concealed Fort Knox Gold and Plutonium Scandals,
reverses in the Middle East, Indira Gandhi's upset of the CIA in
India, and other things have caused our Unseen Rulers enormous
difficulties for over 18 months.  But time is running out, and it
is do-or-die for those who seek to enslave us.  So now the United
States has at last been pried loose from its temporary economic
foothold and we are falling slowly but helplessly like a dreamer
in a nightmare toward the dreaded economic depression far below.

   Politically, the phantom election plan I revealed last month
by which Nelson Rockefeller still plans to become America's chief
executive is proceeding so far exactly as planned.  Sixty-eight
per cent of the voting precincts nation-wide had voting machines
on November 2, 1976, and where they jammed all across the country
there was no provision for paper ballots!  Thousands of ballots
were lost in certain areas, the legality of thousands of others
is being challenged, and re-counts are under way in some places. 
The net result, exactly as planned, was an extremely close
popular vote and no landslide for anyone.  President Gerald Ford
thought he had the election "in the bag", having been promised by
Nelson Rockefeller that he would carry New York State, but the
pained expression on Ford's face as his wife delivered his
concession statement on November 3 was nothing compared to the
shock that awaits Jimmy Carter if the plan now under way
succeeds.  Meanwhile, as the stage is being set for economic and
political shocks in America, we drift ever closer to war and a
"Declaration of National Emergency" that could spell the end of
our freedoms, and the dangerous Intelligence gap created by Henry
Kissinger continues.

   When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17 on October 26,
last month, I mentioned that the Soviet Union already knew where
our lost Phoenix Missile was in the North Sea but had not
retrieved it.  I had just learned of the missile's location and
revealed it in that tape.  On October 27, the following day, as
soon as the tape was released, I also relayed it to Military
Intelligence.  That same day Navy spokesmen told the press that
they still had not located the Phoenix; but using the information
I relayed to them, the Navy found and retrieved the Phoenix
Missile on October 31.  The United States Government would have
you believe it is mere coincidence that they suddenly found the
Phoenix after I revealed its location, even though the Navy had
spent six weeks in a fruitless search prior to that!

   There are also those who would have you believe that General
George S. Brown, the top military officer in the United States,
met with me for more than an hour on September 16, 1976 in his
Pentagon office out of idle curiosity.  And especially there are
many who want you to believe there will be no reason for the
Soviet Union to do as I have charged, planting
underwater-launched nuclear missiles within our own territorial
waters; but nothing, my friends, could be further from the truth. 
What the Soviet Union has done and is doing is completely logical
and to be expected if we look at it from their point of view.  As
Mrs. Margaret Thatcher, leader of the Conservative Party in
England, recently said, and I quote:

  "The danger is our Western tendency to assume that other people
will apply our own standards and values.  When considering
international matters, the important thing is not to look at
other nations as if we were standing in their shoes but as if
they were standing in their shoes."

If you depend, as most Americans do, on the controlled major
media for your understanding of the world, you will never learn
to think this way nor can you hope to grasp the real issues that
govern military survival; yet such understanding is essential if
we are to see how to correct our dangerous situation.

   One organization which in my opinion does do an excellent job
of clarifying matters of defense and national security is the
American Security Council located at Boston, Virginia.  Their zip
is 22713.  I recommend the Council as an excellent source of
information for every concerned American.

   To help in understanding the threat we now face and how we got
into such a position, I will discuss the following three topics




Topic #1--Secretary of State Henry Kissinger has said over and
over again for nearly a decade, quote:

  "Detente, or nuclear holocaust; there is no third way."

With this in mind, public discussion of American-Soviet relations
has focused for years on the alleged happy fruits of detente--the
growing thaw between East and West, etc.--but lately there has
been an ominous change.  President Ford dropped the word
"detente" from his active vocabulary, and mounting of concern
over the ragged condition of NATO forces has been expressed
increasingly by European and American leaders.

   Just last week two so-called prestigious groups burst upon the
public scene to churn up controversy over the issues of mounting
Soviet military power.  First, on November 11 came the "Committee
for the Present Danger" urging presumed President-elect Carter to
increase military spending, instead of decreasing it as promised
during the election campaign.  Then three days later a study
group financed by the Rockefeller Foundation proposed the
opposite--that we undertake joint military reductions with the
Soviet Union, perhaps initiating the process with selected
unilateral reductions of our own.  And the warnings continue!

   Just three days ago a representative of Boeing Aerospace
Company testified before Congress that in case of nuclear war,
98% of the Soviet population would survive because of the
elaborate Civil Defense precautions being taken there.  By
contrast, of course, the United States has no Civil Defense
program worthy of the name.  Obviously detente is fading from the
official scene rapidly.  According to the Kissinger formula, that
means nuclear holocaust is on its way.  But where did he get that

   The word "detente" is just another word for what was termed
"peaceful coexistence" in the early 60's, and the Kissinger
formula first emerged in October 1959 in the form, quote:

  "Peaceful coexistence or nuclear holocaust--there is no third

But the speaker then was not Henry Kissinger; it was Nikita

   The peaceful coexistence idea which later became so-called
"detente" began 20 years ago when Khrushchev announced a major
new Soviet policy line--namely, that war with the West was not
inevitable after all, contrary to the teachings of Lenin. 
Instead, the nuclear age had made peaceful coexistence necessary. 
To most Westerners, this sounded like "live and yet live"; but to
the Soviet Union it meant only the avoidance of a war which could
destroy the Soviet Union.  It was all right to continue to break
off chunks of the free world by intrigue, subversion, and
so-called "wars of national liberation", such as those which have
occurred in Vietnam, Angola, and elsewhere.  The Soviet Union
concentrated on selling the idea of peaceful coexistence for five
years from 1956 to 1961, ably assisted by their allies here in
the United States.

   Then in 1961 a major new phase began as John F. Kennedy became
president of the United States.  For decades the State
Socialists, who run the Soviet Union, had been in alliance with
and supported by the Corporate Socialists whose control over the
United States was drawing ever more complete.  Now at long last
the time was ripe to launch their well-orchestrated joint program
that was to lead to complete dictatorial control of the United
States by the Corporate Socialists, Soviet conquest of vast areas
of the world, piecemeal, with Corporate Socialist assistance, and
finally joint domination of the entire world by the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

   The basic idea of the program was for the strength and resolve
of the United States to be undermined and sapped while the Soviet
Union would be enabled to forge ahead into unprecedented world
power.  Communism would be made to appear to be the wave of the
future, while American morale and faith in our free system of
government would be steadily eroded.  Finally according to plan,
the United States would be in the process of increasing
encirclement and vulnerability, more and more countries becoming
Soviet satellites with the unseen help of American Corporate
Socialists who would share in the spoils.  Economic disaster,
military vulnerability, and the collapse of our own
self-confidence would, according to plan, open the door for
dictatorship here in America.

   The single, most critical step in this long-range plan began
to be taken in 1961--the progressive shut-off of critical
research and development programs for future military technology.

   If research uncovers a basic new concept at a given point in
time, it will ordinarily be 5 to 15 years before it can be
translated into a new operational technology.  In between there
must be development, experimentation, evaluation, and full-scale
production programs.  By the same token, if research and
development are cut off, at some point 5 to 15 years later you
will not have the new technology available that would otherwise
have come into being.

   Early justifications for the dwindling R&D program were based
on fond new hopes for disarmament in connection with the new
Soviet stance in favor of peaceful coexistence.  Later, as the
conflict in Vietnam grew into a major war, it became easier to
leave important R&D items out of the already swollen Defense

   Another key ingredient in the overall plan was to be the use
of Cuban troops as proxies in Soviet so-called "wars of national
liberation" in Latin America and elsewhere.  The Bay of Pigs
invasion in 1961, a few short months after Kennedy took office,
could have produced a serious setback for the Rockefeller-Soviet
plans for overthrow of numerous governments, so Kennedy's
advisers carefully steered him away from making the invasion a

   Meanwhile the Soviet Union constructed long-range plans to
take advantage of the American disadvantage in military
technology that was being arranged to occur in the mid-1970's. 
While our R&D began to decline, theirs accelerated.  By knowing
exactly what to expect, the Soviet Union was able to target its
military development toward achievement of a dominant position 15
years later; and that time has now arrived.

   In 1962, however, a gamble by Nikita Khrushchev almost caused
the whole plan to come apart.  For more than a year a prominent
United States Senator, Kenneth Keating, had been sounding
warnings that offensive nuclear missiles were being placed in
Cuba by the Soviet Union; but his charges were denied by the
Administration, just as my charges about Soviet underwater
missiles are being plausibly denied now.  But President Kennedy
finally decided to look into it himself personally, instead of
accepting blind assurances that there was nothing to it from his
advisers.  He found out that the charges were true and the Cuban
Missile Crisis was upon us.

   The Cuban Missile Crisis led to the elimination from the scene
of both Kennedy and Khrushchev.  First, as I revealed in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 3 for August 1975, President Kennedy was
murdered because he was becoming increasingly dangerous to the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.  He had come into office lacking any
real grasp of the realities of international politics--but he was
learning, and learning fast.  It was clearly only a matter of
time before he would get around to reversing the cutoff of our
critical R&D programs.  Already he was initiating steps intended
to turn off our involvement in Vietnam.  Khrushchev, for his
part, took longer to oust since his power had to be chipped away
carefully by his enemies in the Kremlin; but finally he was
removed for jeopardizing the long-range plan of conquest with a
dangerous gamble that failed.

   Looking ahead toward the increasing opportunities that would
present themselves for the Soviet Union to benefit at America's
expense, the "Institute of the United States of America" was
founded early in the 1960's in Moscow.  This Institute, whose
purpose is to study the vulnerabilities of the United States, was
founded with the help of financing from the Rockefeller

   Once the Oval Office was inhabited by Lyndon Johnson, the
grand plan proceeded onward without further difficulty! 
Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara played an especially
important role in several ways.  The period during which he
served, from 1961 to 1968, was one in which research and
development carried out prior to the R&D cutoff would potentially
be continuing to bear fruit; but McNamara, doing the bidding of
those who had placed him in that position, succeeded in causing
the cancellation of important advanced weapons programs,
decommissioning of many Defense installations, physical scrapping
of huge quantities of Defense materiel, and costly concentration
of effort on ill-fated programs, such as the F-111 multipurpose
Air Force Navy fighter.  He also championed the
impressive-sounding theory of warfare called "Measured Response"
which guaranteed the escalation of Vietnam into a major war by
preventing clear-cut, decisive wins in battle.  As his reward for
such 'valuable' service, McNamara was made president of the World
Bank.  Can you imagine?

   With the inauguration of President Richard M. Nixon of January
20, 1969, the Kissinger era of foreign policy emerged in full
bloom.  Kissinger had been an influential voice in Government
since the early 60's, thanks to his association with Nelson
Rockefeller that began in 1955.  Now he became one of the most
important Rockefeller-Soviet agents in the United States
Government!  Following the outlines of the long-range plan, he
became known as the architect of so-called detente, repeating
Khrushchev's old formula--"peaceful coexistence or nuclear
holocaust"--almost verbatim.

   In 1972 detente entered a new phase.  The SALT I Agreement was
signed in Moscow by President Nixon in May of that year. 
Meanwhile, the same year, the Soviet Union launched the massive
drive in Civil Defense that has lately started attracting
attention.  The Soviet Union could see that the long awaited
opportunity to pull ahead of the United States was fast
approaching.  That same year, 1972, saw the expansion of
so-called detente to Red China.  Kissinger also played a central
role in this development; but far from promoting real peace,
Kissinger was undoing a golden opportunity for freedom for a
quarter of the world's people--and possibly peace for the entire

   What I am about to tell you is top secret, and I am revealing
it for the very first time.

   Some years ago an international entrepreneur (whom I will call
"Smith") was in the act of selling a large European bank when he
was approached by a Chinese on a business venture involving a
retired Chinese general (whom I will call "Lee").  Lee had known
both Chiang Kai-shek and Mao Tse-tung very well during earlier
revolutionary days, and was still closely associated with six
regional military chieftains in Red China who were all genuinely
anti-Soviet in every way.  Moreover, after the turmoil that took
place in Red China in 1957 and later, these Chinese military
chieftains became completely disenchanted and disgusted with
Mao's program of using young hoodlums to terrorize and murder all
suspected opposition to his dictatorial and oppressive programs. 
Mao's euphemistic term, cultural revolution, for these cutthroat
methods of bending the people to his will, did not impress them. 
They contacted Lee and queried him as to the possibility of
getting American support in case they should decide to overthrow
Mao and establish a republic using the customary parliamentary
form of government.  Those who preferred the security of
Socialism would be allowed to live in communes, but the
government would foster a free-market system for the country as a

   General Lee arranged through the United States Department of
State to send envoys through the Bamboo Curtain to make the
necessary arrangements; but someone in the State Department
leaked the information to Red Chinese officials, and all of the
envoys were quickly apprehended and put to death.  Nevertheless
General Lee persisted.  He asked Mr. Smith if he could arrange
for broadcasting equipment to inform all of Red China what was
taking place, why the military deemed it necessary to overturn
Mao, and what form of government would be established.  Smith
agreed to contact certain top officials in the United States
Government close to the President, however General Lee emphasized
that he must circumvent Henry Kissinger and get the ear of Mr.
Nixon only, since Lee did not trust Kissinger nor anyone else in
the State Department.  The contacts were made, but unfortunately
a member of another agency heard of the plan and briefed
President Nixon about it in front of Kissinger.  Almost
immediately arrangements were made for Kissinger to visit China
to meet secretly with Mao.

   This meeting took place, and at the meeting Kissinger informed
Mao that he would be overthrown by a military coup unless Mao's
regime chose to cooperate with those who held the real power in
the United States.  To sweeten the deal for Mao, certain secret
agreements were made concerning the future course of American
relationships with the Republic of China on Taiwan.  The
outgrowth of the meeting was ping-pong diplomacy--the Nixon
summit trip to Peking in February 1972, and so-called detente
between Red China and the United States.  In return, Mao
Tse-tung's ironhanded dictatorship over Red China was rendered
secure once again.  Red China would thus continue to be a
controllable threat to the Soviet Union.  With any real threat to
the Soviet Union from the direction of Red China taken care of,
the Rockefeller-Soviet plan continued.

   Last year the Helsinki Accord gave the Soviet Union
essentially what she had wanted for 20 years--a ratification of
her conquests in Eastern Europe.  By thus signaling to the
imprisoned countries behind the Iron Curtain that we consider
them to be within the Soviet sphere, we reduce any tendency they
might have to revolt in case of war.  The Soviet western flank is
thus made far more secure than before.

   In the past several years, countries have been falling into
the Soviet orbit at a quickening pace with their domination
shared secretly by their Corporate Socialist allies here in
America.  At the same time, the declining military might of the
United States and the fast increasing threat from the Soviet
Union has finally become too obvious to hide any longer.  This
stage, too, was foreseen and planned.

   All of the economic, political, and military factors are
intended to lead to a "Declaration of National Emergency" here in
America, dictatorship, and war!

   But, as it turned out, there is a terrible joker in the deck
that has been dealt by the Rockefeller empire in its hidden
collaboration with the Soviet Union.  The war to come, NUCLEAR
WAR ONE waged primarily on American soil, was supposed to be
neatly limited and controlled with a "Nuclear Safe Zone" set
aside for the Soviet allies here in America, as I revealed in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last May; but the Soviet Union has
for months been maneuvering to carry out a double cross at this
critical stage in America's increasing vulnerability.  They want
to seize all the marbles for themselves.

Topic #2--For many years American strategic defense strategy has
been based on a concept called "Mutual Assured Destruction", or
MAD.  The idea here is that should either the Soviet Union or the
United States launch a nuclear attack on the other, the victim of
the attack would be able to destroy the attacker in return.  In
this concept, furthermore, the targets are cities, not military
targets such as enemy missile installations.  An ICBM attack
under these conditions would have only one basic purpose--to kill
tens of millions of innocent civilians.  This is the so-called
"balance of terror" we often hear about.

   In World War II, Hitler used V-1 buzz bombs and V-2 missiles
in exactly this way against the civilian population of England
instead of against military targets, thinking to terrorize
England into submission.  But as we all know, it didn't work. 
The British learned to dig into bomb shelters, absorb the
civilian deaths and damage, and meanwhile redoubled their efforts
at military installations to strike back at Hitler in more
important ways.

   The MAD mutual terror defense strategy is nothing more than a
nuclear age version of the very technique that was proven to be
useless over 30 years ago.  We've all heard countless times,
quote: "The last thing the Soviet Union would ever want is a
nuclear exchange with the United States."  This comforting
statement tends to make one accept the foolish MAD defense
doctrine, if it is to be believed; but it is wrong.  The
announcement by Nikita Khrushchev in 1956 that all-out war was
not inevitable with the West after all, appeared to be a
renunciation of a basic Leninist principle, but it was not.  It
was simply the beginning of an elaborate 20-year ploy to make us
lower our guard so that when the inevitable all-out conflict did
come, the Soviet Union would be in a position to win.

   History is repeating itself.  In the late 1930's many people
made the mistake of believing that Hitler did not actually want
war but was willing to risk it in order to obtain concessions, so
the concessions were made with the idea that this would prevent
war.  Only too late was it realized that Hitler was determined to
have a war one way or another.

   In the past, the Soviet Union has been notably cautious when
skirting the fringes of a possible nuclear war, but that was
while she was still at a disadvantage militarily.  Now for the
first time the Soviets are emerging into a totally new situation
in which their military power is second to none.  With the rapid
collapse of free governments now occurring around the globe, the
over-all correlation of forces, as they call it, is shifting
rapidly in favor of the Soviet Union.  The Soviet Union is now
No. 1 in military power, while the United States is No. 2--a
situation that has never existed before.

   The time is now ripe for the Soviets to press their advantage
in an effort to seize control of the world.  The standing threat
from Red China is often mentioned hopefully as a major factor
tending to offset any Soviet ideas of waging major war against
us; but this, too, is in error.  The Soviet fear of Red China,
far from acting as a brake, is spurring them on.  Right now Red
China is leaning on the United States; but should the United
States be knocked out of action by a Soviet hammer blow before
China could take advantage of the situation, China would then be
isolated.  Red China would then have no choice but to patch
things up with the Soviet Union and cooperate, at least on
pragmatic matters.  Of course with the United States defeated,
and the two Communist superpowers joining forces once again, the
fate of the rest of the world would no longer be in question. 
Thus, as I stated in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15, if we fall, the
world falls; and that is the basis of Soviet strategy.

   Thus the Soviet Union does want nuclear war with the United
States provided the Soviet Union is prepared to survive with
losses limited to acceptable levels, and provided the United
States can be destroyed as a military rival in the process.  The
Soviet rulers emphatically do not think of nuclear war as
something that could only happen as the unwanted result of a
confrontation, even though this is how we tend to think of it. 
To them war, including nuclear war, is a tool of conquest to be
used whenever it is advantageous to do so.

   People have asked the question: Why would the Soviet Union
plant underwater missiles in our waters when they already have
ICBMs, missile-launching submarines, and so forth?  Even some
officials who know about the Soviet missiles raise this question
in various forms as a smoke screen to create doubt.  For once you
understand the basic Soviet viewpoint I have described, the
reasons for the planting of underwater missiles become far easier
to grasp.

   To begin with, the underwater missiles constitute a
first-strike capability for the Soviet Union--that is, they are
concentrated on military targets.  Specifically, they are
intended to wipe out our naval bases, major ports, and a good
fraction of our naval fleet in one sudden, surprise blow without
advance warning.  This type of first strike is quite different
from those usually discussed, but would be extremely effective. 
Consider the choice faced by an American president immediately
after such a sudden strike by the Soviet Union by means of its
underwater missiles followed by a Soviet ultimatum to surrender! 
True, the American naval forces at sea around the world at the
time of the attack would be unaffected and our missile subs could
give the Soviet Union an unpleasant pasting.  Even our ICBMs
might still be available to fire, but what then?

   First, the damage we could now inflict on the Soviet Union
would be minimized by the mammoth Civil Defense preparations that
have been under way in the Soviet Union for five years and more. 
If the president did choose to counterattack, several million
Soviet citizens would possibly die and a small portion of the
military and industrial facilities of the Soviet Union not
underground would be destroyed.  But the vast majority of the
Soviet population would survive our counterattack as would a
large part of their military-industrial complex.  Now it would be
their turn again.

   The price we would pay for disobeying the Soviet ultimatum
would be awesome.  A salvo of ICBMs, not the whole Soviet ICBM
force, perhaps but a few hundred nonetheless, would rain down on
the United States, hitting both military targets and big cities. 
Thanks to the well named MAD defense strategy we have followed,
we have no Civil Defense and the carnage would be beyond
imagination, especially since Soviet nuclear warheads are many
times more powerful than ours.

   As for our naval forces, attacks by Soviet antiship cruise
missiles would rapidly take their toll; and the inability of
returning to port for fuel and more weapons would cause our navy
to wither away as a fighting force.  It would only be a matter of
time until our vital sea lanes of commerce were totally
destroyed.  The process might continue perhaps for some time, but
the outcome would not be in doubt.  The Soviet Union would be
able to outlast us and outblast us once the initial crucial
strike against our navy was made with the underwater missiles.

   The secret of success of the Soviet plan is their use of a
weapon system that would enable the first strike against our navy
to be a complete surprise with extremely reliable results.  The
greatest possible surprise, of course, would have been achieved
if our navy had never even known the missiles were there off our
shores until the moment they were fired.  That was the surprise
element that my monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 were
intended to remove last summer.

   Another element of surprise has to do with the warning time if
a missile is actually launched.  With ICBMs, satellite
surveillance can provide a warning time of 20 minutes or
so--plenty of time to launch our own missiles in retaliation if
the decision is made to do so.  Submarine-launched ballistic
missiles may cut the warning time to a few minutes.  But in the
case of the short-range underwater-launch missiles, there is
virtually no warning at all since they must travel only a short
distance and the time of flight is brief.  By the time they are
detected and our defenses alerted, they will be exploding over
their targets.

   There is only one other kind of warning, which is probably the
most important of all--advance warning of impending attack
through Intelligence channels and through reading the meaning of
political tensions.  Up to now, for example, NATO defense
planning has assumed that any attack on Western Europe by the
Soviet Union would be preceded by a warning of at least three
weeks.  And 35 years ago there were several advance warnings
before the attack on Pearl Harbor beginning a week or so ahead of
time, but at that time these warnings were deliberately blocked
at high levels of the United States Government because certain
individuals wanted to insure that the attack did occur!  And now
the chance of obtaining advance warning of impending attack is
once again reduced, thanks to the Intelligence gap created by
Secretary of State Henry Kissinger!

   When the Soviet Union decides the time is ripe to attack, they
do not intend to telegraph their intentions in advance.  In this
regard, the underwater missiles lurking along our shores can be
invaluable to them.  Their ICBMs have too long a warning time and
insufficient accuracy and reliability for the Soviet rulers to
employ them with full confidence in a world-wide naval Pearl
Harbor attack, such as I described in monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
15.  And if they chose to use their missile-launching submarines
for that purpose closing in to short range to produce short
flight times for their missiles, they would risk alerting our
navy that something was up because of the peculiar deployment of
their submarines.

   On top of that, a world-wide surprise attack of the kind
contemplated by the Soviets depends for its success on a
simultaneous strike everywhere.  Not an easy thing to achieve
with missiles launched by numerous submarines all over the world;
but the underwater missiles are made to order for a surprise
attack.  They lurk unseen for days, weeks, or months until they
are needed; then when they are to be fired, the preparations for
the attack can be made without any outward sign at all, deep
inside a Command Post in the Soviet Union.  To launch the attack
itself, a signal need only be flashed world-wide from the Command
Post, while the observable activities of the Soviet Union,
military and otherwise, proceed in normal patterns giving no hint
of the impending attack!

   When the surprise attack plan of the Soviet Union is known,
the question is no longer: Why would they plant those underwater
missiles?  The question becomes: Why wouldn't they do it?

   The Soviet Union is prepared to wage war with several times
our own nuclear firepower.  At the same time, they are prepared
to survive such a war as a viable society with population losses
of perhaps no more than 2%.  That's around five-million lives,
and it is indeed very hard for you and me to imagine deliberately
accepting such losses for a political purpose.  But remember, the
Soviet bosses think their way, not our way; and if they were to
suffer losses that large, our own losses could be 50- to

   Provided they have the ability to disable the United States
Navy at the outset with the surprise attack they have planned,
the Soviets believe they have little to lose and everything to
gain now by their standards in a nuclear war; and that is why the
Soviet Union wants nuclear war now.

Topic #3--Since early July 1976 short-wave radio communications
world-wide have been disrupted by what one ham radio operator
describes as, quote: "A super-enormous strong signal that sounds
like a buzz saw."  Not only hams have been affected but maritime,
aeronautical, and telecommunications channels have been rendered
practically useless in some cases.  The signal is a rasping sound
that pulses 10 times per second, originating from Soviet

   The monitoring branch of the Federal Communications Commission
has received a flood of complaints and has written four
complaints to Moscow about it, without any reply whatsoever. 
According to Robert Kutz, chief of the FCC's International
Operations Division, this silence from the Soviet Union is very
unusual, quote: "Usually they have been very cooperative, unless
there's something particularly unique about this situation."

   Indeed there is something unique about these Soviet radio
signals, my friends.  They are transmissions between Moscow and
Soviet submarines world-wide by means of the Advanced
Communications System I mentioned in a recent monthly AUDIO
LETTER.  It is no accident that these signals first began early
in July 1976.  That was the month when I first revealed the
existence of underwater missiles in American and Canadian
territorial waters planted by the Soviets.  It is also no
accident that transmissions like this were first heard in 1962
during the Cuban Missile Crisis.

   The Government professes not to have any idea what these
signals are all about, but they know better.  These signals are
being used to maintain tight coordination of Soviet naval
activities, especially submarine movements, in preparation for
war.  But one lie leads to another; and just as you are not being
told about the Soviet underwater missiles that threaten your life
and your freedom, you are not being told the true meaning of the
Soviet buzz saw signals.

   There are at least 13 transmitters broadcasting these powerful
signals located mostly in Soviet or Soviet-occupied territory. 
Transmitters are operating at Archangel, Leningrad, Moscow, Kiev,
Odessa, Gdansk, the Bosporus Straits, Rostov, Minsk, Warsaw,
Prague, East Berlin, and of all places Loch Ness in Scotland. 
The Loch Ness transmitter is aboard a small submarine that
entered the northeast end of Loch Ness by means of the canal that
connects Loch Ness to Moray Firth.  If there wasn't one before,
there certainly is a Loch Ness monster now, compliments of the
Soviet Union.

   These Soviet transmissions make use of a technique known as
"pulse modulation."  Each of the 10 pulses per second sounds like
nothing more than a meaningless rasp to the ear, but in fact each
pulse contains a superimposed signal in code.  The possible codes
are endless, and a computer is required both to create the coded
pulses for transmissions and to decode them where they are
received.  Therefore unless and until Intelligence information
becomes available on the details of the exact code, it is
practically impossible to intercept and understand the Soviet
messages to their subs.

   But matters even more blatant than the Soviet mysterious
signals are being hidden from you.  For example: Do you know
about the joint Soviet and Cuban naval and aviation maneuvers
that took place from September 15 to September 23, 1976, in the
Caribbean and the Gulf of Mexico?  These war games utilized not
only the new Soviet submarine base at Cienfuegos Harbor not far
from the United States naval station at Guantanamo Bay but also
Marianao and Havana, right across from Florida!  These war
exercises carried a clear threat for the Panama Canal, Puerto
Rico, and our base at Guantanamo Bay; and, in addition, ranged
all along our Gulf coast as far west as Galveston, Texas.  Yet
our so-called Defense Department said not one word about it, and
our sleeping press, following the non-existent lead of our
controlled major media, said nothing about it either.

   Since "Red Friday", October 1, 1976, our Military from General
George S. Brown on down have been muzzled, ordered to flatly deny
charges about Soviet missiles in our waters, if pressed to
comment on them.  Meanwhile, top secret Civil Defense exercises
are now under way here in Washington, D.C. and other sensitive
areas for top Government officials only, while the rest of our
people are left in the dark not only without protection but
without even any official warning that war could be imminent!

   But the last straw came in just the past several days, my
friends.  Last month I reported that immediately after the "Red
Friday" capitulation by President Ford to the Soviet demands
advanced by Andrei Gromyko, Soviet submarines along our east and
west coasts performed a chemical warfare experiment.  Clouds of
radioactive plutonium were released into our atmosphere to drift
inward and contaminate the United States while the United States
Government cooperated by claiming that we were being plastered
with radioactive fallout from a Chinese nuclear test 10 days
earlier.  As I reported last month, we were spared major effects
from that experimental plutonium release due to weather
conditions that did not behave as predicted by the Soviets.  But
now they are poised to do it again!

   On Wednesday November 17 a large Chinese atmospheric hydrogen
bomb test was announced, and immediately we were inundated with
announcements that the radioactive cloud would reach our west
coast only three short days later--today, November 20, 1976. 
Last time they claimed that the Chinese cloud took 10 days to
cover the same distance, but that was because the Soviet subs
were not ready at that time to use the Chinese blast as a cover
for their chemical attack against us.  This time they can hardly

   As of noon yesterday, November 19, 18 Soviet submarines were
deployed at even intervals along our west coast within about 35
miles of our shore line.  They are not missile launchers but are
equipped specifically for the injection of plutonium into our air
today.  The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is telling us
not to fear the Chinese nuclear cloud alleged to be passing over
our country, but is cooperating completely with the Soviet Union
in providing a totally false cover for the Soviet radioactive
plutonium attack on our country!  In actual fact, the
radioactivity created by the Chinese test itself has not yet gone
beyond Red China's own borders.

   The media are reminding us how terrible Swine Flu might be,
and we are also being told of the disappointingly low number of
eligible Americans who are taking the free Government Swine Flu
shots.  We are told that Swine Flu, if it breaks out, could
spread like wildfire; and now certain persons in the United
States Government are cooperating with the Soviet Union in an
attack on our nation by means of radioactive plutonium, the
effects of which can be mistaken for severe "flu" if intended
dosages are achieved.

   My friends, the so-called mysterious signals from the Soviet
Union stopped temporarily on November 2, but then on November 10
they started up again because Soviet war preparations were
resuming.  Since I talked with you last, 36 new missiles have
been planted in our waters in addition to those I referred to
last month.

   I have not given the locations of these to anyone, and for now
I do not intend to do so.  Now let me tell you why.  On one hand
there are those factions within the shell of a Government left
here in Washington who are actively cooperating with the Soviet
Union.  Some of these are outright Soviet agents; others are part
of the Corporate Socialist network that cooperates with the
Soviets for mutual advantage at the expense of the rest of us. 
Some in this second group still do not believe that a Soviet
double cross has been under way for months in the form of the
underwater missiles in our waters.  On the other hand, there are
many who are honestly trying to counter the Soviet underwater
missile threat acting within constraints imposed on them.

   Prior to October 1, missiles were being removed as they were
planted by the Soviet Union, acting on information I was
providing to General George S. Brown and to Military
Intelligence.  In this capacity, I have been acting as an
information channel to go around the Intelligence gap created by
Henry Kissinger.

   But where is all this leading?  What will happen if traitors
in our midst continue to cover up the truth about the Soviet
underwater missiles, and if patriots in our Government cannot
summon the courage to tell the truth, regardless of the
consequences?  What is going to happen if that situation
continues, my friends, is THERMONUCLEAR WAR and DICTATORSHIP here
in America!

   Even if the United States Navy were to continue removing
Soviet missiles as they are planted--which they have been ordered
NOT to do since October 1--this would not prevent disaster.  The
Soviet Union is able to plant missiles far faster than we can
remove them.  So the information I have been relaying is really
being used now for just one purpose--to enable our leaders to
keep abreast of the chances of attack, and to minimize those
chances until they are ready to run and hide in the 96
underground cities of the "Federal Relocation Arc" to ride out
the war--then war can come, scorching the land and consuming our

   The top-secret information provided me by my sources, often at
the risk of their own lives, is not intended for the private use
of cold-blooded traitors and spineless leaders in the American
Government.  It is intended to bring about exposure of the truth
as the one and only thing that can prevent a war.

   If war comes, it will be a devastating surprise to most
Americans.  The perverse behavior of our public officials in
misusing my information threatens to condemn millions of us to a
nuclear holocaust.  Therefore it is only right that they condemn
themselves at the same time.  Without the missile locations I am
now withholding they, too, will be caught in the lightning
surprise attack by the Soviet Union that threatens to engulf the
rest of us.  Millions of our lives apparently mean nothing at all
to them compared to their service to the Soviet Union, and their
jobs, and their pensions.  But now their lives are at stake along
with the rest of us.  Only if the truth about the Soviet
underwater missiles is exposed will I turn over the new
information I have on which not only our lives but theirs, too,
now depend.

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.